40-TMSS-02 Rev.0

Saudi Electricity Company
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN

HAIL
PTS-11CM010
(FINAL)
TRANSMISSION ASSET DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
SCOPE OF WORK AND TECHNICAL

I SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
REVISIONS
DltAWNBY:
DAm: ./
CRK'DBY: ...;..I_-t
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

IN HAIL
PTS-11 CM01 0
DATE: 08.]0.20]]
THL'l DRAWING L'l NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCflON
FOR ORDERING
OR
(ATTACHMENT TO SCHEDULE "B" OF CONTRACT NO. # 00)
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIF1ED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]
PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
JOB ORDERNO. PTS 1
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA 92
B TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
I INTRODUCTION
I 1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
PROJECT SUMMARY
5
5
5
II BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES
2.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS 6

REVISIONS
2.02 KICK OFF MEETING 7
DRAWNBY:
2.03 BASE DESIGN PHASE 7
DATE: ttl 2.04 BASE DESIGN REVIEW 8
CHK'DBY: I 2.05 PROJECT DRAWINGS 8
2.06 PROGRESS REPORTING 14
2.07 QNQC REQUIREMENTS 15
2.08 COMMISSIONING, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS 26
2.09 TECHNICAL DATA MANUALS 27
2.10 TEST RECORD BOOK 27
2.11 PLANT TAGGING OF EQUIPMENT AND
INDEPENDENT COMPONENTS 28
2.12 CONTRACTOR/COMPANY's CONSTRUCTION
SITE OFFICE AND FACILITY 28
2.13 LOSS PREVENTION REQUIREMENTS 29
2.14 SHUTDOWN & OUTAGE COORDINATION 32
2.15 WORKING HOURS 33
2.16 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS 33
III SCOPE OF WORK

DATE: 08.10.201l
3.01 GENERAL 34
3.02 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES 34
3.03 CONTROL AND PROTECTIVE RELAYING
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR REQUIREMENTS 55
CONSfRUcnON OR
FOR ORDElUNG 3.04 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INTERLOCKING 55
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED 3.05 METERING REQUIREMENTS 55
3.06 ALARM/ANNUNCIATOR REQUIREMENTS 55
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGE NO. REV.
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS 2
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Cont'd.)
SECTION PAGE
3.07 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA

ACQUISITION (SCADA) 56
3.08 MECHANICALWORK 56
3.09 CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORK 56
3.10 FIRE DETECTION/ALARM SYSTEM AND SAFETY
& FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 56
REVISIONS 3.11 PROJECT DESIGN DOCUMENTS, CALCULATIONS
& DRAWINGS 56
(J
DRAWN BY:
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS 61
DATE: J
CRK'DBY: I 3.13 PROJECT INTERFACE 61
3.14 STANDARDS, CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS 62
IV DESIGN CRITERIA
4.01 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 69

4.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 69
4.03 CABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 70
4.04 13.8kV CAPACITOR DESIGN CRITERIA 72
4.05 13.8kV DETUNING REACTORS 72
4.06 33kV CAPACITOR DESIGN CRITERIA 73
4.07 33kV DETUNING REACTORS 73
4.08 PROTECTIVE RELAYING DESIGN CRITERIA 74
4.09 CIVIU STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA 74
V EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.01 GENERAL 75
5.02 SUBSTATION ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 75
DATE: 08.18.2011 5.03 CONTROL AND PROTECTIVE RELAYING SYSTEM 78
5.04 METERING SYSTEM 88
5.05 ALARM AND ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM 89
THIS ORAWING IS NOT 5.06 ELECTRICAL EQUPT. INTERLOCKING SYSTEM 89
TO BE USED FOR
CONSI'RUcnON OR 5.07 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL ACQUISITION (SCADA) 90
CERTIFIED AND DATED
5.08 CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORK 90
5.09 FIRE DETECTION/ALARM AND FIRE 90
[PTS 11CM01 o-MZKj
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 3
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
PROTECTION SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Cont'd.)
I VI COMMISSIONING TESTS
6.01
6.02
GENERAL
SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT
91
92
6.03 SCADA EQUIPMENT 92
REVISIONS
APPENDICES
DRAWN BY;
J APPENDIX-I LIST OF ATTACHED CONCEPTUAL & REFERENCE

DATE:
CHK'DBY; / DRAWINGS
APPENDIX- II MATERIAL DATA SCHEDULES
APPENDIX- III TECHNICAL DATA MANUALS
APPENDIX- IV BID STANDARD FORMAT
APPENDIX- V OPERATIONAL SPARE PARTS
APPENDIX-VI COMMUNICATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
(NOT APPLICABLE)
APPENDIX-VII PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
APPENDIX-VIII CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL SCOPE OF WORKS
APPENDIX-IX SCADA REQUIREMENTS
APPENDIX-X TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
APPENDIX-XI CATERING AND ACCOMMODATION REQUIREMENTS (NOT
APPLICABLE)
APPENDIX-XII FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (NOT APPLICABLE)
APPENDIX-XIII SPECIAL TOOLS & EQUIPMENT
BY:
EXHIBIT-) COMPANY FORM NO: 16511 (2110)
DATE: 08.10.2011
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCI'ION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01 D-MZKj
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLANTNO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGENO. REV.
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 4
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
-r---------------------------
SECTION I - INTRODUCTION
1.01 GENERAL
I This Scope of work and Technical Specifications (PTS-11CM01 0) and associated

PROJECT Conceptual Drawings, which are Attachment-I to Schedule "B" of
CONTRACT # ./00, describe the specific scope of work that the
CONTRACTOR is required to carry out on Lump Sum Turnkey (LSTK) basis, until
the successful commissioning, completion and final acceptance of WORK, by Saudi
Electricity Company (hereafter referred to as SEC or COMPANy) in the Central part
of Saudi Arabia, for the installation of 33kV and 13.8kV Shunt Capacitor Banks in
various Substations for Power Factor Correction in Central Region.
REVISIONS
1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

DllAWNBY:
DATE:
CHK'DBY:
The subject project aims the installation of 5MVAr, 10MVAr, 15MVAr at 33kV and
, 5MVAr at 13.8kV, Shunt Capacitor Banks as specified in this Scope of Work and
Technical Specification at 8901,8902,8903,8904,8911,8914,8915,8918,8922,
8077, 7782 & 7780.
Accordingly, this PTS-11CM010 covers the expansion of 33kV and 13.8kV

Switchgear at the existing Substations. It also covers providing/modifying related to
Metering, Protection, Control, SCADA and Communication requirements.
1.03 PROJECT SUMMARY
The CONTRACTOR shall perform on LSTK basis, the design, engineering, material
procurement, quality management, factory inspection/testing, transport and delivery
to site, construction, testing and commissioning and all associated work and
services until final handing over of the proposed expansion WORK in a fully
functional and operating condition to the COMPANY as specified in this Scope of
WORK and Technical Specifications.
****END OF SECTION- I ****

/ S,
l
BY:
DATE: 08.tfUOtl
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIAl.S UNTB..
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01o-MZKJ
JOB ORDER NO. PTS 5
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
HAIL SAUDIARABIA 92
SECTION- II - BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES
2.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. All components and accessories required for the completion and successful
operation of the WORK covered under the scope of this PROJECT, either specified
i in detail or not, shall be supplied and installed by the CONTRACTOR as necessary.
B. The engineering design and specification of equipment/materials supplied under this

PROJECT shall be in accordance with this Scope of work and Technical
Specifications and COMPANY Standards. If the equipment either does not conform
to specifications or is not acceptable to COMPANY based on past operating
experience/any other reason, the CONTRACTOR shall propose alternative
REVISIONS
equipment for review and acceptance by COMPANY. However, in case of a conflict
in the requirements, the CONTRACTOR shall bring this to the attention of the
DIlAWNBY: n COMPANY and shall obtain such applicable requirements for this PROJECT in
~ writing from the COMPANY. The CONTRACTOR shall have no right to decide on his
CHK'DBY; / own the requirements in case of such a conflict, and in case of such an eventuality,
J he will be doing so at his own risk and cost as the COMPANY reserves the right to
reject any or the complete part of such work arising out of the CONTRACTOR's own
decision. The Engineering and Design WORKS under this CONTRACT shall be
carried out by an engineering and design firm that has registration to carry out
engineering and design WORK in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The proposed
engineering and design firm shall also be from COMPANY'S acceptable list of
Engineering and design firms.
C. The drawings enclosed with this Scope of work and Technical Specifications are
conceptual and for the information of the CONTRACTOR only. The CONTRACTOR
should read these drawings in conjunction with this Scope of work and Technical
Specifications. The successful CONTRACTOR shall develop detailed design
drawings for construction purposes.
D. Copies of existing drawings, design calculations, technical reports and other

information as deemed appropriate by the COMPANY may be provided to the
CONTRACTOR upon request, if available. However, if such information is not
available, then the CONTRACTOR should be responsible for the independent
development of the information required to complete the PROJECT specified.
BY'C
DATE: 08.10.2011
E. The specifications of equipment and materials specified herein are to be considered
as the minimum requirements, and the bidders shall carry out their own basic and
detailed design necessary for their proposed specifications.
The base design shall be finalized at base design review meeting based on the
mrs DRAWING rs NOT guideline draWings issued hereof, manufacturer's drawings, calculations and data
TO BE USED FOR sheets, and detailed design shall be finalized based on the base design review and
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING other required information.
MATERIAI.S UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DAlEO
All documents, drawings data and instruction books to be submitted by the
CONTRACTOR shall be written in English language and Metric Unit system.
[PTS- 11CM01D-MZKj
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 6
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
F. The submission of final detail drawings shall be progressive and phased out to give
sufficient review time to COMPANY.
G. COMPANY's acceptance of the CONTRACTOR's design does not relieve him of any
part of his obligations to meet all the requirements of the CONTRACT nor the
I responsibility for the correctness of the design and construction drawings of the
PROJECT.
H. All WORK, including services for the test and inspections required by the COMPANY
and demonstrations, if any, for familiarization of operation, maintenance &
commissioning of new type of switchgear, relays, meters, etc. to the COMPANY
personnel by the manufacturer's representative shall be arranged/done by the
CONTRACTOR at site.
REVISIONS
n The CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY review and approval, the
DlU.WNBY:
J; demonstration package proposed by him giVing the detail/list of eqUipment and
DA.TE:
devices that will be demonstrated.
ClIK'DBY: I
I. The CONTRACTOR's organizational chart shall be prepared as specified in
Instruction to Bidders on Technical Proposal.
J. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the operational spare parts listed in Appendix-V of
PTS and Pricing Attachment 'VI' to Schedule 'C' of this Contract. However,
CONTRACTOR shall finalize the operational spare parts based on the make and
model of the equipment approved during the implementation of the Contract as per
Clause 6.2 of Schedule 'A' - General Terms and Conditions of the Contract.
2.02 KICK-OFF MEETING
A Kick-Off Meeting will be held in COMPANY Headquarters shortly after award of

the CONTRACT. This meeting will cover PROJECT implementation, the Scope of
work, and Schedule and will give the CONTRACTOR an opportunity to discuss all
matters related to carrying out his responsibilities.
2.03 BASE DESIGN PHASE
A. The base design phase of the PROJECT is a 10-12 week period of preliminary
engineering following the kick-off meeting. The purpose of the base design phase is
to completely define the PROJECT in enough details to ensure that the COMPANY
DATE: 08.10.20]]
that all requirements are being met. Information developed during the base design
shall be used as a guide throughout the PROJECT and shall be considered binding
on both parties, unless operational difficulties or design flaws observed during
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
detailed design review are noted and mandate change. All base design drawings
TO BE USED FOR shall be stamped as "Base Design DraWing."
CONSTRUCI'lON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED Coordination meetings will be conducted with the CONTRACTOR's Design team on
regular basis until the design is complete.
[PTS- 11CM01Q-MZKI
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGENO. REV.
JOB ORDER NO. PTS- 7
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit eight (8) sets of the base design document at least
four (4) weeks ahead of the base design review meeting which shall include, but not
limited to the following:
1. Major Materials Purchase Requisitions (Preliminary)
I 2. Design Calculations, Design Drawings and other documents per Section 3.11.
The package to be submitted to the COMPANY shall be properly compiled in 3 -

ring 4" binders for all drawing sheets for civil, electrical, communication and SCADA
drawings.
C. The base design submittal shall be submitted fully complete, containing drawings
and calculations of all discipline as stated. Partial submittals or packages are
REVISIONS
unacceptable and will be rejected. Base design shall include drawings required to
define the project. Additional drawings if provided will not be reviewed during the
DRAWNBV: -,F-;}---t
base design phase.
DATE, ~
CHK'OB"f--
J
1_-1 2.04 BASE DESIGN REVIEW
After completing the Base Design, the CONTRACTOR shall present the Base
Design Package for technical review along with the Drawing Control Sheet.
CONTRACTOR's Project Manager, Project Engineer and the Design/Construction
Engineer in each field of specification shall attend the presentation meeting. During
this meeting, the COMPANY's comments on the base design package will be
reviewed and discussed in detail to finalize the base design for the PROJECT.
Minutes of the meeting shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR to be concurred by
the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
CONTRACTOR may initiate the material procurement WORK during the base
design phase of the PROJECT but the final approval of the material shall be done
only after consideration of comments generated during Base Design Phase and
resolution of comments during the Base Design Review meeting.
2.05 PROJECT DRAWINGS
GI!IIIIIll! A. General
1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all drawings required for this PROJECT
covering all the substations involved in accordance with the requirements of
DATE: 08.10.2011
the COMPANY Engineering Drawing Preparation Standards (SEEDS-II,
Rev.01).
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

The drawings shall be assigned with drawing numbers and indexed as outlined
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
in the above procedure. A block of drawing numbers shall be provided by the
FOR ORDERING COMPANY for all new drawings/documents.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS-11CM010-MZKj
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS 8
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
2. Drawings shall be of uniform size in each discipline as much as possible and

ISO scales shall be 1:10, 1:50, 1:100, 1:1200 etc.
3. The existing system drawings of the source substation are generally available
with the COMPANY in digital or tiff format except in certain cases where it is in
the form of hard copies. Copies of existing available drawings shall be provided
I on CONTRACTOR'S written request. However, if any related information is not

available, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to develop all the required
drawings to satisfy the PROJECT requirements.
4. The drawings involving modification/expansion of the existing system in source

substation shall cover the details of the existing system and interface. The
drawings in general shall be computer drafted and compatible with Microstation
V8 or above version software computer-aided-design (CAD) system. However,
REVISIONS
in case of drawings involving modifications to existing drawings, which are not
available in digital or tiff format CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to develop
DRAWNRY:
all the required drawings.
DATE:
CUK'DBY, 'f----1
J 5. The drawing to be submitted by the CONTRACTOR shall be of the following
standard size in accordance SEEDS-II, Rev,01 and in separate folder for each
Substation:
A- Size sheet, 711x1 016 mm or (28x40 in.)

S- Size sheet, 508x711 mm or (20x28 in.)
C- Size sheet, 356x508 mm or (14x20 in.)
D- Size sheet, 279x432 mm or (11 x17 in.)
E- Size sheet, 211x297 mm or (8.27x11.69 in.)
6. Revision of Existing Drawings! Drawing Control Sheets
a. All existing drawings including common drawings affected by this

PROJECT shall be revised and submitted for COMPAY review as part of
CONTRATOR'S design submittals. The drawings in general shall be
computer drafted Microstation V8 or above version software in
accordance with SEEDS-II, Rev.1.
b. For modification WORKS of existing substation, the existing drawings

only shall be revised as far as possible. If revising the existing drawings
are not feasible or not practical and new drawings need to be developed,
then preferably, the same number with additional/different sheet number
DATE: 08.10.2011
shall be allotted. New drawings havinq new drawing numbers shall be
created only if drawings of existing system are not available.
c. The drawing involving modification/expansion of the existing system in

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR substation shall cover the details of the existing system and interface.
CONSTRUCI'ION OR
FOR ORDERING Drawings giving only the isolated views/information of
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
expansion/modification work without details of existing system/interface
are not acceptable. If new drawings, developed for modification work of
existing system do not cover the complete details of existing system, then
[PTS-11CM010-MZKJ
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
the corresponding existing system drawings shall also be modified to

show the interface/integration with the new drawings developed, and
submitted for COMPANY review as part of CONTRACTOR'S design
submittal.
d. The existing drawings are listed in the drawing control sheet(s) for the
i substation and covered in more than one (1) drawing control sheet for
each of the affected existing substations. The CONTRACTOR shall
review/study these various by drawing control sheets and drawing,
identify the supersededllatest drawings and if necessary carry out field
verification to ascertain the correctness of the existing drawings. Only the
appropriate/ correct drawings shall be used for developing the drawings
for modification WORK, While modifying any existing drawing sheet, the
sheet will be submitted in duplicate, one marked as existing and the other
REVISIONS
marked as 'modified'.
DRAWNBY:
e. All the existing drawing control sheets shall be revised to reflect the new
CHI('DBY:
revision numbers of existing drawings revised and to identify the
I superseded drawings. In addition, a prominent note shall be put on the
revised existing drawing control sheet (s) to indicate the new drawing
control sheet number, if a new drawing control sheet was developed.
(e.g. " See Drawing Control Sheet No. CT-904240 for list of drawings
developed for C. N. # xxxxxxxxx for )
7. SCADA Drawings Requirements
a. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for obtaining all necessary SCADA

information (such as existing SCADA drawings packages and Handover
Book Sheets) from design offices working on the facility.
b. The CONTRACTOR shall produce new and/or revise the SEC standard
size (28" x 20") SCADA drawings and Handover Book Sheets (8%" x 11")
and submit to SEC for review and approval, prior to field installation of the
RTU as applicable.
i. SCADA Function Diagram
This is a simplified one-line diagram for the station showing each piece of
equipment connected to the SCADA system. Details of this drawing
BY:
include the following:
DATE, _==---1
08.10.2011
SEC assigned tags/labels to transmission lines, breakers, and

capacitors
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
CT and PT ratios, transducer specifications and wiring configuration.
FOR ORDERING Information supplied should be complete to enable calculation of
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIEDANDDATED scale factors
[PTS 11CM01O-MZKI
PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWINGNO. PAGE NO. REV.
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
SCADA functions at each device defined by SEC standard symbols.
SCADA point list table
Legend of SEC standard symbol used.
I ii. Handover Book Sheets
Input and Output Points List
This list shall consist of all SCADA points that are grouped according
to type (Le. Analog, Status, Control, etc). Typical fields are Absolute
Point Number, Relative Point Number, Point Description, Scale
REVISIONS Factor, Closed Contact State Description, and IFC Point Marking.
DllAWNBY: RTU Configuration of RTU Map Sheet

DAlE:
CHK'DBY: l{
f-----1 This sheet is a summary of the number, type, and address of
configured input/output controllers, RTU address, point group
address, communication and loop back settings information.
c. Sample drawings and Handover Book Sheets are available from SEC upon
request.
d. The CONTRACTOR shall submit copies of the Handover Book Sheets in

Microsoft Excel format stored in CD.
e. The CONTRACTOR shall provide complete sets of Vendor drawings and

documentation of the RTU and all of its associated equtprnent, consisting
of, but not limited to Operation and Maintenance Manuals, and Schematic
Diagrams.
8. Protection Drawing Format Requirements
All drawings shall be titled to explain the full function of the circuits represented
on that drawing including station and equipment names. Drawings shall be
designed and produced in order to maximize ease of maintenance and
c:2J>
BY:
installation. Each drawing shall have a legend included explaining the functions
of all devices on that drawing. All equipment shall be labeled and identified on
DA'm 08.10.2011
the diagrams as per the designations assigned by the COMPANY. All drawing
formats must be approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
a. Protection AC One Line and Three-Line Diaqrams

THIS ORAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCI1ON OR
FOR ORDERING All the Protection related drawings shall meet COMPANY Standard TES-P-
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
119.33 and AppendiX-VII.
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]

C494 A OF 0
11CM010
b. Wiring Diagrams
Wiring diagrams shall be produced for all panels and equipment. Panel
wiring diagrams shall be arranged such that they represent a working view
of the panel wiring with terminal blocks and devices arranged on the
drawing as they exist in the panels, When possible, it is required to have
I only one (1) drawing per panel. If it is impossible to include all devices on
one (1) drawing, the panel drawing shall be subdivided into sections
(vertically or horizontally), making a mosaic of drawings physically
representing the panel arrangement.
c. Schematic Diagrams
All the Protection related drawings shall meet COMPANY Standard TES-P-
REVISIONS
119.33 and Appendix-VII.
DRAWNBY:
DATE:
y B. Vendor Drawings
CBJ<'DBY, -,,;,'_--1
y
1, CONTRACTOR shall prepare all vendor drawings in Microstation VB or above
version software in accordance with SEEDS-II and submit to the COMPANY
order and shall be specified by the CONTRACTOR.
2. Vendor drawings are manufacturers' drawings, data schedules, specification

sheets installation and operating instructions and any other data required for
material or equipment Requirements of such information are an integral part of
the purchase order and shall be specified by the CONTRACTOR.
3. Preparation and assignment of vendor drawing numbers shall be in

accordance with COMPANY Engineering Drawing Preparation Standard
(SEEDS-II, Rev.01).
4, All vendor drawings shall be subject to review and approval by the COMPANY
at various stages (bid/base design/detail design/construction) of the
CONTRACT.
Note: All vendor drawings shall be consistent with main drawings in all respects and
the vendor drawings shall clearly indicate all inter references with main
drawings and all other vendor drawings as applicable.
DATE: 01l.l0.2011
c. Base Design Drawings
The CONTRACTOR shall submit base design drawings to the COMPANY with his
Base Design Package per Section 3.11.
THIS ORA WING IS NOT
TO BE USED ~R D. Final Detail Design/Construction Drawings
CONSTRUCl'JON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED The CONTRACTOR shall submit point wise compliance statement to COMPANY's
comments and shall obtain approval for all final detail design drawings after
incorporating COMPANY comments. All details design drawings shall be stamped as
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWlNGNO. PAGE NO. REV.
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
"Detail Design Drawings". After receiving the approval, the CONTRACTOR shall
submit to the COMPANY eight (8) complete sets of all interconnected drawings
issued for construction in one (1) submittal. These drawings shall be submitted to
the COMPANY to be stamped as "Noted By" before they are stamped and issued
to CONTRACTOR'S construction team as "Issued For Construction", but in no case
less than fourteen (14) days prior to the start of construction activity.
i No WORK shall be started at site unless all interconnected drawings for a particular
WORK has been fUlly reviewed and agreed upon by the COMPANY and final
construction drawings are available at WORK SITE and with the COMPANY.
A composite list of drawings the CONTRACTOR shall provide as a minimum for this
PROJECT is given in Section 3.11.
REVISIONS
Final detailed design drawings shall be submitted fully complete, by discipline
representing fUlly the part of the PROJECT to be constructed and all the related
DRAWN BY, -tn~----t
drawings. Partial submittals are not acceptable and will be rejected.
OAT>:, ...t.&:~--1
QIK'DBY:
E. As-Built Drawings
1. As the PROJECT nears completion, "As-Built" drawings shall be prepared by

the CONTRACTOR in sufficient details to present an accurate record for
COMPANY.
All existing drawings affected by this PROJECT shall be revised and

corresponding existing drawing control sheets shall be updated by the
CONTRACTOR. The existing/ongoing project drawing control sheet shall be
updated and automated in XLS format. If the existing/ongoing project
substation drawings do not have drawing control sheet, then the
CONTRACTOR shall prepare new Drawing Control Sheet, which shall include
the new and existing drawings. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with
COMPANY for the list of the existing drawings. All Drawing Control Sheets,
listing all proposed and existing drawings shall also be submitted in the Base
Design submittal.
2. All revisions shall reflect field modifications to engineering flow diagrams,

electrical one-line diagrams, electrical schematic connection and
~-s interconnection wiring diagrams; instrument hook-ups, wiring diagrams,
BY:
C J'
terminal connections, dimensioned equipment layouts, all underground
installations and other WORK and facilities not normally visible. The
DATE: 08.10.2011
CONTRACTOR shall provide "As-Built" drawings showing all field
modifications to drawings and diagrams prepared by the Vendors and
SUBCONTRACTORS.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR If the CONTRACTOR was given hard copy or tiff image file to existing " As-
CONSTRUCflON OR
FOR ORDERING built drawings, then it is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to request the
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED COMPANY at least two (2) months before the Technical completion for the
existing "As-Built" drawings and redraw them in Microstation V8 or above
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]

JOB ORDERNO. PTS- 13
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
version software in accordance with SEEDS-II, Rev.01. Updating of existing

"As-built" drawings will not be accepted.
3. As part of "As-Built" drawings submission, the CONTRACTOR shall also

provide the COMPANY three (3) sets of field marked-up drawings reflecting
the "As-Built" condition of the particular segment of WORK completed by the
I CONTRACTOR and distributed, as given below, prior to energization:
-
-
One (1) set shall be retained by the COMPANY at the substation.
One (1) set shall be submitted to the COMPANY.
- One (1) set shall be used for "As-Built" by CONTRACTOR's Engineering
and Design Consultants which shall be included in the final submittal.
4. One (1) sample of original (digital Microstation *.DGN format) and five (5)
REVISIONS
check prints from different "As-Built" engineering drawings shall be submitted
to the COMPANY to verify the quality of digital Microstation *.DGN format and
D.R.AWNBY:
whether the correct drafting procedure is adopted, one (1) month before initial
DATE:
CBK'DBY:
submission of "As-Built" drawings. Before submitting the final "As-Built"
drawings, on sample drawing shall be submitted and got approved.
Five (5) copies of the "As-Built" documents shall be submitted to the

COMPANY for review as to adequacy, completeness, legibility and conforming
to drafting standards. If returned, the CONTRACTOR shall make corrections,
provide additional data and improve the quality as instructed prior to
resubmittal and COMPANY acceptance. The revised "As-Builf' drawings shall
be resubmitted within four (4) weeks after commissioning. Five (5) sets of final
"As-Built" drawings, and one (1) set of "As-Builf' digital Microstation *.DGN
format drawings in CD shall be submitted to the COMPANY for records.
2.06 PROGRESS REPORTING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Weekly PROJECT Progress Reports, in

COMPANY- approved formats for the PROJECT to the responsible COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE. Soft copy of progress reports shall be submitted along with the
hard copy. For this purpose, the total WORK shall be divided into:
1. Engineering and Design.
BY:
~ 2. Procurement/Manufacture/Fabrication Inspection and Delivery of Materials!
EqUipment.
IMTE: 08.10.2011
3. Construction and Installation.
4. Testing and Commissioning.

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING B. The following information shall be included in the Progress Reports:
MATElUALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PlANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGENO. REV.
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 14
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
1. Percent of WORK completed as compared to the weighted schedule used to

assess WORK progress. If progress is less than the scheduled one, its reason
and proposal to overcome the same should be recorded.
2. Statement of items worked on and/or completed during the period.
I 3.
4.
Statement of items to be worked on and/or completed during the following
period.
Problem areas which can have an adverse effect on the schedule.
5. Safety statistics and minutes of construction safety meeting and progress

meeting.
REVISIONS
6. Manpower and equipment availability against the schedule requirement.
DKA..WNBY:
C. The CONTRACTOR shall carry out PROJECT planning/scheduling by using MS
DATE:
C'BK'DBY:
PROJECT computer software. All PROJECT schedules shall be submitted in CD.
v
D. Weekly Progress Meeting shall be conducted between the COMPANY and the
- CONTRACTOR during the entire CONTRACT duration of the PROJECT. Other
coordination and interface meetings will be conducted, as required. The
CONTRACTOR shall prepare the minutes of all meetings. The initial draft shall be
submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for review
and concurrence. The CONTRACTOR shall then incorporate the required
corrections and submit to the COMPANY one (1) original and two (2) copies after
they are duly signed by the authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR. The
COMPANY shall sign one (1) copy in acceptance and furnish it to the
CONTRACTOR and retain the original.
In addition, a Weekly Construction Safety Meeting shall be conducted by the

CONTRACTOR's Safety Engineer or PROJECT Engineer. Minutes of meeting shall
be forwarded to the COMPANY.
2.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A. Quality Management
CONTRACTOR shall implement an effective quality management which addresses

all direct and indirect activities related to the PROJECT to ensure that all contractual
IMTE: 08.10.2011
conditions are met. Quality planning, quality control, quality assurance and quality
improvement shall be part of CONTRACTOR's quality management. To effectively
manage the PROJECT quality, CONTRACTOR shall develop a clearly defined
TH1S DRAWING IS NOT
PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program. The PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
Program shall be implemented from PROJECT start until completion and
FOR ORDERING communicated at different levels of the PROJECT organization. In addition,
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED CONTRACTOR shall also require manufacturers/suppliers to develop and
implement Quality Control Plan/ Inspection and Test Plan for each major
materiaVequipment listed under 2.07C.
[PTS-llCM01Q-MZKJ
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWINGNO. PAGE NO. REV.
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
B. PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program
1. The PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program shall set out the specific quality
procedures and practices, resources, and all activities (in sequence) relevant
to this PROJECT. The PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program shall address
i QNQC activities during design, procurement, manufacturinglfabrication,

delivery, storage, construction, installation, testing and commissioning of all
items of WORK and materials/equipment per Scope of WORK and Technical
Specification.
2. The PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program shall be submitted to the

COMPANY as part of the base design package for review and approval.
REVISIONS
3. The PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program shall clearly define and address
DRAWN BY:
o the following:
DAn:: .~
CBK"DBY: I a. The quality objectives to be attained and CONTRACTOR's commitment
to achieve the objectives in the form of a signed policy statement. The
policy statement shall be signed by CONTRACTOR's management
personnel not lower than the person who signed this CONTRACT.
b. Detailed PROJECT organizational chart and specific allocations of

responsibilities and authorities during the different phases of the
PROJECT.
CONTRACTOR shall include in the PROJECT organizational chart

QNQC engineers and inspectors dedicated to quality assurance and
quality control (QNQC). The QNQC engineers and inspectors shall
report directly to the overall PROJECT Manager. The QNQC engineers
and inspectors shall have adequate experience in their area of
responsibility and shall be responsible for ensuring that all phases of the
PROJECT are built, tested and commissioned in accordance with the
requirements of the PROJECT Scope of WORK and Technical
Specifications. The CONTRACTOR's Chief QNQC engineer shall
interface directly with the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
CONTRACTOR shall use QNQC personnel other than those performing

/"s
BY, (-~::=..J or directly supervising the WORK. The QNQC personnel shall not report
directly to immediate supervisors responsible for producing the WORK
DATE: 08.10.2011
being inspected. CONTRACTOR's QNQC personnel shall be kept free
from the pressures of cost, schedule and production and shall be given
the necessary authority and independence to perform their roles
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
effectively.
TO BE USED FOR The number of CONTRACTOR'S QNQC engineers shall be as required
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING in the Instruction to Bidders for Technical Proposal.
MATERIALS VNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
Jo...- _
c. Procurement Control
CONTRACTOR's PROJECT QNQC engineers shall review all products

and services prior to procurement to ensure conformance to specified
requirements. Procurement control shall include source evaluation and
selection, source inspection and evaluation of objective evidence of
i quality furnished by a supplier against the PROJECT specification.
These products shall cover major materials/equipment and other items

including but not necessarily limited to testing services, fill materials,
Portland cement concrete and additives, asphalt concrete, water
proofing, steel structures, HVAC materials and equipment, electrical
materials, plumbing materials, architectural and finishing materials and
formwork materials.
REVISIONS
n
d. Quality Audit
DRAWNBY:
DATE: f CONTRACTOR shall conduct its own internal quality surveillance at

aIK'D.lY: /
appropriate stages (e.g. design, procurement, construction, installation
and commissioning stage) of the PROJECT to determine compliance to
and the effectiveness of the PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program.
Each element of the PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program shall be
assessed at least once during the life of the PROJECT. The schedule
and frequency should be adjusted if one or more of the following
conditions exist:
i. Result of previous surveillance indicates a need to perform them

more frequently.
ii. Significant changes are made in the PROJECT Quality

Plan/Quality Program.
iii. Safety, performance or reliability of an item is questionable due to

non-conformance.
iv. Verification of corrective action implementation.
Personnel conducting the quality surveillance shall be independent of

( those having direct responsibility for the specific activities or areas being
BY:
evaluated or assessed.
DATE: 08.10.2Ol1
e. Non-Conformance Control
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that items and services which do not

TIllS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR conform to specified requirement are controlled in accordance with
CONSl'RUCfION OR
FOR ORDERING documented procedures to prevent unintended use. CONTRACTOR shall
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DAlEO
identify, document, segregate, evaluate and dispose non-conforming
items and services after proper notification of concerned personnel within
the CONTRACTOR's organization.
[PTS-llCM010-MZKj
JOB ORDER NO. PTS 17
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
CONTRACTOR's QAlQC engineer/inspector shall re-inspect repaired

and reworked non-conforming items. CONTRACTOR shall not use any
repaired item or product unless approved by the COMPANY.
Under this clause, the following definitions apply:
i i. Repair - Action taken on a non-conforming product so that it will

fulfill the intended usage requirements although it may
not conform to the original specified requirements (ISO
9000:2000).
ii. Rework - Action taken on a non-conforming product so that it will

fulfill the specified requirement (ISO 9000:2000).
REVISIONS
r-.
CONTRACTOR shall develop Non-Conformance Report (NCR) form and
DRAWNBY:
submit it to the COMPANY for review and comment. CONTRACTOR's
DATE: I QAlQC engineers/inspectors shall have the freedom to issue NCRs,
CHI'Day: 1
verify implementation of corrective actions and prevent use of non-
conforming items until the deficiency has been satisfactorily resolved.
CONTRACTOR's Chief QAlQC engineer shall submit bi-weekly site
QAlQC reports to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE about non-
compliances.
f. Corrective Action
CONTRACTOR shall develop, document and implement a system for

determining the root cause of non-conformities and identifying the
required corrective actions. New procedures or changes to existing
procedures resulting from identification of the root cause and potential
root cause of non-conformances shall be documented and implemented.
Follow-up action shall be taken to verify effective implementation of
corrective action. The identified cause and corrective action should be
included in the bi-weekly site QAlQC reports that are required to be
submitted to the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
g. Quality Records
~~ CONTRACTOR shall develop and maintain a system for preparation,

BY; " ..
maintenance, protection and preservation of quality records. Documents
DATE: 08.10.2011
such as inspection reports, field inspection checklist, factory test reports,
laboratory test reports, witnessed test reports, inspection logbooks,
equipment calibration records/certificates, construction drawings and
specifications, approved submittals and non-conformance reports are
THIS DRAWING IS Nor
TO BE USED FOR part of these records. All quality records shall be available at WORKSITE
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING for use and/or reference by CONTRACTOR and COMPANY
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
REPRESENTATIVE.
[PTS- 11CM01 o-MZKJ
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGENO. REV.
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAlL
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
h. Control of Inspection, Measuring and Testing Equipment
All measuring and testing equipment and devices which can affect the
quality of construction shall be controlled and maintained.
CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement a documented calibration
control program indicating equipment calibration schedule and identifying
those who are responsible for control of the equipment. CONTRACTOR
shall ensure that only properly identified and calibrated measuring and
testing equipment are used in the PROJECT. Equipment calibration
certificates shall be handed over to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE prior
to the commencement of related jobs.
i. Document Control
REVISIONS
CONTRACTOR shall develop and maintain a documented control
/) program for the review, approval, revision and distribution of documents
DRAWN IV:
,,/ for the activities affecting quality. Responsible personnel for revision,
DATE:
issuance and approval of documents shall be identified. Contractor shall
CIIK'DBY: I
ensure that all pertinent and current issues of appropriate documents are
available at locations where they are essential and obsolete or
superseded documents are promptly removed. CONTRACTOR shall list
all the documents that have to be controlled and shall include PROJECT
Quality Plan/Quality Program, Quality Control Plan/Inspection and Test
Plan, construction and design drawings, calculations, correspondence,
inspection and test reports, field inspection checklist, etc.
j. Material/Eguipment Handling, Storage, Identification and Control
CONTRACTOR shall verify that material/equipment meet prescribed

contractual requirements and are properly handled, identifiable,
traceable, cleaned, preserved and stored.
k. Control of interface and interaction between the COMPANY and

CONTRACTOR and between the CONTRACTOR and its SUB-
CONTRACTORS, manufacturers/suppliers, QA/QC Services
CONTRACTOR(s) [Independent Inspection Agency (ies)] and
Independent Testing Laboratories.
I. Any other applicable QA/QC activity (les) for the PROJECT.

DATE: 08.10.2011
4. Design Control
a. CONTRACTOR shall describe the design control program that will be

applied on this PROJECT whether the design activity is to be done by the
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR CONTRACTOR's own personnel or by design consultants. All design
CONSfRUCI'ION OR
FOR ORDERING input and output shall be reviewed prior to release to the next stage,
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
Hold points shall be shown or indicated in the PROJECT Quality Plan. In
addition to design review, design verification shall be conducted to ensure
that the design stage output meets the design stage input requirements.
[PTS-11CM010-MZKj
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS 19
C494 A OF 0
llCM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
J -----
b. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all design computations, design

drawings and other design documents are properly controlled and
checked prior to submission to the COMPANY. Design documents shall
be signed by the person(s) who prepared and checked them. COMPANY
reserves the right to return design documents without the proper
I c.
signature of the responsible person(s).
If the CONTRACTOR subcontracts the design activity, a copy of the

scope of WORK to be subcontracted shall be submitted to the
COMPANY for review and approval.
5. Field Testing/Inspection and Construction/Installation Control

REVISIONS
CONTRACTOR shall establish and document all procedures and WORK
n instructions to ensure that the construction and installation processes are
DRAWN BY:
performed in a controlled manner. The necessary qualification of personnel
DA'I'E: J and procedure for activities such as welding, non-destructive examination, heat
CRK'DBY: /
treatment, civil/concrete WORKS, etc. shall be defined. WORK instructions
and procedures shall be adhered to by the CONTRACTOR's personnel.
CONTRACTOR shall conduct inspection and testing activities at all phases and
quality audit at appropriate stages of the PROJECT construction/installation.
CONTRACTOR's QNQC engineers/inspectors shall develop and use field
inspection checklist to facilitate checking of a process, actiVity, material or
equipment. The field inspection checklist shall state the characteristic to be
verified, inspection method, acceptance criteria and clause reference of the
applicable standard or specification. The checklist shall have provision for
writing the result of inspection, date of inspection and name and signature of
the QNQC engineer/inspector. Such activities where inspection checklists are
required shall include but not necessarily limited to all pre-commissioning and
commissioning checks and tests, material/equipment receiving inspection,
concrete pre-pour inspection, asphalting, hydrostatic testing, pressure testing
of equipment and lines and air balancing and leak testing of HVAC system. All
inspection and testing results shall be reviewed, safely stored and maintained
by the CONTRACTOR. Typical checklist shall be provided to the COMPANY
for review and comment.
CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement the use of inspection logbook for
use by the CONTRACTOR's QNQC engineers/inspectors in recording their
comments and observations as a result of their inspection. CONTRACTOR's
personnel responsible for rectifying any observed deficiency or non-
conformance shall also write their reply in the logbook stating the actions taken
to correct the deficiency. CONTRACTOR's QNQC engineers/inspectors shall
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR ensure that all unsatisfactory observations on an item are cleared before any
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR OIlDElUNG activity proceeds to the succeeding stage of that item.
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01D-MZKJ
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
C. Quality Control Plan/Inspection and Test Plan
1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY the Quality Control

Plan/Inspection and Test Plan for each major material/equipment covered
under the scope of this PROJECT; based on the following
Transmission/Materials, which requires third party factory inspection:
I

LV Panels (LV Relay & Control Panel, Main AC & DC Distribution Boards)
Switehgears (MV Air/SF6 Metal-Clad SWitchgears)
All insulators used in COMPANY system.
Conductor Accessories (include Jumper Terminals)
MV and HV Power Cables (all voltages and types)
Controls & Instrumentation Cables (all types)
REVISIONS Splice & Termination Kits for all MVand HV Power Cables
Surge Arresters
DRAWNBY: n 33kV and 13.8kV Capacitor Banks
DAn;, ~~T----1 De-Tuning Reactors
CllK'DBY'f- /---1 33kV and 13.8kV Current Transformers
J
33kVand 13.8kV Voltage Transformers
The quality activities including but not necessarily limited to inspection and
testing, for the materiaVequipment shall be planned and documented in the
form of a Quality Control Plan/Inspection and Test Plan. The Quality Control
Plan/Inspection and Test Plan shall be submitted to the COMPANY together
with the PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program.
2. The essential features of the required Quality Control Plan/Inspection and

Test Plan is as follows:
a. It is specifically identified to a particular materiaVequipment.
b. It has provision for revisions to be made and is assigned a unique

document number.
c. It lists all the inspection and testing activities sequentially.
d. It states the location at which the activity is to be carried out.
e. It identifies the applicable standard, test procedure to be followed and

DATE: 08.10.2011 the acceptance criteria for the inspection or test activity.
f. It identifies the extent of inspection, sampling frequency and sample

size, or extent of check.
mIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON
FOR ORDERING
OR g. It identifies the hold point, witness point and surveillance point.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
h. It identifies the record document to be generated, reviewed and
retained.
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
J~ --
3. The Quality Control Plan/Inspection and Test Plan shall indicate the scheduled
dates of testing and inspection at the designated location.
D. Manufacturers/Suppliers
i 1.
2.
CONTRACTOR shall procure all major material items for the PROJECT from
COMPANY qualified and approved sources.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that purchase orders to manufacturers/ suppliers

contain all the applicable industry and COMPANY developed standards and
specifications.
3. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that Purchase Order(s) to approved

REVISIONS
manufacturers/suppliers are not re-assigned or sub-contracted to other
/7
manufacturers/suppliers without COMPANY's written consent.
DRAWNBY:
DATE: J
CHK'DBY: I E. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR(s)
[Independent Inspection Agency]
1. CONTRACTOR shall CONTRACT COMPANY approved Quality Assurance

and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR(s) to provide quality
controVquality assurance monitoring of all quality activities related to
procurementof materials and equipment to be used in this PROJECT.
2. CONTRACTOR shall instruct the contracted Quality Assurance and Quality

Control Services CONTRACTOR(s) to provide directly to COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE, by express mail or fax, four (4) copies of material status,
quality surveillance reports, inspection and test reports within seven (7) days
after the inspection. Soft copies of these signed reports in CD shall also be
furnished and submitted for company records. All pages of the inspection and
test reports shall be reviewed, signed and stamped by the approved inspector
from the Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR.
3. CONTRACTOR's Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services

CONTRACTOR shall not re-assign or sublet portion of their contracted quality
controVquality assurance monitoring WORK.
4. CONTRACTOR shall provide the COMPANY a copy of the Scope of WORK

issued to the Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR.
DATE; 08.10.2011
5. CONTRACTOR shall instruct the Quality Assurance and Quality Control

Services CONTRACTOR to verify and check each material/equipment for
mlS DRAWING IS NOT
conformance against the PROJECT Scope .ot WORK and Technical
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
Specification and each clause of the applicable SEC Material Standard
FOR. ORDERING Specification (SMSS) and Transmission Material Standard Specification
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED (TMSS) and report all deviations that are not included in the COMPANY issued
clarifications. The report of the Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services
CONTRACTOR shall include the following:
[PTS-11CM01D-MZKJ
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 22
C494 A OF 0
l1CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
Ji- _
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~.;J.l1 ~ e.) - "t,.Jf5.U ~J.,......JI ~.;J.l1
a. PROJECTtitle, CONTRACT number.
b. Complete description of the inspected material/equipment.
c. Report number and date.
i d.
e.
Place and date of inspection, scope of inspection.
Documents used during inspection.
1. Manufacturerand plant location where the equipment was manufactured.
g. Detailed description of the inspection and testing activities and their

REVISIONS
results, deviations to specification, manufacturer's explanation to the
n deviations, visual inspection result, packing and marking inspection
DRAWN BY:
J result, conclusion and copy of the outline drawing of the inspected

DATE:
CHK'DBY;
I material/equipment. Witnessed tests and reviewed test data shall be
J clearly identified in the inspection reports.
h. Name of the inspector(s).
6. CONTRACTOR shall furnish copies of the following document to the Quality

Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR(s) contracted to
perform quality assurance and quality control monitoring of each material and
equipment before surveillance:
a. Purchase Order placed to the manufacturer/supplier.
b. Relevant section of PROJECT Scope of WORK and Technical

Specification.
c. Applicable COMPANY developed standard and specification.
d. Manufacturer'sTechnical Specifications and COMPANY approved design

drawings.
e. COMPANY's approval of materiaVequipment and applicable clarifications

.~?
( .-"
issued by the COMPANY.
BY:
DATE: 08.1O.:!On
f. COMPANY approved test program, manufacturing quality control plan or
inspection and test plan.
7. CONTRACTOR shall send to the COMPANY, copy(ies) of all technical

THIS BRA wINe IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR correspondence exchanged between CONTRACTOR and "Quality Assurance
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR".
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
8. CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval from COMPANY before allowing any
personnel of the Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services
[PTS- 11CM01 D-MZKj
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLANTNO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGE NO. REV.

JOB ORDER NO.
PTS 23
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
CONTRACTOR to perform quality assurance and quality control monitoring

activities related to procurement of materials to be used in this PROJECT. The
specific material/equipment to be inspected, manufacturer and location of
manufacturing plant shall be identified for each proposed inspector of the
Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR.
I 9. Employment by CONTRACTOR of a Quality Assurance and Quality Control

Services CONTRACTOR shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR of any
obligation set forth in this CONTRACT.
F. Release for Shipment Certificate
1. Release for Shipment Certificate is a certificate issued by the CONTRACTOR

to the supplier/manufacturer to release the described material for shipment
REVISIONS
after recommendation by the Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services
CONTRACTOR and approval by the COMPANY.
D....WNBY, -(-11-1--;
DATE,"""'F ..JL_-f 2. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all material requiring inspection and/or quality
CHK'DBY: V
----I
surveillance at the supplier/manufacturer's facility are not shipped to the
WORK SITE without a "Release for Shipment Certificate."
3. CONTRACTOR acknowledges that material shipped without approved

"Release for Shipment Certificate" is subject to rejection and return at the
CONTRACTOR's expense.
4. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all inspection and surveillance reports and
any other requirements are satisfactorily completed before requesting the
COMPANY to approve the "Release for Shipment Certificate."
G. Receipt Inspection
1. CONTRACTOR shall conduct receipt inspection of major material and

equipment after delivery at the WORKSITE and shall submit a copy of the
report to the COMPANY.
2. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report to the COMPANY any shipment and

transportation damage.
H. Independent Testing Laboratory

DATE: 08.10.2011
1. CONTRACTOR shall contract COMPANY approved Independent Testing
Laboratory for material and field-testing services.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

2. CONTRACTOR shall instruct the contracted Independent Testing Laboratory
TO BE USED FOR
CON5I'RUCTION OR
to provide four (4) copies of the test results and reports along with soft copies
FOR ORDERING (CD) directly to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE within three (3) days of the
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED test completion. Test reports shall indicate the tested characteristics, test
methods, acceptance criteria and applicable standard. The PROJECT Contract
Number shall be used as reference on all reports.
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
3. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that contracted Independent Testing Laboratory

does not re-assign or sublet any portion of their contracted testing WORK.
4. CONTRACTOR shall provide the COMPANY a copy of the Scope of WORK

issued to and finalized with the Independent Testing Laboratory.
I 5. CONTRACTOR shall make reasonable effort to obtain timely access by the

COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE to the Independent Testing Laboratory's
facility, should the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE exercise the option to
witness any or all the tests and verify the calibration status of the testing
equipment.
6. Employment by CONTRACTOR of an Independent Testing Laboratory shall in

REVISIONS
no way relieve CONTRACTOR of any obligation set forth in this CONTRACT.
DRAWNBY:
()
. I. Inspection by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
DATE:
CIIK'DBY: /
1. COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE will conduct routine and/or periodic inspection
of the WORK. CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities and access to COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE to inspect the WORK and witness the tests.
2. CONTRACTOR shall advise the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in writing the

schedule of any field or laboratory testing to be conducted for this PROJECT
showing the dates and location of testing.
3. CONTRACTOR shall attach a copy of the completed inspection checklist or

finaVin-process inspection report by the CONTRACTOR's QA/QC
engineer/inspector on every inspection request submitted to the COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR's QAlQC engineerlinspector shall ensure that the items for
inspection covered by the CONTRACTOR's "Inspection Requesf' are ready
and in accordance with the CONTRACT requirements prior to inspection by
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
Inspection and witnessing of testing at site by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE

shall be within the regular working hours of the COMPANY. CONTRACTOR's
schedule for inspection and witnessing of testing at site by COMPANY
BY:
DATE:
n. 08.10.2011
REPRESENTATIVE outside of the regular COMPANY working hours shall
have prior approval from the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
J. COMPANY's Quality Assessment (Audit) Right
1. COMPANY reserves the right to conduct scheduled and/or unscheduled quality

mrs DRAWING rs NOT assessment of CONTRACTOR's Quality System, PROJECT Operation, and
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR
PROJECT Quality Plan implementation. The results of such assessments
FOR ORDERING (audits) shall be confidential within CONTRACTOR and COMPANY.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CEJITIFIEDAND DATED
CONTRACTOR shall provide all access and assistance in a timely manner to
COMPANY personnel who will perform the quality assessment (audit).
[PTS- 11CM01o-MZK]

C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
The CONTRACTOR shall implement corrective actions on all deficient areas

discovered during the quality assessment (audit) within a mutually agreeable
time frame. All costs (except cost of wages, transportation and lodging of
COMPANY Quality Assessors) incurred during the quality assessment (audit)
shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
I 2. CONTRACTOR shall include the following conditions on purchase order placed

with the manufacturers/suppliers:
"COMPANY reserves the right to perform plant survey, quality assessment

(audit), and quality surveillance activities and to inspect material at the
suppliers/manufacturer's facility to verify compliance with the terms and
conditions of the purchase order and its related documents. COMPANY
REVISIONS
reserves the right to witness any and all tests specified and to perform such
visual examination (inspection) at the suppliers/manufacturer's facility.
DIlAWNBY:
1/ COMPANY reserves the right to require certificates and data from the
DATE:
supplier/manufacturer on any pertinent aspect of the manufacturing process,
CIIl<'D BY, .-FJ-+_-t
J including but not limited to, mill test reports, heat treatment certificates, welders
and welding procedure qualification records, non-destructive examination
records, test records and quality control manual that will form part of the non-
material requirement that shall be shipped to COMPANY as a document
package".
K. Additional Requirements
The final COMPANY approved protection and control drawings with latest revision
numbers shall be the only drawings used by the independent inspection agency for
testing and acceptance of protection and control equipment. The acceptance criteria
shall include individual device testing and complete functional and point to point
wiring check of the panels in conjunction with the composite AC and DC schematics
and the rear view panel wiring diagrams. Each check shall refer to specific drawing
and revision number. This shall be implemented immediately after base design
meeting.
2.08 COMMISSIONING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY Commissioning, Operation and

Maintenance Manuals, along with Pre-commissioning and Procedures Manuals,
consisting of, as a minimum, the following documents:
DATE. _==-; 08.1o.2B11
1. Detailed manufacturer's instruction manuals applicable to each equipment

installed. These manuals shall contain all information (including any special
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
design and/or construction or operation feature) which may be required by the
TO BE USED ~R COMPANY for safe operation and maintenance of the new facilities and shall
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING describe fully erection, commissioning, operation and maintenance procedures
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED including mechanical/ electrical tolerances for maintenance/repair purposes.
[PTS-llCM010-MZKj
JOB ORDER NO. PT5- 26
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
2. Manufacturer's instruction manuals applicable to each particular test

apparatus.
3. Technical Specification Manuals applicable to each particular test apparatus.
4. Complete sets of exploded view drawings with comprehensive parts

identification for each device to enable the COMPANY to catalogue and order.
5. Interconnection and Schematic Diagrams.
6. Setting and Calibration Procedures and Instructions.
7. Interconnection cable schedule.

REVISIONS
8. Internal wiring interconnection schedule.
DRAWNBV:
J B. The submission schedule for commissioning, operation and maintenance manuals
DATE:
as detailed in (A) above shall be as given below:
CBK'DBY: I
1. Six (6) sets for preliminary review by COMPANY as to adequacy,
completeness, and legibility at least eight (8) weeks before commencing
commissioning tests.
2. Four (4) complete sets of fUlly revised manuals (original and no photocopies)
incorporating the COMPANY's comments to the fUll satisfaction of the
COMPANY before technical completion of the PROJECT.
2.09 TECHNICAL DATA MANUALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide technical data manuals for the substation
equipment, protection relays and underground cable system installed under the
scope of this PROJECT as indicated in the attached Appendix III.
B. The manuals binders shall have COMPANY logo, binder number and PROJECT
title, and CONTRACT Number on the front cover.
2.10 TEST RECORD BOOK
BY,
DATE:
C2- 08.10.2011
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a "Test Record Book" which shall include the
following:
1. Factory test report of each particular equipment installed.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

2. Field test report, which shall include the following:
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING a. Description of Equipment Tested and Manufacturer's Nameplate Data
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DAtED
b. Description of Test
c. List of Apparatus with Calibration Data
[PTS-llCM010-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
llCM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
@ d. Test Results
is
e. Conclusions and Recommendations
f. Appendix, including test forms
B. Each test form where applicable shall include a column quoting the acceptable
maximum and minimum limits of the test in terms of voltage, current, frequency,
time, etc., and include "As Found" and "As Leff' values.
C. Four (4) copies of the "Test Record Book" are to be submitted within thirty (30) days
after commissioning the PROJECT.
2.11 PLANT TAGGING OF EQUIPMENT AND INDEPENDENT COMPONENTS
REVISIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shall affix Plant Tag to each and every individual equipment
including independent components to be installed under this CONTRACT which
DRAWN BY: have a material value of Five Thousand Saudi Riyals (SR 5,000), or more. The
DATE: CONTRACTOR shall install Plant Tags adjacent to the Manufacturer's Data Plate or
CHK'DBY: at any other place approved by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. The
J
CONTRACTOR shall affix Plant Tags by bolts and nuts, or rivets or welds, or
adhesives, as instructed in writing by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE,
depending on the type of equipment to be tagged. The CONTRACTOR shall
complete Plant Tagging before Technical completion.
B. At least sixty (60) days before completion of the installation of all equipment covered
under this CONTRACT, CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY a list of all
equipment and independent components to be tagged, using the format of
COMPANY Form No. 16511 (2/10) Exhibit - I to the Job Specifications. Based on
this list, COMPANY shall assign Plant Tag Number to each item and
CONTRACTOR shall install the Plant Tags in accordance with this list. COMPANY
will, within one (1) month from the date of receipt of the list, issue to CONTRACTOR
the Plant Tags together with the list showing assigned Plant Tag Numbers. The
actual schedule shall be worked out with COMPANY's OAC-ElMAD.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall, if required, assist the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in

locating all eqUipment identified by Plant Tag Numbers in accordance with the list
provided by the CONTRACTOR. .
P /-.-~ 2.12 CONTRACTOR! COMPANY's CONSTRUCTION SITE OFFICE AND FACILITY

BY' ( -'
DATE, tIII.10.201I Contractor shall provide necessary office arrangements for SEC personaVCompany
consultants in the Contractor's temporary site office.
A. CONTRACTOR'S SITE OFFICE:

THIS DRAWING 18 N(fJ'
TO BE USED FOR
CONSfRUCI10N OR The CONTRACTOR shall install three temporary site offices at one of the
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL centralized location of substations at Hail, one at 8077 and one at 7782 prior to
CERTIFIED AND DATED
mobilization of any construction activity pertaining to the PROJECT. Proposal with
layout sketch of the Site office shall be submitted to COMPANY for approval. If the
[PTS-11CM010-MZKJ
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
facilities located outside the COMPANY property/premises a written permission of

the owner of the land/premises shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR and copy
furnished to the COMPANY for records.
B. SITE OFFICE FOR THE EXCLUSIVE USE OF COMPANY/CONSULTANT
I The CONTRACTOR shall provide necessary office arangements for SEC

personnel/COMPANY conultants in each of the CONTRACTOR'S temporary site
offices desribed in 2.12.A.
2.13 LOSS PREVENTION REQUIREMENTS
The CONTRACTOR and/or CONTRACTOR's SUBCONTRACTOR(s) shall strictly

REVISIONS
comply with the following Loss Prevention requirements, in addition to the
stipulations in Schedule A - General Terms and Conditions of CONTRACT:
DRAWN BY: o
DATE: Jl A. General Requirements
CHK'DBY:
,/ 1. Adherence to all applicable provisions of the COMPANY Accident Prevention
Manual and Construction Safety Manual (ISO Special Manual No. 6.483).
2. Compliance with the provisions of the COMPANY General Instructions on

WORK Permit and Clearance Procedure (G.!. #65.111). The CONTRACTOR
shall have an authorized employee with certificate to receive WORK Permit. If
the CONTRACTOR has no authorized employee, or has an employee with
expired certificate, he shall be responsible to coordinate with the COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE for scheduling of WORK Permit training course. All
activities of the CONTRACTOR near or inside the substation shall be allowed
only after securing WORK Permit.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall submit his Loss Prevention Program to the

COMPANY sufficiently in advance to obtain COMPANY approval prior to
commencement of WORK at site. The Loss Prevention Programs shall contain
the following:
a. Cover Page complete with references, as follows:
CONTRACTOR's Name
]IV; ,~
~ ,
Title of Submittal
PROJECT Title and Location
DATE: 011.10.2011
CONTRACT Number
COMPANY's Name
Date of revision
THIS ORAWING IS NOT
TO BE
CONSTRUCI10N
USED
OR
~R b. Table of Contents
FOR ORDERING
MATERJALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED c. CONTRACTOR's COMPANY Safety Policy Statement complete with
signature over printed name and title of CONTRACTOR's Management
REPRESENTATIVE.
[PTS- 11CM010-MZKj

C494 A OF 0
11CM010
d. Specific program items (suitable for the SOW) that the CONTRACTOR
proposes to implement during the CONTRACT execution.
e. Attachments necessary to supplement the program.
PROJECT Table of Organization

Construction Schedule
Equipment Schedule
Manpower Schedule
CONTRACTOR'S standard forms for safety related reports
Temporary Facility layout
Location plan
Copy of valid certificate of first aid
REVISIONS
Curriculum Vitae of Safety Supervisor/Safety Engineer
DRA.WNBY: ()
4. The CONTRACTOR shall appoint qualified and approved by COMPANY, a
DATE: .6f_---1
"'4-
Safety Supervisor/Safety Engineer, to monitor, implement and administer the
1_--1
CIIK'DBY,+-
program for the entire safety of the PROJECT personnel & others from the
J
time of site mobilization to final handing over of the PROJECT. The Safety
Supervisor/Safety Engineer shall report directly to one level higher than the
PRJECT Manager. The Safety Engineer shall do the safety presentation of the
program prior to its approval by ISD/FF & LPD before site mobilization.
5. The CONTRACTOR shall provide necessary personal protective clothing (Le.

head, eye, face, hand, and foot protection) and respiratory protective
equipment including personal protective equipment for fall protection such as
safety belts and lifelines, and implement wearing them.
6. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and use adequate and suitable safety/
warning signs, cordon tapes, portable barricades, warning lights and personnel
protective equipment at the JOBSITE to protect the safety of COMPANY and
CONTRACTOR personnel and the public, and to prevent damage to property.
7. Provision of traffic warning or control warning devices when working near or

along roadways, for safety of personnel and the public. When required by the
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, the CONTRACTOR shall provide personnel
//'-----:; (as flagman) to direct and maintain traffic in affected roadways.
BY, ( "'-"
8. The CONTRACTOR shall provide first aid facilities and must have a certified
DA'n.:: 08.10.2011
employee to administer first aid and Cardio-Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR). A
valid copy of first aide certificate shall be attached with the Loss Prevention
Program.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR 9. The CONTRACTOR shall refrain from using mechanized excavation
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING equipment within restricted areas unless cleared and permitted to do so.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
10. The CONTRACTOR shall request in advance a clearance for de-energizing the
interfacing points and observe grounding procedures.
[PTS-11CM01D-MZKj
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 30
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
Ul--- _
11. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the COMPANY, 10 cards for his
employees and stickers for his vehicles/equipment prior to mobilization to site.
12. In order to prevent theft/loss of materials/equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall

take the necessary measures and precautions including but not limited to the
I following:
a. All materials provided or used in this CONTRACT shall be stored by the

CONTRACTOR in safe and secured locations even if stored for short
period of time.
b. If the equipment/materials are to be stored in the substation area for a

prolonged period, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that they are kept in
REVISIONS
locked containers or any other appropriate method of storage such that
the materials/equipment are not easily noticeable by people with
DRAWNBY:
intention of theft or pilferage. Moreover, such containers shall be placed
DATE:
at a distance from the fence/boundary wall.
CHK'DBY:
I
c. CONTRACTOR shall also consider other factors (Le. temperature,
humidity, etc.) affecting the storage of materials/equipment being stored
in containers, to avoid any damage during such storage period.
B. PROJECT InvolVing Elevated WORKS
1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit 'THE CERTIFICATION OF SAFE USAGE'

for his heavy equipment (Le. cranes and bucket trucks) to COMPANY, through
an independent agency authorized for such certification and correspondingly
stick with green safety sticker.
2. The CONTRACTOR's ladders shall conform to OSHA (Occupational Safety

and Health Administration) standard. Safety practices shall be followed in
positioning ladders. ScaffoldS shall be designed, built and inspected by a
competent engineer prior to its use.
C. PROJECT Involving Welding and Cutting Operations
1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable fire extinguishers to be used in case

of fire emergencies.
DATE: 08.10.2011
2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the welding gas cylinders with suitable rack
that is equipped with security chain(s).
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

D. PROJECT near Energized Lines or Eguipment
TO BE USED FOR
CONsrRUCI'JON OR
FOR ORDERING Observe working clearances when working near or about energized line or
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED ANDDATED equipment as per COMPANY's Accident Prevention Manual. CONTRACTOR may
require coordinating with the COMPANY'S REPRESENTATIVE to work under
permission or NO TEST ORDER (NATO) provided line or Equipment will remain hot.
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
E. PROJECT Requiring the Use of Chemical(s)
Submit material safety data sheets (MSDS) of chemicals required or which are to be
used in the execution of the PROJECT.
I 2.14 SHUTDOWN AND OUTAGE COORDINATION
A. Planned outages of existing equipment which are required for CONTRACTOR's

WORK shall be minimized by CONTRACTOR during his PROJECT execution.
B. Where outages of existing equipment at substation or outage on overhead lines

cannot be avoided, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all details of planned outages
REVISIONS
through the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE with initial coordination during the base
design stage of the PROJECT.
C. As part of the CONTRACTOR's coordination activity (for the planned outage),

CONTRACTOR shall provide reasons, plans and detailed schedule for the planned
outages that will be subjected to COMPANY's review and approval.
D. COMPANY'S approval of planned outages shall be based solely on COMPANY'S

operational considerations.
E. CONTRACTOR shall note that, as a minimum requirement, COMPANY will consider

approval of CONTRACTOR'S proposed planned outages during low load periods
(during the period between November and March), and when CONTRACTOR shall
provide enough manpower at the outage site(s) to minimize the planned outage
time. The total outage on the line shall not exceed 40 working days on daily outage
basis.
F. For double circuit transmission line, CONTRACTOR shall retrofit the OPGW/OGW
while the line circuit on the other side of the tower is energized.
G. Whenever outages become very critical or impossible then contractor shall consider
hot work, all plans for hot work should be discussed and approved by the company
representatives. For critical line outages, CONTRACTOR may have to deploy at
least two working teams to start from both ends of the line.
BY:
i~~ H. No unplanned outages/disruption of COMPANY'S equipment or systems shall be
DATE: 08.10.2011
allowed to support the CONTRACTOR'S installation of any new equipment, or
CONTRACTOR'S movement/relocation of existing equipment at any site.
I. All outages shall be scheduled at least four (4) weeks in advance. Any requested
THIS ORAWING IS NOT outage must be approved by the COMPANY at least two (2) working weeks before
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR actual WORK is carried out.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
J. Prior to removal of existing protection panels and installing new protection panels,
laying of cables, testing of protective relays on the new panels and any other works,
[PTS- 11CM01 OMZKJ
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
U v-'
.. ~.t1 ~l t.J! _ l'u.C.Jt-
. <It"-.,...,.,..-
. _ ...1\ ~ .'.1\
v-
which do not require shutdown shall be carried out to minimize the outage to a bare
minimum. During the outage only relay settings, functional tests and end-to-end trip
tests shall be carried out. Testing of new panels shall be done after installation at the
final location.
2.15 WORKING HOURS
I During the construction phase of the Project, the Contractor shall work in the normal
working hours of the Company, l.e. 7:00AM to 3:00 PM unless otherwise instructed
by the Company. However for the work requiring outages, the Contractor shall be
prepared to work during low load season on weekends or nights, when outages are
feasible. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Company to get work permit
before commencing the job.
REVISIONS
2.16 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
DRAWNB'. -+11+---i
For Training requirements refer to Appendix - X
DATE:~
Y---t
QIK'DBY, 'I---t
I
END OF SECTION - II
DAn: 08.10.20]]
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR
FOR ORDERING
MADRIALS UNTIL
CERTD1ED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
SECTION 11/ - SCOPE OF WORK
3.01 GENERAL
A CONTRACTOR shall provide 33kV and 13.8kV Shunt Capacitor Banks at the
respective substations mentioned in this SOW consisting of but not limited to the
I following major equipment/systems as indicated in this section on a Lump Sum

Turnkey (LSTK) Basis. All components and accessories required for the satisfactory
operation of the facilities of the PROJECT, whether specifically mentioned in detail
or not shall be supplied and installed as necessary.
B. The Bidder/CONTRACTOR shall visit the sites and make aware of the details of the
existing system/facilities. The modification WORK at the associated substations
shall be compatible with the existing system.
REVISIONS
C. The CONTRACTOR shall relocate the existing facilities as required for making
DIlAWNBYl space to install the new equipments under this project and handover all dismantled
DATE:
materials/equipment if any to COMPANY designated warehouse.
CHJ<'DBY, --<1f---1
v
3.02 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & FACILITIES
Note: The Design Ambient Temperature for all Outdoor Equipments shall be
55C as per 01-TMSS01, Rev.01
I. 5MVAr, 33kV Capacitor Bank
A. Capacitor Banks
33kV shunt capacitor banks to deliver net output of 5MVAr each with detuning
reactor connected in series to prevent resonances at all possible operating
conditions. The capacitor bank shall be as per 43-TMSS-01, Rev.O. Automatic
Control of Capacitor Banks (ACCS) shall be provided through a Programmable
Logic Controller (PLC) to control the switching of Capacitor banks. Capacitor
shall be provided with sun shade to avoid direct exposure to sun light. Each
capacitor bank shall be provided with separate fence and gate with electrical
and mechanical interlock to prevent entry when the bank is live. The gate shall
have permissive to open only after 10minutes following the de-energizing of
Capacitor bank. For design criteria, refer to section 4.04 and 4.05.
33kV Capacitor Banks shall be provided in the following 132/33kV Substation:
DATE: 08.10.2011 # SUBSTATION NAME No.

1. 8914 2
2. 8915 1
3. 8918 1
THIS ORAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED ~R 4. 8922 2
CONSTRUCI'lON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]

C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
Each capacitor bank shall include but not limited to the following:
1. 33kV Shunt Capacitor Bank
The shunt capacitor bank shall conform to 43-TMSS-01, Rev.O. The shunt
capacitor bank/individual units forming the capacitor bank shall meet or
exceed the requirement of the following technical specification and shall be
tested accordingly.
Ratings:
a. a-phase MVAr of the bank 5MVAr at 33kV bus (delivered power

at MV bus voltage)
REVISIONS
b. Configuration 3-phase, Un-grounded, Double Wye
n c. Number of cans per Phase (*) See Note 2

DltAWN"BY:
DATI:: .J d. Installation Outdoor

CHK'DBY: 7
J
e. Normal Bus Operating 33kV L-L 19.05kV L-N
Voltage
f. Tuned Harmonic with zero 4.6,n order (279 Hz)

tolerance
g. BIL of the Capacitor Bank 250kVp
h. Power frequency withstand 95kVrms

voltage
i. BIL of individual Capacitor (*) See Note 2

Unit
j. Rated delivered Capacitive 88A

current at MV Bus
k. Minimum Continuous 119A

withstand current capability
including Harmonics
I. Maximum Ambient
DA.TI:: 08.10.2011 temperature
m. Fuse Protection Internal or External
THIS DRAWING lS NOT The capacitor bank shall be designed in such a way that they should be
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcrrON OR
thermally stable. Case hot spot temperature variation should be less than
FOR ORDERING 3"C for a period of 24 hours when energized at test voltage.
MATERlAlS UNTIL
CERTIFlED AND DATED
Capacitor bank must be able to carry continuously 1.35times the
fundamental frequency current flowing with rated voltage and power and
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
JI....-- _
1.1times fundamental frequency voltage (rms) at the 13.8kV bus

continuously.
Note:
i. CONTRACTOR may propose an arrangement (series parallel
combination of units), and number of cans having merits (at no
i
extra cost to COMPANY), at base design stage for COMPANY
review and approval.
ii. The number of cans per phase (*) shall be decided by the
CONTRACTOR based on optimum design. The BIL of each unit
shall be decided based on the number of units in series.
2. 33kV De-Tuning Reactors

REVISIONS
The 33kV De-Tuning reactors, one in each phase of the capacitor circuit,
shall conform to 58-TMSS-02, Rev.O.
DRAWNBY:--- 0_-4
DAn;,.::r ...4_-1 The specification of the series reactors are as follows:
CBK'DBY, )1__---1
J
a. Quantity 3-single phase per

capacitor bank
b. Type Air-Core Outdoor
c. Rated ohms at 60 Hz 10.50
d. Inductance 28mH
e. Impulse withstand voltage 250kVp
f. Power frequency withstand voltage 95kVrms
g. Minimum continuous withstand current 119A

capability including Harmonics
h. Short time withstand current (*) See note
i. Peak momentary current 2.6 x Short time withstand

current kAp
j. Insulation class F
DATE: 08.10.2011
Note: The short circuit withstand current shall be furnished based on

optimum design by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to COMPANY for
THIS DRAWING IS NOT review and approval.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSI'RUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01o-MZKI
JOB QRDER NO. PTS- 36
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
J ----
l;j
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~~ ~I e) - ,t.,.Jf5.\l~."a..wJl j"s.,)'lll
tl
..
~
.. 3. One (1) 33kV, Neutral unbalance current transformers.
~
4. One (1) 33kV, single phase voltage transformer for
Neutral Displacement voltage protection (its
class and burden shall be decided by the
~ Contractor)
~ 5. One (1) lot 33kV XLPEIAir (outdoor & indoor) type
~
terminations
6. One (1) lot ACSR conductor jumpers, clamps and
connectors required to connect the various
equipments
g .., .... ~
REVISIONS
7. One (1) lot Required Surge arresters for capacitor banks,
shall be provided and conform to 35-TMSS-Ol.
DRAWNBV:
0 Surge Arresters
DAm: ...A shall have Discharge Class 3 as minimum and
CRK'DBY: I higher class arrester shall be provided as
J required based on arrester sizing calculation.
- 8. Discharging Eguipment
Each Capacitor shall be provided with discharge resistors and shall be

mounted inside the can to bring down the residual voltage to 50volts or less
within 5minutes after the Capacitor is disconnected from the peak of rated
voltage.
B. 33kV Switchgear (Indoor)
33kV, 1250A continuous at 40C ambient 25kA (sym) interrupting capability

SF6Nacuum interrupting medium metal clad indoor switchgear compatible to
the existing switchgear and suitable for capacitive current switching including
capacitor back-to-back switching and the same shall be proved with type test
reports. The switchgears shall be suitable to feed 5MVAr capacitor bank
proposed in this SOW and conform to COMPANY material standard 32-TMSS-
01, Rev.01. Required CTs and Bus side VTs as per protection requirement
.l:II!Il.Im!
shall also be provided.
33kV Switchgears shall be provided in the following 132133kVSubstations:

~
BY, I -'"
DATE: 01.10.2011
# SUBSTATION No. NOTE
NAME
1. 8914 Existing Switchgears is Hitachi
2
HB30FF
THIS ORAWING IS NOT 2. 8915 Existing Switchgears is Hitachi
1
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRucnON OR
HB30FF
FOR ORDERING 3. 8918 Existing Switchgears is Hitachi
MATERIAI..S UNTIL 1
CER~EDANDDATED HB30FF
4. 8922 Existing Switchgears is Hitachi
2
HB30FF
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
Notes:
-i-.- Swapping and dismantling of existing feeders and breakers, if
required shall be carried out in case expansion is envisaged.
ii. Special tools as per AppendiX-XIII shall be provided.
iii. Control panel for the switchgear shall be provided as per existing
pattern in the station.
I
iv. Dismantled material if any shall be handed over to SEC designated
ware house.
C. Lot: Three phase Voltage Transformer with removable Bus bar links with
voltage ratio similar to the existing VTs for the Bus bar sections to which
capacitor banks to be connected shall be provided wherever Bus Bar Voltage
Transformer is not available.
REVISIONS
D. Capacitor Control Panels Automatic Capacitor Control System (ACCS)
panel(s) as specified under section 5.03. Suitable control logic shall be
I>
proposed by the CONTRACTOR for the configurations other than that
DRAWNBY;
specified vide section 5.03.
DATE: Y
CllK'DBV:
/ E. HV Power Cables (33kv) & Termination
_ A lot 33kV single core 630mm2 (min) copper conductor XLPE insulated
underground cable single run for connecting the outdoor capacitor banks to the
33kV indoor and outdoor switchgears as applicable including required indoor
and outdoor terminations.
F. Low Voltage Power and Control and Instrumentation (Shielded) Cables
Multi-core and/or multi pair control cables and low voltage AC/DC and shielded
instrumentation and communication interface cables, as necessary to
interconnect various substation equipment and devices to achieve a complete
working system for this PROJECT. Complete with conduits and trays.
G. Lighting System & Small Power
Outdoor lighting system for the capacitor banks area and outdoor type single
three phase power socket outlet for testing purpose. Indoor normal/emergency
lighting system shall be provided for the expanded portion of the switchgear
lDIIm!! building.
H. AC/DC Auxiliarv Power Supply
DATE: 08.10.2011 CONTRACTOR shall utilize the existing feeder outlets from the existing AC/DC
distribution panels to meet the AC/DC load requirement of the proposed
switchgears, control and protection schemes. CONTRACTOR shall add/modify
existing AC/OC panels if necessary for the requirement of new
THIS DRAWING IS NOT equipment/panels proposed in this PROJECT. There shall be 20% spare
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR MCBs after modification /addition, if 20% spare MCB are not maintained
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
additional MCBs shall be provided to maintain the 20% spare.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS-llCM01Q-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
llCM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
I. Cable Trays/Ladders/Conduits/Ducts
CONTRACTOR shall utilize/extend/modify/clean the existing cable carriers

(trays, conduits, ducts) in the substation wherever necessary for routing the HV
& LV power, control instrumentation and communication interface cables
required for this PROJECT.
I J. Grounding System
CONTRACTOR shall provide required grounding interconnections for all the

new equipment installed in this PROJECT to connect the existing grounding
grid. Grounding shall be as per COMPANY Engineering Standard TES-P-
119.10 Rev.a.
K. Shielding System
REVISIONS
n CONTRACTOR shall provide shielding system for the outdoor capacitor banks
DKAWNBY:
J installed. Shielding shall be as per COMPANY Engineering Standard TES-P-

DATE:
119.07 Rev.O.
CHK'DBY: f
L. Protection
Existing 33kV Bus bar protection scheme shall be modified to include the new
provided CBs. Required protection for capacitor banks and protection
modification required for the rearranged incomer and feeders shall be
provided. Refer to Appendix - VII for protection requirement.
M. Cable supports
Lot: Supports and clamps for cables and terminations as required.
Note:
All Voltage Transformers shall have dual class (0.5/3P) accuracy.
II. 10MVAr, 33kV Capacitor Banks
A. Capacitor Banks
DATE; 08.10.2011 Control of Capacitor Banks (ACCS) shall be provided through a Programmable
THIS DRAWING IS NOT and mechanical interlock to prevent entry when the bank is live. The gate shall
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCI1ON OR
FOR ORDERING Capacitor bank. For design criteria, refer to section 4.04 and 4.05.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED ANDDATED
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
JOB ORDERNO. PTS 39
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
J _
33kV Capacitor Banks shall be provided in the following 132/33kV Substation:
~ SUBSTATION NAME
1. 8077
i 1. 33kV Shunt Capacitor Bank
The shunt capacitor bank shall conform to 43-TMSS-01, Rev.O. The shunt
exceed the requirement of the following technical specification and shall be
tested accordingly.
REVISIONS Ratings:
DRAWN BY:
a. a-phase MVAr of the bank 10MVAr at 33kV bus (delivered
DATE; J power at MV bus voltage)
CHK'DBY: I
c. Number of cans per Phase (*) See Note 2
d. Installation Outdoor
e. Normal Bus Operating 33kV L-L 19.05kV L-N

Voltage
f. Tuned Harmonic with zero 4.6,n order (279 Hz)

tolerance
g. BIL of the Capacitor Bank 250kVp

voltage
i. BIL of individual Capacitor (*) See Note 2

Unit

current at MV Bus
DATE: OILI0.2011 k. Minimum Continuous 237A

withstand current capability
including Harmonics
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
I. Maximum Ambient
CONSTRUCfION OR temperature
FOR ORDERING
MA'lERlALS UNTIL
CER11FlED AND DATED m. Fuse Protection Internal or External
[PTS- 11CM01Q-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
The capacitor bank shall be designed in such a way that they should be
3C for a period of 24 hours when energized at test voltage.

I
continuously.
Note:

combination of units), and number of cans havinq merits (at no
extra cost to COMPANY), at base design stage for COMPANY
REVISIONS
n ii. The number of cans per phase (*) shall be decided by the
DRAWN BY:
CONTRACTOR based on optimum design. The Bil of each unit
DATE: .J! shall be decided based on the number of units in series.
CHK'DBY: ~+---f
r
The specification of the series reactors are as follows:

capacitor bank
d. Inductance 14mH
f. Power frequency withstand voltage 95kVrms

DATE: 01l.l0.2011
i. Peak momentary current 2.6 x Short time withstand

THIS DRAWING IS NOT current kAp
TO BE USED FOR
CONS'fRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING j. Insulation class F
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]

C494 A OF 0
11CM010

3. One (1) 33kV, Neutral unbalance current transformers.
i 4.
5.
One (1) 33kV, single phase voltage transformer for
Neutral Displacement voltage protection (its class
and burden shall be decided by the Contractor)
One (1) lot 33kV XLPElAir (outdoor & indoor) type

terminations
REVISIONS
equipments
n
DRAWN BY:
.J 7. One (1) lot Required Surge arresters for capacitor banks,

DATE:
shall be provided and conform to 35-TMSS-01.
CHK'DBY: I
Surge Arresters
shall have Discharge Class 3 as minimum and
higher class arrester shall be provided as
required based on arrester sizing calculation.
8. Discharging Equipment

voltage.

capacitor back-to-back switching and the same shall be proved with type test
DAB: 08.10.1011
33kV SWitchgears shall be provided in the following 132133kV Substations:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
NAME
TO BE USED FOR 1. 8077 Existing Switchgears are Toshiba and
CONSTRUCfION OR 1
FOR ORDERING Merlin Gerin
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS-llCM010-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
Notes:
v. Swapping and dismantling of existing feeders and breakers, if

vi. Special tools as per Appendix-XIII shall be provided.
vii. Control panel for the switchgear shall be provided as per existing
I
viii. Dismantled material if any shall be handed over to SEC designated
ware house.
capacitor banks to be connected shall be provided wherever Bus Bar Voltage
REVISIONS
n panel(s) as specified under section 5.03. Suitable control logic shall be
DRAWN BY:
J proposed by the CONTRACTOR for the configurations other than that

DATE:
"/ specified vide section 5.03.
CB:I:'DBY:
J
E. HV Power Cables (33kY) & Termination
A lot 33kV single core 630mm2 (min) copper conductor XLPE insulated
Multi-core and/or multi pair control cables and low voltage AC/DC and shielded
lighting system shall be provided for the expanded portion of the SWitchgear
building.
H. AC/DC Auxiliary Power Supply

DATE: 08.10.2011
CONTRACTOR shall utilize the existing feeder outlets from the existing AC/DC
THIS DRAWING IS NOT existing AC/DC panels if necessary for the requirement of new
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR equipment/panels proposed in this PROJECT. There shall be 20% spare
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
MCBs after modification /addition, if 20% spare MCB are not maintained
CERTIFIED AND DATED additional MCSs shall be provided to maintain the 20% spare.
[PTS-11CM010-MZKJ
JOB ORDERNO. PTS 43
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
CONTRACTOR shall utilize/extend/modify/clean the existing cable carriers

I J. Grounding System

119.10 Rev.O.
K. Shielding System
REVISIONS
CONTRACTOR shall provide shielding system for the outdoor capacitor banks
DRAWNBV:
installed. Shielding shall be as per COMPANY Engineering Standard TES-P-
DATE:
119.07 Rev.O.
CHK'DBY:
L. Protection
M. Cable supports
Note:
III. 15MVArl 33kV Capacitor Banks
A. Capacitor Banks
DAlE: 08.18.2C111 Control of Capacitor Banks (ACCS) shall be provided through a Programmable
THIS DRAWING IS Nor and mechanical interlock to prevent entry when the bank is live. The gate shall
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING Capacitor bank. For design criteria, refer to section 4.04 and 4.05.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED ANDDATED
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZKj

C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
33kV Capacitor Banks shall be provided in the following 132133kV Substation:
# SUBSTATION NAME No.

1. 8901 1
2. 8902 2
z
e 3. 8903 2
Ii: 4.
01 8904 3
~ 5. 8911 2
1. 33kV Shunt Capacitor Bank
REVISIONS The shunt capacitor bank shall conform to 43-TMSS-01, Rev.O. The shunt
DRAWNBY: ...,()""---1 exceed the requirement of the following technical specification and shall be
D'''',~J +-_--I tested accordingly.
{_-I
CIIK'D B Y , j . . -
Ratings:
a. 3-phase MVAr of the bank 15MVAr at 33kV bus (delivered

power at MV bus voltage)
e. Normal Bus Operating 33kV l-l 19.05kV l-N

Voltage
f. Tuned Harmonic with zero 4.6 10 order (279 Hz)

tolerance
g. Bil of the Capacitor Bank 250kVp

voltage
i. Bil of individual Capacitor (*) See Note 2

DAlE: 08.10.2011 Unit

current at MV Bus
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCf]ON OR k. Minimum Continuous 355A
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTll. withstand current capability
CERTIFIED AND DATED
including Harmonics
[PTS-11CM01Q-MZKI

C494 A OF o
11CM010 92
I HAIL SAUDI ARABIA I
J
I. Maximum Ambient 55C

temperature
I
3"C for a period of 24 hours when energized at test voltage.

continuously.
REVISIONS
Note:
/ combination of units), and number of cans having merits (at no
DRAWNBY:
11 extra cost to COMPANY), at base design stage for COMPANY
DATE:
CHK'DIY: I
CONTRACTOR based on optimum design. The BIL of each unit

capacitor bank
d. Inductance 9.3mH
DATE: 08.10.2011 f. Power frequency withstand voltage 95kVrms

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED i. Peak momentary current 2.6 x Short time withstand
current kA p
[PTS- 11CM01 G-MZKj

C494 A OF 0
11CM010

I
3. One (1) 33kV, Neutral unbalance current transformers.
4. One (1) 33kV, single phase voltage transformer for

Neutral Displacement voltage protection (its class
and burden shall be decided by the Contractor)
5. One (1) lot 33kV XLPEIAir (outdoor & indoor) type

terminations
REVISIONS 6. One (1) lot ACSR conductor jumpers, clamps and
DRAWNBY~ I!
equipments
DATE, W
CBK"D BY, ./.../-----1 7. Required Surge arresters for capacitor banks,
One (1) lot
shall be provided and conform to 35-TMSS-01.
Surge Arresters
shall have Discharge Class 3 as minimum and
higher class arrester shall be provided as
required based on arrester siZing calculation.

voltage.

o
capacitor back-to-hack switching and the same shall be proved with type test
BY:~ proposed in this SOW and conform to COMPANY material standard 32-TMSS-
DATE: 08.10.2.011
33kV Switchgears shall be provided in the following 132133kV Substations:

mlS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR # SUBSTATION No. NOTE
CONSTRUCfION OR
FOR ORDERING NAME
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
1. 8901 1 Existing Switchgears Westinghouse
2. 8902 Existing Switchgears Hitachi, ABB &
2
Schneider
[PTS 11CM01 O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
3. 8903 2 Existing Switchgears is Merlin Gerin

4. 8904 3 Existing Switchgears is Merlin Gerin
5. 8911 2 Existing Switchgears Hitachi
Notes:
i. Swapping and dismantling of existing feeders and breakers, if

ii. Special tools as per Appendix-XIII shall be provided.
iv. Dismantled material if any shall be handed over to SEC designated
ware house.
REVISIONS
DIlAWNBY: n capacitor banks to be connected shall be provided wherever Bus Bar Voltage
DATE: J Transformer is not available.
CHK'DBY: /
E. HV Power Cables (33kY) & Termination

2
Lot: 33kV single core 630mm (min) copper conductor XLPE insulated
Multi-core and/or multi pair control cables and low voltage ACIDC and shielded
DAn:: 01,10.2011 three phase power socket outlet for testing purpose. Indoor normal/emergency
lighting system shall be provided for the expanded portion of the switchgear
building.
THIS DRAwINe IS NOT H. AC/DC Auxiliary Power Supply

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING CONTRACTOR shall utilize the existing feeder outlets from the existing AC/DC
MAmRIALS UNTIL
CERTlFIED AND DATED distribution panels to meet the AC/DC load requirement of the proposed
switchqears, control and protection schemes. CONTRACTOR shall add/modify
existing AC/DC panels if necessary for the requirement of new
[PTS-llCM010-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
equipment/panels proposed in this PROJECT. There shall be 20% spare

MCBs after modification /addition, if 20% spare MCB are not maintained
additional MCSs shall be provided to maintain the 20% spare.
I. Cable Travs/Ladders/Conduits/Ducts
I CONTRACTOR shall utilize/extend/modify/clean the existing cable carriers

J. Grounding System

REVISIONS
DRAWNBY:
o 119.10 Rev.O.
DATE: .1 K. Shielding System
CHK"DBY:
J
I
119.07 Rev.O.
L. Protection
provided. Refer to AppendiX - VII for protection requirement.
M. Cable supports
IV. 5MVAr, 13.8kV Capacitor Banks
A. Capacitor Banks
DATE: 08.10.2011
13.8kV shunt capacitor banks to deliver net output of 5MVAr each with
detuning reactor connected in series to prevent resonances at all possible
operating conditions. The capacitor bank shall be as per 43-TMSS-01, Rev.O.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT Automatic Control of Capacitor Banks (ACCS) shall be provided through a
TO BE USED FOR
CONsrRUCI10N OR
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) to control the switching of Capacitor
FOR ORDERING banks. Capacitor shall be provided with sun shade to avoid direct exposure to
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED sun light. Each capacitor bank shall be provided with separate fence and gate
with electrical and mechanical interlock to prevent entry when the bank is live.
The gate shall have permissive to open only after 1Ominutes following the de-
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS 49
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
energizing of Capacitor bank. For design criteria, refer to section 4.04 and
4.05.
13.8kV Capacitor Banks shall be provided in the following 33/13.8kV

Substation:
I No.
# SUBSTATION NAME
1. 7780 2
2. 7782 2
1. 13.8kV Shunt Capacitor Bank
REVISIONS The shunt capacitor bank shall conform to 43-TMSS-01, Rev.O. The shunt
DRAWNBY: exceed the requirement of the following technical specification and shall be
(/
DATE:
~
tested accordingly.
(]IK'D BV, -+-_-1
Ratings:
a. 3-phase MVAr of the bank 5MVAr at 13.8kV bus (delivered

power at MV bus voltage)
e. Normal Bus Operating 13.8kV t-t, 7.96kV LoN

Voltage
f. Tuned Harmonic with zero 4.6'" order (279 Hz)

tolerance
g. Bil of the Capacitor Bank 125kVp

.(~~~
voltage
BY:
i. Bil of individual Capacitor (*) See Note 2
DATE: 08.10.2011
Unit

current at MV Bus
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON
FOR
OR
ORDERING
k. Minimum Continuous 283A
MA'IEJUAlS UNTIL withstand current capability
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
including Harmonics
[PTS-llCM010-MZKj
SCOPE OF WORK 8< TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGE NO. REV.
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
I. Maximum Ambient 55C

temperature
I
3C for a period of 24 hours when energized at test voltage.

continuously.
Note:
REVISIONS
combination of units), and number of cans having merits (at no
DRAWN BY:
y extra cost to COMPANY), at base design stage for COMPANY
DATE:
CHK'DBY:
CONTRACTOR based on optimum design. The Bil of each unit
2. 13.8kV De-Tuning Reactors
The 13.8kV De-Tuning reactors, one in each phase of the capacitor circuit,

capacitor bank
c. Rated ohms at 60 Hz 1.85 n
d. Inductance 4.9mH
DATE: 08.10.2Ol1 f. Power frequency withstand voltage 50kVrms

mis DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED
CONSTRUcnON
FOR
OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CEllTIFIED AND DATED i. Peak momentary current 2.6 x Short time withstand
current kAp
[PTS- 11CM01o-MZKj
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS 51
C494 A OF 0
11CM010

i
3. One (1) 13.8kV, Neutral unbalance current
transformers.
4. One (1) 13.8kV, single phase voltage transformer for
Neutral Displacement voltage protection (its
class and burden shall be decided by the
Contractor)
5. One (1) lot 13.8kV XLPEIAir (outdoor & indoor) type

REVISIONS
terminations
f)
DRAWN BY:
DATE: ../ equipments
CHK'DBY: /
J
7. One (1) lot Required Surge arresters for capacitor banks,
shall be provided and conform to 35-TMSS-
01. Surge Arresters
shall have Discharge Class 3 as minimum
and higher class arrester shall be provided as
required based on arrester sizing calculation.

mounted inside the can to bring down the residual voltage to 5Ovolts or less
voltage.
B. 13.8kV Switchgear (Indoor)
13.8kV, 1250A continuous at 40C ambient 25kA (sym) interrupting capability

/"S capacitor back-to-back switching and the same shall be proved with type test
BY, \ reports. The switchgears shall be suitable to feed 5MVAr capacitor bank
DATE: 08.10.2011
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSI'RUCflON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFlED AND DATED
[PTS-llCM010-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
llCM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
ti SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~~I ~I e) - 1'l.:iJt11l4l~I4s~1
e
8
~
8 13.8kV Switchgears shall be provided in the following 33113.8kV Substations:
e
NAME
1. 7780 Existing SWitchgears are Calor Emag
2
andABB
~
c'"
2. 7782
2
Existing Switchgears are Merlin Gerin
andABB
f3
" Notes:
i. Swapping and dismantling of existing feeders and breakers, if

d ~ N ~
ii. Special tools as per Appendix-XIII shall be provided.
z
REVISIONS
DRAWNBY: n iv. Dismantled material if any shall be handed over to SEC designated
DATE: .r ware house.
CHKOOBY, -r
J C. Lot: Three phase Voltage Transformer with removable Bus bar links with
Am!!!lllI! capacitor banks to be connected shall be provided wherever Bus Bar Voltage

E. HV Power Cables (13.8kY) & Termination
A lot 13.8kV single core 630mm 2 (min) copper conductor XLPE insulated
13.8kV indoor and outdoor switchgears as applicable including required indoor
~ Multi-core and/or multi pair control cables and low voltage AC/DC and shielded
.., 0, interconnect various substation equipment and devices to achieve a complete
DATE: 08.10.2011
THlS ORAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSrRUCfION OR lighting system shall be provided for the expanded portion of the switchgear
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL building.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS-11CM010-MZKI
SCOPE OFWORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
H. AC/DC Auxiliary Power Supply
CONTRACTOR shall utilize the existing feeder outlets from the existing AC/DC
existing AC/DC panels if necessary for the requirement of new
equipmenVpanels proposed in this PROJECT. There shall be 20% spare
MCSs after modification laddition, if 20% spare MCB are not maintained
additional MCBs shall be provided to maintain the 20% spare.
CONTRACTOR shall utilizelextend/modify/clean the existing cable carriers

REVISIONS
DRAWN BY:
J. Grounding System
DATE:
CBK'DBY:
119.10 Rev.O.
K. Shielding System
119.07 Rev.O.
L. Protection
Existing 13.8kV Bus bar protection scheme shall be modified to include the
new provided CBs. Required protection for capacitor banks and protection
M. Cable supports
BY:
0~ Note:
DATE: 08.10.2011
THIS DRA WINe IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCI10N OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNI'JL
CERTIJi'IED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
3.03 CONTROL AND PROTECTIVE RELAYING REQUIREMENTS
A. CONTROL SYSTEM
Control System for 33kV and 13.8kV Switchgears
I The following control levels shall be provided for the 33kV and 13.8kV circuit
breakers control:
i. Control from the 33kV and 13.8kV switchgear panels and Supervisory Control
from Power Control Center (PCG) via the SCADA system, for all breakers.
Local control facility shall be provided in the switchgear with "LOR" selector
g fO'> N _ switch.
REVISIONS
ii. Automatic Capacitor Control shall be provided for each 33kV and 13.8kV
DRAWN BY:
capacitor banks.
DATE:
CHK'DBY:
B. PROTECTIVE AND RELAYING REQUIREMENT
/
For Protective Relaying and Transient Fault Recorder requirement, refer to

Appendix-VII
3.04 Electrical Eguipment Interlocking
The CONTRACTOR shall provide and install all applicable electrical interlocking
facitities required for the 33kV and 13.8kV switchgears provided in this project in
accordance with Section 5.06 of this document and as per Appendix-VII (Protection
Requirement). There shall be a delay of minimum 1Ominutes between each opening
and closing of capacitor banks.
3.05 METERING REQUIREMENTS
The metering requirements of the capacitor banks as indicated in the Relaying and
Metering drawing CT-904241 shall be provided as minimum and shall meet the
requirements specified in TES-P-119.31. The meters shall be provided on each of
the respective control panels and metering panel as applicable. The scale of the
meters shall be as per Clause 5.04.
3.06 ALARM I ANNUNCIATOR REQUIREMENTS

DATE: 08.10.2011
Provide and upgrade/add/modify alarm/annunciation panels at the involved
substations to accommodate all alarms associated with the equipment being
provided under this project. The list of alarms to be provided shall be as per 38-
THIS DRAWING IS NOT TMSS-05.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCI'ION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01 D-MZKI

PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWlNGNO. PAGE NO. REV.
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
~~l tiI...W\ t.) - ~4,A1ll4l~1 ~~l
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
~
~
~
3.07 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITON (SCADA)
~
For SCADA refer to Appendix-IX.
For each capacitor banks the following additional points shall be provided:
Current
~ MVAr
B Voltage
l:I
~
3.08 MECHANICAL WORK
Separate stand-alone HVAC units with 200% capacity (100% spare) shall be
0
z '" N ~
provided for the expanded portion of switchgear room, control room and the new
REVISIONS constructed room as applicable. HVAC system shall be as per 73-TMSS-01 Rev.O.
However, the Air Conditioning shall be similar to the Existing.
DRAWNRV: 17
DAlE: J 3.09 CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORK
CHK'DBY:
-/
I
For Civil and Structural work, refer to Appendix-VIII
4ml!lUOl!
3.10 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
Contractor shall provide necessary fire detection/alarm, fire protection system and
fire equlpment similar to the existing for the expanded portion of the switchgear
room/control room and for the equipments and capacitor banks provided in this
project. New fire protection system provided/added shall be as per TES-P-19.21 and
to be integrated with the existing fire protection system. All additional detectors,
audible alarm devices, and other associated equipments shall be connected to and
compatible with the existing system.
3.11 PROJECT DESIGN DOCUMENTS, CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit all design documents, calculations, studies and
drawings at various stages of the PROJECT as per Table 3.01, as a minimum.
.!JOIlIII:IE!!
Table 3.01
I~ INDEX TITLE
Bid Base
Design
Detail &
Construct.
As-
.y,~ Stage Built
Stage Stage Stage
DATE: 08.10.2011
A EQuipmentlMaterials
33kV and 13.8kV XLPE Power Cables X X
33kV and 13.8kV XLPE Cable sealina ends X X
THIS ORAWING IS NOT 33kV and 13.8kV Capacitors and De-Tuning X X
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR Reactors
FOR ORDERING Automatic Capacitor Control Panels X X X, IV X
MATEJUALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED 33kV and 13.8kV Switch!:lear X X
LV Power and Control Cables X
Outdoor lighting Fixtures, including Receptacles X
[PTS- 11 CM01 D-MZKI

JOB ORDER NO. PT$- 56
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
e SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~~I ~ e..>i - J<4..>f.S1I41.jLwJ1 ~jJJI
@
~
Cable Tray System X
i Various Control, Protective Relays & Metering
X X
Instrument and Devices, SCADA, Indication
Instruments and Devices WI Manuals ICataloaue
Relay Application/Installation I Commissioning
Manuals X
z
e Groundino System Material, Joints, etc. X
~ Shieldina Svstem, Material etc X
~ Site Layout/Plot Plan X X,I X
A Design Calculations
Electrical system study requirement for capacitor X X X
bank installation
33kV and 13.8kV Capacitor Banks X X,IV
g ~
REVISIONS
N
- 33kV and 13.8kV Cable Sizing & Ampacity
Calculations
X X,IV
Lighting and Shielding System Design X X,IV X

Calculations
()
DRAWN BY:
PT Calculation to suooort Burden Ratina X X,IV X
DATE: ~ Liahtina Svstem Desian Calculations X X,IV X
CHK'DBY: Civil Desian Philosoohv X XIV X
-
Fire Protection Svstem Desian X XIV X
Structural Calculations of 33113.8kV S1Gbuildino X X IV X
Design Calculations of outdoor equipment steel X,IV X
suooortino structures
LV Cable Sizing and Amoacitv Calculations X X,IV X
Relav Aoolication X XIV X
Relay Setting Calculations along with all X,III X
eauioment related data
33kV and 13.8kV Short Circuit Calculations and X X,IV X
Capacitor switching current and voltage
calculations Breaker Selection
PROJECT PERT/CPM Schedule for Monitoring
and Control Activities X
CONTRACTOR's Loss Prevention Program
X
Site Security Plan X
QAlQC Plan X
Insoection and Test Plan X
Factory Test Procedure
X
Eauioment Demonstration Package X
Site Test Procedure X
lJlIII:W!'.I!
A Schedule showing the outages requirements for X X
f/-~ the PROJECT on the ongoing protect facilities
P Abbreviations, Svmbols and Leaend X X,IV X
~ Switchina One-Une Diaaram X X,IV
BV: X
DATE: 08.10.2011 Relavina and Meterina One-Line Diaaram X X IV X
Comoosite AC Schematic Diaarams X X VI X
AC Comoosite Three Line Diaaram X X VI X
DC Comoosite Schematic for Protection X X. VI X
DC Composite Schematic for Control X X, VI X
TKIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR Logic Flow Diaaram for Interlocking Scheme X X, VI X
CONSTRUcnON OR Panel Wiring Diagrams for Relay, Control X, VI X
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL Annunciator SCADA Interlace, Fault Recorder
CERTIFIED AND DATED Substation EQuioment Layout X X,II X
Substation Eauioment Details X X,IV X
Interconnection Diaarams X,VI X
[PT&- 11CMOlD-MZKJ
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLANTNO. INOEX DRAWING NO. PAGE NO. REV.
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS 57
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~~I ~l t.;S - I'~ 4l.......,J1 ~~\
~
~
[> Substation Groundina Details X X,II X
a Substation Racewav and Cablina Plan X X,IV X
Substation Racewav and Cablina Details X X,IV X
Buildino Equipment Arranoement Plan/Sections X X,IV X
Substation Outdoor Equipment Arrangement X X, II X
Plan/Sections
z Conduit Plan and Details X, IV X
Si
Cable and Conduit Schedule X IV X
~
o Substation Outdoor LightingIPower Layout and X X,IV X
~ Details
Interlock Scheme X X VI X
AC and DC Panel Wiring Diagram and Schematics X,VI X
including LVAC Automatic Transfer Scheme for
ACSystem
AC/DC Auxiliary One-Line Dlaqram X X, IV X
g ~ N ~
AC/DC Panel board Schedule X,IV X

REVISIONS SCADA Drawina Standard Svmbols X X IV X
Function Diaaram X X,IV X
IJ Handover Book Sheets X IV X
DKAWNBY:
SCADA Sinole Line Dlaoram X,VI X
DAlE: If SCADA lnterconnectlnq Diaqram Status X VI X
CHK'DBY:
-I SCADA Interconnectinq Dlaqram Control X VI X
SCADA Interconnectino Dlaqrarn Analoq X,IV X
Fire Alarm and Detection System EqUipment X X, IV X
4m\lm;l!
Layout, Interconnection Riser Diagrams &
Equipment MountinQ Details
Fire Fiqhtino Equipment Layout X X IV X
Annunciator System Equipment Layout. X X, IV X
Interconnection Dlauram & Mountino Details
Communications and Electrical PowerlGrounding X X,IV X
Cable Routing Detail (for Fiber Optics Terminal
Equipment)
Electrical Grounding Cable Interconnection Detail X X,IV X
- Fiber Optics TerminalEQuipment Link
Protective Relay Circuit Interconnections (with X X,IV X
Fiber Optic Terminal Equipment)
33kVand l3.8kV Cable Termination X X,IV X
Arranaements Plan Section and Details
Duct Bank Lavout and Details X X,IV X
Cable TunnelslTrenches Layout and Details X X, IV X
Vendor Drawinas X X X IV X
Revision of Existing System Drawings (if X X X,IV X
aoolicable)
~ K
Q General Notes (Design Methodology, Design Data, X X,III X
BY' (
/ S~ Concrete Rebars, Forrnwork etc.l
Cable basement Foundation Plan, Sections and X X,III X
DAlE: 08.10.2011 Details (for Switchqear BuildinQ)
Ground Floor FraminQ Plan (S/G BuildinQ) X XIII X
Ground Floor Beams, Longitudinal and Cross X,1I1 X
Sections with Rebar Details(S/G BuildinQ)
Roof Framino Plan (S/G Buildinq) X X,III X
THIS DRAWING IS Nor Roof Beams, Longitudinal and Cross Sections with X, III X
TO BE USED FOR
CONSI'RUcnON OR Rebar Details (S/G Buildinq)
FOR ORDERING Ground Floor Slab Rebar Details & Sections (all X,III X
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED Buildinas)
Roof Slab Rebar Details & Sections (S/G Buildino) X III X
Column & Footinq Layout, Sections and their X X,III X
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS 58
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
Ii SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY 'i;i~ ~I e.) - ~~jf5.Il ~.".....Jl 4.s~1
I:i
~
Rebar Details (S/G Buildinal
~ Staircase Lavout, Sections & Rebar Details X X,III X
Typical Rebar Arrangement Details at Beam X,III X
Column Junction, Column Footing Junction and
Beam Slab Junction
Steel Bending Details XIII X
33kV and 13.8kV Duct Bank Layout and Details X,III X
..~
u
Manhole/Hand hole Sections and Rebar Details
Trench and Duct Bank Lavout & Sections
X
X
X, III
X III
X
X
~ Building Roof Plan and Details (S/G Building) X X,1I1 X
Buildina Sections and Elevations (S/G Buildinal X XIII X
Wall Sections and Details (S1G Buildina) X X,III X
Buildina Finish Schedule (S/G Buildina) X X III X
Door and its Hardware SChedule (All Buildinas) X X, III X
0
z ~ ... - Basement Floor Plan, Sump Pit and Drainage
Channel Details (S/G Buildina)
Design & Fabrication drawings for Steel
X X,III X
REVISIONS M X X,III X
Supporting Structure of SA, AirlXLPE Cable
/7 Sealina End
DRAWN BY:
Steel Checkered Plate Layout and its Supporting X,1I1 X
DATE: .:f Framing and Details
CHK'DBYl 7 Layout of outdoor Equipment Sections and Details X X,1I1 X
/
Additional Drawings as Specified in Appendix-VI X X, VI X
S
~
T System Interconnection Diagram (for X X, VI X
Interconnection of Communication Equipment with
SCADA and Protective Relavs )
X Drawing Control List X X,I X
X - Indicates requirement for submission.
The requirements indicated under column "Detail & Construction Stage" shall be
submitted in groups (I to VI) as indicated against each item. The time schedule for
the submittal of each group shall be finalized during base design. Partial submittal
of calculations/drawings in any group will not be accepted.
Notes to the Above Table:
1. Bid Stage
a. The following shall be provided for each indicated item in the table:
lDI.ll:!m
i. Data Schedule completely filled-up and stamped by the respective
.~
BY,' -.,
equipment vendors.
DATE: 08.10.2011 ii. Equipment catalogues makes, type and technical parameters duly
highlighted.
iii. Certified type Test report of all major equipment.

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR iv. Clause by clause compliance statement of the COMPANY's
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
Material Standards Specification.
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
v. List of past supplies.
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]

JOB ORDER NO.
PTS 59
C494 A OF 0
l1CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
vi. Vendor drawings.
b. The following shall also be provided:
i. Compliance statement for the scope of WORK as per PTS-

11CM010
I 2.
ii. List of deviations, if any.
Base Design Stage
Final approval of major equipment (indicated under bid stage, Table 3.01, after
all deviations have been resolved) shall be obtained.
The following shall be provided for each indicated item in the table:
REVISIONS
a. Design calculations
DRAWN BY: ---V-()--i
b. Original manufacturer's drawings and literatures
DATE:"-(- d_---t c. Design drawings
CB:K'DBY:,-- I_-i d. Final data schedules
e. Final clause by clause compliance statement
f. Vendor drawings
3. Final Design and Construction Drawings Stage
a. Final Design Drawings
i. Final design drawings shall be provided for each indicated item in

the table
ii. Final design calculation for the PROJECT and additional

calculations, if required
iii. Final approval of design drawings, after incorporating all comments

of COMPANY, shall be obtained.
iv. Vendor drawings
b. Construction Drawings
i. Final construction drawings shall be provided for each indicated

item in the table.
DATE: 08.10.2tJ1l
ii. Revised final construction drawings shall be provided, if required.
4. As-Built Stage
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE
CONSTRUCTION
USED
OR
FOR As-built drawings shall be provided for each indicated item in the table as per
FOR ORDERING SEEDS-II, Rev.1.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFlED AND DATED
B. Along with final detail design package, CONTRACTOR shall submit the following as
per SEEDS-II, Rev.1 in Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) files:
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
1. Design Drawings
2. Design Calculations
3. Material Data Schedule
4. Equipment Catalogue
Each discipline documents shall be arranged in a separate folder designated by

discipline's name. Contractor shall furnish the same in a CD.
The revision numbers and notes reflecting the changes made throughout the design
shall be retained in the submitted final detail design drawings. Also, the input and
output files for design calculations carried out by computer programs shall be
furnished.
REVISIONS
All PDF files shall have no open or change security password.
DRAWN BY:
f/ 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS

DATE:
CBK'DBY: )(f
A. General
/
i. A modified switching diagram on 1000mm x 600mm laminated board to
replace the existing switching diagram and showing the new additions shall
be fixed on the wall at the existing place where the present switching One
Line Diagram is placed in the 132kV/33kV 33/13.8kV Switchgear rooms.
ii. The necessary modification and/or relocation of any existing

structures/equipment and utilities which may be coming in the way of the
substation reinforcemenVexpansion WORK.
Iii. All existing equipmenVmaterials replaced by the new equipmenVmaterials or

those which becomes out of service due to implementation of this PROJECT
shall be dismantled/packed, transported and stored in a proper way at the
COMPANY designated warehouse.
B. Special tools & Eguipments
For Special tools & Equipments requirements refer to Appendix-XIII
3.13 PROJECT INTERFACE

DATE: 08.10.2011
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with Substation Maintenance Department - Centra
(SMD-C) and Distribution Engineering Department (DED) for details of various
equipments, existing underground, cable route plan, shifting / swapping of cable
TH~ ORAWING is N(Jf
feeders etc. in the involved substations.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTmED AND DATED
[PTS-11CM010-MZKJ
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
3.14 STANDARDS. CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
All WORKS equipment and material covered by this document shall conform to the
latest edition of the COMPANY's Material Standard Specifications supplemented
with latest applicable industry Standards, Codes and Specifications. The latest
edition of each Standard and Specification shall mean the latest edition specified
i hereunder.
The CONTRACTOR shall strictly comply with the folloWing Standards, Codes and
Specifications, and no deviation shall be accepted unless otherwise accepted by a
written waiver from COMPANY. The CONTRACTOR may propose "equivalent"
Standards and Specifications if such standards and specifications are equal to or
better than those specified herein, and shall be subject to prior approval of the
COMPANY.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: 0
A. COMPANY Materials Standard Specifications
DATE: A 01-TMSS-01 General ReqUirements for All Equipment/Materials
CBK'DBY, ~--f-7_--1
v (Rev. 01)
10-TMSS-05 Bare Copper-Clad steel Grounding Conductor and Ground Rod

(Rev.1)
11-SDMS-03 15kV XLPE Insulated Power Cables

(Rev.1)
11-TMSS-10 Power and control Cable, Cu or AI conductor, 600/1000V Rating

(Rev. 0)
11-SMSS-11 Instrumentation Cables, Shielded

(Rev. 2)
12-SDMS-01 Cable Joints, Termination and Accessories up to 36kV

(Rev.O)
23-TMSS-01 PVC Conduits and Fittings for Underground Cables

(Rev. 0)
23-TMSS-02 Duct Sealing Unit

(Rev. 0)
DATE: OIUO.20ll
24-TMSS-01 Metallic Cable Tray Systems

(Rev. 0)
rms DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR 31-TMSS-01 Relay and Control Panels
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING (Rev. 0)
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFII!DAND DATED
31-TMSS-02 Auxiliary AC/DC Panels
(Rev. 0)
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
31-TMSS-06 Terminal Blocks

(Rev. 0)
32-TMSS-01 Metal Clad Switchgear 11kV, 13.8kV, 33kV or 36kV

(Rev.01)
35-TMSS-01 Surge Arresters 11kV through 380kV

(Rev. 0)
37-TMSS-03 LV Circuit Breakers

(Rev.O)
38-TMSS-03 Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)

REVISIONS
(Rev. 01)
DRAWN BY: - f()---t
,'-
38-TMSS-04 Sequence of Events Recorder System
4_-1
DA""-J!E!:-
(Rev. 0)
CHl<'DBY'f- 1_-1
38-TMSS-05 Annunciator Systems
(Rev. 0)
40-TMSS-02 Metering Devices

(Rev. 0)
43-TMSS-01 Shunt Capacitor Bank, Substation Type, 13.8kV thru' 380kV

(Rev. 0)
50-TMSS-01 Current Transformer, 11kV thru' 380kV

(Rev. 0)
50-TMSS-03 Potential Transformer, 33kV thru' 380kV

(Rev. 0)
54-TMSS-01 Mineral Insulating Oil for Electrical Apparatus

(Rev.01)
58-TMSS-02 Air Core Series Reactor, 13.8kV through 380kV

(Rev. 0)
DATE: 08.10.2011
70-TMSS-02 Chain Link Fence
(Rev. 0)
70-TMSS-03 Normal Weight Ready-Mixed Portland cement Concrete

THIS ORAWINe IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR (Rev. 0)
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
73-TMSS-01 Packaged Air Conditioning Units.
(Rev. 0)
[PTS-llCM010-MZKj
JOB ORDERNO.
PTS- 63
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
90-TMSS-03 Portable Fire Extinguishers

(Rev. 0)
B. COMPANY Engineering Standards
TES-B-106.01 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems

(Rev. 0)
SES-H-001 Painting Standards

(Rev. 0)
SES-H-001.01 Paint Color Codes and Standards

(Rev. 3)
REVISIONS
TES-P-104 Underground Cable Engineering Standards
DRAWN BY: f)
TES-P-119 Substation Design Standards
DATE: J (Rev.01)
CllK'DBY: t
J
TES-P-119.37 Short Circuit Calculation for Substation Equipment
TES-P-122.01 Basic Design Requirements
TES-S-101 Safety and Security Standards

(Rev. 0)
TES-T-111.02 Communication Facility Grounding

(Rev.O)
SES-T-556 Circuit Quality and Performance

(Rev.O)
SES-W-1 General Welding Criteria

(Rev. 0)
C. COMPANY Construction Standards
TCS-P-104.01 General Requirements
TCS-P-104.02 Cable Reels Handling and Storage

DATE: 08.10.2011
TCS-P-104.03 Trenches and Ducts
TCS-P-104.06 Cable Installation, Field Handling Procedures

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE usm FOR
CON5I1lUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
TCS-P-104 Underground Cable Installation Standards
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
TCS-P-105 Pre-Commissioning Tests/Procedures for SEC Transmission
(Rev.O) Electrical Installations
[PT&- 11CM01O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
TCS-Q-113.01 Asphalt Concrete Paving

(Rev. 0)
TCS-Q-113.02 Earthworks
(Rev. 0)
I TCS-Q-113.03
(Rev. 0)
TCS-P-122.01
(Rev.O)
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Safety
TCS-P-122-02 Material Handling

(Rev.O)
REVISIONS
TCS-P-122-05 Installation of Steel Structure Foundations

DltAWN.lY:
(Rev.O)
DATI::
CHK'DBY: -...,7'-----1 TCS-P-122-06 Assembly and Erection of Steel Structures

/
(Rev.O)
TCS-T-111.Q1 Acceptance/Commissioning, Test and Inspection of

Communications Network Equipment
SCS-T-557 Underground Communication (Telephone/Optical Fiber/Pilot)

(Rev.O) Cable Installation Standards
D. COMPANY Standard Drawings
TA-800001 High/Low Bus Support & Disconnect Switch Structure

(Rev.D)
TD-800007 Standard Sign - Danger High Voltage Keep Away

(Rev.D)
SC-036128 Anchor Bolt Details of Standard Anchor

(Rev. 0)
SB-D36138 Lighting Standard Mounting Details

(Rev.O)
DATE: 08.10.2011
TA-800004 Lighting/Lightning Steel Monopoles

(Rev.O)
THIS oRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR SA-036224 Typical Duct Bank Section Stand Duct Bank for 33kV Cables
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING (Rev.D)
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
SA-036226 Typical Duct Bank Sections Concrete Encased Duct Bank for
(Rev. 3) D.6kV to 380kV
[PTS- llCM010-MZKJ
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 65
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
SB-036354 PVC Conduit Installation Concrete Encasement

(Rev.2)
TB-800091 Concrete Encased Duct Detail for Rock Areas (Vital

(Rev.2) Communications)
I SA-036356
(Rev.O)
Service Manholes
Line Manholes
SA-036357
(Rev.O)
SB-036358 Manhole Accessories

REVISIONS
(Rev.1)
DRAWN BY:
SB-036359 Standard Manhole Material Take-Off List Type Guide
DATE:
(Rev.O) Communication
CHK'DBY:
SB-036361 Communication Cables MH Waterproof Treat Install Concrete

(Rev.O)
S8-036363 Electronic Marker System Installation Details Commincation

(Rev.O) Cables
SB-036370 PVC Conduit Install Concrete Encasement Communication

(Rev.1)
SB-036371 Concrete Encased Duct Details Rock areas Communication

(Rev.1)
T8-800076 Standard Pre-Cast Hand hole for Communication in Non-Traffic

(Rev.5) Areas (1.20m x 1.20m x 1.20m)
TB-800077 Standard Pre-Cast Hand hole for Communication in Traffic

(Rev.3) Areas (1.20m x 1.20m x 1.20m)
TE-800110 COMPANY Monogram for Equipment Mounting

(Rev. 0)
DATE: 08.10.2011
TD-80008 Standard Sign, Danger High Voltage, Bone & Skull
(Rev.O)
SE-1191922 Finished Schedule/Miscellaneous Details

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR (Rev.O)
CONSTRucrION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIF1EDANDDATED
SE-1191927 Standard Drawing for Manhole Cover for Sewers 600MM
(Rev.O) Opening (Manufactured Locally)
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZKJ

JOB ORDER NO.
PTS 66
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
JI.......-
i
_
SE-1191928 Section & Ladder Details Elevation

(Rev.O)
SE-1191936 Crash Barrier, Location Plan and Details in SIS

(Rev. 0)
E. Other Standards
SEEDS-I SEC Engineering Drawing Standard
SEEDS-II SEC Engineering Drawing Standard for Contractors

(Rev.01)
12-SDMS-02 Lugs and Connectors for MV/LV Distribution System

REVISIONS
(Rev. 2)
DIlI\WNBY:
()
.d ANSI/IEEE-18 Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors
DATE:
CllK'DBY: I
J ANSI/IEEE- Application Guide for Capacitance Current Switching for AC
C37.012 High Voltage Circuit Breakers, Rated on Symmetrical Current
Basis
IEEE-1036 Guide for Application of Shunt Power Capacitors
IEEE-519 IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirement for Harmonic

Control in Electrical Power systems
IEC-60871-1 Shunt Capacitors for A.C. Power Systems Having a Rated

Voltage Above 660 V
F. Industry Standards/Codes
The following lists include (but shall not be considered all inclusive) the most
important codes and standards (latest edition) applicable to this PROJECT. The
SEC will not provide these codes and standards:
NEMA TC-8 Extra Strength PVC Plastic Utilities Duct For Underground
Installation
NEMA U TC-9 Fittings for ASS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct For Installation
DATE: 08.]8.2011
Underground
DIN 8074 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes Dimensions

THIS ORAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR DIN 8075 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes General Quality
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING Requirements and Testing
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFlED AND DATED
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication
Standardization Sector-Recommendations G.652 and G.655
[PTS 11CM01OMZKj
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 67
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
NEC2002 National Electrical Code
GTE General Telephone and Electronics
BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International
i **** END OF SECTION III ****
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY'
. -~/[ )
DATEl ~
ClIK'DBV, l-----l
DATE: 08.10.2011
nns DRAWING IS Nor

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
[PTS- 11CM01 o-MZKJ
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAlL
C494 A OF o
11CM010
HAlL SAUDI ARABIA 92
SECTION- IV - DESIGN CRITERIA
The CONTRACTOR shall adopt the following design criteria as a minimum for this
PROJECT:
4.01 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
I All equipment/materials devices and their specified ratings furnished under this
PROJECT shall be suitable for operation as outlined in TES-P-119.02 and
01-TMSS-01, (Rev.01)
4.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
REVISIONS
A. General
DRAWNIY: IJ 1. COMPANY's 33kV System is non-effectively grounded whereas 13.8kV is

DATE: - solidly grounded.
CHK'DRY: I
The entire electrical system including grounding shall be designed for the short
circuit current rating of the corresponding system voltage circuit breakers. The
33kV and 13.8kV systems design parameters shall be in accordance with the
requirements outlined in COMPANY Standard TES-P-119.02 and hereunder:
a. The short circuit rating of 33kV switchgear shall be minimum 25kA (Sym-
3sec / 1sec - as applicable at each SIS).
b. The short circuit rating of 13.8kV switchgear shall be minimum 25kA (Sym-
3sec / 1sec - as applicable at each SIS).
2. Computer Calculations
If Computer software is used in design calculations/studies, then the details

regarding the name of the software, its version, etc. shall be clearly indicated in
the corresponding submittals and shall be accompanied by the soft copy of the
input & output files. Assumptions made if any shall be clearly highlighted with
appropriate justification/supporting document for the values assumed. The
data provided to the computer as an input shall be clearly distinguished from
those computed by the program. A program description document (user's
guide) and a copy of the software (on returnable basis) shall be made available
upon request by the COMPANY and contain the information necessary to
determine the nature and extent of the analysis, verify the input data, interpret
DATE, _==--1
08.10.Wll
the results, and determine whether the computations comply with these
recommendations.
TIllS DRAWING lS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
B. Auxiliary Supply Voltage
Supply Voltage for Control, Protection & Alarm : 125/110V DC (Ungrounded)
Supply Voltage for Communication Equipment: 48V DC (Grounded +ve)
I Supply voltage for Auxiliary Circuit
As applicable
220VAC, 30, 4 wires
The CONTRACTOR shall verify and confirm the auxiliray AC/DC voltage ratings of
each substation.
C. System Phasing Arrangement

REVISIONS
DRAWNIV:
The COMPANY standard phasing arrangements in Substations are the following:
DATE:
CHK'DBY;
1. Red, Yellow, Blue when from East to West.
2. Red, Yellow, Blue when from North to South.
3. Red, Yellow, Blue when from Top to bottom.
4.03 CABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The following cable design requirements shall be considered by the

CONTRACTOR for 33kV and 13.8kV cables. The soil thermal resistivity to be
considered shall be based on soil thermal resistivity measurements results
furnished in Geo-Technicallnvestigation Report.
A. Calculations of Cable Ampacity
1. The cable ampacity (continuous) for capacitors to be achieved at laying

conditions indicated under item 2, 3 or 4 below as applicable shall be:
33kV, 5MVAr 154A

33kV, 10MVAr 308A
33kV, 15MVAr 462A
13.8kV,5MVAr 368A
DATE: 08.10.2011
2. The cable ampacity calculation for cables laid in duct bank (concrete encased
duct bank or sand duct bank) shall be based on IEC-60287 and the following
basic parameters:
THIS DRAWING IS NOT a. Soil Thermal Resistivity - 1.2 k.mlW

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR (Lower value may be considered if soil thermal model test with moisture
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
content of 2"10 indicates lower value). Contractor shall test the soil
CERTIFIED AND DATED thermal resistivity at the proposed location.
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
b. Soil temperature - 40C.
c. Cables lay in PVC ducts embedded in concrete for concrete encased

duct bank and in PVC ducts covered with sand for sand duct bank. The
thermal resistance of air space between cable surface and PVC internal
surface shall be considered.
i d. Cross sectional arrangement of duct bank and depth of laying of duct

bank - To be proposed by CONTRACTOR considering the actual worst
site layout restrictions / limitations.
3. For cables exposed to sunlight, solar radiation heat density of 1.1 kW/m 2 and
ambient temperature of 55'C shall be considered.
REVISIONS
4. 15kV/36kV single core, copper, XLPE cables shall be laid between shunt
n capacitors and 13.8kV/33kV switchgears. However, cable size and number of
DRAWN BY:
runs epr phase along with ampacity calculations shall be proposed by the
DATE: J CONTRACTOR and the same shall be subject to COMPANY review and
CIlK'DBY: I
,.J approval. Minimum size of 13.8kV/33kV cables shall be 630mm2 . The
dimensions of the cable trench shall depend upon the ampacity required,
spacing between phases, bending radius, etc.
B. Sheath Sizing Calculations
1. The sheath standing voltage shall be based on TES-P-104.08
2. The sheath capability to withstand shall be 25kA for 13.8kV/33kV cables and in
accordance with ICEA P-45-482 Standard.
3. The short circuit rating of 13.8kV/33kV system shall be equal to that the
13.8kV/33kV sWitchgear and that of the 13.8kV/33kV cable sheath shall be
equal to the corresponding maximum ground fault current and subject to a
minimum of 25kA(1 sec) for 13.8kV/33kV respectively.
Note: All cable sizes given in the document are a minimum and can change based
on the above sizing requirements.
C. Metallic Sheath Grounding
The grounding system of the power cable shall be designed to limit the induced
DATE: 08.10.2011
voltage on the cable sheath at safe level and to eliminate the sheath losses.
For metallic sheath grounding, TES-P-104.08 shall be applicable.

nus DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED POR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERJNG
MATERIALS IJNTIL
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
[PTS- 11CM01OMZKj
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 71
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
4.04 13.8kV Capacitor Design Criteria
a, Normal Can kVAr Rating (*) kVAr See Note iii

b. Normal Can Voltage and (*) L-N, 60 Hz, see Note iii
Frequency
I
c. Capacitor Bank Operating 14.47kV L-L, 8.35kV L-N
Voltage due to Reactor Voltage
(with 1.0 pu @ 13.8kV Bu)
d. Minimum Continuous Voltage 17.5kV L-L
withstand Capability (including
harmonics)
e. Nominal Capacitance Rating (**) See Note iii
REVISIONS f. Number of Cans (***) See Note iii
DRAWN BY:
()
DATE: J
CHJ{'DBY, -_-+-'-1
/ (i) The capacitor rack should include sufficient space to add three additional units
(1 per phase) in the future. If harmonic tuning requirements dictate installation
of additional capacitor units, then spare capacitor units can be connected.
(ii) The fuse holder and associated capacitor unit, if required, must withstand
discharge from up to three (3) capacitor banks in addition to source contribution
during phase to phase faults considering capacitance of 13.8kV feeders
associated with one (1) bank. The manufacturer shall provide type test report
indicating the maximum allowable discharge energy from parallel banks for
these devices.
(iii) Nominal Can kVA Rating, Voltage rating (*), nominal capacitance Rating (**)
and number of cans (***) shall be decided by the CONTRACTOR based on
optimum design.
4.05 13.8kV De-Tuning Reactors
The inductance of the tuning reactor shall be such that tuning frequency is at 4.6th
order.
The reactor shall be designed to have a linear voltage-current characteristic up to
BY;
/-5
f l? ..?
110% of continuous withstand current capability.
DATE: 08.]0.2011
Spacing of tuning reactors shall be carefully evaluated so that the reactor's
magnetic field may not cause significant currents in nerby structural steel. The
supporting insulator caps, supporting structures nuts, bolts and fixtures shall be of
nonmagnetic material to prevent heating due to stray flux.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSI'RUCI'ION OR
The supporting insulators shall be station post type designed, manufactureded and
FOR ORDERING tested in accordance with the requirement of 15-TMSS-1, Rev.O.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
The supporting brackets and accessories shall be hot dip galvanized per 01-
TMSS-01, Rev.01.
[PTS-llCM010-MZKj
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 72
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
One each grounding pad shall be provided on two diagonally opposite legs of the
pedestal. The grounding pad shall be sized to accommodate connectors suitable
2
for bare standard copper conductor of size 240mm
The latest issue of Recommendations of the TMSS, IEC, ANSI/IEEE Specification
I 4.06
shall apply for capacitors and de-tuning reactors.
33kV Capacitor Design Criteria
a. Normal Can kVAr Rating (*) kVAr See Note iii

b. Normal Can Voltage and (*) L-N, 60 Hz, see Note iii
Frequency
REVISIONS c. Capacitor Bank Operating 34.6kV L-L, 19.98kV L-N
Voltage due to Reactor Voltage
DRAWN BY: r-. (with 1.0 pu @ 13.8kV Bu)
DATE: ..Y d. Minimum Continuous Voltage 41.85kV L-L
OIK'DBY: T
withstand Capability (including
harmonics)
e. Nominal Capacitance Rating (**) See Note iii
f. Number of Cans (***) See Note iii
(i) The capacitor rack should include sufficient space to add three additional units
(1 per phase) in the future. If harmonic tuning requirements dictate installation
of additional capacitor units, then spare capacitor units can be connected.
(ii) The fuse holder and associated capacitor unit, if required, must withstand
discharge from up to three (3) capacitor banks in addition to source contribution
during phase to phase faults considering capacitance of 13.8kV feeders
associated with one (1) bank. The manufacturer shall provide type test report
indicating the maximum allowable discharge energy from parallel banks for
these devices.
(iii) Nominal Can kVA Rating, Voltage rating n, nominal capacitance Rating (**)
and number of cans (***) shall be decided by the CONTRACTOR based on
optimum design.
4.07 33kV De-Tuning Reactors

DATE: 08.10.2011
th
The inductance of the tuning reactor shall be such that tuning frequency is at 4.6
order. Refer to Section-III.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR The reactor shall be designed to have a linear voltage-current characteristic up to
CONSTRUCI'ION OR
FOR ORDERING 110% of continuous withstand current capability.
MAmRIAI.S UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
Spacing of tuning reactors shall be carefully evaluated so that the reactor's
magnetic field may not cause significant currents in nerby structural steel. The
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZKI
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
supporting insulator caps, supporting structures nuts, bolts and fixtures shall be of
nonmagnetic material to prevent heating due to stray flux.
The supporting insulators shall be station post type designed, manufactureded and
tested in accordance with the requirement of 15-TMSS-1, Rev.O.
i The supporting brackets and accessories shall be hot dip galvanized per 01-
TMSS-01, Rev.01.
One each grounding pad shall be provided on two diagonally opposite legs of the
pedestal. The grounding pad shall be sized to accommodate connectors suitable
2
for bare standard copper conductor of size 240mm
The latest issue of Recommendations of the TMSS, IEC, ANSI/IEEE Specification

REVlSIONS
shall apply for capacitors and de-tuning reactors.
DRAWN BY:
()
4.08 PROTECTIVE RELAYING DESIGN CRITERIA
DATE:
OIK'DBY:
For Protective Relaying Design Criteria, Refer to Appendix- VII.
4.09 CIVIUSTRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA
For civil /structural design criteria refer Appendix-VIII.
**** END OF SECTION IV ****
DATE: 08.10.2011
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS-11CM010MZKj

C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
Ii SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~~ ~I e.) - l>l.uf.S1l ~.,......Jl ~~I
I:l
fl
~
fl SECTION V - EQUIPMENTIMATERIALS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
~
5.01 GENERAL
This Section outlines broadly the technical specifications of the major equipment/
z materials required for the complete installation of the PROJECT. The specifications
~il outlined herein shall be read in conjunction with the attached PROJECT drawings,
the COMPANY Material Standard Specifications and the associated International
~ Standards and Codes. The ratings and specific requirements of the various electrical
equipments shall be as indicated in Data Schedule of COMPANY Material Standard
Specifications, and the CONTRACTOR shall ensure full conformity with the same.
0
z ... ... ~
5.02 SUBSTATION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
REVISIONS
All equipment/material shall conform to the related COMPANY standards and other
rJ standards in accordance with the tabulation hereunder:
DKA.WNBY:
DATE: A
CHK'DBY: -; Table 5.01
I
-
Serial COMPANYStandards! Notes
EQUIPMENTIMATERIAL
No. other Standards
1. 13.8kVl33kVXLPE Cables 11-SDMS-03 1
2 13.8kV133kV Switchgear 32-TMSS-01, 32-TMSS-03 2
3 12kV SuroeArresters 35-TMSS-01
4 13.8kVl33kVCaoacitorBanks 43-TMSS-01 7
5 Air Core Series Reactor 58-TMSS-Q2 7
6 13.8kV/33kV Termination Kits 12-SDMS-01 TES-P-104.04 4
7 Relav and Control Panels 31-TMSS-01
8 AnnunciatorSYStem 38-TMSS-05
9 LV Power & Control Cables (PVCIXLPEI TES-P-104, 11-TMSS-1 0
10 Instrumentation Cables TES-P-104, 11-TMSS-11,
TES-P-119
11 LV Cable Termination TES-P-104 5
12 AC Auxiliary PowerSupply Equipment 31-TMSS-02, TES-P-119.30 6
- Main AC Distribution Panel TES-P-119.30
- 3801220V Sub-Distribution and Distribution TES-P-119.30
l;II[[(fIIJ! Panel
- 380/220VDistribution Panel TES-P-119.30
~ - Liohting and Small Power Eauipment TES-P-119.25
BY' C ~ 13 Groundina System TES-P-119.10
DATE: 68.10.2011 14 ShieldingSystem TES-P-119.07
15 Cable TrayslDuetslDuct Sealing UniVConduits! TES-P-104, TES-P-119.20 3
Trenches 23-TMSS-01, 24-TMSS-01,
23-TMSS-02
mIS DRAWING IS NOT 16 Metering Devices 4O-TMSS-02
TO BE USED FOR
CONSI'RUCTION OR 17 Remote Terminal Unit (RTUI 38-TMSS-03
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL 18 NormalWeight Readv Mixed Concrete 7D-TMSS-03
CERTIJ'IEDAND DATED
19 Bare COPPer-Glad Steel GroundingConductor 1D-TMSS-05
[PTS-llCM01D-MZKj
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICALSPECIFICATION FOR PLANTNO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGENO. REV.
POWERFACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS 75
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
I
i
Notes:
1. 13.8kV/33kV XLPE Cables
The size of the cables to be supplied shall meet the cable ampacity requirements
given in section 4.03. at actual site installation conditions. The minimum acceptable
sizes are given in the relevant drawings/section 3.0. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish cable ampacity calculation to establish that the cable being supplied meets
the ampacity requirements.
2. 13.8kV/33kV Switchgear
a. The 13.8kV/33kV switchgears shall be provided with necessary CT's as per

relaying and metering Drawing No.CT-904241 and as per Appendix-VII. The CT
& PT shall meet the requirements specified in 32-TMSS-01, Rev.01
REVISIONS
b. The cable terminal lug for feeders shall be one (1) hole type as per COMPANY
DRAWN RYl -/n-f----1
Standard SDS-9
DATE, -/,JlF---i
CIIK'DBY, '~'---1 3. 13.8kV/33kV Cable Support & Clamping
J
a. Arrangements for cable support shall be provided for all cables in between
Shunt Capacitors and 13.8kV/33kV switchgears.
b. All cables shall be labeled at both ends to correspond its connection at the other
end.
4. 13.8kVl33kV Termination Kits
13.8kVl33kV Termination kit shall be as per 12-SDMS-01, (Rev.O)
5. LV Cable Terminations
a. Power cables shall be terminated in accordance with cable manufacturer's

recommendations. Control wiring cable tails shall be bound in such a way that
each wire may be traced back to its associated cable. Core of multi-core or
multi-pair cables shall be grouped together. All spare cores shall be numbered
and terminated in spare terminals farthest from the cable gland. Each core of
the control instrumentation cable shall be identified with numbered ferrules. The
By,Q ferrules shall be made of insulating materials.
DATE: 08.10.2011
b. Cable glands shall be used at all equipment to support the weight of the cables.
Compression (indentation) type cable lugs shall be used for all terminations. All
conductor joints shall be made at terminal points. All wires associated with trip
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
circuit shall be clearly marked ''TRIP'' and provided with red sleeves.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCf]ON OR
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
c. All terminals shall be designed to receive (on either side) two (2) nos. of cable
CERTIFIED AND DATED cores of used cross-section. Each terminal block shall be marked for circuit
identification. The terminal blocks for AC and DC circuits shall be grouped
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZKj
JOB ORDER NO,
PTS- 76
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
separately. Terminal blocks mounting arrangement shall provide easy access to

wires, terminations and ferrules.
6. AC Sub Distribution Panels
4-pole MCCBs shall be provided on incomer and bus couplers and shall be as per
I figure 30.2 of TES-P-119.30
7. 13.8kV/33kV Shunt Capacitor Bank
a. The shunt capacitor bank shall conform to 43-TMSS-01, Rev.O. The shunt
capacitor bank/individual units forming the capacitor bank shall meet or exceed
the requirements.
REVISIONS
b. 13.8kV/33kV De-Tuning Reactors
DRAWNBV:
DATE: ..< The supporting insulators shall be station post type designed, manufactured
CHK'DBY; / and tested in accordance with requirements of 15-TMSS-1, RevO.
I
Support brackets and accessories shall be hot dip galvanized as per 01-TMSS-
01, Rev.01.
One each grouping pad shall be provided on two diagonally opposite legs of the
pedestal. The grounding pad shall be sized to accommodate connectors
2
suitable for bare standard copper conductor of size 240mm
The latest issue of Recommendations of the TMSS, IEC, ANSI/IEEE

specification shall apply for capacitors and de-tuning reactors
c. Neutral Current Transformers
The neutral CT of the capacitor bank shall be single phase, outdoor, free
standing type conforming to 50-TMSS-01 and associated data schedule.
The CT primary rating, short time rating and the ratio shall be selected by the
CONTRACTOR, which shall be subject to COMPANY approval. However, short
time rating shall not be less than the maximum current flowing through the
Neutral due to Faults or Capacitor Units Failures whichever is higher. The CT
DAtE: 08.18.2011
shall be rated to withstand the voltage surge during switching operations and be
provided with a rod gap across the primary terminals and a low voltage surge
arrester across the secondary terminals. Alternatively, the CT primary protection
TIDS DRAWING IS Nor
by surge arresters may be offered.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCI10N OR
FOR ORDERING d. Discharging Eguipment
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED ANDDATED
Each capacitor shall be provided with discharge resistors to bring down the
residual voltage to 50V within 5minutes.
[PTS- 11CM01o-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
J'---- ~
e. Required Test Data
1. Provide actual capacitance in microfarads obtained by measurement or test.

2. Provide actual inductance in ohms and X/R ratio at rated fundamental
frequency as obtained by measurement or test for each reactor.
3. Provide fundamental frequency 12t thermal heating limit capability curve for
the design supplied for the capacitor.
4. The CONTRACTOR can also propose his design meeting the requirements
of SEC and the design calculation shall be submitted to SEC for review.
However, SEC has the right to reject the proposal submitted to SEC if SEC
requirements are not complied with.
8. Specification for Materials Required for 13.8kVl33kV XLPE Cable Installation

REVISIONS
1. PVC conduits and fittings shall be provided in all underground concrete duct
DRAWNBY: f)
J banks. The PVC conduits and fittings shall be designed, manufactured and
DATE:
tested in accordance with COMPANY's Material Standard Specification 23-
CBK'DBY:
,f TMSS-01.
2. Sub ducts on hand holes and inside the bUilding shall be corrugated, flexible
and fire retardant (2 Hours UL rating) with 25mm outside diameter. Sub duct
installation shall be in accordance with SCS-T-557.08.
3. Sub ducts on the underground duct banks and direct buried conduits in
trenches shall be rigid with 32mm outside diameter and made from HDPE
piping compound, its inner wall shall be smooth and black in color. It shall be
comply with specification DIN 8074, DIN 8075 and STC specification MAT 2301
and pullinq length shall not exceed 450meters.
4. For direct buried cable trenches, PVC conduits shall be of class-4 type. Nylon
pull ropes "l4 inches in diameter (of different colors) shall be provided and
installed in all vacant/spare ducts and sub ducts.
5. The duct sealing units for conduit fittings shall be in accordance with
COMPANY's Materials Standard Specification 23-TMSS-02, Rev.O.
~
.
6. Unless otherwise indicated, the size of the PVC conduits for fiber optic cables
.y,l ~ shall be 100mm inner diameter and for 13.8kVl33kV cables 150mm.
DAre 08.10.2011
5.03 CONTROL AND PROTECTIVE RELAYING SYSTEM
A. General
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR 1. The relay and control panels shall conform to 31-TMSS-01. The control system
FOR ORDERING
MATERIAlS UNTIL of the 13.8kV/33kV metal clad indoor switchgear shall conform to 32-TMSS-01,
CERTIF1ED AND DATED
Rev.01.
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
1
Additionally, refer to Appendix-VII, for requirements of 13.8kV/33kV Bus Bar

differential protection.
2. The control panel shall be completely wired and adequate terminal blocks shall
be provided for the termination of external incoming cables.
B. Control Requirements
1. 13.8kV/33kV Control system
The control system of the 13.8kV/33kV metal clad indoor switchgears shall
conform to 32-TMSS-01, Rev.01 and associated Data Schedule and TES-P-
oz ... 119.
REVISIONS
The remote position of local/remote selector switch shall transfer breaker
controls to the 13.8kV/33kV control panel and to the Power Control Center
DRAWN BY: -,f7i-()---t
(PCC) through SCADAICommunication channels depending upon the position
DATE:-* ".,.,-----1
7t-_--1 of locaVsupervisory selector switch on 13.8kV/33kV Control Panel. Local
CHK'DBY,
, control facility shall be provided in the switchgear, but shall be kept in disabled
condition.
2. AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF CAPACITOR BANK SCHEME (ACCS)

REQUIREMENTS (for substations with three transformers)
The automatic control of Capacitor banks shall be accomplished by the use of

the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). The panel to house PLC and other
associated devices of ACCS shall confirm to 31-TMSS-01, Rev.01. The PLC
shall be designed to be used in the substation environment. It shall have the
watchdog system capability to monitor the PLC circuits and identify the
defective circuit and give alarms. These alarms shall be monitored by SCADA.
It shall have an ON/OFF/TEST switch which will also be operated and
monitored by SCADA. The programming procedures shall be easily done
without special knowledge of programming. The PLC shall be equipped with
the following features:
I. The Main Machine Interface programming equipment shall be provided.
II. The PLC shall be flexible, extendable, if any additional inpuVoutput is

needed. The PLC program shall be able to read in and modified. If needed
to reprogram the microprocessor such as servicing case, programming unit
DATE: 08.10.2011
and video display unit shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR in order to
accomplish this task at the field.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to train the COMPANY
TO BE USED FOR personnel during the commissioning on the use and programming of the
COJ'IISTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING PLC. The PLC shall be equipped with its own DC/DC converter. It shall
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED meet the standard of IEC.
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZKJ
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
III. The PLC shall be completely devoted to capacitor bank automatic control.
The PLC shall not be used as Annunciator.
IV. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the automatic switching

scheme in a fully operational order. Any material required shall be supplied.
The proposed scheme shall be reviewed and approved by the COMPANY.
I The scheme shall be thoroughly tested during commissioning.
V. The ACCS shall be provided to perform the following minimum functions.

But not limited to:
1. The ACCS shall control the reactive power requirement at HV side

of each Transformers.
2. Automatic switching 'ON' and 'OFF' of the capacitor banks shall be
REVISIONS
based on:-
o (i) Voltage measured on the respective 33kV or 13.8kV busses.
DRAWN BY;
DATE: IJ.
(Ii) Reactive Power measured on the HV side of the Transformers
CHK'DBY:
,I OR
Sum of Reactive Power measured on the 33kV or 13.8kV
side of the Transformes and the calculated value of Reactive
Power for the compensation of the Reactive Power losses of
the Transformers on the basis of (real time measured
current)2 multiplied by Transformer impedance.
(iii) As specified vide CASE-I to VI below.
1. CASE-I
Bus Coupler-1 (BC-n and Bus Coupler-2 (BC-2) are in Open position
Capacitor-1 (C-1) shall be switched ON when the reactive power of the

Power Transformers T-1 measured (HV side) is above the set value of
reactive power (MVAr-1) and the duration of this reactive power exceeds the
set value of time (tt), If the reactive power measured is below the set value
of reactive power (MVAr-2) and the duration of reactive power below this set
value, is above the set value of time (12), the Capacitor (C-1) shall be
switched OFF or remain in OFF condition.

DATE: 08.10.2011
set value of time (t1). If the reactive power measured is below the set value
THIS DllA WING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR value, is above the set value of time (12), the Capacitor (C-2) shall be
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING switched OFF or remain in OFF condition.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS-11CM010-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
set value of time (t1). If the reactive power measured is below the set value
value, is above the set value of time (t2), the Capacitor (C-3) shall be
i 2. CASE-II
Bus Coupler-1 (BC-1l is in Open position and Bus Coupler-2 (BC-2) is in

Close position
Capacitor-1 (C-1) shall be switched ON and OFF as per the same condition
as specified under CASE-1 for Capacitor-1 (C-1)
REVISIONS
Capacitor-2 (C-2) shall be switched ON when the total reactive power of
17 Power Transformers T-2 & T-3 measured (HV side) is above the set value
DRAWN BY:
A of reactive power (MVAr-3) and the duration of this reactive power exceeds
DATE:
the set value of time (t3). If the total reactive power of Power Transformers
CIIK'DBY:
,/ T-2 & T-3 measured is below the set value of reactive power (MVAr-4) and
the duration of reactive power below the set value of reactive power, is
above the set value of time (t4), The Capacitor shall be switched OFF or
remain in OFF condition.

Power Transformers T-2 & T-3 measured (HV side) is above the set value
of reactive power (MVAr-5) and the duration of this reactive power exceeds
T-2 & T-3 measured is below the set value of reactive power (MVAr-6) and
3. CASE-III
Bus Coupler-1 (BC-1) is in Close position and Bus Coupler-2 (BC-2) is in

Open Position.

DATEl 08.10.2811
above the set value of time (t-4), The Capacitor shall be switched OFF or
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR remain in OFF condition.
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIAlS
CERTIFlED AND DATED
UNTIL
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
i Capacitor-3 (C-3) shall be switched ON and OFF as per the same condition
as specified under CASE-1 for Capacitor-3 (C-3)
4. CASE-IV
Bus Coupler (BC-n and Bus Coupler-2 (BC-2l are in Close position.

REVISIONS
Power Transformers T-1, T-2 & T-3 measured (VH side) is above the set
value of reactive power (MVAR-3) and the duration of this reactive power
exceeds the set value of time (t3). If the total reactive power of Power
Transformers T1, T-2 & T-3 measured is below the set value of reactive
power (MVAr-4) and the duration of reactive power below the set value of
reactive power, is above the set value of time (t4), The capacitor shall be

reactive power, is above the set value of time (t6) , The Capacitor shall be

reactive power, is above the set value of time (t8), The Capacitor shall be
DAT&: 08.10.2011
5. CASE-V (OVERVOLTAGE CONTROLl
Automatic switching 'OFF' of the capacitor banks shall be performed based

on the voltage measured on the respective bus; i.e. when the bus voltage
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR measures higher operating (33kV - 38kV) I (13.8kV - 16kV). The capacitor
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING banks shall be switched 'OFF' when the measured value of voltage is above
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
the set value of voltage (V-1) & duration exceeds the set value of time (t9).
This requirement shall be fulfilled even superseding the conditions of CASE
1 to IV above.
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
e SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY J.;i~1 ~\ t,) - "4Jf5.1141~1 ~~
~
t
e 6. CASE-VI (UNDERVOLTAGE CONTROl)
Automatic switching 'ON' of the capacitor banks shall be performed based

on the voltage measured on the respective bus; l.e, when the bus voltage
measures lower operating (33kV - 24kV) / (13.8kV - 12.4kV). The capacitor
~
"~
banks shall be switched 'ON' when the measured value of voltage is below
the set value of voltage (V-2) & duration exceeds the set value of time (t10).
Q
1 to IV above.
ACCS shall be provided with facility to modify the setting and/or

0 ~ N ~
bypass/deactivate the settings, as required.
z
REVISIONS
B. ADDITIONAL CONTROL REQUIREMENT IF THE TOTAL CURRENT
EXCEEDS THE CONTINUOUS CURRENT WITHSTAND CAPABILITY OF
DRAWN.Y;
jI THE CAPACITOR BANK
DATE:
CHK'DBY:
-j
I For all above cased, if the total current (including the harmonics current)
exceeds the continuous current withstand capability of the capacitor, the
~ controller should adopt the following strategy regardless of the reactive
power flow in the transformers:
For the operating configuration of only one capacitor connected to

only one transformer; the capacitor should be switched OFF.
For the operating configuration of only one capacitor connected to

two transformers (in parallel) and if the measured voltage at 13.8kV
bus is below the set value of voltage (V-3) & duration exceeds the set
value of time (t11); the second connected capacitor should be
switched ON.
For operating configuration of only one capacitor connected to two

transformers (in parallel) and if the measured voltage at 13.8kV bus is
above the set value of voltage (V-3) & duration exceeds the set value
of time (t11); this connected capacitor should be switched OFF.
l:I:BIllIEI!
For the operating configuration of two capacitors connected to two

BY:
(?y transformers (in parallel); one of the two capacitors should be
DATE: 08.10.2011
switched OFF.
For the operating configuration of three capacitors connected to two

transformers (in parallel); one of the three capactors should be
THIS DRAWING IS NOT switched OFF.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCflQN OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTn.
During these conditions all the previous normal control logics should be
CERTIFIED ANDDATED superseded and suitable alarms and indications should be transmitted to
[PTS- llCM010MZKI
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION INHAIL

C494 A OF 0
11CM010
Control center. Suitable provision for resetting the configurationllogic back

to normal, only by manual resetting, should also be provided.
The minimum inputs to the ACCS shall consist of status of all 69113.8kV
incomer (transformer) CB's, bus-tie CB(s), each 13.8kV incomer voltage,
each 13.8kV bus voltage, each 13.8kV capacitor bank bus voltage, each
i power transformer's Var readings on HV side, and the status of lockout

relays of incomer CB's/Capacitor CB's. When 13.8kV incomer
(Transformer) CB is switched 'OFF, the associated capacitor banks shall
be switched 'OFF before 13.8kV bus section CB is switched 'ON'.
The CB of the capacitor bank once switched 'OFF shall not switch 'ON'
within 10 minutes. Auto / Manual and Local/Remote selection shall be
provided for the ACCS. In any case the 13.8kV incomer breakers of
REVISIONS
Transformers T-1, T-2 & T-3 shall be switched 'ON', the associated
DRAWN BY:
, capacitor shall not switch 'ON' within 10 minutes. Also, two (2) nos.
capacitor banks should not be connected to a single transformer.
DATE:
C'BK'DBY:
The ACCS shall prevent undesired switching 'ON' operation of CB's of
associated capacitor banks in anyone of the following cases:
i. 13.8kV Bus fault (86 B1 or 86 B2 or 8683) operates.

ii. 13.8kV Capacitor feeder unclear faults (main feeder CB or dedicated
capacitor feeder CB Lockout relay operates).
iii. 13.8kV Bus-Tie Lockout operates.
Auto / Manual and Local/Remote selection shall be provided for the

ACCS.
VI. RANGE OF SETIINGS
1. MVAr Setting Ranges
MVAr-1 0 to 50 MVAr in steps of 1 MVAr

MVAr-20 to 50 MVAr in steps of 1 MVAr
DA.TE: 08.10.2011
2. Voltage Settings Ranges (for 33kY)

TH~ ORAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
V-1 33 to 38 kV in steps of 0.1 kV
FOR ORDERING V-2 28 to 33 kV in steps of 0.1 kV
MATERIAl.S UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED V-3 28 to 33 kV in steps of 0.1 kV
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
3. Voltage Settings Ranges (for 13.8kV)
V-113.8 to 16 kV in steps of 0.1 kV

V-2 12 to 13.8 kV in steps of 0.1 kV
I 4. Time Settings Ranges
t-1 0 to 30 minutes in steps of 1 minute

REVISIONS
t-? 0 to 30 minutes in steps of 1 minute
n t-8 0 to 30 minutes in steps of 1 minute
DIlAWNBY:
,JI t-s 0 to 120 seconds in steps of 0.1 second
DATE:
t-10 0 to 5 seconds in steps of 0.1 second
CHK.'DBY: r t-11 0 to 5 seconds in steps of 0.1 second
J
3. AUTOMATIC CAPACITOR CONTROL SYSTEM (ACCS) REQUIREMENTS (For

Substations with Two Transformers)
The automatic control of Capacitor banks shall be accomplished by the use of

the programmable logic controller (PLC). The panel to house PLC and other
associated devices of ACCS shall confirm to 31-TMSS-01. The PLC shall be
designed to be used in the substation environment. It shall have the watchdog
system capability to monitor the PLC circuits and identify the defective circuits
and gives alarms. These alarms shall be monitored by SCADA. It shall have an
ON/OFFfTEST switch which will also be operated and monitored by SCADA. The
programming procedures shall be easily done without special knowledge of
programming. The PLC shall be equipped with the following features:
I. The Man Machine Interface programming equipment shall be provided.
II. The PLC shall be flexible, extendable, if any additional input/output is

needed. The PLC program shall be able to read in and modified, if needed
in future by the COMPANY Engineers. Therefore, the equipment needed to
reprogram the microprocessor such as servicing case, programming unit
DATE: 08.10.1011
and video display unit shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR in order to
accomplish this task at the field. It is the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR to train COMPANY personnel during the commissioning on
the use and programming of the PLC. The PLC shall be equipped with its
THIS DRAWING IS NOT own DC/DC converter. It shall meet the standard of IEC.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCI'ION OR
FOR ORDElllNG III The PLC shall be completely devoted to capacitor bank automatic control.
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED The PLC shall not be used as annunciator.
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 85
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
IV. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the automatic switching

scheme in a fully operational order. Any material required shall be supplied.
The proposed scheme shall be reviewed and approved by the COMPANY.
The scheme shall be thoroughly tested during commissioning.
V. The ACCS shall be provided to perform the following minimum functions,
I but not limited to:
1. The ACCS shall control the reactive power requirement at HV side of each
Transformers.
2. Automatic switching 'ON' and 'OFF of the capacitor banks shall be based
on:-
(i) Voltage measured on the respective 33kV or 13.8kV busses.
REVISIONS
(ii) Reactive Power measured on the HV side of the Transformers
OR
DRAWNlIY: -fn.f-~
Sum of Reactive Power measured on the 33kV or 13.8kV
DATE, ",Ar-_-1 side of the Transformes and the calculated value of Reactive
CIIK'DBY, '1----1
Power for the compensation of the Reactive Power losses of
the Transformers on the basis of (real time measured
current)2 multiplied by Transformer impedance.
(iii) As specified vide CASE-I to VI below.
1. CASE-I
Bus Sectionalizer (BS) in Open position
Capacitor-1 (C-1) shall be switched ON when the reactive power of Power

Transformers T-1 measured (HV side) is above the set value of reactive
power (MVAr1) and the duration of this reactive power exceeds the set
value of time (t1). If the reactive power measured is below the set value of
reactive power (MVAr-2) and the duration of reactive power below this set
value exceeds the set value of time (t2), the Capacitor-1 (C-1) shall be
Capacitor-2 (C-2) shall be switched ON when the reactive power of Power

Transformers T-2 measured (HV side) is above the set value of reactive
power (MVAr1) and the duration of this reactive power exceeds the set
value of time (t1). If the reactive power measured is below the set value of
DATE: 08.]0.2811
reactive power (MVAr-2) and the duration of reactive power below this set
value exceeds the set value of time (t2), the Capacitor-2 (C-2) shall be
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED ~R
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
JOB ORDER NO.
PTS- 86
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
2. CASE-II
Bus Sectionalizer (BS) is in Close position

I of reactive power (MVAr-3) and the duration of this reactive power exceeds
the set value of time (t-3). If the total reactive power of Transformers T-1
&T-2 measured is below the set value of reactive power (MVAr-4) and the
duration of reactive power below the set value of reactive power exceeds
the set value of time (t-4), the Capacitor shall be switched OFF or remain in
OFF condition.

REVISIONS
DRAWN BY:
the set value of time (t-5). If the total reactive power of Transformers T-1
DATE:
&T-2 measured is below the set value of reactive power (MVAr-6) and the
CHK'DlIY:
duration of reactive power below the set value of reactive power exceeds
the set value of time (t-6), the Capacitor shall be switched OFF or remain in
OFF condition.
3. CASE -III (OVER VOLTAGE CONTROl)
Automatic switching 'OFF' of the capacitor banks shall be performed based

on the voltage measured on the respective bus; te. when the bus voltage
measures higher operating voltage (13.8-16.0kV). The capacitor banks
shall be switched 'OFF' when the measured value of voltage is above the
set value of voltage (V-1) & duration exceeds the set value of time (t-7).
I &11 above.
4. CASE -IV (UNDER VOLTAGE CONTROLl
The CB of the capacitor bank once switched 'OFF' shall not switch 'ON'
within 10 minutes. Auto / Manual and Local/Remote selection shall be
provided for the ACCS. In any case the 13.8kV incomer breakers of
Transformers T-1 or T-2 shall be switched 'ON', the associated capacitor
shall not switch 'ON' within 10minutes. The ACCS shall prevent undesired
switching 'ON' operation of CBs of associated capacitor banks in anyone of
DATE: 08.10.2011
the following cases.
a. 13.8kV Bus fault.
b. 13.8kV Capacitor feeder unclear faults (main feeder CB or dedicated
capacitor feeder CB Lockout relay operates).
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR c. 13.8kV Bus Tie Lockout operates.
CONSTRucrION OR
FOR ORDERING d.. Auto / Manual and LocaVRemote selection shall be provided for the
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
ACCS
[PTS 11CM01 o-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
V: RANGE OF SETTINGS
1. MVAr. Setting Ranges
MVAr-1 o to 50 MVAr. in steps of 1 MVAr

MVAr-2 Oto 50 MVAr. in steps of 1 MVAr
I MVAr-3
MVAr-4
MVAr-5
MVAr-6
Oto
Oto
Oto
Oto
100 MVAr
100 MVAr
100 MVAr
100 MVAr
in steps of
in steps of
in steps of
in steps of
1 MVAr
1 MVAr
1 MVAr
1 MVAr
2. Voltage Settings Ranges (for 33kVl

REVISIONS
n V-3 28 to 33 kV in steps of 0.1 kV
DRAWN BY:
DATE: J
CBK'DBV: 7 3. Voltage Setting Ranges (for 13.8kVl
J
V-1 13.8 to 16 kV in steps of 0.1 kV
V-212 to 13.8 kV in steps of 0.1 kV
4. Time Setting Ranges

t-s 0 to 30 minutes in steps of 1 minute
t-? 0 to 120 seconds in steps of 1 seconds
t-8 0 to 5 seconds in steps of 0.1 second.
c. Protective Relaying System
For Protective Relaying and Transient Fault Recorder Systems requirements, refer
B't;~
~ to Appendix-VII.
5.04 METERING SYSTEM

DAn:: 08.10.2Ol1
The metering devices shall conform to TES-P-119.31 and the requirements

specified in this section. All meters shall be digital type suitable for mounting on the
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
MOSAIC control panel. The following meters shall be provided:
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcrION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNl'IL
CERTD'IEDANDDATED
[PTS-llCMOlO-MZKj

C494 A OF 0
11CM010
1. 33kV Switchgears
a. Energy meter: MVAhr
b. Voltmeter: 0-50 kV with 30 simultaneous display for

Ph-Ph and Ph-Neutral Voltages (One (1)
for each Bus Section)
c. Ammeter: 0- 500A
d. DPDM: o20 MVar
2. 13.8kV Switchgears
REVISIONS
a. Energy meter: MVAhr
DRAWN BY: JJ b. Voltmeter: 0-18 kV with 30 simultaneous display for

DATE; .J Ph-Ph and Ph-Neutral Voltages (One (1)
(BK'DBV; I for each Bus Section)
c. Ammeter: 0- 600A
d. DPDM: o 10 MVar
Note:
The accuracies of all meters shall be in accordance with TES-P-119.31.
The range of meters indicated is tentative and may change during base {
detailed engineering stage.
The DPDM should be able to be configured for any CTR (CT Ratio) {PTR (PT
Ratio) & forward & reverse directions.
5.05 ALARM AND ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM
The existing alarm and annunciator system of the substations shall be modified to
incorporate the alarms from the equipments installed under this project. Refer to
Appendix-VII
.IY:
(2
Alarms shall be tested in accordance with 38-TMSS-05 and applicable clauses of
DATE: 08.10.2011
01-TMSS-01, Rev.01.
5.06 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INTERLOCKING SYSTEM

rrnsDRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR 33kV and 13.8kV Capacitor Banks
CONSTRucrION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED The following are the major interlocks which are required to be provided, but not
limited to:
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]

C494 A OF 0
11CM010 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
a. All electrical equipment interlocking requirements for capacitor bank

switching devices in line with COMPANY standard 32-TMSS-01, Rev.01
b. The CB of capacitor bank once switched OFF shall not be switched ON

within ten (10) minutes.
Note: Protective relay panels shall not be used for mounting various relays /
devices required for interlocking system.
5.07 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)
Refer to Appendix IX for SCADA requirements.
REVISIONS
5.0S'CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORK
DUWNBY: For Civil and Structural work Requirements, refer to Appendix VIII.
DA'IE: .r
CIIK'DBY: { 5.09 FIRE DETECTION/ALARM AND FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
J
Fire Fighting Equipment
Fire fighting equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements

outlined in 90-TMSS-03, TES-P-119.21 and hereunder:
33kV and 13.8kV capacitors: 6kg C02 portable fire extinguishers.
**** END OF SECTION V ****
DATE: 08.10.2Ol1

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]
JOB ORDER NO, PTS- 90
C494 A OF 0
11CM01 0 92
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA
SECTION VI - COMMISSIONING TESTS
6.01 GENERAL
A. A list, giving the details of the commissioning and site tests shall be prepared by the
CONTRACTOR and submitted to the COMPANY for review and approval not less
I than six (6) months before the schedule date of tests.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all the appropriate tools,
Calibrated test equipment and temporary AC and DC power supplies needed to
perform the commissioning and site tests. All tests shall be performed in accordance
with the applicable IEC and ANSI Standards and established practices and
procedures.
REVISIONS C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a schedule of proposed commissioning tests at

least two (2) months prior to scheduled date of tests with a list of test and
DRAWNBY:
commissioning equipment to be used for the PROJECT. The list shall indicate
DAlE:
jJ whether each equipment is owned or to be rented. Contractor shall also forward the
CIIK'DBY: q--- weekly test schedule to the concerned department/division on or before Monday of
J every week for arranging witnessing personnel and to monitor the testing &
commissioning activities.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for conducting additional tests if

recommended by the equipment manufacturers or by the COMPANY.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for commissioning the existing protection

scheme involved within the scope of the subject PROJECT.
F. Testing of high voltage cable system and fiber optic cable shall be carried out to
ensure that the necessary design and operation specifications are achieved prior to
placing the cable system into service.
G. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to carry out all tests in a safe manner and
with pre-determined safe working procedure submitted to the COMPANY.
H. The mechanical check and visual inspection, as required in COMPANY Standard

TCS-P-105, Rev.01 shall be carried out prior to any electrical test.
I. In addition to the tests required in this standard, all test required by the cable
manufacturer shall be performed. In the event of conflict between the testing
~> requirements of this standard and those of the cable manufacturer, the COMPANY
BY, l < tzJi'
shall be the sole judge as to which tests shall take precedence.
DATE; 08.10.1011
J. All sites testing and commissioning will be done under COMPANY witness.
Witnessing of testing/commissioning by COMPANY does not mean acceptance of
test results. Test results will be reviewed and approved by COMPANY separately
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR after CONTRACTOR submits the same for review and approval.
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR OllDElllNG
MATERIALS UNTIL K. The test of All protective relays to be started only when the required IFC drawings
CERTIFIED AND DATED
has been approved with the final protection scheme by the concerned COMPANY
Engineering authority, and the same for the SOE and DFR List. And all protective
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZK)
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
relays are to be tested using COMPANY approved program controlled computerized

relay test equipment, Programs for testing of all relays shall be submitted to the
COMPANY after completion of commissioning tests.
L. The CONTRACTOR shall perform automated calibration tests to prove the correct
relay characteristics and timing operation after adjusting the relays to the settings
I approved by COMPANY. The CONTRACTOR shall carry out calibration tests via
COMPANY approved computer operated, test equipment, using automated test
routines developed by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the Manufacturer for all
main protective numerical relays such as distance relays, differential relays, bus bar
protection relays etc, as the proposed numerical protective relays to be used in this
project are computerized and sophisticated electronic eqUipment, which includes
scheme configuration, fault recording features, local and remote access for down
loading system parameters and settings, it is requested that the CONTRACTOR
REVISIONS should have a commissioning engineer from the relay supplier or certified by the
relay supplier and Approved by the COMPANY to perform the acceptance
DRAWN BY;
/commissioning tests for the numerical relays involve in this projects, the approval
DATE:
has to granted at least two months prior to start the commissioning tests. All the
CBK'DBY: ~ automated test routines and sub routines, software accessories, leads required to
( perform the test has to be hand over to the COMPANY one set for each type of the
relays.
M. Field tests and commissioning results shall be submitted to the COMPANY not later
than two (2) days after completion of tests for review prior to the final energization.
N. All Pre-commissioning Tests shall be carried out in accordance with COMPANY's

Pre-commissioning Test Procedures ''TCS-P-105, Rev.01".
6.02 SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT
The CONTRACTOR shall perform all the applicable site commissioning tests of the
new equipment installed under this PROJECT in accordance with applicable
sections of the COMPANY Construction Standard TCS-P-105, Rev.01
"Commissioning Test and Checks of Power Transmission Network Equipment".
6.03 SCADA EQUIPMENT
CONTRACTOR shall finalize the SCADA Handover Book Sheets and Test
procedure to be submitted to Company at least two (2) weeks before the scheduled
pre commissioning
DATE: 08.10.2011 Pre-commissioning shall only be started if all SCADA points have been completely
wired.
Final commissioning shall be scheduled at least one (1) month after pre-
THIS DRAWING IS NOT commissioning has been successfully completed.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSI'RUCI'ION OR
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL **** END OF SECTION VI & SOWITS ****
CERTIFIED AND DATED
[PTS- 11CM01O-MZKj
C494 A OF 0
11CM010
APPENDIX I
LIST OF ATTACHED
CONCEPTUAL AND REFERENCE DRAWINGS
r:
.;
PROJECT TITLE PROJECT ENGINEER CONTRACT NO. JOB ORDER NO. DRAFTING OFFICE
MOAYED Z. AL-KADHEM I V.SUBRAMANIAN -
HAIL SAUDI ARABlt
INITIAL REV. FURTHER REV.
DRAWING NO. SHEET NO. DRAWING TITLE REMARKS
NO. NO nAT"
INDEXA
PTS-11CM010 1 TO 92 0 SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEXP
CT-904241 1 OF 2 0 RELAYING AND METERING - ONE LINE DIAGRAM FOR 13.8kV CAPACITOR BANK
CT-904241 2 OF 2 0 RELAYING AND METERING - ONE LINE DIAGRAM FOR 33kV CAPACITOR BANK
PROJECT COMPLETION DATE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHEET NO. REV. NO.
AS BUILT
BY
. . C494 X CT-904240 1 IOFI 1 0
APPENDIX II
MATERIAL DATA SCHEDULES

APPENDIX II
MATERIAL DATA SCHEDULES (SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS)
The following COMPANY Material Standard Specifications Data Schedules are attached. The
CONTRACTOR shall fill out the Data Schedule indicating the technical particulars of the
equipment offered by him. In no case, the data specified by the COMPANY in the Data Schedule
shall be erased or altered by the CONTRACTOR while he fills out his data.
1 10-TMSS-05 Bare Copper-Clad Steel Grounding Conductor and Ground Rod

(Rev. 1)
2 11- SDMS-03 15kV to 36kV XLPE Power Cables (36kV)

(Rev. 1)
3 11-TMSS-10 Power and/or Control Cable, Cu. or AI. Conductor, 600/1000V Rating
(Rev.O)
4 11-SMSS-11 Shielded Instrumentation Cables

(Rev. 2)
5 12-SDMS-Q1 Cable Joints, Terminations and Accessories up to 36kV (36kV)

(Rev. 0)
6 23-TMSS-01 PVC Conduits and Fittings for Under Ground Cables

(Rev.O)
7 23-TMSS-02 Duct Sealing Units

(Rev.O)
8 24-TMSS-01 Metallic Cable Tray Systems

(Rev. 0)
9 31-TMSS-01 Relay and Control Panels

(Rev. 0)
10 31-TMSS-02 Auxiliary AC/DC Panels

(Rev. 0)
11 31-TMSS-06 Terminal Blocks

(Rev. 0)
12 32-TMSS-01 Metal Clad Switch Gear, 11kV, 13.8kV, 33kV or 34.5kV (33kV)
(Rev.01)
13 35-TMSS-01 Surge Arresters, 11kV through 380kV

(Rev. 0)
14 37-TMSS-03 LV Circuit Breaker

(Rev.O)
10F2
15 38-TMSS-03 Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)
(Rev. 1)
16 38-TMSS-05 Annunciator System

(Rev. 0)
17 4Q-TMSS-02 Metering Devices

(Rev. 0)
18 43-TMSS-01 Shunt Capacitor Bank, Substation Type, 13.8kV through 380kV

(Rev.O)
19 48-TMSS-02 Non-Metallic Fiber Optic Cables

(Rev.O)
20 50-TMSS-Q1 Current Transformers 11kV through 380kV

(Rev. 0)
21 50-TMSS-03 Potential Transformers (PT) 33kV through 380kV

(Rev. 0)
22 54-TMSS-01 Mineral Insulation Oil for Electrical Apparatus

(Rev.1 )
23 58-TMSS-02 Air Core Series Reactor, 13.8kV through 380kV (For De-Tuning)
(Rev.O)
24 70-TMSS-02 Chain Link Fence

(Rev.O)
25 70-TMSS-03 Normal Weight Ready-Mixed Portland cement Concrete

(Rev.O)
26 90-TMSS-03 Portable Fire Extinguishers

(Rev. 0)
20F2
TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ '.-TMSS"', Rev.,
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
BARE COPPER-CLAD STEEL GROUNDING CONDUCTOR AND GROUND ROD
SEC Enquiry No. Date: _
SEC Purchase Order

No. Date: - - - -
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with r.o. No. -"-F_'_,S_----'.:.....l_C-_fI'

__O_,_O _
REFERENCE
SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION 'A' 'B' 'C'
3.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
ASTM B91O/B91OM *
4.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REOUIREMENTS
4.2.2 Copper-Clad Steel Grounding Conductor
AWG Size \" No.5

Nominal Cross-Section (mm') 3 / 'g. 11
Overall Diameter (mm) 23 U

Minimum Tensile Strength (kN) *
D.C. Resistance at 20C (QIkm) *
'A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATAIPARAMETERS

'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERNENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAIPARAMETERS
'C'- REMARKS SUPPORTING THE PROPOSED DEVIATION IN COLUMN 'B'
(*)- DATAIPARAMETERS TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER/
VENDOR/CONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'
~ 10TMSS05R011MSO Date of Approval: September 07, 2010 PAGE NO.9 OF 11

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECI.,CATlON <:::.J 10TMSS.(l5, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
SECTION NO. DESCRlPTION 'A' 'B' 'C'
4.2.3 Copper-Clad Steel Ground Rod
Nominal Diameter (mm) 16 or 19
Actual Diameter (mm) 14.3 or 17.1
Minimum Length (mm) 3,000
4.3 Conductivity of Annealed Copper-Clad

40
Steel Wire (% lACS)
4.4 Direction of Lay left hand
4.5 Minimum Copper Thickness for:
Copper-Clad Steel Wire (mm) *

Ground Rod (mm) 0.25
4.6 Length of Grounding Conductor
Total Required Length (m) *

Maximum Length per Reel (m) 2,000
Tolerance in Length per Reel 5%
Type of Reel wooden
10TMSS05R01/MSO Date of Approval: September 07, 2010 PAGE NO. 10 OF 11

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECl"iCATJON <:.J "TMSS"', Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
A. ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL INFORMATION OR FEATURES TO BE FURNISHED BY

SEC:
B. ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY DATA OR FEATURES PROPOSED BY

BIDDERIVENDORJSUPPLIERJCONTRACTOR:
B. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERJVENDORJSUPPLIERJ

CONTRACTOR:
Actual Manufacturer Vendor/Supplier/

of EquipmentlMaterial Contractor
Name of the Company

Location and address
Name and Signature of

authorized
representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
10TMSS05R01/MSO Date of Approval: September 07. 2010 PAGE NO. 110F11

Saudi Electricity Company (j ~4...>foSll ~..1.".....J1 ~y1.l1
11-SDMS-03, Rev. 01
SEC DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS SPECIFICATION
DATE: 01-11-2004
9.0 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE

15 KV TO 36 KV XLPE POWER CABLES
(Sheet I of 4)
SEC Inuuirv No: Item No:
SEC
REF
4.0
DESCRIPTION
I
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
SEC SPECIFIED
VALUES
VENDORPRQ-
POSED VALUES"
1. Reference Manufacturing Standard IEC-60502-2

2. Max. Permissible Continuous Conductor Temp ("C) 90
3. Maximum Short Circuit Temperature ("C) 250
4. Max. Permissible Cont. Temp. ofInner Covering (0C) *
" *
5. Max. Permissible Cont. Temp. of Outer Sheath (0C)
6. Rated Voltage (kV) 15kVor:er
7. Number of Cores VI~
8. Conductor Material Cuor Al
9. Shape of Conductor Round
10. Conductor Cross-Section (mrrr) I;;, "3C'0 '~...... (l').~ As per Inquiry
II. Approximate Diameter of Conductor (mm) *
12. Number of Strands of Conductor (No) *
13. Minimum Thickness of Conductor Shield (mm) *
14. Insulation Material XLPE
15. Nominal Thickness ofInsulation (mm) As perIEC
16. Min/Max Thickness ofStrippable Semi Conducting
Insulation Shield Material (mm) *
17. Diameter Under Insulation Semicon (mm) *
18. No. & Nominal DiameterofCu Wire Screen (mm) *
19. Minimum Thickness of Copper Tape and Width (mm) O.lx15
20. Inner Covering Material PE
21. Nominal Thickness ofInner Covering (mm) *
22. Armor Type and Thickness (mm) *
23. Core Identification (Red, Yellow, Blue) Yes
24. Diameter under Inner Covering (mm) *
25. Filler Material *
26. Outer Sheath Material PVC type ST2
27. Diameter under Outer Sheath (mm) *
28. Thickness of Outer Sheath (mm) AsperIEC
~ Page 11 ofl7
Saudi Electricity Company (j ,,4JfoS.U ~J.jLwJ1 ~.;JJI
11-SDMS-03, Rev. 01
DATE: 01-11-2004

(Sheet 2 of 4)
SEC Inquiry No: Item No:
SEC SEC SPECIFIED VENOORPRD-
REF DESCRIPTION VALUES POSED VALUES
Vl5kV-Red
29. Color of Outer Sheath
3i:1i1' wti~
30. Marking Embossed as Specified Yes

31. Overall Diameter of the Cable (mm)
32. Net Weight of Conductor (KglKm)
33. Conductor DC Resistance at 20C (Ohms/Km)
34. Conductor AC Resistance at 90C (Ohms/Km)
35. Inductance (mHlKm)
36. Inductive Reactance (OhmslKm)
37. Conductor Impedance at 90 C (Ohms/Km)
38. Zero Sequence Impedance Assuming all Current
in Screens:
R (Ohms/Km)
X (Ohms/Km)
39. Capacitance (uFlKm)
40. Charging Current (AmpslKm)
41. Earth Fault Capacitive Current (Amps/Km)
42. Short Circuit Rating of Cable based on Maximum
Conductor Operating Temperature (l Second)
- Conductor (KA)
- Screen (KA)
43. Conductor Temperature before Short Circuit (" C)
44. Conductor Temperature at the end of Short Circuit (" C)
45. Screen Temperature before Short Circuit (' C)
46. Screen Temperature at the end of Short Circuit (' C)
2~or 15 kV
47. System Short Circuit for one Second (leA)
~SA3"fV
48. Permissible load in Amps under Maximum Service
Conditions given in this Specification (Amp)

49. Maximum pulling Tension (kN)
50. Maximum side wall press (kN/m)
51. Maximum Bending Radius (m)
52. Meets Strippability requirement of AEIC CS-8 Yes
{?; Page 120f17

Saudi Electricity Company (j ~~~ ~J.....-n A.syill
11-SDMS-03, Rev. 01
DATE: 01-11-2004

(Sheet 3 of 4)
SEC SEC SPECIFIED VENDOR PRO-
53. Maximum partial discharge at 1.5 times rated

Yes
voltage, 10 PC
54. Meets Spark Test requirement for jacket Yes
55. Meets all Test requirements oflEC-60502-2 Yes
6.0 I PACKING AND SHIPPING
I. Drum Type Returnable
2. Length of Cable (m) As per Inquiry
3. Dimensions (m) *
4. Gross Weight (Kg) *
5. Net Weight (Kg) *
6. Marking as per the Specification Yes
8.0 I SUBMITTALS
1. All submittals as per the Specification Yes
Note: (*) - Values to be provided/proposed by the Vendor.

(**) - Please provide explanations for deviations, if any.
Page 13 of17
G --4J+S.ll ~J.".....JI
11-SDMS-03, Rev. 01
~y1.l1

DATE: 01-11-2004

(Sheet 4 of 4)
A) Additional Technical Information or Features Specified by SEC.
B) Additional Supplementary Data or Features Proposed by BidderNendor/Supplier.
C) Other Particulars to be filled-up by the BidderNendorlSupplier.
D) List of Deviations and Clauses to which exception is taken by the

BidderNendor/Supplier.
(Use separate sheet, if necessary).
Manufacturer of
DESCRIPTION VendorlSupplier
MateriallEquipment
Name of Company
Location and Office Address
Name and Signature of Authorized

Representative with Date
Official Seal I Stamp
Page 14 oft?
CJ "4~ ~J,JLwJ1 ;,s.;JJ1
ll-SDMS-03, Rev. 01
DATE: 01-11-2004
P'IS .- " C. M 0 \ 0
(Sheet 1 of 4)
SEC Inouirv No: Item No:
SEC
REF
4.0
DESCRIPTION
I I
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
SEC SPECIFIED
VALUES
VENDORPR0-
POSED VALUES"
I. Reference Manufacturing Standard IEC-60502-2

2. Max. Permissible Continuous Conductor Temp (0C) 90
3. Maximum Short Circuit Temperature ("C) 250
4. Max. Permissible Cont. Temp. ofInner Covering ("C)
5. Max. Permissible Cont. Temp. of Outer Sheath eC) /'
6. Rated Voltage (kV) J.@" or 3'6kV
7. Number of Cores V1e
8. Conductor Material vlSu~
9. Shape of Conductor ~ Round
10. Conductor Cross-Section (mrn") 63C' Itt ("lI- As per Inquiry
II. Approximate Diameter of Conductor (mm)
12. Number of Strands of Conductor (No)
13. Minimum Thickness of Conductor Shield (mm)
14. Insulation Material XLPE
15. Nominal Thickness ofInsulation (mm) As perIEC
16. MinIMax Thickness ofStrippable Semi Conducting
Insulation Shield Material (mm)

17. Diameter Under Insulation Semicon (mm)
18. No. & Nominal Diameter ofCu Wire Screen (mm)
19. Minimum Thickness of Copper Tape and Width (mm) 0.IxI5
20. Inner Covering Material PE
21. Nominal Thickness ofInner Covering (mm) *
22. Armor Type and Thickness (mm)
23. Core Identification (Red, Yellow, Blue) Yes
24. Diameter under Inner Covering (mm)
25. Filler Material
26. Outer Sheath Material PVC type ST2
27. Diameter under Outer Sheath (mm)
28. Thickness of Outer Sheath (mm) As per IEC
~ Page 11 of 17
Saudi Electricity Company .(j ~4.)foS.U ~J.jlLoWJ1 ~yJJl
11-SDMS-03, Rev. 01
DATE: 01-11-2004

(Sheet 2 of 4)
SEC SEC SPECIFIED VENDORPRQ-
tfilH Jetl
29. Color of Outer Sheath
tl36 kV - Black
30. Marking Embossed as Specified Yes
31. Overall Diameter of the Cable (mm) *
32. Net Weight of Conductor (Kg/Km) *
33. Conductor DC Resistance at 20C (Ohms/Km) *
34. Conductor AC Resistance at 90C (Ohms/Km) *
35. Inductance (mH/Km) *
36. Inductive Reactance (OhmslKm) *
37. Conductor Impedance at 900C (OhmslKm) *
38. Zero Sequence Impedance Assuming all Current
in Screens:
R (Ohms/Km) *
X (Ohms/Km)
39. Capacitance (uFlKm) *
40. Charging Current (AmpsiKm)
41. Earth Fault Capacitive Current (Amps/Km)
42. Short Circuit Rating of Cable based on Maximum
Conductor Operating Temperature (I Second)
- Conductor (KA)
- Screen (KA)
43. Conductor Temperature before Short Circuit CO C)
44. Conductor Temperature at the end of Short Circuit (0 C)
45. Screen Temperature before Short Circuit (0 C)
46. Screen Temperature at the end of Short Circuit CO C) *
47. System Short Circuit for one Second (kA)
j;flt Hj I:V
25 for 36 kV
48. Permissible load in Amps under Maximum Service
Conditions given in this Specification (Amp) *
49. Maximum pulling Tension (kN)
50. Maximum side wall press (kN/m)
51. Maximum Bending Radius (m)
52. Meets Strippability requirement of AEIC CS-8 Yes
~ p age 12 of17
Saudi Electricity Company (j ~4~ ~J.".....JI ~~I
ll-SDMS-03, Rev. 01
DATE: 01-11-2004

(Sheet3 of 4)
SEC SEC SPECIFIED VENDOR PRO-
REF DESCRIPTION VALUES POSED VALUES"
53. Maximum partial discharge at 1.5 times rated

Yes
voltage, 10 PC
54. Meets Spark Test requirement for jacket Yes
55. Meets all Test requirements ofIEC-60502-2 Yes
6.0 I PACKING AND SHIPPING

1. Drum Type Returnable
2. Length of Cable (m) As per Inquiry
3. Dimensions (m) *
4. Gross Weight (Kg) *
5. Net Weight (Kg) *
6. Marking as per the Specification Yes
8.0 I SUBMITTALS
1. All submittals as per the Specification Yes
Note: (*) - Values to be provided/proposed by the Vendor.

(**) - Please provide explanations for deviations, if any.
Page 13 of 17
J'---- _
G ~4...>f1ll ~J~I ~yJJl
ll-SDMS-03, Rev. 01
DATE: 01-11-2004

(Sheet 4 of 4)
A) Additional Technical Information or Features Specified by SEC.
B) Additional Supplementary Data or Features Proposed by BidderNendor/Supplier.
C) Other Particulars to be filled-up by the BidderNendor/Supplier.
D) List of Deviations and Clauses to which exception is taken by the

BidderNendor/Supplier.
Manufacturer of
DESCRIPTION Vendor/Supplier
Material/Equipment
Name of Company

Representative with Date
Official Seal / Stamp
~
Page 14 of 17
J _
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION (j "-TMSS-'., Rev .
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
POWER AND/OR CONTROL CABLE, COPPER OR ALUMINUM CONDUCTOR,

600/1Q00V RATING
SEC Enquiry No. Date: - - - - -
SEC Purchase Order Date:

No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with J.O. No. _F_-r....c:s=._---=-,'_C__M_O_I_o _

REFERENCE
Standards to which material shall conform *
4.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
4.1 General
POV/~e. t
Cable application (Power or Control) C f'1JT R.eoL
PVGI
Cable installation g TSA.1
(conduit, duct, trays, direct burial, GIS etc.)
Voltage rating (kV) *

Fault current duration (sec.)
Available ground fault current (kA)

(when shielded cable is required)
Conductor DC resistance per kID at lOGC

(n) *
'A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATAlPARAMETER.

'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERNENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAIPARAMETERS.
'C'- REMARKS SUPPORTING THE PROPOSED DEVIATION IN COLUMN 'B'.
(*)- DATAIPARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER/
VENDOR/CONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'.
11TMSS1OROIYM Date of Approval: March 18, 2006 PAGE NO. 10 OF 14

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:::J HTMSS", Rev. 0
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE

600/1OOOV RATING
REFERENCE
4.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Conductor AC resistance per Ian at lOC

(n) *
Minimum Insulation resistance per Ian at

lOC (MQ) *
Maximum permissible continuous

conductor temperature (0C) *
Maximum rated temperature of

insulation material (0C) *
Maximum permissible continuous

jacket temperature caC) *
4.3.1 Conductor Material Cu/~
Conductor cross sectional area (mm') *

For conductors -lmnf and larger:
Number of strands per conductor *
Diameter of compacted strand (rom) *
Number of conductors *
For conductors below 4mm 2 :
Stranding required? Yes/ ~
Number of strands per conductor *

Diameter of compacted strand (mm) *
Number of conductors *
~
=11=TM=S==S=1==OR==OfY=====M==============================
Date of Approval: March 18. 2006 PAGE NO. 11 OF 14
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ 'HMSS-'., Rov. 0
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE

600/l000V RATING
REFERENCE
4.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Outer diameter of conductor (mm) *

Is conductor tinning required?
4.3.2 Insulation Material ~/XLPE
Minimum average thickness of insulation

(mm) *
Outer diameter over insulation (mm) *
Insulation shield material, if any
Thickness of insulation shield (mm) *

'fE'> F~"P- '"N.j r ~C'\.... (ABu;.~
4.3.3 Binder required? !'it"' F<:'~ P~lf1'& q..a.-:-::..E1 _
yes nR CO'Jig; .... <-l>.8 ...E;S
N<' F"~ f'e>v{ER- c I\./S\..E S
4.3.4 Metallic shield required? Yes / No _
Thickness of metallic shield (mm) *
4.3.5 Armor material, if any
4.3.6 Jacket Material PVC
Average jacket thickness (mm) *

Overall diameter of cable (mm) *
4.4.7 Reference standard for core
identification (IEC, ICEA) *
4.4.8 Color of single core cable/wire (if

applicable) *
11TMSS10ROIYM Date of Approval: March 18,2006 PAGE NO. 12 OF 14

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:J "-TMSS.1., ROY.
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE

600/1000V RATING
REFERENCE
5.0 TESTS
5.3 List of special tests, if required -NO-
6.0 PACKING AND SHIPPING
6.3 Cable weight (kglkm) *

Reel and cable weight (kg) *
Cable length per Reel (m) *
Total quantity required (m)
Cable reel diameter (mm) *

Cable reel width (mm) *
Maximum pulling tension (kN) *
Minimum bending radius (mm) *
. 11TMSS1OROIYM Date of Approval: March 18, 2006 PAGE NO. 13 OF 14

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:J "-TMSS-l., Rov.
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE

600/1000V RATING

SEC:

BIDDERIVENDORISUPPLIERICONTRACTOR:
B. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERIVENDORISUPPLIERI

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
epresentative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
11TMSS10ROIYM Dale of Approval: March 18, 2006 PAGE NO. 14 OF 14

~4~ ~j."......JI4.s.;-&.1\
SEC MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION 11-SMSS-11, Rev. 2
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SHIELDED INSTRUMENTATION CABLES
SEC Enquiry No. _ Date:
SEC Purchse Order No. Date:

or Contract No.
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with J. O. No. _ _"'--"-''''---''-"''-''''-'''-''-''-''-''-

PTS-llCMOI0 _
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REOUIREMENTS
REFERENCE
4.1 General
- Type of application
(process Control, SCADA, RELAYING
Computer, GIS, etc.) SCADA
4.1.2 Cable construction

(Single/Multiple, Pair/Triad) *
4.1.3 Reference manufacturing
standard (lCEA, 1EC) *
'A' - SEC SPECIFIED DATAIPARAMETER

'B' - BIDDERISUPPLIERIVENDORICONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAl
PARAMETERS
'C' - REMARKS SUPPORTING THE PROPOSED DEVIATION IN COLUMN 'B'
(*) - DATAl PARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDERI
SUPPLIERIVENDORICONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'
11SMSS11 R2IAAG PAGE NO.2 OF 15

,.4JfSll ~~."......JI ~~I
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.2 Rated Voltage *

Conductor de resistance @
20C (Olkm) *
Conductor ac resistance @
20C (Olkm) *
Maximum permissible
continuous conductor
temperature (0C) *
Mutual capacitance (~Ikm) *
Capacitance unbalance (PF) *
Insulation resistance
@ 20C (MOIkm) *
Dielectric Strength :
Insulation withstand voltage

between conductors (V) *
Insulation withstand voltage
between conductors and
shield (kV) *
Attenuation (dBlkm) *
Cross-talk loss *
11SMSS11R2/AAG PAGE NO.3 OF 15

,.t.:..>fSll ~J~I4.s~1
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.3.1 Conductor:
Material *
Size (mm-) *
Number of strands *
4.3.2 Insulation:
Material (pVC or XLPE) *

Average thickness (mm) *
Minimum thickness (rnm) *
Rated temperature COc) *
4.3.3 Group Shield:
Material *
Minimum thickness (mm) *
4.3.4 Size of communication
wire, if applicable (mm-) *
11SMSS11R2/AAG PAGE NO. 4 OF 15

9-4Jf-S.ll4.:J~1 J..s~1
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.3.5 Cable Shield:
Material *
4.3.7 Inner Jacket (if applicable):
Material (pVC or XLPE) *

Rated temperature (0C) *
4.3.8 Is metallic sheath required? Yes/W@
Sheath material Applicable only Relaying

Purpose, Refer Appendix-
Sheath average thickness (mm) *

Sheath minimum
thickness (mm) *

9-4~ ~J~I 4.sj-JJ1
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.3.9 Is armor sheath required? ~lNo
Sheath material *
Sheath average thickness (mm) *
Sheath minimum
thickness (mm) *
4.3.10 Outer Jacket:
Material (PVC or XLPE) *

6.3 Cable weight (kg/km) *
Reel and cable weight (kg) *
Cable length per reel (m) *
Total quantity required (m)
Cable reel diameter (mm) *

Cable reel width (mm) *

~~.JfSll4.:J~1 J..s~1
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
6.3 Cont'd.
Maximum pulling
tension (kN) *
Minimum bending
radius (mm) *
11SMSS11R2/AAG PAGE NO. 7 OF 15

(j 9'4JfSll ~J~I 4..s~1
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
A. ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL INFORMATION OR FEATURES SPECIFIED BY

SEC:
B. ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY DATA OR FEATURES PROPOSED BY BIDDER

VENDOR/SUPPLIER/CONTRACTOR:
C. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERNENDOR/SUPPLIER/

CONTRACTOR:
Manufacturer Vendor/Supplier/
Of Material/Equipment Contract
Name of the Company
Location and Address

Authorized Representative
and Date
Official Seal/Stamp
ofthe Company
~
11SMSS11R2IAAG PAGE NO.8 OF 15
CJ ~4~~j~I~~1
12-SDMS-Ol, Rev. 01
DATE: 19-06-2010G
9.0 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE: fi5- ,'CfV\O\O

Cable Joints and Terminations
(Sheet 1 of2)
SEC SEC SPECIFIED VENDOR

DESCRIPTION PROPOSED
~EF. VALUES(*)
VA> 11T1i'~
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

4 REQUIREMENTS
1 Joint! Termination *
Heat Shrinkable tf~AT

2 Type Cold Shrinkable i5HR IN KA aU,
Pre- Molded
3 Outdoor/Indoor (Termination only) OU"T/)Of>f!,R..~
1l'J 000
Indoor Termination Length: *

4 Low Voltage *
Medium Voltage *
Conductor material, size and number of C("rpE""~

7 i 1- b"?;,o m (YI1..
cable cores
8 Voltage Designation (kV) *
9 Manufacturer Catalog Number *

Class of Termination as per
10 Yes
IEEE-48
11
Creepage Distance (mm)
(Outdoor Termination only)
40 fYIf'J/ K V
List of contents per Kit supplied as per
12 Yes
SEC approved sample
Submittals Required as part of

14 Yes
Tender/Inquiry included
15 Weight of each JointlTennination (Kg) -
16 Name of the Manufacturer Yes
17 Country of Origin Yes
* As per tender/inquiry, as applicable.
Page 15 of 16
Saudi Electricity Company (j ~~.J+Sll ~..l.,,-ll ~~\
12-SDMS-Ol, Rev. 01
DATE: 19-06-2010G
9.0 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE:
Cable Joints and Terminations

(Sheet 2 of 2)
A) Additional technical information or features specified by SEC.
B) Additional supplementary data or features proposed by bidder/vendorl

supplier.
C) Other particulars to be filled-up by the bidder/vendorlsupplier.
D) List of deviations and clauses to which exception is taken by the

bidderl vendorl supplier.
Manufacturer of Vendorl
Description
Material Supplier
Name of Company
Name & Signature of Authorized

Representative with date
Official Seal I Stamp
Page 16 of 16
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION'\..) ''-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
PVC CONDillTS & FITTINGS FOR UNDERGROUND CABLES
SEC Enquiry No. Date:

-----
SEC Purchase Order
No.
or Contract No. Date:
-----
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with r.o. No. P T S - \ \ CfIl 0 I0
REFERENCE
Applicable Industry Standards *

4.2 Type of PVC conduit (Type DB, EB, EPC-

40-PVC, PVC corrugated flexible tubing) *
4.3.2 Continuous operating temperature (0C) 90
4.3.3 Mximum emergency connductor

overloading temperature (0C) 105
4.4.1 PVC conduit compound cell classification 12154
a. Kind of resin in compound PVC
b. Impact resistance, (Jim) of notch >80.1
c. Tensile strength, (Mpa) 21.0 to 27.5
d. Modulus of elasticity in tension,

(Mpa) 3585 to 4275
e. Deflection temperature under load of

1.82 MPa, (0C) 100 to 110
'A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATAIPARAMETER.

'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERIVENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAIPARAMETERS.
& (*)- DATAIPARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER/

~ 23TMSS01RO/AGG Date of Approval: Ocotber 9, 2007 PAGE NO. 22 OF 24

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION ~ ,,-lMSS-Ol, Rev. 0
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
PVC CONDUITS & FITTINGS FOR UNDERGROUND CABLES
REFERENCE
4.4.2 PVC fitting compound cell classification 11232
a. Kind of resin in compound PVC
b. Impact resistance, (Jim) of notch >40.0
c. Tensile strength, (Mpa) 27.5 to 34.4
d. Modulus of elasticity in tension,

(Mpa) 2620 to 3171
e. Deflection temperature under load

of 1.82 MPa, (0C) 70 to 80
4.5.2 Overall length of conduit (m) 6.10m O.03m
4.5.3 Have belled-end conduits? YeslNo
4.6.1 Conduit size
Outside diameter (mm) *

Minimam Wall Thickness (mm) *
Dale of Approval: Ocolber 9,2007 PAGE NO. 23 OF 24

TRANSMISSION MATERIALSSTANDARD SPECIFICATION.<:::.J 23-TMSS-G1, Rev. 0
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
PVC CONDIDTS & FITTINGS FOR UNDERGROUND CABLES

SEC:

BIDDERNENDORJSUPPLIERJCONTRACTOR:
C. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERNENDORJSUPPLIERJ

CONTRACTOR:

of Equipment/Material Contractor
Name of the Company


authorized
representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
~ 2=3""TM==S:::::SO==1==RO==/A===G:::::G=========::===:====:=::::=:================::::======
Date of Approval: Ocotber 9. 2007
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <::.J 23-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
DUCT SEALING UNITS

-----
No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with J.O. No.

-p-rS
--- - - cr
\ \- C>
--- ---------- 0'
REFERENCE
4.12 Type (empty or cable) fMj>T" l- CAI~ Lf:

Location to be installed (underground, cable
vault, etc.) *
Inside diameter or dimensions of duct (mm)1\5. RlQU I/*.D _

Provision of dimensional sketch for non-
Yes/No
circular cross section
Precise outside diameter of cable (mm) ~.
Precise outside diameter of neutral wire

(mm)
4.4.1 Material:
Sealing *
4.4.3 Compression Plate *

Bolt(s) *
'A' - SEC SPECIFIED DATAIPARAMETERS
'B' - BIDDERJSUPPLIERIVENDORJCONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATA!
PARAMETERS
(*) - DATAIPARAMETER TO BE PROVIDED/PROPOSED BY THE
BIDDERJSUPPLIERJ VENDORJCONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'
~~;:===========:====:======~===
23TMSS02RO/AAG Date of Approval: August 5, 2006 G PAGE NO. 11 OF 13
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPEClFlCAHON
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

<:J 23 oTlolSS"',
Rev. 0
DUCT SEALING UNITS
REFERENCE
Washers *
Nuts
4.3.1 Maximum Operating Temperature of the

*
Duct Sealing Unit CC)
4.3.2 Maximum Operating Pressure of the Duct

Sealing Unit (kPa) '"
4.6.5 Recommended nut torque for 69 kPa (10
psi) pressure (Joule or Nm) '"
Maximum Nut Torque (Joule or Nm)
~
. 2"':3:;;TM=:=:S~S~02~R;:::OI:=:=AA~G=============:;===========::=============
Date of Approval: AugustS, 2006 G PAGE NO. 12 OF 13
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION <:::J 23-TMSS"2, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
DUCT SEALING UNITS
A. ADDITIONAL TECHNlCAL INFORMATION OR FEATURES TO BE FURNISHED BY

SEC:

BIDDERIVENDORlSUPPLIERlCONTRACTOR:
C. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERNENDORISUPPLIERI

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
epresentative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
1$
2:::::3T=M':':S~SO:::2::;RO=/AA:=:=:G========::=:===:=':'===:==~:':""'==============
Date of Approval: August 5, 2006 G PAGE NO. 13 OF 13
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARD SPECIFICATION CJ 24TMSS.Q1, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METALLIC CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS

-----
SEC Purchase Order
No. or Contract No. Date: _
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with 1.0. No. _
REFERENCE
Applicable industry standard *

4.2 Design Criteria
Tray designation *
Working load capacity (kg/m) *
Safety factor 1.5
Maximum deflection (rom) 12
4.2 Materials
Type of material (AI/Steel)
Type of protection
a) If aluminum alloy,
b) If carbon steel,
'A '- SEC SPECIFIED DATAIPARAMETER.

'B'- BIDDERlSUPPLIERlVENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATA/PARAMETERS.
(*)- DAT AlPARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER!
~
, =::2~4T;;';M~SS~0:;;1R::;:OIY=BQ:;========;:='===;=:===;=::===:=~=:==========::=:=::=::=:=:=::==:=::::::::::
Date of Approval: March 18,2006 PAGE NO. 11 OF 13
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ 24-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.4 Fabrication
Type of Cable Tray (Ladder, Trough, Solid

Bottom, Channel) LN/D~R
Rung spacing for ladder type tray (mm) *

Minimum thickness of material (mm) 2
Span length (mm) *

Moment ofIneria (mm") *
Section modulus for two side rails (mnr') *
Are Cable Barriers Required? ~~/~
Finish touch up *
24TMSS01 ROIYBQ PAGE NO. 12 OF 13

7.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:

B. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERlVENDORJSUPPLIERJ

CONTRACTOR:

Name ofthe Company


authorized
epresentative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
24TMSS01 RO/YBQ Date of Approval; March 18, 2006 PAGE NO. 13 OF 13

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:::J 31-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
RELAY AND CONTROL PANEL

-----
No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with J.O. No. --0--=-=---_--0- _
REFERENCE
Applicable industry standards *

4.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REOillREMENTS
4.1 Fabrication
Degree of protection IP41
Panel Dimension in rom (W x D x H)
ABTS/APTS Panel *
RTCC/AVC Panel *
CB Control Panel *
Bus Coupler and Bus Section Panel *
Synchronising Panel *
Mosaic CB Control Panel (if
*
applicable)
Panels other than above (if applicable) *
'A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATAIPARAMETER

~ VENDOR/CONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'.
31TMSS01 RO/KVJ Date of Approval: February 22, 2006 PAGE NO. 26 OF 30

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION \J 31-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.2 Miscellaneous electrical requiremen~ "2.. 2..-. J1'2 "1

Auxiliary Power Supply AC (Vac\. A s ''2>?>o
(oR) 1'2.:2-<:" _
Voltage Range
ItPf'L \LA BLf) + \
- 0
"I "
Auxiliary Power Supply DC (Vdc 4 \\0 /12...5
(A~ J\PPLI<AB.O ~& -I'2.11eV' lIoVDe
Voltage Range q 0 - 140 fey I 2.J5 VJ)C
Rated CT Secondary (A) lor 5
120 \I i 2-0
Rated VT Secondary (V) '6" " ~
Indication lamps (LED type) l.ED
4.3 Terminal Blocks
Type of Terminal Blocks

(Vendor to provide literature or catalogue) *
4.4 Relays, Meters and Instruments
Complete list of the required Protective

Relay, Meters and Instruments Provided? * YeslNo
Drawing Attachments:
a. Relay and Metering One-line Diagram * YeslNo
b. Front and Rear Panel Layout * YeslNo
c. Rear Panel Wiring! Interconnection

* YeslNo
Block Diagrams
Technical literature or Catalogs of all

Required Relays, Meters and Instruments * YeslNo
Provided?
4.5 Wiring
Type of insulated wire * YeslNo

31TMSS01ROIKVJ Date of Approval: February 22,2006 PAGE NO. 27 OF 30
4<: c..oN'R'K,,n-,~ Tt:> V{;~\FY FOP. T;:Aui AtJ Y f"'oL\.OW
AS A v'A\"~B i.--B IN EX\5TIN 6- .srs:
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATlON<:J 31TMSS-01, Rev. 0
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.6 Grounding
Size of Copper Ground Bus (mmi) 150
Size of Copper Ground Conductor (mnr') 95
4.7 Mimic Bus Diagram

,/
Mimic bus diagram required? Yes_
Mimic bus material YeslNo
4.8 Annunciator system
Annunciator system required
5.1 RTCC Panels
Digital Voltmeter required on HV side (VT

available)
rJ~esIN 0
Additional equipment/devices required?

YeslNo
If yes, List these
5.2 Control Switches
Type or Model No. *

Contact Ratings:
Current (A)
Number of Contacts
~ Number of Shipping Section *
'* LV!""'\"" ~"'CTOr-

31TMSS01 ROIKVJ f) . Date of Approval: February 22, 2006
Fo~ EAc::...H S/~ A.N D poL-LOW
ro \/1?R.\fY
PAGE NO. 28 OF 30
A>
AvA\l-ABU~' IN ~\s,lN& S/5
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
6.0 OPTIONAL OR SPECIAL TESTS REQUIREMENTS (if any)
~
. ~31~TM;::::S:;:S===01=:::R~01KV:::=:=:=J========:=======:=================
Date of Approval: February 22, 2006 PAGE NO. 29 OF 30
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:


CONTRACTOR:

Name ofthe Company


authorized
representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
ofthe Company &
Date
31TMSS01RO/KVJ PAGE NO. 30 OF 30

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:::J 31-TMSS02, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
AUXILIARY ACmC PANELS

-----
No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with J.O. No. Il CM 0\0

pTS - --'- _
REFERENCE
4.1 Dead front

endlMulti-
Main distribution board
cubicle
assembly
Mounting of sub-distribution Boards VFloor~
Tie box (for 48V DC Telcom applications
Only)
No. of DC distribution metering and low
voltage disconnect unit
4.2 Rating
Auxiliary power supply voltage (Vac)

Operating range
* 3 cg 0/ "Z,.'"LO
10 %
Auxiliary power supply voltage (Vdc)
Operating range
*" I' 0 Ii .2.5
*
4.3 Enclosure
For AC system
Panel dimensions (mm)
Width *
'A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATAJPARAMETER.
'B'- BIDDERISUPPLIERIVENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAJPARAMETERS.
Ah
(*)- DATAJPARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER!
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION ~ 31TMSS-02, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
AUXILIARY ACIDC PANELS
REFERENCE
Depth *
Height *
For DC system
Panel dimensions (mm)
Width *
Depth *
Height *
Degree of protection IP41
No. of main panels (ACIDC) *

No. of sub-distribution panel boards
(ACIDC)
*
Cable entry (ToplBottom) BC1TTOM
4.4 Circuit Breakers
No. of outgoing AC circuits of
Main Distribution Panel :I<

Sub Distribution Panel
Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)

*
ACBmake *
ACBtype *
Country of Manufacture *
Catalogue No. *
Nominal Rating (V) *
Amp. Capacity (A) *
Short Circuit Interrupting Capacity
Symmetrical(kA) *
Asymmetrical (kA) *
Duration (Sec.) *
~=;3::=1T;::M::;:S:;;::SO;::;1~RO;:;:/I<:V=::=:=:=J========:==:=:======:::::::==================
Date of Approval: May 30, 2006 PAGE NO. 23 OF 29
lr--------------------
I
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPEC,FICATION <::.J 31-TMSS.Q2, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
AUXILIARY AC/DC PANELS
REFERENCE
Circuit Breakers (continued)
Operating Mechanism
(MechanicalJElectrical) *
Fuses provided? * Yes/No

Fuse type *
Catalogue No *
Closing coil
Rated voltage (Vde) *
VA burden *
Operating range (Vde) *
Tripping coil
VA burden *
Spring charging motor
VA burden *
Closing time (ms) *
Opening time (ms) *
Number of Auxiliary contacts
NO contacts *
NC contacts *
Auxiliary contacts provided for Alarm y;'s~
Number of NO contacts *
Number ofNC contacts *
Trip ~;mc
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
MCCB make *
~ 31TMSS01RO/KVJ Date of Approval: May 30, 2006 PAGE NO. 24 OF 29

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <::.J 31-TMSS02, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <::J 31TMSS-02, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.4 Circuit Breakers (Continued)
MCBtype *
Catalogue No. *
Nominal Rating (V)
AC voltage (V ae)
DC voltage (V de)
Ampere Capacity (A)

AC 15/20
DC 15/20
Short Circuit Interrupting Capacity

Symmetrical (kA) *
Asymmetrical (kA) *
Duration (Sec.) *
Auxiliary contacts provided for Alarm
4.5 Dry type transformer
Rating (kVA) *
Type of insulation *
Voltage ratio *
No. of taps on secondary side *
Range of taps *
Vector group Dynll
4.6 Busbars
Rated voltage (V)

AC voltage (V nTIs) *
DC voltage (V de) *
Current (A) *
Short time current for 1 sec. (kA) *
~ Size of busbar (rom x mm) *
31TMSS01ROIKVJ I R .oJ Dale of -:,-,Pproval: May 30,2006 .. I P.f.GE NO. 26 OF 29
*c.ot.JTRAcTOR.. TO vt: 11=-, FDf< ~ALH ~/.s AND Fo t- \..0 v'-' p.s,
AV/Jt..I\..-ABLE \rJ Elt'IST)!'JG' ~(J,.
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <::::J 31-TMSS02, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
AUXILIARY ACIDC PANELS
REFERENCE
Busbars (Continued)
Number of busbars *
Material of busbar *
4.7 Relays, Meters, Instruments & Contactors
Complete list of the required protective

Relay and DC contactors provided * YeslNo
Drawing Attachments
Relay one line diagram * YeslNo
Panel layout * YeslNo
Technical literature or catalogues of all

required and DC contactors provided * YeslNo
Relays
Make *
Type *
ACMeters
KWH meter
Range *
Make *
ACAmmeter
Range *
Make *
Accuracy Class I
AC Voltmeter
Range *
Make *
Accuracy Class I
DC Meters (for Distribution and Sub

distribution panels)
DC Ammeter
4; Range
31TMSS01ROIKVJ
*
Date of Approval; May 30, 2006 PAGE NO. 27 OF 29
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:J 31-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION 'A' 'B' 'c
4.7 Relays (Continued)
Make *
Accuracy Class I
DC Voltmeter
Range *
Make *
Accuracy Class I
DC Meters (For Telecom/commWlication

panels)
DC Ammeter
Range *
Make *
Accuracy Class I
DC Voltmeter
Range *
Make *
Accuracy Class I
4.8 Instrument Transformers
CT secondary rating (A) SA/IA
Accuracy Class
Metering 0.5
Protection *
4.10 Wiring and terminal blocks
Type of insulated wire *

Type of terminal blocks *
(Vendor to provide literature or catalogue)
4.12 Grounding
Size of copper ground bus (mm x mm) *
Type of ground clamp or Conductor *
~.
Size of ground conductor (mnr') *
Date of Approval: May 30, 2006 PAGE NO. 28 OF 29
31TMSS01ROIKVJ
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:::.J 31-TMSSoOZ. Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
AUXILIARY AC/DC PANELS
A. ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL INFOR1v1ATION OR FEATURES TO BE FURNISHED BY

SEC:


CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
cA~~=============
- 31TMSS01RO/KVJ Date of Approval: May 30, 2006 PAGE NO. 29 OF 29
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION G 31-TMSS-06, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
TERMINAL BLOCKS

------
No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with lO. No. p-rs- t \ C/'AO\ D _
REFERENCE
4.1 Terminal Block Make *

TypelModel No. *
Catalogue Enclosed Yes
Comparative Tracking Index (CTI) ~200

Creepage distance (rom) 8
Material group per IEC 60947-1 *
A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATAIPARAMETER.

'B'- BlDDERJSUPPLIERNENDORJCONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATA/PARAMETERS.
(*)- DATA/PARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BlDDERJSUPPLIERJ
VENDORJCONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'.
~
. ;"3:='1T:::'M;:;S~SO:::=6R==-0:::=/K::::SB========~;:::=;;;:;;::;:;:='::::;r.=:;;:;i91':"':=.5'~~============
Dale ofApproval: 31 August, 2009 PAGE NO. 6 OF 8
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION ~ 31-TMSS-06, Rev. 0
6 DATA SCHEDULE
TERMINAL BLOCKS
REFERENCE
Screw/Spring
Terminal Block Type loaded
CT Terminal Block -Disconnecting CT
Yes
shorting terminal with ground link
VT Circuits Sliding Link
Spare Terminals per Terminal Block *
~=;3:::::1T;:M::::S':::SO:::6':::RO:::IK::::S:;:'B=======::;;;;;~~=::r.=;r:;"E~~~==============
Date of Approval: 31 August, 2009 PAGE NO. 7 OF 8
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
TERMINAL BLOCKS

SEC:

BIDDERNENDORISUPPLIERICONTRACTOR:
B. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERNENDORISUPPLIERI

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company & Date
~
=3""1""'TM==:S:==S:;;::06:==R:;;::O/;:;;KS:==B:=========;;:=~77"====;=;~==.'.'=='='===============
Dale of Approval: G. Month dd, yyyy PAGE NO. 8 OF 8
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATlONG===========
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METALCLAD SWITCHGEAR II kV, 13.8 kV, 33 kV OR 34.5 kV
SEC Enquiry No. Date: -----

No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with J.O. No. y -r..s ~ \\ C fV'\ 0 I0

REFERENCE
3.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND

STANDARDS *
Mean Altitude above Sea Level (m) <... I OD CJ 0'l _

Type of Upstream Neutral Grounding
"* RG:~R Sf:C1"lo.tJ-3
(Solidly grounded, resistance grounded) 0 F' P T..s
4.2 Switchgear Assembly
Switchgear Model Designation *

No. of Panels in the Switchgear for
Incoming Feeders
Outgoing Feeders
Bus tie Breaker(s)
Bus Riser/Metering
Station Service Transformer
Dedicated Feeder(s)
Material of Bus Support Insulators *

Switchgear Enclosure RAL Color Finish RAI 1113j
. Natural/
Type of cooling F d
If) I r: orce
~~C@ L cr- S~~Oe FGRNt:: vJ SWIT<:Hf,L;ARPP-NE"1.- sHAL.-I..8 J\1,ATCH&i)
'A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATAIPARAMETER. fJ./STlrJ6 .5>\!.J I, C.HG-f-AR P'ANEL-
'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIER/VENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAIPARAMETERS.
~ VENDOR/CONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'.
o 32TMSS01R01/KVJ Dale of Approval:June 30,2010 PAGENO. 26 OF 41
TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION CJ 32TM""', Rev.,
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METALCLAD SWITCHGEAR 11 kV, 13.8 kV, 33 kV OR 34.5 kV
REFERENCE
4.3 Ratings:
Nominal Voltage of Switchgear &

Breaker
Maximum Voltage Withstand 5 It{"l...\.. 1& &..

(Emergency conditions) of (kV nns) Bt>..c;~D oN
Switchgear & Breaker 'Dr RA"Tl lJG _
Design Ambient Temperature of

Switchgear & Breaker
I.2/50jlS Lightning Impulse

Withstand Voltage of Switchgear,
Breaker, ES, CT & VT: Si-tAl.l. ~p
To ground and between phases (kVpeak) BA s ~ D "rJ
Across Isolating Distance (to (kVpeak) OfR.ATIOG
applicable equipment)
Power Frequency Withstand

Voltage of Switchgear, Breaker,
ES,CT&VT:
To ground and between phases (kV
nns
) s>rLAl-L IS E
Across Isolating Distance (to f:;AS(:-V 0 N
applicable equipment) (kV nns) O"RA1"ING
-----
Power Frequency Withstand S.~f\I-L-lSb
(kV nns) ef:\s.6D o,..!!
Voltage of Auxiliary Circuits p~ RArTI tJ Gl.X- _
Rated Continuous Current of:

Switchgear Main Busbar (A nns)
Incomer Circuit (Anns)
Bus Tie Circuit (A nns)
Outgoing Feeder Circuit (Anns)
Metering Feeder circuit (A nns)
Station Service transformer
(Anns)
circuit
, 32TMSS01ROllKVJ Dale of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 27 OF 41
J
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .(j=~~~~~~~
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION 'A' 'B' 'c'
4.3 Contd.
Rated Short-time Withstand
Current of Switchgear, Circuit (kA rms)
Breaker, ES & CT 25v-A
Short-time current Duration (s) ) See.-
Rated Peak withstand current of

Switchgear, CB, ES & CT (2.6 x (kApeak)
Isc) 661<1>-
Internal arc fault current for 1(s) (kA)
4.4 Degree of Protection of Indoor Enclosure IP4X
Type of material used in metal-cladding *

Minimum thickness of enclosure (mm) *
Material of partition between bus bar
compartments *
Material of seal-off bushing at partition

between bus bar compartments *
4.5 Outdoor Enclosure
Is outdoor enclosure required? 'resINo
Degree of Protection of Outdoor Enclosure IP54
4.6 Busbar Conductors and Connections

Material of busbar (Cu)
Busbar insulation material *
Material of insulating covers for bus
bars and molded boots for bus bar *
connections
4.7 Power Circuit Breakers
Breaker Model Designation *
it 32TMSS01 ROllKVJ Date of Approval: June 30. 2010 PAGE NO. 28 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARD SPECIFICATION .(j ======================
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.7 Cont'd.
(SF6/
Breaker Insulation medium
Vacuum) *
Rated SF6 gas pressure (kPa) *

Breaker close lockout pressure
(kPa) *
(if applicable)
Breaker trip lockout pressure (if

applicable)
(kPa) *
Rated Symmetrical Interrupting

Current of Breaker at Nominal (kA nns) *
Voltage
Rated Peak withstand/ Making

Current of breaker
(kApeak) *
First Pole To Clear Factor of

1.5
breaker
Rated Interrupting Time of (Cycles/m

5/80
breaker s)
Arcing Time
Maximum (ms) *
Minimum (ms) *
Rated opening time (ms) *
Rated Closing Time (ms) *
Rated Reclosing Time (ms) *
Rated Close-Open Time (ms) *
Rated Permissible Tripping Delay (s) *
Minimum Opening Time of the
(ms)
first opening pole of the Breaker
~
32TMSS01 ROllKVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 29 OF 41
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ================
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METALCLAD SWITCHGEAR 1I kV, 13.8 kV, 33 kV OR 34.5 kV
REFERENCE
4.7 Cont'd.
Sf/AI-I. &. A!: PE/2
5:)(1 ST\N &-
O-0.3s-CO-
3min-CO
Rated Operation Sequence or
O-0.3s-CO-
15s-CO
Breaker Design XIR Ratio 17 (Min.)
Maximum DC resistance of the

power carrying circuit from
terminal to terminal of circuit
(Ohm) *
breaker
Temperature Rise at Rated

Continuous Current of circuit
breaker
Main Contacts (0C) *
Terminals (0C) *
Rated Out-of-Phase breaking
current capability
(kArms) *
Rated cable charging current

Breaking capability
(Arms) *
Rated back to back capacitor bank

Breaking current, if applicable
(Arms)
*.
Rated Capacitor Bank In-rush
(kApeak) 20
Making Current, if applicable
Rated Transient Recovery

Voltage for Terminal Fault
(kVpeak) *
Operating Mechanism:
Type *
Designation *
cfr. 32TMSS01ROllKVJ Date of Approval: June 30. 2010 PAGE NO. 30 OF 41

TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION .<::J================
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.7 Cont'd.
Spare Auxiliary Contacts
Total Number of normally Open (Nos) ...
Total Number of normally ...
(Nos)
Closed
Rated current (Adc) ...
Rated voltage (Vdc) ...
Number of close-open operations
that can be performed by the ...
mechanism before spring recharge
Time required to charge the ...

(s)
closing spring
Auto-reclose IN/OUT selector

switch Required for Outgoing '\1i8/No
Feeders?
Auto-reclose lockout reset push

button Required for Outgoing ,Cs/No
Feeders?
DC Control power
Breaker Spring Charging Motor

Rated voltage (V dc) 125
Range of operating voltage (Vdc) 90-140
Rated current (Ado) ...
Maximum starting Current (Ado) ...
Breaker closing Coil

Range of operating voltage (Vdo) 90-140
Breaker tripping Coil

Range of operating voltage (Vdo) 70-140
Grounding Trucks required for

bus bar grounding? (Specify their Yes/No
numbers)
~
32TMSS01 R01/KVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 31 OF 41
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION CJ ================
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.11 Low voltage compartment

Light Points
Voltage (V ac) 127
Power (Watts) *
Space Heaters
Voltage (Vac) 220
Power (Watts) *
Receptacles
Voltage (Vac) 127
Current (Amp) 15
Voltage (V ac) 220

Current (Amp) 10
LED/
Type of indicator
Lamp *
Relays, Meters, transducers and

Instrument (Specify details,
provide a complete list and
metering one-line diagram for
review)
Transducers
Input current (Amp) lor 5
Output current (rnA) 0-1
Accuracy ::::0.25
Analogi
Type of meter
Digital *
Metering Accuracy Class

Digital meters 0.5
Analog meters 1.0
Revenue meters 0.2
4.12 lEDs
lED type / Model number *
Make and country of origin *
it
32TMSS01R01IKVJ Dale of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 32 OF 41
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ =::::::==========~~~
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.12 Cont'd.
Functions included in the *

standard configurations
Supported functions *
Supported tools *
Optional functions *
Number of physical connection
in the standard configuration *
(analog and binary)
Supported Communication
interfaces and protocols *
Auxiliary Power
Mounting
Display
Operating temperature range
Type ofCT ...
Make & country of origin of CT *

Type of CT Insulation Class &
locations *
Rated Current of CT Secondary (A) lor 5
32TMSS01R01IKVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 33 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION CJ 3HMSS-o" RoY. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.13 Cont'd.
CT Continuous Thermal Rating
Single ratio CT 120%
Dual ratio CT 120%
Rated Short Time Withstand

Current of CT:
Thermal, Ith (kA rms) *
Dynamic (kApeak) _=:.:=._
2.6xlth
Short time thermal current

duration
(s) *
Rated parimary short circuit

current ofCT, (Ipse) *
Maximum Temperature Rise of

CT *
CT Ratio(s)
Incomer Circuit
Bus Tie Circuit
Out going Feeder Circuit

Protection
Metering
Station Transformer
Busbar Differential
Restricted Earth Fault
CT Burden(s) (VA)/Resistive
burden -Rb
Incomer Circuit (Ohms) *
Bus Tie Circuit (Ohms) *
Outgoing Feeder Circuit (Ohms) *
Station Transformer (Ohms) *
Dale of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 34 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION (j =====================
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION 'A' 'B' 'c'
4.13 Contd.
Bus Tie Circuit *
Outgoing Feeder Circuit *
sHA-L-L- Br;- *A~
Station Transformer
Metering Accuracy Class ofCT PE:f2- &'XtS 'T I '" &

Incomer Circuit *
Bus Tie Circuit *
Station Transformer *
CT Secondary winding
Resistance at 20C, Ret
(ohms) *
For class TPS CTs per IEC
Rated symmetrical short circuit

current factor (Kssc) *
Dimensioning parameter (K) *

Excitation limiting secondary
Voltage, Ual
(Volts) *
Accuracy limiting secondary

exciting Current, Ial
(rnA) *
Secondary excitation current, Imag

at half excitation limiting (rnA) *
secondary voltage
For class Cor K CTs per IEEE I

Class P CTs per IEC
CT Magnetizing current, l mag (rnA) *

CT Knee point voltage, Vk/
Secondary limiting e.m.f
(Volts) *
Voltage Transformer
tt *
Type of construction
32TMSS01ROllKVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 35 OF 41
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .<:.J 'HMS"", Roo, 0'
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.13 Cont'd.
Insulation Class *
Winding Material. (Cu) *
Rated Voltage Factors *
Rating of Current Limiting Fuse
(Arms) 3
on VT Primary
VT Secondary MCB/Fuse current (A) *

rating ~il:J /bE: PR.vIOE.O
rGJR Ao::..H ~/'::.
VT Secondary Voltage (V rms) 0.<1>/[:3
Extended tap Voltage ofVT (V rms) I'#r- 0

VT Voltage Marked Ratio *
VT Burden (VA)
VT Accuracy Class
0.2/3P or 0.5/3P
(MeteringlRelaying)
Accuracy class to be selected as
per Project! Design requirement
4.18 External Cabling (Details to be provided by

the main Contractor) * Yes/No
Type of termination Bolted
Power Cable Details:

Type of insulation ~l.--Pt
Voltage class (kV rms) 151<v
Incomer Circuit
No. of cable/phase No ...
Conductor material (Cu/Al) Ci./
Area of Cross section (rnrrr') &30
~2TMSS01 R01/KVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 36 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARD SPECIFICATION <:J=========================
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.18 Cont'd.
Out going feeder

No. of cable/phase No *
Conductor material (Cu/Al) C\)
Area of Cross section (mrn'') 63(;1
Station Service Transfomer-I
Conductor material (Cu/Al) <,
Area of Cross section
Station Service Transfomer-2

(mnr')
""
Conductor material (Cu/AI) -,
Area of Cross section (mrrr') S.
4.19 Forced cooling
Number offans Nos *

Rated voltage of'fams) Va<; 127/220
Rated power offan(s) W *

Fan(s) operating condition
Switchgear Load current A *
Switchgear Temperature (if
applicable)
C *
Switched delay for fan

operation
Re-settable delay range (s) *
Alarms
Fan failure
overload * YesINo
No load * YesINo
Elapsed time for operation
offan * YesINo
~
32TMSS01R01JKVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO, 37 OF 41
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .~=~,,;,,;;;~~~~~
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.20 Grounding
(mmx
Copper grounding bus size *
mm)
Method of busbar grounding *

Bonding of hinged doors (mnr') ::::10
Current of grounding switch and (kA rms)
bus '2-5-
Short-time current Duration (s) (
4.21 Accessories
Adjustable trolley * YeslNo
Portable device for CB trans. * YeslNo
Relay Test Plug * YeslNo
Test jumper cable * YeslNo
High voltage test plug * YeslNo
Storage box for test plug * YeslNo
Manual operation handle for
CB&ES * YeslNo
Special tools for CBlRelay
maintenance * YeslNo
Recommended Clearances:
In front of the Switchgear (mm) *
At rear of the Switchgear (mm) *
Panel Dimensions (H x D x W)
Incoming Feeder Panel (mm) *

Outgoing Feeder Panel (mm) *
feeder Panel
(mm) *
Bus Tie Panel (mm) *

Bus Riser/Metering Panel (mm) *
~ 32TMSS01ROllKVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 201O PAGE NO. 38 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION .<::J 32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
Contd.
Panel Weight:
Incoming Feeder Panel (kgs.) *
Outgoing Feeder (kgs.) *
feeder
(kgs.) *
Bus Tie Panel (kgs.) *

Bus riser/Metering Panel (kgs.) *
Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 39 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION (J ,>-TMSS..', Rov. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
5.0 TESTS
Optional or Special Test

Requirements (if any)
~
''==::~~~~=======O;:====:=:=====;===:===:='=============;;;:;:;;:FTii;;:::=;:;c::;<;==n
32TMSS01R01/KYJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO, 40 OF 41
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION <::J '2-TMSS"', R.v. 0'
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:
\6.~jLV SWl"'{'t..HG-E.A~ S4l.A-lL- BE "'sV/T,Af>LE FO~ (APAcITIJb
S""'ITCf.( I N & AND f3,ACiL T D e.Ac K.. S\,v ITC j-t I tJ G (AfJA B I /...IT Y


CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
Representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
32TMSS01R01/KVJ Dateof Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 41 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARe SPECIFICATION <::::J 32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METALCLAD SWITCHGEAR 11 kV, 13.8 kV, 33 kV OR 34.5 kV -

SEC Enquiry No. Date: - - - - -

No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with lO. No. --' P .,-s_\\=---_-'--

efV\ 0 \ e> _
REFERENCE

STANDARDS
*
Mean Altitude above Sea Level (m) '-1000

flFf"t:P- S&:TlcJ-,l-3
Type of Upstream Neutral Grounding p'T s
of
(Solidly grounded, resistance grounded) P5;15TANC
GI-?0N Of;D
4.2 Switchgear Assembly
Switchgear Model Designation *

No. of Panels in the Switchgear for
Incoming Feeders
Outgoing Feeders
Bus tie Breaker(s)
Bus RiserlMetering
Dedicated Feeder(s)
Material of Bus Support Insulators *

Switchgear Enclosure RAL Color Finish **
R:A.1:: 5"es2
. NaturnV
Type of coolmg Force d
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:::.J "-TMSS"', Rev, .,
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.3 Ratings:
Nominal Voltage of Switchgear &

Breaker (kV nns) .33 K. V
Maximum Voltage Withstand
(Emergency conditions) of
Design Ambient Temperature of

l.2/S01ls Lightning Impulse

Withstand Voltage of Switchgear,
Breaker, ES, CT & VT:
To ground and between phases (kV pealJ
Across Isolating Distance (to
(kVpeak) ~
*' ~-f\
**
applicable equipment)

Voltage of Switchgear, Breaker,
ES,CT&VT:
To ground and between phases (kV nns) i-.**
Across Isolating Distance (to
applicable equipment) (kV
nns
) ***
Voltage of Auxiliary Circuits
Rated Continuous Current of:

Switchgear Main Busbar (Arms)
Incomer Circuit (Arms)
Bus Tie Circuit (Anns)
Outgoing Feeder Circuit (Anns ) I '2 E50 A
Metering Feeder circuit (Arms)
Station Service transformer
(A nns)
circuit
~ 32TMSS01R01/KVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 27 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION \J 32TMSS-01, Rey, .,
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.3 Contd.
Current of Switchgear, Circuit (kA rms)
Breaker, ES & CT '2.5 K..A
Short-time current Duration (s) I Set.
Rated Peak withstand current of
Switchgear, CB, ES & CT (2.6 x (kApeak)
Isc) bG~A
Internal arc fault current for l(s) (kA)
4.4 Degree of Protection of Indoor Enclosure IP4X
Type of material used in metal-cladding *

Minimum thickness of enclosure (mm) *
Material of partition between bus bar
compartments *
Material of seal-offbushing at partition

between bus bar compartments *
4.5 Outdoor Enclosure
Is outdoor enclosure required? ~o
Degree of Protection of Outdoor Enclosure IP54
4.6 Busbar Conductors and Connections

Material of busbar (Cu)
Busbar insulation material *
Material of insulating covers for bus
bars and molded boots for bus bar *
connections
4.7 Power Circuit Breakers
Breaker Model Designation *
~ 32TMSS01 R01/KVJ Dale of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 28 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:J=========
32TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.7 Cont'd.
(SF6/
Breaker Insulation medium
Vacuum) *
Rated SF6 gas pressure (kPa) *

Breaker close lockout pressure
(if applicable)
(kPa) *
Breaker trip lockout pressure (if

applicable)
(kPa) *
Rated Symmetrical Interrupting

Current of Breaker at Nominal (kAnns) *
Voltage
Rated Peak withstand! Making

Current of breaker
(kApeak) *
First Pole To Clear Factor of

1.5
breaker
Rated Interrupting Time of (Cycles/m

5/80
breaker s)
Arcing Time
Maximum (ms) *
Minimum (ms) *
Rated opening time (ms) *
Rated Closing Time (ms) *
Rated Reclosing Time (ms) *
Rated Close-Open Time (ms) *
Rated Permissible Tripping Delay (s) *
Minimum Opening Time of the
first opening pole of the Breaker
(ms) *
~ 32TMSS01 R01fKVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 29 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION 'CJ =.;;;;.,.;.;;,~~~;,;;~=
32TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
5"'f\~~ e.&: ~ S
4.7 Cont'd. C~. '~"T I tJ G-
O-O.3s-CO-
3min-CO
Rated Operation Sequence or
O-0.3s-CO-
ISs-CO
Breaker Design X/R Ratio 17 (Min.)
Maximum DC resistance of the

power carrying circuit from
terminal to terminal of circuit
(Ohm) *
breaker
Temperature Rise at Rated

Continuous Current of circuit
breaker
Main Contacts (OC) *
Terminals (OC) *
Rated Out-of-Phase breaking
current capability
(kArms) *
Rated cable charging current

Breaking capability
(Arms) *
Rated back to back capacitor bank

(Arms)
Breaking current, if applicable
Rated Capacitor Bank In-rush 20

(kApeak)
Making Current, if applicable
Rated Transient Recovery

Voltage for Terminal Fault
(kVpeak) *
Operating Mechanism:
Type *
Designation *
~ 32TMSS01R01/KVJ Date of Approval: June 30,2010 PAGE NO. 30 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ====..;;,,;:,,;.~;,;,;:~=
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
MET ALCLAD SWITCHGEAR 11 kV, 13.8 kV, 33 kV OR 34.5 kV
REFERENCE
4.7 Cont'd.
Spare Auxiliary Contacts
Total Number of normally Open (Nos) *
Total Number of normally
(Nos) *
Closed
Rated current (A.!c) *
Rated voltage (Vdc) *
Number of close-open operations
that can be performed by the *
mechanism before spring recharge
Time required to charge the

closing spring
(s) *
Auto-reclose IN/OUT selector

switch Required for Outgoing SS/No
Feeders?
Auto-reclose lockout reset push

button Required for Outgoing ~/No
Feeders?
DC Control power
Breaker Spring Charging Motor

Rated voltage (Vdc) 125
Maximum starting Current (A.!c) *
Breaker closing Coil
Breaker tripping Coil
Grounding Trucks required for
bus bar grounding? (Specify their Yes/No
numbers)
~ 32TMSS01 R01/KVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 31 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:J ====::::::::::======~;,;;~=
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
. REFERENCE
4.11 Low voltage compartment

Light Points
Voltage (V.c) 127
Power (Watts) *
Space Heaters
Voltage (V.c) 220
Power (Watts) *
Receptacles
Voltage (v.c) 127
Current (Amp) 15
Voltage (v.c) 220

Current (Amp) 10
LED/
Type of indicator
Lamp *
Relays, Meters, transducers and

Instrument (Specify details,
provide a complete list and
metering one-line diagram for
review)
Transducers
Input current (Amp) lor 5
Output current (rnA) 0-1
Accuracy >0.25
Analog!
Type of meter
Digital *
Metering Accuracy Class

Digital meters 0.5
Analog meters 1.0
Revenue meters 0.2
4.12 IEDs
IED type / Model number *
1232TMSS01R011KVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 32 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION \J ================~=====
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION 'A' 'B' 'C'
SECTION NO.
4.12 Cont'd.
Functions included in the *

standard configurations
Supported functions *
Supported tools *
Optional functions *
Number of physical connection

in the standard configuration *
(analog and binary)
Supported Communication
interfaces and protocols
*
Auxiliary Power
Mounting
Display
Operating temperature range
Type ofCT *
Make & country of origin of CT *
Type of CT Insulation Class &
locations
*
Rated Current of CT Secondary (A) lor 5
~3::2::':TM~S;::;S:::0:;::1R:::07.1/:'::KV7.J========:':='='7:====:=:===::o:=::'='=========;~;;;=;;;~;;;;::;;;:;;::;:;:
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ=====~===
32-TM55-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.13 Cont'd.
CT Continuous Thermal Rating
Single ratio CT 120%
Dual ratio CT 120%
Rated Short Time Withstand

Current of CT:
Thermal, Ith (kAnns) *
Dynamic (kApeak) 2.6xIth
Short time thermal current

duration
(s) *
Rated parimary short circuit

current ofCT, (Ipse)
(kAnns) *
Maximum Temperature Rise of

CT
caq *
CT Ratio(s)
Incomer Circuit ~**
Bus Tie Circuit
Out going Feeder Circuit

Protection
Metering *~*
Station Transformer
Busbar Differential
Restricted Earth Fault
--
CT Burden(s) (VA)lResistive
burden -Rb
Incomer Circuit (Ohms) *
Bus Tie Circuit (Ohms) *
Outgoing Feeder Circuit (Ohms) *
Station Transformer (Ohms) *
Relaying Accuracy Class(es) of
CT
~ Incomer Circuit *
*~* R~FE"R PTS
32TMSS01R01/KVJ Date of Approval: June 30. 2010 PAGE NO. 34 OF 41
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .<:::::J =============
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDDLE
MET ALCLAD SWITCHGEAR 11 kV, 13.8 kV, 33 kV OR 34.5 kV
REFERENCE
4.13 Contd.
Bus Tie Circuit *
Stl ~....\.. BE" AS
Metering Accuracy Class of CT ff:R ey. \ST\ ,.J fir
Incomer Circuit *
Bus Tie Circuit *
CT Secondary winding
Resistance at 20C, Ret
(ohms) *
Rated symmetrical short circuit

current factor (Kssc) *
Dimensioning parameter (K) *

Excitation limiting secondary
Voltage, D al
(Volts) *
Accuracy limiting secondary

exciting Current, I a1
(rnA) *
Secondary excitation current, Irnag

at half excitation limiting (rnA) *
secondary voltage
For class C or K CTs per IEEE /

Class P CTs per IEC
CT Magnetizing current, I rnag (rnA) *

CT Knee point voltage, Vk1
Secondary limiting e.m.f
(Volts) *
Voltage Transformer
I), Type of construction

Make and country of origin
*
*
- 32TMSS01R01/KVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 35 OF 41
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:::J "-TMSS"', Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.13 Cont'd.
Insulation Class *
Winding Material. (Cu) *
Rated Voltage Factors *
Rating of Current Limiting Fuse

3
on VT Primary
VT Secondary MCB/Fuse current

rating
VT Secondary Voltage
Extended tap Voltage ofVT 12.0
VT Voltage Marked Ratio *

VTBurden (VA) \0 0
VT Accuracy Class
0.2/3P or O.S/3P
(Metering/Relaying)
Accuracy class to be selected as
per Project! Design requirement
4.18 External Cabling (Details to be provided by

the main Contractor) * YeslNo
Type of termination Bolted
Power Cable Details:

Type of insulation )(l-P'-
Voltage class (kV nns) '31\(.v
Incomer Circuit
Conductor material CLl _
(Cu/AI) _--,-----_
Area of Cross section (mm") b30
32TMSS01R01/KVJ Dale of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 36 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION \ ) =====================
32TMSS01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.18 Cont'd.
Out going feeder
Cv*
No. of cable/phase No
Conductor material (Cu/Al)
Area of Cross section (mm2) 63 0
Station Service Transfomer-l
Conductor material (Cu/Al) -,
(mm2)
Area of Cross section
Station Service Transfomer-2

'"
Conductor material (Cu/Al) -,
Area of Cross section (mnr') <,
4.19 Forced cooling
Number of fans Nos *

Rated voltage offan(s) v: 127/220
Rated power offan(s) W *

Fan(s) operating condition
Switchgear Load current A *
Switchgear Temperature (if
applicable)
C *
Switched delay for fan

operation
Re-settable delay range (s) *
Alarms
Fan failure
over load * YeslNo
No load * YeslNo
Elapsed time for operation
of fan * YeslNo
&: 32TMSS01R01/KVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 37 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION 'CJ===========~~,;,;;~=
32-TMSS-01, Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.20 Grounding
(mmx
Copper grounding bus size
mm) *
Method of busbar grounding *

Bonding of hinged doors (mnr) >10

Current of grounding switch and (kAnns)
bus ';2-6
Short-time current Duration (s) \
4.21 Accessories
Adjustable trolley * YeslNo
Portable device for CB trans. * YeslNo
Relay Test Plug * YeslNo
Test jumper cable * YeslNo
High voltage test plug * YeslNo
Storage box for test plug * YeslNo
Manual operation handle for YeslNo
CB&ES
*
Special tools for CBlRelay YeslNo
maintenance
*
Recommended Clearances:
In front of the Switchgear (mm) *
At rear of the Switchgear (mm) *
Panel Dimensions (H x D x W)
Incoming Feeder Panel (mm) *

Outgoing Feeder Panel (mm) *
feeder Panel
(mm) *
Bus Tie Panel (mm) *

Bus RiserlMetering Panel (mm) *
~ 32TMSS01R01/KVJ Date of Approval: June 30, 2010 PAGE NO. 38 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION \.J 32.TMSS-01, Rev,
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
Contd.
Panel Weight:
Incoming Feeder Panel (kgs.) *
Outgoing Feeder (kgs.) *
(kgs.) *
feeder
Bus Tie Panel (kgs.) *

Bus riserlMetering Panel (kgs.) *
32TMSS01 R01/KVJ Dale of Approval: June 3D, 2010 PAGE NO. 39 OF 41

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <::J '>oTMSS"', Rev. 01
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
5.0 TESTS


32TMSS01ROllKVJ
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARD SPECIFICATION <::::J '2-TMSS"', Rev. 0'
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:
32>KiI s- 1TC-i1 GEM 5HAI..1- B' $VI'f\I?I... F"f2. CAPAc iTlV8
5 vJ I TCI1\rJ6 AN 0 BAc\(: , 0 .EAGK. $~I-rq.(I tJ6 cA pAJ?1 1-1 T '(

BIDDERNENDORlSUPPLIERlCONTRACTOR:
C. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERlVENDORlSUPPLIERI

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
Representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
11 MS;:;S:::':0:;:;:1R:;:'01:7./'rN~J =======;~==;=;=::::='=":"":'~==~=========s'~~=J"i'~:n
=::'32;:;T7: Date of Approval: June 30, 2010
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .<::J 35-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SURGE ARRESTERS FROM 11 kV THROUGH 3S0kV NOMINAL

----
SEC Purchase Order
No.
or Contract No. Date: - - - -
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with lO. No . ....!F~T:.-:S=:..-._-....!\'....:.\_C...!.;V\~C>~\-=o:...- _

REFERENCE
SYSTEM DATA
Nominal System Voltage (kV)

(llkV, 13.SkV ,33 kV, 34.5kV , 69kV ,
11OkV, IISkV , 132kV ,230kV or 380kV) _
System Fault Current Level at

Rated System Voltage (kA)
Max. Duration of Ground Fault (ms)
System Neutral Grounding at Arrester

Point of Installation (Effectively,
Non-Effectively grounded)
'A'_ SEC SPECIFIED DATAIPARAMETER.

'B'_ BIDDER/SUPPLIERNENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAIPARAMETERS.
~35TMSS01RO/MSO Dale of Approval: October 10, 2007 PAGE NO.8 OF 13

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARD SPECIFICATION ~ 3S-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SURGE ARRESTERS FROM 11 kV THROUGH 380kV NOMINAL
REFERENCE
System Component(s) to be protected
Transmission Line
Surge Impedance (ohms) *
Length (kM) *
Underground Cable
Capacitance (IlF/kM) *
Length (kM) *
Capacitor Banks 3~J<-"
Capacitance (MVAR) 5 i I 0/ /5 tIIo/AR.
-----
Others
(Power Transformers,Reactors, GIS
etc.,attach details) *
BIL of Equipment to be protected (kVpeak) * _
3.0 APPLICABLE INDUSTRY STANDARD ----- *

4.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT
4.1 General
Type *
Model Designation *
Location (Indoor/Outdoor)
4.2 Performance Characteristics and Ratings
Rated Voltage (kVrms)
Line Discharge Class *

Dielectric Withstand for Housing
Lightning impulse withstand voltage,
with 1.2/50 IlS Waveform (kVpeak) *
Switching impulse withstand voltage with
250/2500IlS Waveform (for arresters with
rated voltage of200kV and above)
(kVpeak) *
One minute power frequency withstand
Voltage. (kVrms) *
Date of Approval: October 10, 2007 PAGE NO.9 OF 13
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARe SPECIFICATION .(j 35TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
Nominal Discharge Current (Lightning

Impulse Classifying Current) With 8/20 us
Waveform (kA) *
High Current Impulse Capability With
4/10 us Waveform ( kA peak) *
Long Duration Wave Withstand Capability
- Current (A) *
- Duration (ms) *
Maximum Lightning Impulse Residual
Voltage with 8/20 us Waveform(kVpeak)
at a Discharge (classifying) Current of :
- 5 kA *
-IOkA *
-20kA *
-30kA *
Maximum Switching Surge Residual
Voltage (kVpeak) at a Discharge Current of:
-0.5kA *
-1 kA *
-2kA *
- 3 kA *
Maximum Steep Current/Front-of-Wave
Residual Voltage Based on 11> 2 or 0.5 us
Waveform, as Applicable (kVpeak)
at a Discharge Current of :
- 10 kA *
-20kA *
Temporary over voltage capability(kVrms)
for:
- 1 second *
- 10 second *
Maximum R.I.V (uv) *
Maximum External Insulation Levels
~
Power frequency Dry Withstand Voltage
(kVrms) *
35TMSS01 RO/MSO Date of Approval: Oelober 10, 2007 PAGE NO. 10 OF 13
l
I
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ "-TMSS-.', Roy. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
Power frequency Wet Withstand Voltage
(kVrrns) *
Lightning Impulse Withstand Level
(kVpeak) *
Switching Impulse Withstand Level
(kVpeak) *
Leakage Current Through Arrester
at MCOV (rnA) *
Maximum Energy Absorption Capability
i) kj/kV of Arrester Rating *
ii) kj/kV of MCOV *
4.3 Construction
Pressure Relief Capability (rrns symmetrical)

High current, short duration (kA)
Low current, long duration (A) 600
Porcelain Housing
Color *
Creepage Distance (mm) *
Bending Failing Load (kN) *
Cantilever Strength min. (kN) *
Torsional Strength (kN) *
Compression Strength (kNm) *
No. of stacks in each unit *
Height (mm) *
Internal Pressure Required to Operate
Pressure Relief Device as a Percent of
Pressure Required to Burst Porcelain (%) *
Mounting Arrangement
Mode of mounting(Self
supportinglbracket mounting) *
Bolt circle diameter (mm) *
No. of holes *
Size of bolts (mm) *
Accessories
f);.
Scale range of the leakage Ammeter
(rnA) *
35TMSS01RO/MSO Date of Approval: October 10, 2007 PAGE NO. 11 OF 13
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .~ ".TMSS"1, Roy. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
Dia of the grading ring, if applicable

(mm) *
Material of the grading ring, if applicable
*
Terminals
Type Pad
Size (mrrr') *
Material (AI or CU) *
Grounding
Size (mm") *
Material *
MISCELLANEOUS
Minimum Clearance, Between Live

Parts and Earth Parts (mm) *
Minimum Permissible Centre to Centre
Distance Between Arresters (mm) *
Overall Height of Arrester (mm) *
Weight of Arrester (kg) *
f1:
., """'=-:=:-:=:~C:=:=========:=====================
35TMSS01RO/MSO PAGE NO. 12 OF 13
l
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:

B. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERIVENDORISUPPLIERJ

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
Representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
, 35TMSS01ROIMSO Date of Approval: October 10. 2007 PAGE NO. 13 OF 13

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION <:::J '7-TMSS', Rov
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
LV Circuit Breakers

-----
No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with J.O. No. P""r..s ,- \\ eM 0 \~
REFERENCE

STANDARDS *
Mean Altitude above Sea Level (m) /: I0 e-o

Type of Upstream Neutral Grounding
(Solidly grounded, resistance grounded)
4.2 Miniature circuit-breakers (MCB)
Mounting VerticallHorizontal
Method of mounting *
Number of poles 1/2/3/4
Degree of protection *
Pollution degree *
Type of terminals *
Rated operational voltage (Ue) (V.eNde) *
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) (V.eNde) *
37TMSS03RO/MAS Dale of Approval: March 31, 2010 PAGENO. 10 OF 17

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS sr ANDARD SPECIFICATION <:J 37-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
LV Circuit Breakers
REFERENCE
4.2 Contd.
Rated impulse (kVp) *

Rated frequency (Hz) 60
6,10,13,16,
Rated current (A.c/~c)
20,25,32
Maximum ambient temperature C *

Rated current at max. ambient
temperature
(Aac/Adc) *
Range of instantaneous tripping

current *
Rated (ultimate) short circuit

capacity & voltage
(kA)& V *
Service short circuit capacity (kA) *

Connectable cross section of
copper conductor for screw-type *
terminals
Service life at rated load (No.) >20000
Auxiliary contacts
Number of NO contacts (No.)
Number ofNC contacts (No.)
Number of change over contacts (No.)
Type of tripping device *

Additional tripping device if
required * Yes/No
Details of the tripping device *
~ 37TMSS03RO/MAS Date of Approval: March 31, 2010 PAGE NO. 11 OF 17
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECI"CAT10N<:::J 37-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
LV Circuit Breakers
REFERENCE
4.3 Molded case circuit breakers

MCCBs)
Verticall
Mounting Horizontal
Pollution degree *
Type of terminals *
Rated operational voltage (Ue) (VaJVde) *
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) (VaJVde) *
Rated current (AaJAde)
Maximum ambient temperature C *

temperature
(Aae/Ade) *

current *

capacity
(kA) *

fl: terminals
37TMSS03RO/MAS
Date of Approval: March 31, 2010 PAGE NO. 12 OF 17
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPEC'FICATION ~ 37-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
LV Circuit Breakers
REFERENCE
SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION 'At 'B' 'C'
4.3 Contd.
Service life at rated load (No.) ~20000
Auxiliary contacts
Number of NO contacts (No.) ""/(
Number ofNC contacts (No.) ~
Number of change over contacts
Carriage locking facility for

(No.)
*
withdrawable circuit-breakers * Yes/No
Type oftripping device *

Additional tripping device if
required
'" Yes/No
Details of additional tripping

device *
Protections
Over load & SC Yes/No

Over voltage Yes/No
Under voltage Yes/No
Earth fault Yes/No
Reverse current flow (if
Yes/No
required)
Unbalance phase voltage (if
Yes/No
required)
Metering quantities
Voltage Yes/No
Current Yes/No
Power Yes/No
Energy Yes/No
Power factor Yes/No
f2;====~~=.=::==.=:::==::========:============
37TMSS03ROIMAS Oateof Approval: March 31, 2010 PAGE NO. 13 OF 17
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICAn O N e : ; 37-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
LV Circuit Breakers
REFERENCE
4.4 Air Circuit-breaker (ACBs)
Vertical!
Mounting
Horizontal
PoIlution degree *
Type of terminals *
Rated operational voltage (Ue) (V.JVdc) *
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) (V.JVdC) *
Rated current (A.JActc) *

Maximum ambient temperature (0C) *
temperature
(A.JAdc) *

current *

capacity
(kA) *

~
terminals
37TMSS03RO/MAS Date of Approval: March 31, 2010 PAGE NO. 14 OF 17

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARD SPECIFICATION .CJ 37-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
LV Circuit Breakers
REFERENCE
4.4 Contd.
Service life at rated load (No.) >20000
Auxiliary contacts
Number of NO contacts (No.)

*
Number ofNC contacts
Number of change-over contacts

(No.)
(No.)
*'-*
Carriage locking facility for
withdrawable circuit-breakers * Yes/No
Type of tripping device *

Additional tripping device if * Yes/No
required
Details of additional tripping

device
Protections
Overload & SC Yes/No
Over voltage Yes/No
Under voltage Yes/No
Earth fault Yes/ No
Reverse current flow (if required) Yes/No
Unbalance phase voltage (if
Yes/No
required)
Metering quantities
Voltage Yes/No
Current Yes/No
Power Yes/No
Energy Yes/No
Power factor Yes/No
~======:::=.==:=:=~~=====
37TMSS03RO/MAS Dale of Approval: March 31, 2010 PAGENO. 15 OF 17
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:; 37-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
LV Circuit Breakers
REFERENCE
5.0 TESTS

37TMSS03RO/MAS Date of Approval: March 31, 2010 PAGE NO. 16 OF 17

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION ~ .7-TMSS, Rev
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
LV Circuit Breakers

SEC:

C. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERJVENDORJSUPPLIERJ

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
Representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
~===::==;===============
.,..>
37TMSS03ROIMAS Date of Approval: March 31. 2010 PAGE NO. 17 OF 17
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ 38-<MSS"3, Rev. 01
9.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT
SEC Enquiry No. Date: - - - - - -

No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with J.O. No. _PI'> ,- I (~C'="'.L(V)--,--_D_l0 _

REFERENCE

5.0 FUNCTIONAL REOUIREMENTS
5.2 Master Communication Protocols
Protocol #1 : (PI) IEC-60870- (li pclnJ

5-101
Protocol #2: (P2) IEC-60870-{"...p "'? 1
5-104 tJP- '~/ _
2 --'---_-L_
Others (Px-Specify)
Existing Protocol
A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATA/PARAMETER.

'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERNENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAlPARAMETERS.
(*)- DATA/PARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER/
~
=3==ST:::::M""S""SO==3R""1==/K""SB:========:;;;=;:=;=;;===='=O;;::;::;;:::=:::;=::;;;;;;;;;=============
Dateof Approval: 31 August, 2009 PAGE NO. 42 OF 47
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARO SPECIFICATION CJ 3a-TMSS..3, Rev. 01
9.0 DATA SCHEDULE

REFERENCE
5.3 Maintenance Ports
RS 232D Maint. Port 1

IOOBaseT Maint. Port 1
Others (e.g. USB, RS 485)
6.0 DESIGN REOUIREMENTS
Manufacturer *
Type (Multi/Single CPU)
Model No. *
6.1.4 Master Communication Interface &
Protocol Scheme for Each Main CPU:
Interface, Port, Protocol # RS232D, 1st , PI

Interface, Port, Protocol # RS232D,2nd
Interface, Port, Protocol # IOOBaseT, 1st, P2
Interface, Port, Protocol # 100BaseT, 2nd
Interface, Port, Protocol # 100BaseT, 3rd
Interface, Port, Protocol # RS485,I st
6.3.7 RTU Control Disable/Enable

Bit/Contact per Indication
6.5 RTU I/O Configuration & SCADA

Points Requirement
6.5.1 Analog Input (Type: DC/AC

Unit: Amp/Volt)
Unit, Type, Scaling Resistor IOmA,DC, '1

Quantity
Unit, Type, Scaling Resistor 4-20mA,DC, '1

Quantity
6.5.2 Analog Output (Type: DC/AC

Unit: Amp/Volt)
Quantity, Type, Unit

Quantity, Type, Unit
38TMSS03R1IKSB Date of Approval: 31 August, 2009 PAGE NO. 43 OF 47

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <::J 38-TMSS""', Rev. 01
9.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
6.5.3 Staus/Alarm Input(Function-Std/Acc.SOE,
Type-IC or 2C/Elect. Form AIB/C)
Fun., Type, Form:

Qty.
Fun., Type, Form:
Qty.
Fun., Type, Form:
Qty.
6.5.4 Accumulator Input (Independent Module)
Qty., Form (AlC):
6.5.5 Control Output (SBO)
Qty. of Paired Points" Rating, Misc.

Specs
No. ofContctslPoles per Pt.
Qty. of Single Points" Rating, Misc.

Specs
Qty. of Digital, Electronic Points, Misc.

Specs
6.5.6 RaiselLower Pulse Output
Qty. of Paired Points" Rating, Misc.

Specs
Qty. of Single Points" Rating, Misc.

Specs
Qty. of Digital, Electronic Points, Misc.

Specs
38TMSS03R1JKSB Date of Approval: 31 August, 2009 PAGE NO. 44 OF 47

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARe SPECI.,CATlON \J 38-TMSS-D3, Rev. 01
9.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
6.5.7 MUlti-Type Iput/Output
Contact Input
Contact Output
Analog Input
Analog Output
6.6.1 Master Communication Interface,

Device & Cable Specifications
(e.g.: 100BaseT, Switch, Cat.5)
Master Communication 1:
Master Communication 2:
6.6.2 I/O Communication Interface,

Device & Cable Specifications:
(E.G. RS485, Contlr., UTP)
1/0 Communication 1:
1/0 Communication 2:
6.8 Power Supply
Source DC Voltage
DC Voltage Tolerance
Back Up Source AC Voltage

AC Voltage Tolerance 5%
No.ofPhaseslWires 1 P,2W
Frquency Tolerance *
Tap Changer Power Supply
Qty. (# ofTransf. Pots.) *
Constant Output (VIA) 5Vdc
Max. Rating per PIS l50mA
DI Wetting supply
Voltage output
Current Rating
38TMSS03RlIKSB Dale of Approval: 31 August, 2009 PAGE NO. 45 OF 47

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .<.:J 38-TMSS-03, Rev. 01
9.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
6.10 RTU Enclosure Type
Enclosure Type
Width (mm) 600-1200
Depth (mm) 600-1200
Height (mm) 2200-2285
Cable Entry (Bottom/Top)
RTU to IFCIRTU Distance (mm) *
Field Interfce Cabimnet (IFC)
Width (mm) 600-1200
Depth (mm) 600-1200
Height (mm) 2200-2285
Cable Entry (Bff)
Cabinet with Exhaust Fans

No.offans
Top/Side Fans:
Heater & Fan Voltage Rating
7.4 Special Tests
38TMSS03R1/KSB Date of Approval: 31 August, 2009 PAGE NO. 46 OF 47

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION.<::J ' TMSS"", Rev. 01
9.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:

B. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERNENDORJSUPPLIERJ

CONTRACTOR:

ofEquipmentlMaterial Contractor
Name of the Company


authorized representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
~
. ~3:':'8T=M7:S:::S=03:=R':':1/K:':':S:::B;==========;;;;:E=:~~~~~:;=;;;:;;;c================~
DateofApproval: 31 August, 2009 PAGE NO. 47 OF 47
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ 38.TMSS-05, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEMS

----
SEC Purchase Order
No. or Contract No. Date:
----
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with J.O. No. l\ (ffl

PT...5 - -'-'- 0\(') _
REFERENCE

4.1 General
Annunciator System Model No.1 Catalogue

No. *
No. of Annunciator Units
Marshaling Kiosk Required? Yes/No
Drawing Attachments:
a. Panel Layout Yes
b. WiringlInterconnection Block Diagrams Yes
First out Feature Required? ~s/No

4.2 Alarm Logic Unit
Operating Temperature Range (0C) *

Response Time (ms) *

'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERNENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DAT AlPARAMETERS.
b... (*)- DATAIPARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER/
QJ.. VENDOR/CONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'.
38TMSS05ROiYBQ Date at Approval: August 6,2006 G PAGE NO. 17 OF 20

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION CJ 38-TMSS-05, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEMS
REFERENCE
4.3 Visual Display Unit
Width (mm) *
Height (mm) *
No. of Alarm Points
Window Size
Width (mm) *
Height(mm) *
Letter Size (mm) *
Arrangement of Alarm Display Windows
No. of Rows *
No. of Columns *
Programmable LED by (flashing rate/color) _
4.6 Additional annunciation alarms required? YeplNo

If yes, list the alarms:
Gt ~~~::==========~=:=:===:=:=:':==============
38TMSS05ROIYBQ Date of Approval: August 6, 2006 G PAGE NO. 18 OF 20
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARD SPECIFICATlON.(j -TMSS..., Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEMS
REFERENCE
SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION 'A' 'B' 'c
4.7 Power Supply
I~?
Nominal DC Voltage (Vdc) iI 0
DC Voltage Range
Minimum (Vdc)
Maximum (Vdc) 140
AC Backup Supply (Vac)
No.ofPhaseslWires
Rated frequency (Hz) 60Hz
Frequency variation range 0.5%
5.0 TESTS
Optional or Special Test Requirements (If

any)
3BTMSS05ROIYBQ Date of Approval: August 6, 2006 G PAGENO. 19 OF 20

TRANSMISSION MATERIALSSTANDARD SPECIFICATIONG a8-TMSSoOS, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEMS

SEC:

BIDDERlVENDORISUPPLIERICONTRACTOR:
C. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERIVENDORISUPPLIERI

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized epresentative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
ofthe Company & Date
38TMSS05ROIYBQ PAGE NO. 20 OF 20

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION(j 40-TM88-o2, Rev_ 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES

No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with J.O. No. PTS - II C/y\ 0 I0 _
REFERENCE
Type of Ammeter (Maximum Demand!

Instantaneous Ammeter)
System Voltage (AC)(kV)/connection '3 ~ l,.c.. \/_ ~.gi.<11

.s.v 8s. T A l1ot-J
Application /VI ET6R i 10 (.'-'+L....- _
Type Designation *
Manufacturer *
Dimension of face (mm x mm) *
Type (Moving iron or solid-state) *
CT Ratio
Indication Type (Analog or Digital) *

Scale Range (A)
Scale Deflection CO) *

'A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATA/PARAMETER.
'B'- BIDDERISUPPLIERlVENDORICONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAlPARAMETERS.
'CO- REMARKS SUPPORTING THE PROPOSED DEVIATION IN COLUMN 'B'.
40TMSS02RO/DB Dale of Approval: March 25, 2007 PAGE NO. 13 OF 27

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION .~ 40-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE
Display Character size (mm x mm) *

Demand Interval (minutes)
Frequency (Hz) *
Accuracy Class (Inst. rms/Demand) *
Power Consumption (VA) *
Material of the Meter Case *
Mounting Position *
Degree of protection of the
Meter Case (IP) *
Long duration overload
Current (A)/Duration (s) *
Short duration overload
Resolution (%) *
LAN Capability Yes.
Communication Protocol
Communication Speed (Baud Rate) N
Applicable Codes and Standards *
40TMSS02ROIDB Date of Approval: March 25, 2007 PAGE NO. 14 OF 27

r----------------------------------------------
I
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION~ 40-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
TRANSMISSION MATERIALSSTANDARD SPECIFICATION\.:) 40-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE
Type of Voltmeter (Instantaneous/

Synchronizing Double Voltmeter) lN5TAtJ TAN GoU<;.
-----
System Voltage (AC)(kV)/connection 33lr< vI-I] -,'jll.";

-"------
S\.lQ-s rATIO.JJ
Application fV\ Eo reA. \ N 6'"'-- _
Type Designation *
Manufacturer *
Dimension of face (mm x mm)
Type (moving iron or solid-state for

Inst. Voltmeter & moving coil for
Synch, Double Voltmeter) *
PT Ratio
Indication Type (Analog or Digital for

Inst. Voltmeter & Analog for
Synch, Double Voltmeter) *
Scale Range (kV)
Scale Deflection (0) *

Display Character size for
digital type indication (rom x mm) *
Frequency (Hz) *
Accuracy Class

Mounting Position *
40TMSS02RO/DB Date of Approval: March 25, 2007 PAGE NO. 16 OF 27

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARD SPECIFICATION \J 40-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE
Degree of protection ofthe

Meter Case (IP) *
LAN Capability
Communication Protocol tJA
Communication Speed (Baud Rate)
Impulse withstand voltage (kVpeak)
Power frequency withstand

Voltage (kVrms)
/;~=====:===:============
40TMSS02ROIDB Dale of Approval: March 25, 2007 PAGE NO. 17 OF 27
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION~ 40-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE
DC Voltmeter
System Voltage (V)!connection

rJA
Application
Type Designation *
Manufacturer *
Type (moving coil) *
Scale Range (A)! Scale Deflection (0) .-
Accuracy Class

Material ofthe Meter Case *
Mounting Position *
Meter Case (IP) *
Withstand voltage (kV) *
Long duration over-
Voltage (V)/Duration (s) *
Short duration over-
&
. 40TMSS02RO/DB Dateof Approval: March 25, 2007 PAGE NO. 1B OF 27
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE
Digital Power Demand Meter
System Voltage (AC)(kV)/connection

331<..\/ f. J313.d
s lJ BSTATI "N
Application M ~%R\ tJ 0 _
Type Designation *
Manufacturer *
Type (solid state) *
Impulse withstand voltage (kVpeak) -:;-O/3l.f _ _
Voltage (kVrms)
Connection
CT Ratio gEFf,e. PT'_S_ _

PT Ratio .- J.:> -
Indication Type *
Scale Range (V/A/MW/MVARJMVA) Ptff~ prJ- - - - -
Frequency (Hz) *
Accuracy Class (V/A/MW/MVAR/MVA) J?ff'ft pn _
Mounting Position *
40TMSS02ROIDB Date of Approval; March 25, 2007 PAGE NO. 19 OF 27
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARe SPECIFICATION ( ] 40-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE

Meter Case (IP) *
Provision for logging THD (total
harmonic distortion upto 25th harmonic)
in voltage and current on each phase
with time stamp and printing YeslNo
Provision for logging THD coincidental

MVAR at the time of maximum
MW with time stamp and printing YeslNo
Capability for combining MYA

demands of two feeders and
sending the alarm YeslNo
Auxiliary Supply Voltage (Vdc) *

Maximum demand indication
interval (min)
LAN Capability YeslNo

Communication Protocol
Communication Speed (Baud Rate)
SCADA annunciation of meter fault

for dedicated Bulk Power Customer YeslNo
~,~===::===:================
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:..; 40-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE
Energy Meter
System Voltage (AC)(kV)!connection

.sUfu"T"A r , oJJ
Application tv1 E: IE gl ~(7
"Import" and export" indication YeslNo
Type Designation *
Manufacturer *
Type (Moving iron or solid-state) *
Connection ., * :/c.
CTRatio
* *"f.
PT Ratio

t **
Voltage (kVrms)
Indication Type (DRUM or LED) *

Scale Range (MVARH/MWH)

Memory retention time (months) *
Frequency (Hz) *
Accuracy Class (MWHJMVARH)
~ Power Consumption (VA) *

~~ t< t '* r=r;; R.. \:> , $
~ 40TMSS02RO/DB Date of Approval: March 25, 2007 PAGE NO. 21 OF 27
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION~ 40-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE
Material ofthe Meter Case *

Mounting Position *
Meter Case (IP) *
Auxiliary Supply Voltage (Vdc) *
Capability for summating pulses
(lOOkWH and 100kVARH per pulse,
300ms width) from accumulators of
energy meters on two feeders Yes/No
~
==:;40::;TM~S;:;:S:;::02;:;:R:::'0/;;:O;:"B========;:=~:=:===:=:,:=:===:=-=:,,:,===============
Date of Approval: March 25, 2007 PAGE NO. 22 OF 27
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .\,j,===========
40-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE
Type of Frequency Meter (Instantaneous!

Synchronizing Double Frequency Meter) rJA
System Voltage (AC)(kV)!connection
Location
Type Designation/Manufacturer *
Type (Moving coil or solid-state for Inst.
Frequency Meter & vibration reed type for
Synchronizing Double Frequency Meter) *
PT Ratio
Indication Type (Analog or Digital

for Inst. Frequency Meter & Analog for
Synchronizing Double Frequency Meter) *
Scale Range for Frequency Meter (Hz)
Accuracy Class

Mounting Position *
Degree of protection of the Meter Case (IP) *
Power frequency withstand voltage (kVrms)
~ 40TMSS02RO/DB Dale of Approval: March 25, 2007 PAGE NO. 23 OF 27

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION CJ 40-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE
Power factor meter

System Voltage (AC)(kV)/connection
Application
Type Designation/Manufacturer *
Type (Moving coil or solid-state) . *
CTRatio
PTRatio
Indication Type (Analog or Digital
Scale Range (lead-Iag)/Deflection (")

Frequency Range (Hz) *
Accuracy Class
Pewer Consumption
Current circuit (VA) *
Voltage circuit (VA) *
Mounting Position *
Power frequency withstand voltage (kVrms)

~, Capability of sending "low power factor" alarm _
_ 40TMSS02RO/DB Dale of Approval: March 25, 2007 PAGE NO, 24 OF 27
-)t.' if. "p..'6 r:Efl. PTJ"

8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
:METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE
Synchroscope
Location
Type Designation *
Manufacturer *
Indication Type (pointer) *
PT Ratio
Frequency Range (Hz) *

Accuracy Class
Power Consumption
Incoming line side (VA) *
Bus side (VA) *

Mounting Position *
40TMSS02RO/DB Dale of Approval: March 25, 2007 PAGE NO. 25 OF 27

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .<::.:J 40-TMSS02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES
REFERENCE
Tap Position Indicator
Location
Type Designation *
Manufacturer *
Type (moving coil or solid state) *
Indication Type (Analog or Digital) *
Tap Position Range

Accuracy Class

Mounting Position *
Degree of protectionof the Meter Case (IP) *

voltage (kVrms)

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATlON~ 40-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
8.0 DATA SCHEDULE
METERING DEVICES

SEC:

C. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERIVENDORISUPPLIERI

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
40TMSS02ROIDB Dale of Approval: March 25, 2007 PAGE NO. 27 OF 27

TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION (j 43-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SHUNT CAPACITOR BANK, SUBSTATION TYPE, 13.8kV THROUGH 380kV
SEC Enquiry No. Date: -----

No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with r.o. No.l_l"S----::.._-_1,_{_"_fYl_D_l_o _

REFERENCE

STANDARDS *
Mean Altitude from Sea Level (m)
4.1 Design Criteria

. . "(',\) t \...f .sTAll
Type of connection of Capacitor Bank L.I" { __ H
(Single star or Double star with grounded wI' D. I -riA-
neutral) vt-l6-~clJlII~f'JG U I i . L
Type of capacitor bank neutral Grounding
Type of application (Reactive power

-
{lJ;A(.-nvG p~ '''f'r:..
compensation or Harmonic filtering) Co~PN5ATI~ __' __

Type of Bank Switching (Isolated or back- 0.. _
t o - b a c k ) B A c 1 < T () J:;MCI'
Capacitors (internally or externally fused) t,

4.2 Ratings
Nominal System Voltage (kV rms)
Date of Approval: August 23, 2006 PAGE NO. 10 OF f6

TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:J 43-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SHUNT CAPACITOR BANK, SUBSTATION TYPE, B.8kV THROUGH 380kV
REFERENCE
4.2 Cont'd.
Capacitor Bank Rated Voltage (kVrms) \5. 1 s
3-phase Bank Reactive Power Rating at
Rated Voltage (MVAR) 1-
Bank Insulation Level (BIL) (kVpeak) 125" I<. V
Rated power frequency withstand
voltage(kVrms) ~O
Design Ambient temperature of the 0

capacitor bank (0C) 5":;- c.
Temperature range of operation (OC) ...
Harmonic filter:
Tuned harmonic frequency (Hz)
Type of filter (band-pass/high-pass)
Rated Continuous Current (Arms) f2e1-w PH

System fault level (kA rms)
Capacitor tolerance (%)
Power Network Single Line Diagram

-..,/
Yes/No
provided?
4.3 Capacitor Bank Assembly
Model designation of the Capacitor Bank *

Expected lifetime of the Bank (Years) *
Maximum Terminals Voltage Rating
including harmonics (kV rms) *
Maximum Continuous Current
~ Rating including harmonics (Arms) *

43TMSS01 ROIDB Date of Approval: August 23, 2006 PAGE NO. 11 OF 16
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION .<:::.J 43-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.3 Cont'd.
Number of Parallel Capacitors per group ~
Number of Parallel groups in series/phase 41--
Total number of capacitors/phase pf>

Air-core series reactor (if any) inductance
per phase (mH)
Peak maximum inrush current (kApeak) *
Peak maximum outrush current (kApeak) *

Frequency of inrush current (Hz) *
Frequency of outrush current (Hz) *
Rate of change of inrushloutrush current
(kA/ll s) *
Capacitance per phasetuf') *
Base and spacing insulators (Furnish detail

dimensions and mechanical ratings) *
Capacitor bank assembly drawing provided? * Yes/No
4.4 Capacitor Unit
Model designation of the Capacitor Unit *

Capacitance (IlF) *
Capacitor Unit Rated Voltage (kV rms)
Capacitor Unit Power Rating (kVAR)
Maximum Continuous Operating Current

(Arms) *
43TMSS01RO/DB Date of Approval:August 23, 2006 PAGE NO. 12 OF 16
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:J 43-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.4 Cont'd.
BIL of Capacitor Unit (kVpeak) t-
Rated power frequency withstand voltage
(kV rms) fi..
Tank material of Capacitor Unit
Whether the tank is to be painted?

J
YesfJ:l6
Internal Discharge resistance (ohm) *

Standard for capacitor dielectric fluid
(Furnish complete data of the dielectric *
fluid)
Capacitor tank rupture curve provided? * YeslNo
Temperature coefficient of the capacitor

(IlFI"C) *
4.5 Capacitor Bushing
Number of bushings per capacitor unit * Single/double
Maximum Voltage Rating (kV rms) *

Wet (10 sec.) Power Frequency
withstand voltage (kV rms) 5-0
Dry (I min.) Power Frequency withstand
voltage (kV rms) ~b
Basic Impulse Withstand voltage (BIL)
(kVpeak) 12..S-
Color of Porcelain Brown
Creepage Distance (mm) L,D . . . -./\l-..J

I
AJ Striking Distance (mm)

43TMSS01RO/DB
*
Date of Approval: August 23, 2006 PAGE NO. 13 OF 16
TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:::J 43-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SHUNT CAPACITOR BANK, SUBSTATION TYPE, l3.8kV THROUGH 380kV
REFERENCE
4.5 Cont'd,
Permissible safe cantilever loading at

external terminal (Kg) *
Facilities required for making capacitance
J'
YeslN6'
measurement and Power factor test?
4.6 Terminals
Type (parallel groove clamp or threaded

studs) *
For Conductor Size (mrrr')
For Conductor Material (AI or Cu) AL

J
Bird-proof terminal caps required? Yes
Type for neutral and mid-point *

4.8 Capacitor Rack
Complete dimensional details and weight to ../

be provided? Yes;JJ6
4.9.1 Individual Capacitor Unit Protection
Fuse:
Type & designation *

Fuse element, fuse-bus & fuse element
supporting assembly material *
Maximum Voltage Rating including

harmonics (kV rms) *
Maximum Continuous Current Rating

including harmonics (Arms) *
~ 43TMSSOl ROIDB Date of Approval: August 23, 2006 PAGE NO. 14 OF 16
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SHUNT CAPACITOR BANK, SUBSTATION TYPE, I3.8kV THROUGH 380kV
REFERENCE
4.9.1 Cont'd.
Current Rating of the fuse-bus/base (Arms) *

Cold resistance of the fuse-link (0) &
percentage tolerance of resistance value *
External creepage distance along the fuse-

link (for current limiting fuse) (mm) *
Interrupting assymetrical current (A) *

Discharge energy interrupting rating (Joule) *
Time-current characteristics provided?
Capacitor bank protection data provided?

JYes,%
Yes/No
Other General Information:
Approximate shipping dimensions of

capacitor bank/unit (mm) *
Approximate shipping weight of capacitor

bank/unit (Kg) *
List parts that will be dismantled

and shipped separately *
43TMSS01 ROIDB Date of Approval: August 23, 2006 PAGE NO. 15 OF 16

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION <:J 43-TMSS"", Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:

BIDDERNENDORlSUPPLIERlCONTRACTOR:

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
epresentative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
43TMSSOl RO/DB Date of Approval: August 23,2006 PAGE NO. 16 OF 16

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION <::J 43-TM55-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SEC Enquiry No. Date: - - - -

No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with 1.0. No. _'---- p-rs.- 1\ ('M 0 I 0 _
REFERENCE

STANDARDS '"
Mean Altitude from Sea Level (m)
4.1 Design Criteria
Type of connection of Capacitor Bank D o0e.i.-G S"-r" p..

(Single star or Double star with grounded 11"'1 T H
neutral) vN(?R.0i.>ND E;:D ;J6VII!..AL-
Type of capacitor bank neutral Grounding
Type of application (Reactive power fl.l'oC TIllS P{)l,,.} 8P-

compensation or Harmonic filtering) C o'({\ fWs-!'-'-'-"c=-:.,N-=--_ _
Type of Bank Switching (Isolated or back- i2.1\'~K '''0 BALI"
to-back) l..Y1L , _
Capacitors (internally or externally fused) _~:tJ_.__
4,2 Ratings
Nominal System Voltage (kV nns)

'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERNENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAIPARAMETERS.
'C'- REMARKS SUPPORTING THE PROPOSED DEVIATION IN COLUMN 'B',
("')- DATAIPARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER/
~"'==:;::::':'==='=========";"'====:=======================
43TMSS01 ROIDS PAGE NO. 10 OF 16
TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION ~ 43-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SHUNT CAPACITOR BANK, SUBSTATION TYPE, l3.8kV THROUGH 380kV
REFERENCE
4.2 Cont'd.
Capacitor Bank Rated Voltage (kVnns) 3b3
3-phase Bank Reactive Power Rating at
Rated Voltage (MVAR) ?/loll~
Bank Insulation Level (BIL) (kV peak) 'Z5t'> \,\.V
Rated power frequency withstand

voltage(kVrms) 15'
Design Ambient temperature of the
capacitor bank (OC) 55c
Temperature range of operation (0C) -*
Harmonic filter:
Tuned harmonic frequency (Hz) Zl-1

Type of filter (band-pass/high-pass)
Rated Continuous Current (A nns) /-efe>'" . prJ

System fault level (kA rms) 23'j.lA
Capacitor tolerance (%)
Power Network Single Line Diagram

provided?
~lNo
4.3 Capacitor Bank Assembly
Model designation of the Capacitor Bank *

Expected lifetime ofthe Bank (Years) *
Maximum Terminals Voltage Rating
including harmonics (kVrms) *
Maximum Continuous Current
it
"I
Rating including harmonics (Arms)
43TMSS01 ROIDB
*
Date of Approval: August 23, 2006 PAGE NO. 11 OF 16
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION (j 43-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.3 Cont'd.
Number of Parallel Capacitors per group

'*"It-
Number of Parallel groups in series/phase
Total number of capacitors/phase

'to
Air-core series reactor (if any) inductance
per phase (mH)
Peak maximum inrush current (kApeak) *

Peak maximum outrush current (kApeak) *
Frequency of inrush current (Hz) *
Frequency of outrush current (Hz) *
Rate of change of inrushloutrush current
(kA/lls) *
Capacitance per phaseuif') *

Base and spacing insulators (Furnish detail
dimensions and mechanical ratings) *
Capacitor bank assembly drawing provided? * Yes/No
4.4 Capacitor Unit
Model designation of the Capacitor Unit *

Capacitance (IlF) *
Capacitor Unit Rated Voltage (kVrms)
Capacitor Unit Power Rating (kVAR)

*
~
Maximum Continuous Operating Current
~ (Arms) *
43TMSS01 RO/DS Date of Approval:August 23, 2006 PAGE NO. 12 OF 16
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS Sf ANDARD S'EC!FICATlON <:::J 43- TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.4 Cont'd.
BIL of Capacitor Unit (kV peak) ~.
Rated power frequency withstand voltage

(kV rms )
Tank material of Capacitor Unit ...
Whether the tank is to be painted?
Internal Discharge resistance (ohm) ...
Standard for capacitor dielectric fluid

(Furnish complete data of the dielectric *
fluid)
Capacitor tank rupture curve provided? * Yes/No
Temperature coefficient ofthe capacitor

(l!F/"C) *
4.5 Capacitor Bushing
Number of bushings per capacitor unit * Single/double
Maximum Voltage Rating (kV rms) *

Wet (10 sec.) Power Frequency
withstand voltage (kV rms)
Dry (1 min.) Power Frequency withstand

voltage (kV rms)
Basic Impulse Withstand voltage (BIL)

(kVpeak) '2-5
Color of Porcelain Brown
Creepage Distance (mm)
~~=====Striking Distance (mm)

43TMSS01 RO/DS
*
Dale of Approval: August 23, 2006 PAGE NO. 13 OF 16
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <::J 43TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.5 Cont'd.
Permissible safe cantilever loading at

external terminal (Kg) *
Facilities required for making capacitance V
Yes!Na...
measurement and Power factor test?
4.6 Terminals
Type (parallel groove clamp or threaded

studs) *
For Conductor Size (mnr')
For Conductor Material (AI or Cu) A~

Bird-proofterminal caps required? VYes!Ng:
Type for neutral and mid-point *

4.8 Capacitor Rack
Complete dimensional details and weight to

be provided?
~s&m
4.9.1 Individual Capacitor Unit Protection
Fuse:
Type & designation *

Fuse element, fuse-bus & fuse element
supporting assembly material *
Maximum Voltage Rating including

harmonics (kV rms ) *
Maximum Continuous Current Rating

including harmonics (Arms) *
G
~
43TMSS01 ROIDB Dale of Approval: Augusl23, 2006 PAGE NO, 14 OF 16
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION (j 43-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.9.1 Cont'd.
Current Rating of the fuse-bus/base (Arms)

Cold resistance of the fuse-link (n) &
percentage tolerance of resistance value

External creepage distance along the fuse-
link (for current limiting fuse) (mm)
Interrupting assymetrical current (A) *

Discharge energy interrupting rating (Joule) *
Time-current characteristics provided? * Yes/No
V
Capacitor bank protection data provided? Yes/&e
Other General Information:
Approximate shipping dimensions of

capacitor bank/unit (mm) *
Approximate shipping weight of capacitor

bank/unit (Kg) *
List parts that will be dismantled

and shipped separately *
43TMSS01ROIDS Date of Approval: August 23, 2006 PAGE NO. 15 OF 16

TRANSMISS'ON MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION CJ 43-TMSS-Q1, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:

C. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERIVENOORJSUPPLIERJ

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
epresentative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
43TMSS01ROIDB Date of Approval: August 23,2006 PAGE NO. 16 OF 16

TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICAnON <:::J 50-1MSS... , Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, llKV THROUGH 380 KV
SEC Enquiry No. Date: ------

No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with lO. No. _
REFERENCE
Nominal System Voltage (kV) 3.3v...\f
System short circuit current (kA sym.) at

rated voltage Ljo~A
Type of System Grounding Ft;.. S,j",('t.NCG

C7 fLoJN f) B.D~---
Installation (Outdoor/lndoor) " \IT DlXl{(- - - - -
55' or:-
'A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATA/PARAMETER.

'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERIVENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DAT AlPARAMETERS,
, 'C'- REMARKS SUPPORTING THE PROPOSED DEVIATION IN COLUMN 'B'.
(+)- DATA/PARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER/
~ ~~~~=======================
50TMSS01 RO/JSG PAGE NO. 10 OF 15
Date of Approval: May 30, 2006
TRANSMISSION MATERIAlS STANDARD SPECIFICATION G 50-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

REFERENCE

*
4.1 Ratings
Rated Primary Current (A) ~. ~ '

Rated Secondary Current (A) lor 5
4.1.1 Continous Thermal Current Rating Factor *

Multi ratio CTs ~2.o
Single ratio CTs r2 . Co
Rated Short Time Thermal

Current-Ith (kA rms)
(21,25,31.5,40,50,63 kA rms)
Short time thermal current duration (sec.) I Sec

*
Rated Dynamic Current (kA peak) 2.6xIth
Fault current duration (sec.) I Sec

Rated primary short circuit current -IPSC
(kA) *
Temperature Rise (OC) *

Nunber of Metering Cores ~~;t
Number of Protection Corers ir ~ fl
4.2 Construction "I

F'"~f:.f: j,l "ND IN';,. (o",..O~)
Type ofCT (Ring continuous/split core
type, bushing type, cast resin type, free
standingoil filled/fluid filled type)
_c.'Ill...v;LL~d
... --~--, ....,.
~
u~T f-fS I rJ
(ltv o0c9f)
50TMSS01 RO/JSG Date of Approval: May 30, 2006 PAGE NO. 11 OF 15
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ 50-TMSS01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, IIKV THROUGH 380 KV

REFERENCE
4.2 Construction (Continued)

Free standing CT core location (top or
bottom) *
Type of Insulation (Mineral Oil filled / .M I,N fR..A ~Lc~ff

Fluid / Cast Resin) v jl k i-."l
Manufacturer's type Designation *

4.2.2 Insulating Oil /Fluid
[Refer to Data Schedule of 54-TMSS-OI for
insulating oil.Vendor to fill in column 'B' *
of the same]
4.2.3 High Voltage Insulator Housing
Name of Manufacturer *
Type (Porcelain/Cast Resin) *
Make Designation
Creepage Distance (mm) i/o rtlml'r< 1/

Color fbI- """oJf'J
Cantilever Strength (kN) ~
4.2.4 Terminals
.,t
Primary Terminal Connector:
Conductor Material (AI or Cu) (~.,p fFI'-
Size (mm-)
Number of Conductors/phase ,1 *'

Degree of protection of enclosure for
I P5y
~
secondary terminal box
I,
50TMSSO 1RO/JSG Dale of Approval: May 30, 2006 PAGE NO, 12 OF 15
J,---------I
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, IIKV THROUGH 380 KV

REFERENCE
4.3 Primary Winding for Free Standing Type
CTs
Bar Primary ~Cu
Wound Primary Material *
Winding Insulation and Class *

Rated Maximum Voltage (kV) *
BIL (kV peak) *
Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (kV
rms) -Indoor CTs *
Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (kV

rms) -Outdoor CTs
I minute dry (kV rms) *
10 sec. Wet (kV rms) *
BSL for 380kV (kV peak) *
4.4 Secondary Winding cv
Core No 1/2/3
Re LA::') \ to'
Purpose ( Relaying / Metering) &.. Nt GTe & \N ""'&'----- _
Relaying!
Winding No. I: Purpose
Metering
Type ofProtection(back / /
up/differential/distance protection etc)
Current Ratio at specified tap
Accuracy Class
Burden (VA)lResistive burden -Rb (ohms) */*/*
t~~============
50TMSS01RO/JSG Date of Approval: May 30, 2006 PAGE NO. 13 OF 15
TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION (J 50-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, 11KV THROUGH 380 KV

REFERENCE
4.4 (Continued)
Secondary winding Resistance */*/*
at 20C -Rct (ohms)
Specified Tap
Rated symmetrical short circuit current *

factor -KSSC
Dimensioning parameter -K *
Excitation limiting secondary *
Voltage -Ual (Volts)
Accuracy limiting secondary exciting

current - lal (rnA) *
Secondary excitation current-Imag
at half excitation limiting secondary
Secondary winding resistance -Rct (ohm)
5.1.3 Special tests

Special tests required Class P CTs
Chopped Lightning Impulse
Measurement of capacitance and dielectric

dissipation factor
Multiple Chopped Impulse test on Primary

Winding
Mechanical Tests
Measurement of Transmitted OverVoltages
Special tests required Class TPS CTs
~ Verification of Low Leakage Flux

=5""0""'TM==S""S==0==1R""0='J==SG:===============================
Dateof Approval: May 30, 2006 PAGE NO. 14 OF 15
TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:J 50-TMSS-01, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:


CONTRACTOR:

Name ofthe Company


authorized
representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
~~====~
50TMSS01 RO/JSG Date of Approval: May 30, 2006 PAGE NO. 15 OF 15
TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANDARe SPECIFICATION (j SO-TMSS..', Rev, 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT) 33KV THROUGH 380KV

No.
or Contract No.
P'S--Il
SEC PTS No./Project Title with J.O. No. ---'-- --'----- e(V\ 010 _
REFERENCE
Nominal System Voltage (kV)

(33/34.5/69/1101115/1 32/380)
System Short Circuit Current(kA

sym.)at rated system voltage
(Single Phase to Ground)
Type of System Grounding f2-e leu j ) .5

g iVld.. er;/3
"(l A
Installation ( Outdoor/Indoor)
'J) eSo j\'l bi ~I\+ tel'lf. 5"5 CJ

c
'A'- SEC SPECIFIED DAT AlPARAMETER.

'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERIVENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAlPARAMETERS.
~~===========
50TMSS03RO/JSG Date of Approval: August 28, 2006 PAGE NO. 8 OF 13
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARe SPECIFICATION .~ 50-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
Applicable Industry Standard *

4.1 Ratings
Maximum Rated Primary Voltage

(kV rms) (Phase to Ground)
Rated Voltage Factor
Rated Secondary Voltage (V rms)

1'2-:7
(Nominal)
Secondary - I ~V3= '- I ";) .t
LCJV _
Secondary - 2
I~ - 120
Any tap required on Secondary -1 J3
or Secondary -2 winding ~;rg;:
If 'Yes', What is the tap voltage?
Secondary -1 ( V rms) I ?-o
Secondary -2 (V rms)
Rated burden ( VA)

Secondary - 1 I CD vA ( ~i{)
Secondary - 2 \ c~ VA (tn1n-)----,-----
Continous Thermal Burden ( VA ) i i 1\1 1'2> If,OCid _

Type of insulation (Liquid/Solid)
Maximum Partial Discharge Level
Phase to earth (pc)

@ maximum rated voltage *
@1.2 x max.rated voltage /"';3 *
~~~=============
50TMSS03RO/JSG Date of Approval: Augusl2B, 2006 PAGE NO.9 OF 13
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANCARC SC!FICAnON (j 50-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.1 Ratings (Continued)
Maximum Radio Influence Voltage(RIV)

(applicable only for 115 & 132 kV outdoor ~2500 J.lV
PTs) at 1.1 x maximum rated voltage!..J3
Winding Insulation and class *

Winding Material (AI or Cu) *
BIL of Winding (kV peak) *
Power Frequency Withstand Voltage of
Winding (kV rms) *
Accuracy class:
Secondary - 1
Secondary - 2
4.2 Construction
Type ofPT ( Mineral Oil filled/silicone

liquid filled)
3-phase type or Single Phase type
Manufacturer's type designation *

4.2.2. Insulating Oil
(c)
[Refer to Data Schedule of 54-TMSS-O1.
Vendor to fill in column 'B' ofthe same]
4.2.2. Silicone Liquid

(d)
lEC ASTM
Applicable Standard
60836 D4652
Color (Max.)
=:;:SO=TM:7.S='=S;:'03='=R;:'0JS
/:7. = ' = G : = = =Date
== of= =====
Approval:August 28,= = = = = = = = = = = = =PAGE
2006 = =NO.
== 10 =
OF =
13
TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION<::J 50-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.2.2. Silicone Liquid (Continued)

(d)
IEC ASTM
Applicable Standard
60836 D4652
Appearance * *
Viscosity Max. at 40 40+4 39
C (mm' Is)
Flash point, Min .(0C) 240 300
Pour point, Max (0C) - 50 -50
Densitr at 20 (oC) ( 0.955 *

kg/dm ) to 0.970
Dissipation Factor tan 1)

at60Hz@
25C * 0.01
90C 0.0012 *
Dielectric breakdown 40 35
voltage at 60
HZ,Min.(kV)
Neutralization value 0.02 0.01

max (mg KOH/g)
Water content (ppm) 50 50
PCB content * *
4.2.3 High Voltage Insulator Housing
Name of Manufacturer *
Type (Porcelain/Silicon Rubber)
~ Rated Voltage (Nominal, kV rms) *

50TMSS03RO/JSG Date of Approval: August 28. 2006 PAGE NO. 11 OF 13
TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANOARO SPECIFICATION <::J 50-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.2.3 High Voltage Insulator Housing (Cont.)
BIL (kV peak)
Power frequency Withstand Voltage:

(Wet Withstand applicable for Outdoor
Housings only)
I minute dry (kV rms) *
10 sec. wet (kV rms) *
Creepage Distance (mm) *
Color *
Cantilever Strength(kg) *
4.2.4 Terminals
Primary Terminal Connector:

For Conductor Material (AI or Cu) (0
Size (mm'')
Number of Conductor/phase ~ *
Degree of protection of enclosure for *
secondary terminal box
4.2.5 Protection of Secondary
PT secondary MCB/fuse rating(A)

'*
4.4 PT Overall Dimensions (mm) *
Weight(Kg)
5.0 TESTS
Optional or Special Test Requirements (if

any)
50TMSS03RO/JSG Date of Approval: August 28, 2006 PAGE NO. 12 OF 13
JL----~~~~_
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARD SPECIFICATION CJ 50-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:

B. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERIVENDORJSUPPLIERJ

CONTRACTOR:

Name ofthe Company


authorized
Representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
~ 50TMSS03RO/JSG Date of Approval: August 28, 2006 PAGE NO. 13 OF 13

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION (5 54-TMSS""', Rev. 0'
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
MINERAL INSULATING OILS FOR ELECTRICAL APPARATUS

No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with J.O. No. -L

P'T~ -11 eM 0/ 0
_
REFERENCE
3.0 APPLICABLE INDUSTRY. *

STANDARD
4.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

AND CHARACTERISTICS
Classification/Type of oil *
Manufacturer's Designation of oil *
'A' - SEC SPECIFIED DATAlP ARAMETER

'B' - BIDDER/SUPPLIERNENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED
DAT A/PARAMETERS
(*) - DATA/PARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/
SUPPLIERIVENDOR/CONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'.
54TMSS01 R01/AMA Date of Approval: 01 September, 2009 PAGE NO.6 OF 11

TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:J S4-TMS..." Rev, 0'
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4 (Cont'd) As per As per

IE:. ASTM
60296 D 3487
Type of crude oil used * *

Oil before Filling in Transformer
Appearance/visual examination clear, clear

free from &
sediment bright
& suspen-
ded matter
Color, Max. *
Kinetic Viscosity, Max. (mmvs) at :
-30 DC 1800 *
o DC * 76
+ 40 DC .u, u.
+IOODC * 3.0
Flash point, Min. (0C) 135 145
Pour point, Max. (0C) -40 -40
Density, Max, (g/cm") at
Interfacial tension at 25 DC,

Min. (dynes/em)
Date of Approval: 01 September, 2009 PAGE NO. 7 OF 11

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION G 54.TMSS-O., Rev. 01
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE

IEC ASTM
60296 D 3487
Dielectric Breakdown Voltage

at 60Hz, Min. (kV)
As delivered
Dielectric Dissipation Factor

(Loss Tangent), at 60Hz, Max. at:
* 0.05 %
0.005 *
* 0.30%
Neutralization number, Total 0.01 0.03

Acidity, Max. (mg KOH/g)
Oxidation Stability : IEC 61125(C) ASTM D 2440

164H 164H
Total Acid number,

Max. (mg KOHlg) 1,2 0.6
Sludge, Max (% by mass) 0.8 0.3
Water content at delivery, Max

(ppm)
- in Drums 40 {
{ 35
- in Tank container 30 {
Total Sulphur content, Max. * *

Presence of Anti oxidant
Additives Nil Nil YeslNo
54TMSS01R01/AMA Date of Approval: 01 September. 2009 PAGE NO.8 OF 11

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .~ 54-TMSS.D1, Rev. 01
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE

IEC ASTM
60296 03487
Lowest cold start energizing * *

Temperature (LCSET)
P. C. B Content
P. C. A Content, Max. (%) 3.0 *

2-Furfural and related compounds, 0.1 *
Max. (mglkg)
Gassing Tendency, IEC 60628(A) ASTM D2300(A)

Max. ().lL/min.) H2
+30 +30 _
5.2 Corrosive Sulphur Per

IEC 62535 Noncorrosive
ASTM 1275B Noncorrosive
5.3 DBDS
Passivator
54TMSS01ROllAMA Date of Approval: 01 September, 2009 PAGE NO. 90F 11

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD "E"'nCATION CJ 54-TMSS-Q1. Rev, 01
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION 'A' 'B' 'e'
5.6.4 Electrostatic charging tendency *

(if applicable)
6.0 MODE OF DELIVERY
Drums or tank container capacity *

Total number of drums or tank container *
Weight of oil in each drum or tank container *
54TMSS01ROllAMA PAGE NO. 10 OF 11
J,--' _
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATlON~ .4-TMSS.01, Rev. 01
7.0 DATA SCHEDULE
MINERAL INSULATING OIL FOR ELECTRICAL APPARATUS

SEC:
T;..s'T r::."f< ('OJ<'12-0};1\1, SVl-fuR. Pft TF,C 2..5 3 5 /-~TIl'\ D12758
,SHAi,\-.BG rfP-r6p-(f\fD oN l,NsvLAT/,I'v'G- oil ltJ FAc-reI:Y

B. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERNENDORISUPPLIERI

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
epresentative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company &
Date
54TMSS01 ROllAMA PAGE NO. 11 OF 11
J _
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <::J .8-TMSS"', Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
AIR CORE SERIES REACTOR 13.8 KV THROUGH 380kV

-----
SEC Purchase Order No. Date: _
-----------------
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with J.O. No. PT5-1\ C/Vlojo

REFERENCE

Model Designation *
4.1 No. of phases 3~
Outdoor/Inside
Type of mounting Weather proof
enclosure
Reactor Arrangement
(side by side or vertically stacked)
"*
A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATAlPARAMETER.
'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERNENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAlPARAMETERS.
~"",.".," Date of Approval: August 6, 2006 G PAGE NO.8 OF 12

6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

REFERENCE
SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION 'A' 'B' 'e
HAfl.(Y\O(JiC
4.2.1 Design and Construction F/l"-'i3=R
Ba i '!jg/
Application
Tuning
Copper/
Coil conductor
Aluminum
Magnetic clearance (Minimum)
Reactor coil
Center to center (mm) *
Edge to edge (mm) *
Edge of reactor to metallic parts
not forming closed loops (mm) *
Noise Level (dB) *
Maximum RIV at maximum line to
ground value of system voltage 250J.lV
(applicable for 230kV and 380kV only)
Complete dimension with drawing
details provided * YeslNo
Reactor weight (kg) *
Design Ambient Temperature *
Class ofInsulation *
Maximum temperature rise (OC) *
Hot spot temperature eC) *
Supporting Insulator
(Manufacturer shall fill up column 'B' *
of l5-TMSS-Ol data schedule)
4.2.2 Damping Reactors

Nominal System Voltage UN(kVrms)
-------
Inductance per phase (mH)
Inductance tolerance *
Rated continuous current IN (A)
Overload current rating (A)
(suitable for capacitor bank *
overloading)
High frequency in-rush current
lIN (kApeak) *
In-rush current frequency fib (Hz) *
58TMSS02ROIKSB Date of Approval:August 6, 2006 G PAGE NO. 9 OF 12

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARD SPECIFICATION (j 58-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.2.2 (continued)
High frequency out-rush current
lour (kApeak) *
Out-rush current frequency fob (Hz) *
Rated short circuit withstand current
(kA) for 1 second 26kA
Thermal short-time overcurrent (kApeak)
Harmonic voltage distortion factor Fhu "**
BIL (kVpeak) *
Power frequency withstand voltage
(kV nns) *
Switching Impulse Withstand Voltage
(BSL) if applicable (kV peak) *
Total Losses at 75C and 110% rated
voltage (kW) at in-rush frequency *
Q-factor at in-rush frequency *
Impedance at rated frequency (ohm) *
Thermal class of insulation *
Temperature rise C *
Voltage drop (V) *
4.2.3 Tuning (Filter) Reactors
Nominal System Voltage UN (kV nns) '33 ",v
Rated inductance LA (mH) at tuning
frequency t.cftzr rvs
Inductance tolerance for principal tap Max 5%
Tapping Range (%) (if applicable)
Inductance Step (%)
i:
t
Number of steps )C
Inductance tolerance at other taps
Fundamental current rating IN (A) *
Rated tuning frequency current IA
(A)
Rated tuning frequency fA (Hz)
~
/K;:=;
-:;58==r="M;:;ss="0;:;2R="07. SS=== = = = = = ===:= =:=:'=
Dateof ===:-=:===
Approval: ':'7:==::==
August6, 2006 G = = = = = = =='PAGE
='' =':7:'''':':'''='7':
NO. 10 OF 12
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION~ 58TMSS-02, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
Rated short time current IKN (kA) and
*1* 1
duration
Mechanical peak current (kApeak) *
Type of filter (band-pass/high pass)
BIL (kVpeak)
Power frequency withstand voltage
(kVrms)
Switching Impulse Withstand Voltage
(BSL) if applicable (kVpeak)
Total Losses at 75C and 110% rated
voltage (kW) at tuning frequency *
Q-factor at tuning frequency *
Impedance at rated frequency (ohm) *
Thermal class of insulation *
Temperature rise C *
Voltage drop (V)
(for each tap and principal tap) *
Power Network Single line Diagram ,,/
Yes~
enclosed
4.4 Terminals (applicable for outdoor reactors)

Type *
Copperl
Material
Aluminum
No. of holes
For Conductor Size (mrrr')
(6-).!t<
6SCl* m tyIfl-
For Conductor Material (AI or Cu) AI
Incoming conductor take-off
(vertical, horizontal, angle to horizontal)
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Approximate shipping Dimensions
(mm) *
Approximate shipping weight (kg) *
58TMSS02RO/KSB Date of Approval: August 6, 2006 G PAGE NO. 11 OF 12

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION <:.:J .8-TMSS-<l2, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:

C. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERIVENDORJSUPPLIERJ

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized
representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
F",.., ""'' ' '. Dateof Approval: August6, 2006 G PAGE NO, 12 OF 12
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .<::J 70-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
9.0 DATA SCHEDULE
CHAIN LINK FENCE

No.
or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with lO. No. ---J.Pc..::....<.T:.-"'".S''----'I:.!../~C:..!.M~O:=:../~O'''"_ _
REFERENCE

CH4/A/
Fence Type HNI<.
Weight of Zinc Coating (g/m 2)(Class

l/Class 2)
Thickness of PVC Coating

Width of fence fabric (mm)
Height of fence (including barbed

wire when required) (mm)
'A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATA/PARAMETER

'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERlVENDQR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATA/PARAMETERS
Dale of Approval: April 9, 2006 PAGE NO. 21 OF 28

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANOARD SPECIFICATION CJ 70-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
9.0 DATA SCHEDULE (Cont'd)
REFERENCE
6.0 MATERIALS
6.1 Wires
Weight of Zinc Coating (g/m 2) / PVC -t

Coating Thickness
Barbed Wire y
Tension Wire t
Tie Wire J(
Clip Wire t
6.2 Posts & Rails
ToplBrace Rail
Weight of Zinc Coating (g/m 2)/ PVC JE

Coating Thickness
Nominal diameter (mrn) -'f
Pipe wall thickness (mm) t=
Weight per meter (kg/m) t"
Line Posts
Weight of Zinc Coating (g/m 2) / PVC Jy

Coating Thickness
Nominal diameter (mm) Jf
Pipe wall thickness (mm) tr
Weight per meter (kg/m) 1""
'A' -SEC SPECIFIED DATAJPARAMETER

'B' - BIDDER/SUPPLIERlVENDORICONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAJPARAMETERS
'C' - REMARKS SUPPORTING THE PROPOSED DEVIAnON IN COLUMN 'B'
(*) -DATA/PARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY TIlE BIDDER/SUPPLIER/
Date of Approval: April 9, 2006 PAGE NO. 22 OF 28

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .(j 70-TMSS-D2, Rev. 0
REFERENCE
6.0 MATERIALS (Cont'd)
Comer Post
Weight of Zinc Coating (g1m 2)/ PVC ..f

Coating Thickness
Nominal diameter (mm)
Pipe wall thickness (mm) '*
Weight per meter (kg/m) t"
Gate Posts
Weight of Zinc Coating (g/m2) / PVC .:r
Coating Thickness
Nominal diameter (mm) r
Pipe wall thickness (mm) r
Weight per meter (kg/m)
6.3 Gates and Accessories
Personnel Gate
Width(mm)
Height (mm)
Gate frame extension YeslNo
Main Gate
Width(mm)
Height (mm)
Gate frame extension YeslNo

'A' - SEC SPECIFIED DATAlPARAMETER
'B' - BIDDERlSUPPLIERNENDORICONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAIPARAMETERS
(*) -DATAIPARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER/
R/ CTOR IN COLUMN 'B'
Dale of Approval: April 9. 2006 PAGE NO. 23 OF 28
TRANSMISSION MATERlALSSTANOARO SPECIFICATION (j 70-TMSS-02, Rev. 0
CHAIN LINK FENCE

SEC:

BIDDERJVENDORISUPPLIERfCONTRACTOR:
B. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERJVENDORISUPPLIERI

CONTRACTOR:
Actual Manufacturer Vendor/Supplier!

Name ofthe Company


authorized
Representative and date
Official Seal/Stamp
70TMSS02ROfSZA Date of Approval: April 9, 2006 PAGE NO. 24 OF 28

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARO SPECIFICATION .<::::J 70-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
12.0 DATA SCHEDULE
NORMAL WEIGHT READY-MIXED PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
SEC Purchase Order No. Date: _

or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with J.O. No. --,P'--Lh~3'--.LIL!1C""J)I)~""O:L/-",O~ _
REFERENCE

8.0 CONCRETE QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
8.5 a) Exposure Requirements SEyeRB
b) Type of Cement rsrs-r

c) Min. Cement Content (kg/m') .J2t>
d) Pozzolanic Material Content (kg/m')
~
NamelBrand 1ft
e) Req'd Min. Cylindrical Compressive 38
Strength @ 28 Day Strength(MPa)*
f) Max.water/ cementitious materials ratio eJ.40

g) Max. Slump w/o admixture (mm) /(;)(;)
h) Mass of fine aggregates (kg/nr')

'*
'A' - SEC SPECIFIED DATAlP ARAMETER
'B' - BIDDER/SUPPLIERIVENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAIPARAMETERS
'C' - REMARKS SUPPORTING THE PROPOSED DEVIAnON IN COLUMN 'B'
(*) -DATAIPARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER!
70TMSS03RO/SZA Date of Approval: April 10, 2006 PAGE NO. 36 OF 38

TRANSMISSION MATERIAlS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .e:, 70-TMSS-G3, Rev. 0
12.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SEC Purchase Order No. _ Date: _

or Contract No.
SEC PTS No.lProject Title with J.O. No. -I-~.:oL-..LLL~~:::.L.Io.t:..-

,PTS-!lCMOIO _
REFERENCE
CONCRETE OUALITY REOUIREMENTS
i) Coarse Aggregates
Type 1t
Mass (kg/nr') .y
Nominal Size (mm) !K
j) Admixture:
Type ?it
Brand If'
Dosage (11m3 ) ~
10.0 TESTS
10.2.2 Frequency of Sampling for

Compressive Strength/m" S6C./O.2.).
10.2.4 Chloride Permeability Test Yes6$
Frequency ofPenneability Test/m" S EC./O. 2-'g.
'A'- SEC SPECIFIED DATAIPARAMETER

'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERlVENDORJCONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATA/PARAMETERS
(*)- DATA/PARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIERJ

-----------------------------------~
TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD S""CIFICAT ON CJ 70-TMSS-03. Rev. 0
12.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:

BIDDERlVENDORISUPPLIERfCONTRACTOR:
B. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERlVENDORISUPPLIERI

CONTRACTOR:

Name of the Company


authorized Representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
70TMSS03ROJSZA Date of Approval; April 10, 2006 PAGE NO. 38 OF 38

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICAT,ON .R:J. 'D-lMSS-D3, Rev. D
12.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SEC Enquiry No. Date: - - - -
SEC Purchase Order No. Date: ----

or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with 1.0. No. ----!.P.::..J.:aY--.LJI/~CM~!,.!,O=.!o/O~ _
REFERENCE
8.0 CONCRETE QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
8.5 a) Exposure Requirements MOlJ5I?B16

b) Type of Cement TftfJ5-.ll
c) Min. Cement Content (kg/m') JSO
d) Pozzolanic Material Content (kg/rrr') J/(
NameIBrand :t
e) Req'd Min. Cylindrical Compressive ,2.8
Strength @ 28 Day Strength(MPa)*
f) Max.water! cementitious materials ratio 0.40
g)Max. Slump w!o admixture (mm) 7S

h) Mass of fine aggregates (kg/nr') -#
'A' - SEC SPECIFIED DATAfPARAMETER

'B' - BIDDER/SUPPLIERIVENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAfPARAMETERS
(*) -DATAIPARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDfPROPOSED BY TIlE BIDDER/SUPPLIER!
70TMSS03RO/SZA Date of Approval:Apnl 10.2006 PAGE NO, 36 OF 3'8

TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION \:.J 70TMSS.03. Rev. 0
12.0 DATA SCHEDULE
SEC Purchase Order No. Date: ~".",...,..,~~

or ContractNo.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with J.O. No. ~PL.L.Z;
....5L-...I./:LI-kC.~M~O~/~O=-- _
REFERENCE
CONCRETE QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
i) Coarse Aggregates
Type
Mass (kglm3)
Nominal Size (mm)
j) Admixture:
Type
Brand
Dosage (lim')
10.0 TESTS
10.2.2 Frequency of Samplingfor

Compressive Strength/m" SGC./O.2 ..2 _
10.2.4 Chloride PermeabilityTest l:e!tN'o
Frequency of Permeability Test/m"
'A'- SEC SPECIFIEDDATAIPARAMETER

'B'- BIDDER/SUPPLIERNENDQRfCONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATAIPARAMETERS
(*)- DATAIPARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDERfSUPPLIERI

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION CJ 70-TMSS-D3, Rev. 0
12.0 DATA SCHEDULE

SEC:


CONTRACTOR:
Actual Manufacturer Vendor/Supplier!

of EquiprnentlMaterial Contractor
Name of the Company


authorized Representative
and date
Official Seal/Stamp
70TMSS03RO/S Dale of Approval: April 10, 2006

PAGE NO. 38 OF 38
TRANSMISSION MAT.RlALS STANDARD SC!FICATION .(j 9.-TMSS-ll3, Rev
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
SEC Inquiry No. Date _
SEC Purchase Order No. Date _

or Contract No.
SEC PTS No./Project Title with 1. O. No. 'P"-s ..-, \(;1t\ b 1c:.J
REFERENCE
3.0 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS *

4.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REOUlREMENTS
4.1.3 Type of Fire Extinguisher

(Hand Held/Wheeled)
vHf ELED
4.1.4 Type of Extinguisher Agent

p:l Y C /-Ill MltAL-
Type of Dry Chemical (if used) ("02-
4.2 Ratings
4.2.1 Fire Extinguisher Classification c I.-A~.s t315 c.- - - -

4.2.5 Capacity (Kg) 1>
'A' - SEC SPECIFIED DATAIPARAMETERS

'B' - BIDDERISUPPLIERIVENDORICONTRACTOR PROPOSED
DATAIPARAMETERS
'*' - DATA/PARAMETER TO BE PROVIDEDIPROPOSED BY THE BIDDERI
SUPPLIERIVENDORICONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'
~~==========
90TMSS03ROIMHS Date of Approval: June 24, 2008 PAGE NO. 15 OF 17
TRANSMISSION MATE.lACS STANOARD SPECIFICATION <:::J 90-TMSS-03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
REFERENCE
4.2 (Continued)
Horizontal Range (Meters)
Discharge Time (Sec.)
5.0 TESTS
5.3 Performance Test Require? Yes/No
90TMSS03ROIMHS Date of Approval: June 24, 2008 PAGE NO. 16 OF 17

TRANSMISSiON MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION .CJ 90TMSS03, Rev. 0
6.0 DATA SCHEDULE
A. ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL INFORMAnON OR FEATURES SPECIFIED BY

SEC:
B. ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY DATA OR FEA TURES PROPOSED BY BIDDER/

VENDOR/SUPPLIER/CONTRACTOR:
C. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDERIVENDOR/SUPPLIER/

CONTRACTOR:
Manufacturer Vendor/Supplier/
ofMateriallEquipment _ _----"''''''''''''''''~
Contractor _
Name of Company

Representative and Date
Official Seal/Stamp
of the Company
90TMSS03ROIMHS PAGE NO. 17 OF 17
J"- _
APPENDIX III
TECHNICAL DATA MANUALS

APPENDIX III
TECHNICAL DATA MANUALS Page 1 of2
1. Technical Data Manuals
The CONTRACTOR shall provide Technical Data Manuals as applicable for the
substation equipment and underground cable systems installed under the PROJECT.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit at least two (2) sets of manuals for review and
approval by the COMPANY at least two (2) months prior to the mechanical completion
date of the PROJECT. After COMPANY approval, the CONTRACTOR shall submit
three (3) sets of final approved manuals two (2) weeks before mechanical completion
date of the PROJECT.
2. Substation Equipment
The Technical Data Manuals for the substation equipment, as applicable, shall include
the following information as a minimum pertaining to the major substation equipment
installed under the PROJECT.
a. Equipment for which TMSS and SMSS Data Schedule is available.
A copy of manufacturer's nameplate of the equipment.
Name of the manufacturer and equipment serial number shall be specified

in the attached Form No. PTD-EQP-DS1.
Updated Data Schedules attached to the COMPANY Materials Standard

Specification (TMSS and SMSS) after manufacture of the equipment, and
stamped by the manufacturer.
The Technical Data is required for the following substation equipment:
13.8kV XLPE cables

33kV XLPE cables
13.8kV Splice and termination Kits
33kV Splice and termination Kits
Surge Arresters
13.8kV Metalclad SWitchgear
33kV Metalclad Switchgear
13.8kV Capacitors and De-Tuning Reactors
33kV Capacitors and De-Tuning Reactors
b. Equipment for which TMSSI SMSS Data Schedule is not available
For protection relays, transducers, fault recorders and metering, the technical
data shall be provided by the manufacturer/CONTRACTOR as stated below:
APPENDIX '"
TECHNICAL DATA MANUALS Page 2 of2
a. Protection Relays
The technical data for the protection relays shall include data for all protection,
lockout and auxiliary relays installed for the protection of the substation
equipment, overhead lines and underground cables.
The CONTRACTOR shall fill in the attached Form No. PTO-REL-OS2.
b. Transducers
The CONTRACTOR shall provide a copy of the manufacturer's nameplate

data only for each transducer.
c. Fault Recorders
The CONTRACTOR shall fill in the attached Form No. PTO-OTR OS3.
d. Metering
The CONTRACTOR shall fill in the attached Form No. PTO-MET OS4.
e. UndergroundCables
The CONTRACTOR shall fill in the attached Form No. PTO-UGC OS6
f. Automatic Capacitor Controller
The CONTRACTOR shall fill in the attached Form No. PTO-EQP OS1
3. Underground Cables
The CONTRACTOR shall provide technical data data applicable for XLPE Cables,
splices and terminations as per details of updated data schedules of the relevant
COMPANY material standard specifications (TMSS and SMSS) stamped by the
manufacturer.
In addition to the above mentioned TMSS and SMSS data schedules, the
CONTRACTOR shall provide additional information in the attached form no. PTO-UGC
OS6
SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT
SEC Form No. PTD-EQP DS1
project Title:- Contract No. : _
substation Prepared By: _ Date: __
POWER
ITEM # DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER SERIAL # REMARKS
DISPATCH #
Page 1 of 5
TECHNICAL DATA FOR PROTECTION RELAYS
project Title:- __ Contract No. : _
substation:- Prepared By: _ Date : _
EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTION

ITEM # PANEL # DEVICE # MANUFACTURER TYPE # MODEL #
PROTECTED ORDER # LEAF
MANUFACTURER
ITEM # COMPONENTS FUNCTION CATALOG # REMARKS
ORDER #
Page 1 of 1
TECHNICAL DATA FOR FAULT RECORDERS
Project Title:- Contract No. : _
substation Prepared By: __ Date : __
YEAR OF COMPONENTS
ITEM # MANUFACTURER MODEL #
MANUFACTURE DESCRIPTION DRAWING # PART #
Pagelofl
TECHNICAL DATA FOR METERING EQUIPMENT
Project Title:- _________ contract No. : _
substation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Prepared By: _ Date: _
ITEM SERIAL MODEL YEAR OF ACCURACY MEASUREMENT

DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER
# # # MANUFACTURE CLASS
INSTANT. MAX.DEM COMBINED
Page 1 of1
TECHNICAL DATA FOR UNDERGROUND CABLES
SEC Form No. PTD-UGC DS6
project Title:- ___ Contract No. : __
substation:- Prepared By: _ Date: _
CABLE TYPE CONDUCTOR CABLES STRAIGHT STOP

ITEM # NAME OF CIRCUIT kV MANUFACTURER
XLPEOR LPOR SIZE PER PHASE JOINTS JOINTS
Page 50f5
APPENDIX IV
BID STANDARD FORMAT

APPENDIX IV
BID STANDARD FORMAT
The BIDDER shall fill in Annex A & C which shows equipment salient features along with the
Technical Proposal. The BIDDER shall also fill in Annex B which shows the documents
submitted along with the Technical Proposal
ANNEXA
Contract No.
Project Titile:
EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS
Description of EquipmenU Country of Tech. Info.

No. Type/Model Manufacturer
Material Oriain In Section#
A. SUBSTATION EQPT/MATL..
1 Power Transformer
380/230kV
230/69kV
115/13.8kV
69/13.8kV
2 Capacitor Banks
33kV
13.8kV
3 Shunt Reactor
4 Air Core Reactors
33kV
13.8kV
5 Cricuit Breaker
380kV
230kV
115kV
6 GIS Equipment
380kV
230kV
115kV
7 CCVT/CVTIVT
380kV
230kV
115kV
33kV
13.8kV
8 Free Standing Current Transfomer
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
33kV
13.8kV
9 Relay & Control Panels
10 Metalclad Switchgear
34.5kV
33kV
13.8kV
11 Disconnect Switch
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
12 Surge Arrester
360kV
230kV
115kV
30kV
12kV
13 Station Post Insulator
380kV
230kV
115kV
Note: Strike-off items which are not applicab/e to this project Page 1 of 3
ANNEXA
Contract No.
Project Titile:
Description of Equipment/ Country of Tech. Info.

Material Oriain In Section#
12 Wall Bushing
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
13 Batteries Charger
14 Batteries
15 Annunciator System
16 Fire Protection & Signalling System
17 XLPE or LPOF U/G Cable
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
33kV
13.8kV
18 Fiber Optic Terminal Equipment
Low Density
SDH
19 SCADARTU
20 Dig. Trans. Fault Recorder
21 Sequence of Event Recorder
B. UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSION
LINE MATERIAL
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
33kV
13.8kV
2 Non-metallic Fiber Optic Cable
3 Pilot Cable. 19 pairs
4 Link Box for U/G Power Cable
5 Sheath Voltage Limiter
C. O/H TRANSMISSION LINE
EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL
1 Overhead Line Conductor
2 Overhead Ground Wire
3 Tubular Steel Pole
4 Lattice Steel Structure
5 Wood Pole
6 Disconnect Switch
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
Note: Strike-off items which are not applicab/e to this project Page 2 of3
ANNEXA
Contract No.
Project Titile:
Description of Equipment! Country of . Tech. Info.

Material Orioln In Section#
7 Line Post Insulator
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
33kV
8 Suspension Insulator
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
9 Composite Overhead Optical
Fiber Ground Wire (OPGW)
10 Fiber Optic Joint Box
11 Fiber Optic Terminal Equipment *
Low Density
SDH
!Jote: Strike-off items which are not applicable to this project Page ~~ of 3
ANNEX B
Contract No.
Project Titile:
SUMMARY OF EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Description of Equipment! Statement of Data Manufacturer's Type Test
No. List of Users
Material Compliance Schedule Catalogs Reports
A. SUBSTATION EQPT/MATL.
1 Power Transformer
380/230kV
230/a9kV
115/13.8kV
a9/13.8kV
2 Capacitor Banks
33kV
13.8kV
3 Shunt Reactor
4 Air Core Reactors
33kV
13.8kV
5 Cricuit Breaker
380kV
230kV
115kV
a GIS Equipment
380kV
230kV
115kV
7 CCVT/CVTIVT
380kV
230kV
115kV
33kV
13.8kV
8 Free Standing Current Transfomer
380kV
230kV
115kV
eokv
33kV
13.8kV
10 Metalclad Switchgear
34.5kV
33kV
13.8kV
11 Disconnect Switch
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
12 Surge Arrester
380kV
230kV
115kV
30kV
13.8kV
13 Station Post Insulator
380kV
230kV
115kV
Note: Strike-off items which are not applicable to this project Page 1 of 3
ANNEXB
Contract No.
Project Titile:
Description of Equipment! Statement of Data Manufacturer's Type Test
No. List of Users
33kV
14 Wall Bushing
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
15 Batteries Charger
16 Batteries
17 Annunciator System
18 Fire Protection & Signalling System
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
33kV
13.8kV
Low Density
SDH
21 SCADARTU
22 Dig. Trans. Fault Recorder
23 Sequence of Event Recorder
UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSION
B.
LINE MATERIAL
380kV
230kV
115kV
69kV
33kV
13.8kV
2 Non-metallic Fiber Optic Cable
3 Pilot Cable 19 pairs
4 Link Box for U/G Power Cable
5 Sheath Voltage Limiter
C. O/H TRANSMISSION LINE
EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL
1 Overhead Line Conductor
2 Overhead Ground Wire
3 Tubular Steel Pole
4 Lattice Steel Structure
5 Wood Pole
6 Disconnect Switch
380kV
230kV
115kV
ANNEXB
Contract No.
Project Titile:
Description of EquipmenU Statement of Data Manufacturer's Type Test
No. List of Users
7 Line Post Insulator
380kV
230kV
115kV
8 Suspension Insulator
380kV
230kV
115kV
9 Composite Overhead Optical
Fiber Ground Wire (OPGW)
10 Fiber Optic Joint Box
Low Density
SDH
ANNEXC
Contract No.
Project Titile:
SUMMARY OF PROPOSED PROTECTIVE RELAYS
No. .. ....
Description of Equipment!
Manufacturer
Country of
Orinin
Type/
ModAl
Tech. Info.
' In.... -" 1#
2 Feeder Protection
a. Distance Relay
Set 1 (21P)
Set 2 (21S)
b. Directional Comparison
Earth Fault Relay
Set 1 (67NP)
Set 2 (67NS)
c. longitudinal/Pilot Wire
Differential Relay
Set 1 (87lP)
Set 2 (87lS)
d. Back-up Inverse Time Overcurrent
Relay with Instantaneous Unit
Phase (50/51)
Neutral (50/51N)
e. Back-up Directional Overcurrent
Relav with Instantaneous Unit
Phase (50/51 )
Neutral (67N)
f. Synchrocheck Relay (25)
g. Auto Reclosing Relay (79)
h. PT Fuse Failure Relay
3 Power Transformer Protection
a. OlTC Control Panel
b. Differential Relay (87 T)
c. Restricted Earth Fault Relay
HV Side (87 REF-HV)
lV Side (87 REF-HV)
d. Back-up HV side Overcurrent
Relay with or without Inst.Unit
Phase (50/51)
Neutral (50/51 N)
Ground (50/51 G)
e. Back-up Secondary side Directional
Overcurrent Relay with or without
Inst. Unit
Phase (67)
Neutral (67G)
f. Back-up lV side Neutral Overcurrent
Relay with or without Inst.Unit
g. Tertiary Winding Inverse Time
Overcurrent Relay with or without
Instantaneous Unit (50/51TW)
h. HV Side Over Fluxing Relay (99T)
4 Grounding Transformer Protection
a. Restricted Earth Fault Relay (87 GT)
Page 1 of3
Note: 1. Strike-off items which are not applicable to this project

2. In case different make/type/model of same kind of relays are proposed for different applications list them all.
ANNEXC
Contract No.
Project Titile:
Description of Equipment! Country of Type/ Tech. Info.
No. Manufacturer
"~'~r'~1 Orinin ModAl lin H
b. Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay with/
without Intantaneous Unit
Phase (50/51 GT)
Neutral (50/51 GGT)
5 Station Service Transformer Protection
a. Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay with
Intantaneous Unit (50/51)
6 Bus Bar Protection
a. Bus Bar Differential Relay (87 B)
b. Bus Bar Differential Check Relay (87B)
c. CT Open Circuit Supervision Relay
7 Bus Sectionalizing and lor Bus Coupler
Breaker Protection
a. Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay with/
without lntantanaous Unit
Phase (51BT)
Neutral (51NBT)
8 Breaker and Protection Circuit Failure
Supervision
a. Breaker Failure Relay (50 BF)
b. DC Supervision Relay
Set 1
Set 2
c. Trip Circuit Supervision Relay
Set 1
Set 2
d. Trip Coil Supervision Relay
Set 1
Set 2
9 Reactor Protection
a. Differential Relay
b. Restricted Earth Fault Relay
c. Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay with!
without Intantaneous Unit
Phase (50/51)
Neutral (SO/51 N)
10 Capacitor Bank Protection
a. Harmonic Desensitized Instantaneous
Overcurrent Relav
Phase Set 1 (SOP)
Phase Set 2 (50S)
Neutral Set 1 (50NP)
Neutral Set 2 (50NS)
b. Short Time Overcurrent Relay
Phase Set 1 (51P)
Phase Set 2 (51S1)
Neutral Set 1 (51NP)
Neutral Set 2 (51NS)
c. Overcurrent Relay with Harmonic Filter
for Mid-point Unbalance
Set 1 (59P)
Page 2 013
Note: 1. Sfrike-off items which are not applicable to this project.

ANNEXC
Contract No.
Project Titile:
No. ..
Description of Equipment!
Manufacturer
Country of
Orinin
Type/
MnnAI
Tech. Info.
I'n C' .... #.
Set2 (59S)
d. For Neutral Point Unbalance
Set 1 (59NP)
Set 2 (59NS)
46UB
e. Bus Over Voltage Relays
Set 1 (59BP)
Set 2 (59BS)
f. Bus Under Voltage Relay
Set 1 (27BP)
Set 2 (27BS)
11 Protection Signalling/Communication
Interface Equipment
a. For Distance Protection
b. For Pilot Wire Differential Protection
c. Breaker Failure Scheme
d. For Longitudinal Differential Protection
12 other Relays
a. Under frequency Relay (81)
b. Lockout Relay (86)
c. Timers (62)
d. Tripping Relay (94)
e. Tripping & Lockout Relay Supervision
f. DC Supply Supervision Relay (74)
g. Test Switches
13 Bidder to Specify and List other Relays
and Devices
Page 3 of3
Note: 1. Strike-off items which are not applicable to this project.

APPENDIX V
LIST OF OPERATIONAL SPARE PARTS

OPERATIONAL SPARE PARTS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
33kV OUTDOOR SHUNT CAPACITOR FILTER BANK (MISC. PARTS)
(COMBINED FOR ALL 515)
15MVAR VOLTAGE :33kV TYPE :_ _
MANUFACTURER : _ YEAR OF MANUFACTURER : _
(A) (B)
PART
ITEM MFR.REC. QTY.
ITEM DESCRIPTION MFR. NAME NO.1 SECREQ.
NO. (FOR 10YRS
TYPE QTY.
OPERATION)
Equipment connectors each

1 5%
type
2 Conductor jumpers 5%
3 Capacitor units 5%
Fuses for Capacitor Bank each
4 5%
type as appilcable
5 Fuse links as appilcable 5%
6 Flipper assembly if applicable 5%
Copper wire to jumper
7 5%
capacitor units to the frame
8 Surge Arresters 5%
9 Protection relay (each type) 5%
10 Auxiliary relav (each type) 5%
11 Control relay (each type) 5%
12 Ammeter (each type) 5%
13 Var meter(each type) 5%
14 Tuning reactor each type 5%
15 Voltmeter (each type) 5%
16 Control fuse (each rating) 5%
17 Contactor 5%
18 MCCBs (each type/rating) 5%
Note:Quantity of spare shall be 5% of the actual supply rounded to the next whole number

(COMBINED FOR ALL 5/5)
MANUFACTURER: __ YEAR OF MANUFACTURER : __
(AI (Bl
PART
ITEM MFR.REC. QTY.
ITEM DESCRIPTION MFR. NAME NO./ SEC REQ.
NO. (FOR 10YRS
TYPE QTY.
OPERATION)

1 5%
type
4 type as appilcable
5%
5 Fuse links as applicable 5%
7 capacitor units to the frame
5%
8 SUr!:Je Arresters 5%
10 Auxiliary relay (each type) 5%
17 Contactor 5%
(COMBINED FOR ALL SIS)
(A) (B)
PART
ITEM MFR.REC. QTY.
ITEM DESCRIPTION MFR. NAME NO.1 SEC REQ.
NO. (FOR 10 YRS
TYPE QTY.
OPERATION)

1 5%
type
4 5%
type as appilcable
7 5%
17 Contactor 5%
13.8kV OUTDOOR SHUNT CAPACITOR FILTER BANK (MISC. PARTS)
5MVAR VOLTAGE :13.8kV TYPE :_ _
MANUFACTURER: __ YEAR OF MANUFACTURER : __
(A) (B)
PART
ITEM MFR.REC. QTY.
ITEM DESCRIPTION MFR. NAME NO.1 SEC REQ.
NO. (FOR 10YRS
TYPE QTY.
OPERATION)

1 5%
type
4 5%
type as appilcable
7 5%
17 Contactor 5%
33kV CIRCUIT BREAKER
FOR EACH TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER AS USED
VOLTAGE :33kV TYPE :_ _
(A) (B)
ITE PART
MFR. SEC
M ITEM DESCRIPTION NO.1 MFR.REC. QTY. (FOR 10 YRS
NAME REQ.
NO. TYPE OPERATION)
QTY'
1 Breaker SF6Nacuum complete for 1250A 5%

2 Vacuum bottle ( Interrupter) for 1250A 5%
3 Tulip contacts with arms top& bottom for 1250A 5%
4 Control Cable with plug & socket 5%
5 Insulating plate (partition) between poles 5%
6 Flexible copper connector if applicable 5%
7 Pressure gauge SF6 as appilcable 5%
8 Set of seals 5%
9 SF6 filling valve as appilcable 5%
10 SF6 density monitor switch as applicable 5%
Note:Quantity shall be 5% of the actual supply rounded to the next whole number.
OPERATING MECHANISM FOR 33KV CIRCUIT BREAKER
FOR EACH TYPE OF CIRCUIT BREAKER AS USED
TYPE: -------
MANUFACTURER : _ YEAR OF MANUFACTURE :_ _
CAl CBl
ITE PART
MFR. SEC
NAME REQ.
NO. TYPE OPERATION)
QTY.
1 Trio coil each tvoe 5%

2 Closing coil 5%
3 Auxiliary switch each type 5%
4 Limit switch each tvoe 5%
5 Auxiliarv relav each tvoe 5%
6 Control relav each type 5%
7 Pressure switch each type 5%
8 Electric Motor, sprinq charcinq mechanism 5%
9 Ooeration Counter 5%
10 Dash oat I Shock absorber 5%
11 Anti pump relay 5%
12 Mechanism spnnq charqinq handle 5%
METALCLAD SWITCHGEAR
VOLTAGE: 33KV TYPE: _
MANUFACTURER: _ YEAR OF MANUFACTURE : __
(AI (BI
ITE PART
MFR. SEC
NAME REQ.
NO. TYPE OPERATION)
QTY.
1 lsolatlnq (disconnectino) contact feeder side 1250A 5%

2 Soout feeder I bus side 1250A 5%
3 Shutters bus I feeder side 5%
4 voitace Transformer (VT) each type I rating 5%
5 Current Transformer (CT) each type I rating 5%
6 Ground switch ooeratlno mechanism 5%
7 Interlockswitch each type 5%
8 Space heaterof each type 5%
9 Portable ground set (if applicable) 5%
10 Busbarsupport I insulator 5%
11 Fuse each type rating for PI's & metering bus cubicle 5%
12 Operating handle breakertruck 5%
13 Operating handle Disconnect switch 5%
14 Operating handle Ground switch 5%
13.8kV CIRCUIT BREAKER

FOR EACH TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER AS USED
VOLTAGE :13.8kV TYPE :_ _
(AI (B)
PART
ITEM MFR. SEC
ITEM DESCRIPTION NO.1 MFR.REC. QTY. (FOR 10 YRS
NO. NAME REQ.
TYPE OPERATION)
QTY.
1 Breaker SF6Nacuum complete for 1250A 5%

2 Vacuum bottle ( Interrupter) for 1250A 5%
3 Tulip contacts with arms top& bottom for 1250A 5%
4 Control Cable with plug & socket 5%
5 lnsulatinn plate (partition) between poles 5%
6 Flexible copper connector if applicable 5%
7 Pressure gauQe SF6 as appilcable 5%
8 Set of seals 5%
9 SF6 fiIIlna valve as applicable 5%
10 SF6 density monitor switch as applicable 5%
OPERATING MECHANISM FOR 13.8KV CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPE : _
MANUFACTURER :, _ YEAR OF MANUFACTURE :, _ _
(A) (B)
PART
ITEM MFR. SEC
NO. NAME REQ.
TYPE OPERATION)
QTY.
1 Trip coil each type 5%

2 Closino coil 5%
3 Auxiliary switch each type 5%
4 Limit switch each type 5%
5 Auxiliary relav each type 5%
6 Control relay each type 5%
7 Pressure switch each type 5%
8 Electric Motor, sprinQ charqinq mechanism 5%
9 Operation Counter 5%
10 Dash pot I Shock absorber 5%
11 Anti pump relav 5%
12 Mechanism spring charoinq handle 5%
METALCLAD SWITCHGEAR
VOLTAGE: 33KV TYPE: _
MANUFACTURER: _ YEAR OF MANUFACTURE :, _
(AI (BI
PART
ITEM MFR. SEC
NO. NAME REQ.
TYPE OPERATION)
QTY.
1 Isolating (disconnecting) contact feeder side 1250A 5%

2 Spout feeder I bus side 1250A 5%
3 Shutters bus I feeder side 5%
4 Voltage Transformer (VT) each tvpe I ratina 5%
5 Current Transformer (CT) each type I rating 5%
6 Ground switch operating mechanism 5%
7 Interlock switch each !Voe 5%
8 Space heater of each type 5%
9 Portableground set (if applicable) 5%
10 Busbar support I insulator 5%
11 Fuse each type rating for PT's & metering bus cubicle 5%
12 Operating handle breaker truck 5%
13 Operating handle Disconnectswitch 5%
14 Operating handle Groundswitch 5%
OPERATIONAL SPARE PARTS POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
VOLTAGE: TYPE:
MANUFACTURER: YEAR OF MANUFACTURE:
fA) (B)
PART SEC
MFR. NO.1 REQ. MFR.REC. QTY. (FOR 10
ITEM DESCRIPTION NAME TYPE QTY. YRS OPERATION)
MCCB- AC panel board sub circuits (Each Rating) 5%
Main Breaker DC panel board (Each type/Ratino) 5%
MCCB- DC panel board sub circuits (Each Ratlna) 5%
Light control devices 5%
Cartridoe Fuses- all ampere ratings-each type 5%
33kV XLPE Cable 400m
13.8kV XLPE Cable 100 m
Terminal Hardware each type as used 5%
Out door CT each type and Ratino as used 5%
Out door VT each type and Rating as used 5%
33kV Cable sealing end each type as used 5%
13.8kV Cable sealing end each type as used 5%
Note:Quantity mentioned as 5% above of the actual supply shall be rounded to the next whole number.
APPENDIX V
PTS-11 CM01 0, SCADA Spare Parts for
Power Factor Correction in Hail
VOLTAGE: TYPE:_ _
(B) (C) (AXC)

r---l&-
MFR.REC.
ITEM PART NO.1 SEC UNIT
ITEM DESCRIPTION MFR. NAME QTY.(FOR TOTAL
NO. TYPE REQ. PRICE
10YRS (SR)
QTY. (SR)
OPERATION)
I-----
I-----
f-----
20 % of offered modules as spares --
I-
--
GRAND TOTAL SR.:
fnl-2011-10-04_PT&-11 CM01O_Appndx V_SCADA _SPAREPARTS-pfcINhail.xls

APPENDIX VI
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
{NOT APPLICABLE}
APPENDIX VII
PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR
(PTS-11CM0101
i 1. INTRODUCTION.
CONTENTS
a) General.
b) System Details.
REVISIONS
2. LIST OF RELATED SPECIFICATIONS.
PIlEPAREDBY: _ _ -I
DATE:
3. PROTECTION MODIFICATIONS IN 13.8kV & 33kV SWITCHGEARS
CHK'DBY:
4. CAPACITOR BANK PROTECTION.
a) Capacitor Bank Protection Requirements.

b) Protection Tripping Schemes.
c) Integration with Existing Protections
d) Capacitor Monitor.
e) Protection Design Guidelines.
f) Circuit Breaker Requirements.
g) Current & Potential Transformers for 33kV & 13.8kV CB
5. SHUNT CAPACITOR BANK CONTROL
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
BY:
13.8kV & 33kV Relaying & Metering One Line Diagram - Refer Appendix I.
DATE:
THIS DOCUMENT IS
Nor TO BE USED FUR
CONSTRUCI'ION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
APPENDIX-VII (PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL)
APPENDIXVII 1
JOB ORDER NO. HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PTS- OF 00
11CM010 17
"
PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR

1. INTRODUCTION
a) GENERAL
It is proposed to install capacitor banks, as specified in the Scope of Works

in PTS-11 CM01 0 for power factor correction in the existing 132/33kV &
33113.8kV Substations in the Hail, Quwayah and Wadi AI-Dawasir.
Accordingly 13.8kV & 33kV shunt capacitor banks with de-tuning reactors will
be installed at 13.8kV & 33kV Bus.
REVISIONS
This specification details the requirements of protection and automatic

PREPAREDBY: _ _-{
control strategy of the shunt capacitor banks to be installed 13.8kV & 33kV
DATE:
switchgears as detailed in the SOW. Accordingly the contractor shall tailor
CBK1>BY:
the protection requirements to suit the equipments existing in the substation
based on the system requirements. The system details given as guideline
shall be utilized as applicable.
In order to install Capacitor Banks, additions. of circuit breakers and

modifications are required in the existing switchgears of the above
mentioned substations as per section (III) of the PTS. The contractor shall
verify from site, the existing primary system as well as the protection
schemes available and propose necessary modifications keeping in view of
the technical requirements for achieving the functional objectives of the
project, even if they are not detailed in the SOW.
Note: For installing and commissioning the required protection

system for the capacitor banks and associated feeders, all the
necessary primary or secondary equlpments shall be provided by the
contractor irrespective of whether or not these materials are included
In the scope or not. Necessary clarification from SEC shall be sought
by the contractor in case of any ambiguity.
BY:
b) SYSTEM DETAILS.
DATE:
The 13.8kV & 33kV bus bars in the stations indicated above are with two
Transformers and two bus sections and Three Transformers with three
sections. The 13.8kV side of the transformer is star connected and the
neutral is solidly grounded. The scheme contemplates that the capacitor
bank is to be switched in and out in accordance with the MVAr loading
THIS DOCUMENT IS
Nor TO BE USED FOR measured on the HV side of the 132/13.8kV and 33/13.8kV Transformers,
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERJNG persisting for a settable time and the preset value of the voltage on the
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
33kVl13.8kV bus for a pre set magnitude of time.
APPENDlXVII (PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
APPENDIX-VII 2
JOB ORDER NO. HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PTS OF 00
11CM010 17
fJ
1
The transformer voltage regulation is accomplished by Negative Reactance

method. The existing voltage control setting could allow two tap difference
between the Transformers in question, with the voltage dead band control of
plus or minus one percent of the rated terminal voltage. Where single phase
HV bus bar potential transformers are available in the stations, then for
i Synchronizing purpose, which are to be utilized for the measurement of VAR

loading on the HV side of the Transformer is to be considered.
For the purpose of directionalizing the negative sequence current relays or

even the plain directional current relaying, the potential transformers on the
transformer LV side, are not to be utilized, since the transformer are being
controlled by transformer auto close switching equipment, to bring in the hot
stand-by transformer. In the event of anyone of the two transformers in
REVISIONS
service goes faulty then the controlling circuit breaker is to be provided with
PREPARlDBY: _ _;
the necessary potential transformers for the above purpose.
DATE:
CHK'DBY:
2. LIST OF RELATED SEC SPECIFICATIONS
The following SEC Specifications shall be applicable in addition to the Capacitor

Bank Protection Specifications detailed in Section # 3 below. These
specifications are to be used appropriately to match the requirements for the
protection of the Capacitor Bank as well as for the modifications in the
switchgear to which the capacitor bank will be connected.
1. Nomenclature of Protective Relays.

2. Testing & Commissioning of Control Alarms & Protection Circuits.
3. Pre-eommissioning Test Procedures
4. Alarm Organization.
5. Switchgear Interlocking
6. 33kV Feeder Protection.
7. 13.8kV Feeder Protection.
8. 33kV Bus bar Breaker Protection.
9. 13.8kV Bus bar Breaker Protection.
BY;
10. 33kV Switchgear.
DATE:
11. 13.8kV Switchgear.
12. Relay and Control Boards
13. 12SV/110V DC Supplies. (To be verified for each Substation)
14. TCP-4/3 Use of Protection Equipment.
THIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCflON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
APPENDIX-VII (PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANTNO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.
APPENDIX-VII 3
JOB ORDERNO. HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PTS- OF 00
11CM010 17
J
3. PROTECTION MODIFICATIONS IN 33kV & 13.8kV SWITCHGEARS
3.1 General
l, Except for the protection and control equipments of the capacitor banks
I (to be provided in separate Capacitor Control and Protection Panel) the

switchgear panel at the substation busbar feeding the Capacitor Bank
shall be provided having protections as per SEC (33kVI13.8kV
Underground feeder Protection).
ii. Control & Protection Panels and Automatic Capacitor Control System
(ACCS) for shunt capacitor banks shall be provided as detailed in Section
(4) below.
REVISIONS
I"REPAREDIYl _ _ -I iii. Wherever new feeder panels will be used for reconnecting existing
DATE:
circuits, it shall be required to provide all protections available for this
CHK'DBY:
circuit presently.
iv. For capacitor feeders the CTs, VTs, trip coils, tripping arrangements, DC
supervision, trip Circuit supervision, control requirements, etc, the
appropriate clauses for Section 4 (Capacitor Bank Protection) and PTS
shall prevail.
v. The DC supply for the new switchgear and modified panels for capacitor
banks shall be separately derived from the existing DC panel with suitable
modification as per PTS and as per section 4(b) below.
vi. The VTs for protection, metering, and control of the capacitor bank shall
be on the bus side of the capacitor control circuit breaker. If buses VTs
are not available at present it shall be provided.
vii. Necessary modification of the tripping circuits of all the CBs on the
switchgear shall be required to accomplish the CBF tripping as mentioned
in the Capacitor Protection ReqUirements (section 4). Similarly in case of
Bus bar protection relay operates, it should trip out the capacitor CB also.
BY:
viii. There shall be interlock to ensure that capacitor CB closing shall not be
n....TE:
possible before energizing the corresponding busbar. Similarly all
interlocking requirements as required by the specifications for control,
ACCS, and protection of the capacitor bank shall be incorporated in the
new switchgear.
ix. Existing busbar protections shall be modified for including the additional
1HIS DOCUMENT JS
Nor TO BE USED FOR switchgear also. The BB protection CT of the switchgear panel shall be
CONSI'RUCI10N OR
FOR ORDERING wired to existing respective CT ring of that bus section. The BB trip Relay
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
of respective bus section shall trip the CB of the capacitor bank
connected to that bus section. Also Close block for the capacitor Bank
CBs shall be provided from respective BB protection trip UO Relays. If
APPENDIXVII (PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANTNO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.
APPENDIX-VII 4
11CM010 17
i
the existing trip UO Relays shall not have adequate No. of contacts then
the trip UO relay shall be replaced with the Relay of adequate No. of
contacts. Activation of UO Relay from a UO Relay shall not be allowed.
Care shall be taken that after complete modification there must at least
20% spare contacts for Future/Emergency use.
i x. In case when grounding is out side the busbar protection CTs, suitable
CT shorting and isolating arrangement should be provided for preventing
false tripping of busbar during earth faults.
xi. Incase when additional outdoor CBs will be provided for switching of the
capacitor bank, these breakers together with the existing upstream CBs
shall satisfy all the protection, control and interlocking requirements
REVISIONS
described in the above paragraphs.
PREPARED.lY; ---f
i. Additionally there shall be interlocks such that the old upstream CB
DATE:
can be opened only after opening the outdoor capacitor CB and
CHK'DBY:
similarly the outdoor capacitor CB can be closed only after closing
the old upstream CB.
ii. Any capacitor closing or tripping shall be possible only through the
new outdoor CB rated for capacitor switching.
iii. In case of a fault on the upstream of the outdoor CB, the over
current relay on the existing switchgear shall initiate the lock out
relay of the capacitor bank and also a timer which shall after delay
trip the up stream CB. However the interlocks between the CBs
shall ensure that the capacitor CB is opened before the upstream
CB tripping.
iv. Separate unit protection (high impedance type) shall be provided for
the cable connection between outdoor CB (CB to be included) and
the existing indoor switchgear CB. Cable protection shall trip the
capacitor CB at the first instant and then trip the upstream breaker
after the time delay.
BY:
v. Similarly busbar protection shall at first trip the capacitor CB and
DATE:
then trip the upstream CB after time delay.
3.02 Modifications in each 33kV113.8kV SUbstations
a) Protection Modification for the spare panel to be used for connection of

Capacitor bank
TIllS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCflON OR
FOR ORDERING If the spare panel is equipped with U/G cable feeder protection then
MATElUALS UNTlL
CERTIFIED AND DATED existing protection shall be retained as it is. If the spare feeder panel is
equipped with 33kV/13.8kV OHL protection then existing Distance Relay+
DEF Relay + Auto Reclose Relay shall be dismantled and new Pilot wire
APPENDIXVII (PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANTNO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.
APPENDIX-VII 5
JOB ORDERNO. HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PT8- OF 00
11CM010 17
cable differential protection (MBCI+MCRI+ MMLG02) for the cable inter

connection between the existing spared switchgear panel and the Out door
switchgear panel shall be installed. The Relay shall be connected with the
Relay shall be installed activated from the 87PW. On operation 87PW the
UO Relay shall open the out door CB of the capacitor bank first on
successful opening of the out door CB the indoor switchgear CB shall be
opened.
b) Out door switchgear Panel for the Capacitor Bank.
The protection Details and CT & VT requirements shall be as stated in

Section 4 of this PRo
REVISIONS
One additional set of CT identical to CT shall be installed for 87PW
protection of the cable interconnection between the out door and indoor
PREPARED BY: _ _ -I
switchgear panels. The CT positioning shall be such that the Capacitor
DATE:
CHK'DBY:
protection and the Cable protection (87PW) shall over lap each other. The
contractor shall install pilot wire protection Relay with separate trip lockout
Relay in the same Relay Panel. Necessary pilot wire and pilot wire
APPROVED
connection shall be the contractor's responsibility.
The CT wiring from the switchgear panel to the Relay panel shall be of
adequate size,
C) Protection Modification for The spare panel to be used for the outgoing
Circuit shifted from one bus section to another bus section
Existing CTs shall be first checked from site and if the existing CTs are not
same as of spare panel, then new set of CTs shall be installed. However
33kV/13.8kV BB protection CT shall be identical to existing BB Protection
CT. New CT required shall be of the same type and shall have the same
dimensions to fit in the existing switchgear.
If the out going circuit shifted is UlG Cable feeder and the installed
protection in the spare panel is for UlG cable feeder then no major
protection modification shall be required only the contractor shall check the
BY:
compatibility of the Pilot wire differential protection with the remote end any
DATE:
Relay module or auxiliary Relay needed shall be the contractors
responsibility.
If the out going circuit is OHL line and the existing protection in the spare
panel is for U/G cable feeder then the existing pilot wire protection shall be
dismantled and new Distance protection + DEF protection and Auto
TIllS DOCUMENT IS
Nor TO BE USED FOR Reclose Relay shall be installed the panel shall be modified to bring it par
CONSTRUCfION OR
FOR ORDERING
forSEC-EOA
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DAlEO
If the existing protection in the spare panel is for OHL line and the out
going circuit shifted is U/G cable feeder ,the existing distance Relay + DEF
APPENDIX-VII (PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
APPENDIXVII 6
11CM010 17
I !
1
Relay and Auto Reclose Relay shall be removed and new pilot wire
protection (MBCI+MCRI+MRTP01 +MMLG02) shall be installed in the
panel. The Protection must be identical and compatible with the remote end
of the UG cable feeder. The panel shall fully comply with SEC-COA
specifications for U/G Cable feeder).
I If the existing spare or new breaker is used for existing cable feeder when
the feeder swapping is envisaged to accommodate the position for
capacitor bank - For UG cable feeder circuit's care shall be taken that
87PW Pilot wire protection Relay shall be identical and compatible with the
Relay at the remote end. However supervision/supervised module shall be
selected accordingly. If the new Relay shall be installed in the new panel
then the modification shall also be carried out at remote end for identical
protection.
REVISIONS
1'1IP...... y, _ _ -I
The existing schematic Drawings shall be Modified/ reproduced
accordingly.
DATE:
CHK'DBY:
Alarm indications shall be as per SEC-COA latest version.
APPROVED 4. CAPACITOR BANK PROTECTION
a) Capacitor Bank Protection Requirements
In general, the Protection scheme for capacitor banks shall be designed in

accordance with the guidelines given in the IEEE Guide for Protection for
Capacitor Banks (C37.99-2000 / latest) supplemented by the manufacturers
own experience and expertise. However the supplier shall be fully
responsible for the satisfactory functioning of the protection scheme
considering all aspects of SEC system conditions.
The offer shall include design and supply of a comprehensive protection

scheme for the equipment offered by the supplier. Full details including the
relay characteristics shall be provided in the bid offer giving necessary
calculations if necessary. All relays and devices chosen shall be immune to
the mal-effects of possible harmonics, ferro-resonance and surges in the
locality. Also a schedule showing how each relay will be functionally utilized
BY:
shall be submitted along with the technical offer.
DATE:
The following is a list of devices as guideline for the design of Capacitor

Bank System Protection which shall be governed by the appropriate clauses
of IEEE C37.99, and IEC 60871. Regarding the characteristics of each
protection function and its application clause 3(e) shall also be followed.
Whether mentioned herein or not, all primary or secondary devices required
THIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR for the fulfillment of the protection and automatic control of the capacitor
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING bank shall be provided by the contractor. The contractor shall do the
MATERIALS
CERTIFIED AND DAmD
UNTIL
necessary engineering before bidding and clarifications shall be obtained
from SEC.
POWER FACTOR CORREcnON IN HAIL)
APPENDIX-VII 7
11CM010 17
n
1) Time and Instantaneous Over Current & ElF Protection
2) Phase Unbalance/ Negative sequence Current protection.
3) Neutral Unbalance Current protection. (see note below)

4) Voltage Differential Protection. (If applicable)
5) Over Voltage protection.
6) Under Voltage Protection.
7) VT supervision for all Voltage transformers. (By voltage and MCB aux
contact).
REVlSIONS
8) Trip Circuit Supervision (CB open and Closed Position) as per SEC
I'1lEPAIlED BY: ----I
specification.
DATE:
CHK'BY:
9) Capacitor Discharge Timers, Interlock Timers (Additional to the PLC
assigned functions)
10) Trip Lock out relays 1 & 2
11) Non Lock out trip relays (as required)
12) Logic Controllers
13) Capacitor Monitor (can be a built feature of anyone of the above)
14) Other Protections recommended by manufacturer.
There shall be two groups of protections such that failure of anyone group
shall not jeopardize timely clearance of the fault. The scheme shall be such
that any type of fault shall be detected by minimum two principles preferably
one from voltage source and the other from a current source. The two
protection groups can utilize multifunction relays, which need not be
essentially identical or comprising the same functions. (See typical
BY:
Protection Logic Diagrams CT-904241, vide Appendix 1)
DAn:
Notes:1) Requirement of CTs and VTs for these protections shall be

subject to the approval of SEC-COA.
2) Surge Protections shall be provided for CTs or VTs wherever

applicable.
11IIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR
FOR ORDERING 3) Sensitive VT circuits shall be of screened cables to avoid stray
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
voltages.
APPENDIX-VII (PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
APPENDIX-VII 8
11CM010 17
"
t
4) Some of the enlisted protections may not be applicable to certain

Bank configurations.
5) In case the Neutral current CT is of very low ratio and accurate

setting is not possible with Current Relays, the Protection can be
through a voltage relay across a loading resistor.
b) Tripping Schemes
All protection and tripping DC circuits shall be logically segregated into two
groups operating on the two Station DC systems and to the two CB Trip coils
appropriately. DC supply Supervisions, Trip Circuit supervision etc shall be
as per relevant specifications and practice applicable. Any type of fault
REVISIONS
detected simultaneously by current relay as well as by voltage relay shall be
I'IlEPAREDBY: _ _-{
operating on two different trip coils. Also if any fault is to be detected by a
second set of identical relay, then also the segregation shall be made.
DATE:
CHK'DBV:
Note:
Suitable timers shall be provided such that sufficient time interval shall be
allowed as recommended by that Capacitor Bank Manufacturer between
tripping and closing operations. Also there shall be provision for preventing
simultaneous closure of more than one bank. Sufficient time intervals (to
allow settling of transients) shall be provided between the switching in of two
banks. These interlocks shall be in addition to the logic controller (ACCS)
software configurations.
c) Integration of Existing Busbarl Stuck Breaker protection
1) 33kV/13.8kV Capacitor Bank: The Capacitor feeder CB shall be provided

with identical CTs as that existing for other bays in the same busbar section
for BIB protection. The complete system shall be re-commissioned. The
stage-II of the Capacitor CBF relay shall initiate BIB trip relay also to trip out
all CBs connected to the respective busbar.
2) In case 33kV/13.8kV system is not provided with Busbar protection; instead

BY:
a partial differential protection (Stuck Breaker Protection) is provided which
DATE:
trips the Incomer and Bus section Breakers only. Modification shall be
required such that the Stage-II of the Capacitor CBF relay shall trip all the
out going feeders, Incomer CB and Bus section CB of the respective
sections.
d) Capacitor Bank Monitor

lUIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING Each capacitor bank system shall have user friendly monitoring devices of
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIEDANDDATED the state of the art (can be a built-in feature of protection relays) with
facilities for retrieving fault data, transients recording, THD reporting up to
15th harmonics, fault analysis, trouble shooting, and issue maintenance
APPENDIX-VII (PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANTNO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
APPENDIX-VII 9
llCM010 17
warning signals and to monitor performance. Suitable Note Book PC shall be

supplied with necessary software to retrieve and analyze the data from the
monitor.
e) Capacitor Bank Protection Design Guide lines
I 1. Configuration of the Capacitor Bank:
The capacitor bank shall be in the double star configuration with the neutral
floating but inter connecting the neutrals of both the star connected element
of the bank, with provision of the current transformer with full primary
insulation, with suitable ratio, in such a manner that when one percent of the
capacitors fails, it shall be possible for being sensed and alarm is to be
REVISIONS
initiated. In the event of failure of large number of series capacitor (10% or
I'IIEPAlUIDBY; _ _ -I more), rendering higher level differential currents the capacitor bank shall be
arranged for tripping.
DATE:
CHK'DBY:
The prime point of consideration shall be the required voltage factor and the
corresponding time which, each phase unit is to be rated, in view of its
AI'TROVED applicable system neutral, which is resistance grounded, to avoid
catastrophic failures of capacitor bank, in the event of delayed clearance of
any possible line to ground faults.
Another possible and eventual over voltage condition to which these

capacitor banks could be subject to is fifth harmonic voltage. In the event of
loss of load on the concerned bus bar, the possible over voltage that is
impressed on the transformer, especially when the transformer is operating
in the most minus percentage taps, considerable fifth harmonics currents
could be generated due to over fluxing in the core of the transformer. The
capacitor bank along with the leakage reactance of the Transformer and the
de-tuning reactor will resonate near about the fifth harmonics (as the series
resonance) resulting in the appreciable voltage built up, in the individual
elements of the tuned circuit, constituted by the leakage reactance of the
transformer , the de-tuning reactor and the capacitance of the capacitor
bank. To secure the elements under these conditions suitable metal oxide
arrestors are to be employed with adequate energy handling capacity and
BY:
factor of safety to contain the catastrophic failures of the banks and possible
DATE:
damages to the nearby equipments.
Capacitor banks are normally rated for continuous operation up to 110% of

the nominal voltage RMS and the crest voltage not exceeding
1.2*1.414*(rated RMS terminal voltage) including the harmonics but
excluding the transients. It is to be studied that during the system operating
11I1S DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USID FOR conditions that the crest voltage to which the capacitor bank is subject to, is
CONSTaUCfION OR
FOR ORDERING
well within the rated magnitude of the capacitor themselves or well within the
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
clipping voltage of the arrestors employed for the Protection of these
elements.
APPENDIXVII (PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.
APPENDIXVlI 10
11CM010 17
The sixth harmonic content and the crest voltage to which the capacitor bank
is subject is to be studied and the voltage is to be suitably contained or the
capacitors are to be rated, in accordance with the system conditions.
The design aspects of various protections are given below.
I 2. Over Current and Earth Fault Protection:
The over current Protection shall be peak detector including the harmonics
but supervised by the Positive sequence direction sensor with the timer
supplement. In the event of currents discharges in to the parallel circuits the
Protection is to be blocked. The utility value of imparting direction feature,
the relay to see only the current flowing into the capacitor and not the
REVISIONS
discharges when any adjacent feeder trips on fault and thus making the
capacitor bank being available and thus providing VARs in accordance with
PRErAREDBY; _ _ -I
DATE;
the available voltage on the bus while clearing the fault. In the event of
CHK'DBY:
forward current increases inclusive of the harmonics the current function will
have to be activated for accomplishing the tripping of the capacitor bank.
The earth fault protection shall be accomplished by peak detector supervised

by directional ground fault sensor with the timer supplement and only
operates for fault within the capacitor bank and the ground faults in the
adjacent feeders, the discharge from the capacitor bank shall not lead to any
operation of the direction earth fault relay. In case where 33kV/13.8kV
source is star connected and the neutral is grounded through resistance for
accommodating the earth fault current vector clearly in the operating part of
the characteristics and the fundamental discharge from the capacitor bank if
any, in case of faults on the adjacent feeders, shall lead to the blocking of
the relay.
3. Neutral Unbalance Current Protection
Neutral unbalance current protection with proper compensation for the

standing unbalance of the system and variation in the manufacturing
tolerance of the capacitors adopted. The range of setting shall be such as to
identify the short circuiting of one percent of the capacitor bank. The relay
BY:
shall be provided minimum two stages one for initiating the alarm at the low
DATE:
set level and tripping at the highest level of unbalance is detected. The CT
shall be provided in the common link between the two neutral points of the
Double Star Capacitor Bank. The relay shall be sensitive only to fundamental
frequency.
4. Negative Sequence Directional Protection.

THIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING Directional Negative Sequence Current Protection, to cover the inter rack
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
phase faults. The protection shall have the negative sequence directional
sensor, to identify the inter phase faults with in the capacitor bank. The relay
responds to the negative sequence current flow into the capacitor bank only.
APPENDIXVII (PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
APPENDIX-VII 11
11CM010 17
f
Depending on the magnitude of the inductive load on the parallel circuits or

during the fault condition of the parallel circuits, the relay is screened and
sensitive setting could be adopted for the inter-phase fault sensing function.
5. Over Voltage Protection.
The over voltage protection is to be provided in the scheme of protection

with the fundamental voltage sensor supplemented with the timer with
adjustable time settings. The relay shall have two stages one for initiating
alarm at low percentage of increase of the nominal voltage and the other
stage with the timer for initiating tripping.
6. Under Voltage Protection.

REVISIONS
PREPAREDBV: _ _ -I The under voltage protection is to be provided in the scheme of protection

DAlE:
with the fundamental voltage sensor supplemented with the timer with
CJlKfDBY:
adjustable time settings. The relay shall have two stages one for initiating
alarm at low percentage of decrement of the nominal voltage and the other
stage with the timer for initiating tripping.
Note: Current Transformer for Neutral Unbalance relay
The current transformer intended for adoption of the neutral unbalance

sensing relays shall be suitable for the low current application. The ratio and
class of the CT shall be specified by th contractor subject to SEC approval.
The current transformer shall be fUlly insulated for the system voltage and
shall be rated for the impulse insulation level suitable for the applicable MV
applications and the short time rating should be estimated after appropriate
study. Suitable surge protections should be provided as required and as per
guidelines of IEEE.C.37.
f) Circuit Breaker Requirements
The rating of the breaker is to be checked for the suitability for the frequent
switching on and off the capacitor bank and also to handle the extreme fault
level of 25kA-1 sec for 33kVl13.8kV level. The supplier shall confirm that the
BY:
breaker is entirely re-strike free.
DATE:
The contractor shall provide the following details of the breaker adopted for
the control of the capacitor Bank.
Continuous current carrying capacity

THIS DOCUMENT IS Breaking capacity (inductive)
Nor TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING Breaking capacity (capacitive)
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
Short circuit Rating, Magnitude and duration 33kV/13.8kV
Maximum Temperature
APPENDlXVII (PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
APPENDIX-VII 12
Joa ORDER NO. HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PTS- OF 00
11CM010 17
f
Tripping time
Breaker Capability Notes:
The TRV capability of the CB and the system TRV during the process of
i
opening under all conditions of operation, must be matched in such a way
that the TRV capability of the CB is not exceeded under any circumstances,
but limited to the safe level recommended by the manufacturer of the CB. In
the event of calculation indicates that at any point of time from the instant of
opening the breaker under certain conditions, the System TRV generated, is
exceeding the with stand capability of the CB, or touching the level with in
adequate safety margin, suitable limiting action for the surges are to be
adopted in such a manner that there exists always a safety margin of
REVISIONS specified magnitude from the with stand capability of the CB.
PBEPAllEDBY: _ _--\ The following shall be responsibility of the contractorl supplier.

DATE:
CHK'DBY: 1) For conducting the study and assessing the harmonics in the stations
and to establish the method to filter.
2) To check the possibility of on set of linear or nonlinear resonance and

the method to either to contain or eliminate, without leading to the
stressing of the capacitor banks and the components.
3) Consequent to the detailed examination, in the event of insulation

coordination is to be applied by the adoption of the limiting devices,
their capacity, withstand capability and the limiting level, etc are to be
provided insulation coordination chart and is to be accepted by the SEC
concerned division.
4) Establishing the withstand capability of the capacitor bank and the

tuning reactor during inrush and out rush currents, under the respective
system condition of energizing the bank and for fault in the adjacent
section.
5) To check the suitability of the breaker for breaking duty in the event of
BY:
an inter rack fault, at the critical point of the capacitor string depending
DATE: on the design of the bank.
g) 13.8kV Current and Potential Transformers Requirement
1) 800-400/1 AMP, 15VA at the lowest Ratio Class 5P20 for the Directional OIL
and ElF Protections with IPCT for metering.
THIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONsrRUcnoN OR 2) 800-400/1 AMP, 15VA at the lowest Ratio, Class 5P20 for the Backup OIC +
FOR ORDEJUNG
MATEJtIALS UNTIL
Thermal OIL and ElF Protections.
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
APPENDIX-VII 13
11CM010 17
3) Three x Single Phase PTs of 13.8kV/"3/1101"3Vx1101"3V, (50+50) VA,

Class (0.5+3P) for Protection, Metering and ACCS equipments. These VTs
shall be on the busbar side of the switchgears. However, the existing VT
ratio at each of the SIS shall be checked.
h) 13.8kV Current and Potential Transformers Requirement
4) 800-400/1 AMP, 15VA at the lowest Ratio Class 5P20 for the Directional OIL
and ElF Protections with IPCT for metering.
5) 800-400/1 AMP, 15VA at the lowest Ratio, Class 5P20 for the Backup OIC +
Thermal OIL and ElF Protections.
REVISIONS
6) Three x Single Phase PTs of 33kVl"3I11 01"3Vx11 OI"SV, (50+50) VA, Class
PREPAIlEDBY: _ _-I
(0.5+3P) for Protection, Metering and ACCS equipments. These VTs shall
DAn:
be on the busbar side of the switchgears. However, the existing VT ratio at
CBK'DBY:
each of the SIS shall be checked.
Note: All the above specifications are the minimum values only. The
contractor shall verify the existing and propose new CTNT in
line with the existing ones and confirm adequacy by calculations
subject to SEC approval.
5. CAPACITOR BANK CONTROL
Automatic Control
The switching IN and OUT of the capacitor bank shall be in accordance with the
descriptions in the "Control Requirements" under Section 5.03 of the Scope of
Works and Technical Specifications of the PTS.
Note: All the Switching shall be from the Capacitor Control and Relay
panels. The Circuit Breaker Panel feeding the Capacitor Bank shall
be such that CB closing shall not be possible locally, except in "CB
drawn out position".
BY:
Alarm and Indications
The alarm organization for capacitor banks shall be such that all protection and
control functions shall be indicated on annunciator windows. This shall include
monitoring functions such as DC supervision, AC supervisions, trip circuit
supervision, VT supervision, relay fault indications as per standard practices
nns DOCUMENT IS subject to SEC approval. Each bank shall have separate annunciators with
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
sufficient spare windows mounted on the capacitor control panel. Possible
FOR ORDERING grouping of alarms are acceptable for SCADA points as per SEC-COA policies.
MATERIALS UNTH..
CERTIFIED AND DATED
APPENDIXVII 14
11CM010 17
SCADA
The supplier shall design and install appropriate SCADA system for Capacitor
Banks remote control and monitoring in line with the requirements of SEC
concerned department. It shall be ensured that burdens on Measuring CTs due
i 6.
to the distance to transducer location shall be with in limits.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All the main protection relays shall be of numerical type and facility shall be
available for setting the relays through the local HMI and also facility to down
load the setting from the PC to be supplied together with the applicable
programme, one set along with PC to be supplied. Minimum drawing submittal
REVISIONS
shall be as, but not limited to, the following.
PREPARED BY: ----I
DATE:
A. Submittal of Drawings
CIIK'DBY:
1. Drawing index shall be available at the beginning of each set of drawing
describing the subject of each sheet or group of sheets and its issue
AI'I'IlOVED number.
2. A full detailed legend describing the equipment type and how to read the
drawings shall be given.
3. Each sheet of drawing shall be marked as "For Approvaf, Approved' and

"Final As-built", as the case may be.
4. Drawings shall be submitted in A3 size in a proper binder with no sheets

folded.
5. The feederlbay name/number shall be available on each sheet with the

following sheet number.
6. Proper inter-reference shall be added for primary and secondary equipment

and these inter-references shall include all the necessary guidance, such as
drawing number, page and grid reference.
BY;
DATE:
7. Each sheet shall be titled as per the function, such as "Tripping Relay-1, DC
Distribution, etc."
8. At the beginning of each set of drawing an equipment list shall be added

and this shall furnish full information about each device in respect of type,
rating, make, the number of NO & NC contacts, the Sheet #, grid location on
THIS DOCUMENT IS
Nor TO BE USED FOR the sheet containing the device and ordering information, etc.
CONSI1lUCl10N OR
FOR ORDEllING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
9. Inter-reference for contacts are to follow contacts location and not the coil
location.
APPENDIX-VII 15
11CM010
17
10. Single line diagram shall be submitted first. This diagram shall show the
layout, rating, standard device number, the number of phases and the
relative location of each equipment as appropriate, then followed by the
detailed logic diagram and the schematic diagram for each bay showing the
internal detailed connection and wiring (or referred to in an attached
standard drawing if necessary).
B. Control & Protection Supplies
1. The supply for each type of protection, tripping circuit and alarm shall be
derived directly from the main DC distribution board independently for each
bay. Internal looping of such supplies shall not be acceptable either in
control or protection panels and each MCB shall be equipped with an alarm
REVISIONS
contact covering both automatic and manual operation.
PREPAllEDBY: _ _ -I
DATI::
2. The supply connections shall be made point to point with supply terminals
OIK1>BY:
covered with plastic cover and proper supply supervision relays shall be
provided.
C. Isolation of VT's and Shorting. Isolation & Earthing of CT's
1. Proper CT shorting and isolating arrangement shall be provided for each CT

circuit and '11" terminals arrangement shall invariably be used to allow
isolation of neutral and earth connections.
2. The CT star point shall never be made directly on the CT secondary

terminals.
3. CT terminals shall be covered with a caution label as "Caution, CT Circuits to

be shorted before Isolation". The label shall describe the shorting and
isolation process briefly.
4. Plug-in type connection shall never be used in CT circuitry
5. Each VT circuit shall be equipped with isolating link, covered in a labeled

plastic cover.
BY:
DATE:
6. Colour coded cables shall be used for VT circuit.
7. Supply to any cubicle shall be through a labeled terminal block with the cable
supply on one side and the internal connection on the other. Wires shall be
terminated by insulated lug.
rms DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR 8. Each equipment inside a panel shall be properly labeled in its function on
CONSTRUCTION
FOR ORDERING
OR
metallic sheet.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
9. Each trip isolation link shall be labeled with red sleeve.
APPENDIX-VII 16
11CM010
17
D. Miscellaneous
1. Measuring transducers for SCADA shall be located on SCADA panel.
2. CT shorting and CTIVT isolation facilities also shall be provided in SCADA
i 3.
panels.
Consistency throughout the substation in numbering, designation, ferruling,

labeling, etc., shall be maintained.
4. For each relay and device the detailed catalogues covering working
principle, pre-commissioning tests, operation and maintenance, setting
procedures shall be provided in original documents and not photo copies.
REVISIONS
5. Anti-pumping relay shall be effective as long as the closing pulse persists

PREPAREDBV: ----I
from all sources of closing commands.
DATE:
CHK'DBl':
E. Ferruling:
......,VED Ferruling of both internal and external secondary wiring should follow IEC
391 , Fig.14d.
***END OF APPENDIX-VII***
BY:
DATE:
THIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED mR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
APPENDIX-VII 17
11CM010 17
1/
~
APPENDIX -VIII
CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL SCOPE OF WORKS

APPENDIX - Villa
REVISIONS
CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK
PRII"ARED BY: _ _ -I
DATE:
CH&'PBY:
FOR

r -'
PTS-11 CM01 0
CEIlTIIIIB
BY,
DATE,
'k(fj,
IU 1)( III
(ATTACHMENT TO SCHEDULE "B" OF CONTRACT NO ./ )

rms DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE llSED FOR
CONSTRlJC1'ION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE ND REV.
FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX 1
C494 A Villa OF 0
PTS-11CM010
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA 4
1.00 CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORK
GENERAL
This CIVIL Scope of work and Technical Specifications describe the requirements and
scope of work that the CONTRACTOR is required to carry-out until the successful
commissioning, completion and final acceptance of WORK by Saudi Electricity
Company in the Central Region of Saudi Arabia, for the installation of 33kV capacitor
banks and reactors in existing Substations #7780, #7782, #8901, #8902, #8903, #8904,
#8911, #8914, #8915, #8918, #8922 and #8077 in Quwayah at Central Operating Area
for Power Factor Correction. CONTRACTOR shall provide all the civil works required
for the installation of the capacitor banks, de-tuning reactors and other equipment
gl ~ N _
covered in this project, in all the substations involved, not limited to the following.
REVISIONS
,
2.00 SCOPE OF WORK
PRJjrARED BV, ----I
DAb::
A. At Substations #7780, #7782, #8901, #8902, #8903, #8904, #8911, #8914, #8915,
CHfDBY:
#8918, #8922 and #8077 in Quwayah
1. Design, fabrication and erection of hot-dip galvanized steel supporting structures

for all outdoor electrical equipment provided under this project
,
1-
-
'" '"--'r
2. Design and construct the foundations, as applicable, for the structures as
mentioned in item 1 above.
3. Design and construct the foundations, as applicable, for all outdoor equipment
4. Design and construction of reinforced concrete foundations for the 33kV and
13.8kV capacitor banks
5. Provide and install chain link fences with gates and provide with necessary
interlocking mechanism for each of the capacitor banks, De-tuning reactors and
reactors installations, including Signboards and Danger Boards.
6. Provide and install sunshade protections with one (1) meter eaves around all
capacitor banks installed in this project.
7. Design and construction of dedicated concrete encased ductbanks and handholes

to route all the underground LV/control/communication cables from all equipment
installed to the switchgear/control Room
CONTRACTOR shall determine exact layout of these ductbanks and shall size
them adequately to accommodate the LV power cables & control cables to be
T~S DRAWI:"fG IS NOT installed considering 20% spare capacity.
T BE USED FOR
C NSTRUCTION OR
FO ORDERING
M TERIALS UNTIL. 8. Design and construction of dedicated concrete encased ductbanks and suitable
CE TIFIED AND DATED
manholes to route all the 33kV, 13.8kV and LV underground power cables from
the equipment installed to the switchgear/control room
CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO REV.

I JOB ORDER NO.
APPENDIX 2
,
, C494 A Villa OF 0
PTS-11CMD1D
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA 4
,
CONTRACTOR shall determine exact layout of these ductbanks and shall size
them adequately to accommodate the 33kV/13.8kV/LV underground power cables
to be installed considering 20% spare capacity.
The elevation of the top of the manholes shall be 100mm above the surrounding
asphalt finished grade elevation to preclude the entry of water. All manholes within
the substation yard shall be of traffic type.
9. Reinstatement/Repair/Replenishment of existing structures, soil, equipment, etc.,

which will be affected or disturbed by implementing the Scope of Work shall be
carried out by the Contractor
10. Design and construction of concrete foundations with steel structures for cable
REVISIONS
sealing ends (potheads) support for 33kV and 13.8kV cable terminations, if
required.
PRlPARlD BY: ----I
DATE,
11. CONTRACTOR shall provide all the metallic cable trays, galvanized steel supports
CHK'DBY:
for the cables and necessary accessories.
12. Disposal of removed/demolished materials/debris to a Company designated

dumping site
NOTE: Only the applicable clauses of Appendix-Vilib shall be referred to in conjunction

with this Appendix-Villa.
r
B. 33kV Switchgear Room Expansion with all the requirements at #8901 SIS
i. Existing switchgear room shall be extended approximately three (3) meters.
ii. Removal/Demolition of end-walls and exterior metal doors, if any of the existing
Switchgear Room Building affected by the expansion. The metal doors will be
reinstalled/relocated suitably.
Building expansions shall match the width, height, materials and color of the
existing building. If overhead traveling cranes exist, they shall be extended to the
BY:
building expansions. For the design of building expansions, refer to the
DATI:: !r 'A-Ill applicable clauses of Appendix-VI lib.
iii. Geotechnical investigation at the Switchgear Room to be expanded. Soil

investigation and report preparation shall be in accordance with the attached
PTS-08EM313 - Scope of Work and Technical Provisions for Geotechnical
Investigation and Material Testing for 380kV Substations.
iv. Design and construction of Switchgear Room building extension at existing

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
Substation mentioned above. Existing cable basement, tunnel, trenches, etc., if
CONSTRUCTION
FOR ORDERING
OR any, shall be extended to the expanded portion.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
V. Installation of liquid applied single component elastomeric waterproofing
membrane for the new roof of the Switchgear Building. Contractor shall submit
CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PLANT Ne INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO REV.
C494 A Villa OF 0
PTS-11CM010
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA 4
waterproofing material properties and specifications including application

instruction for Company review and approval.
c. Shifting of Drive Gate with all requirements at #8904 SIS
i. Remove and shift the main drive gate to a new location approximately three (3)
meters to the south.
ii. Close the portion of the old drive gate with same materials as the existing
perimeter fence.
iii. The portion/area of the substation adjacent to the closed portion shall be
backfilled, leveled and asphalted.
cz
REVISIONS iv. Construct new asphalted ramp in front of the relocated main drive gate up to the
existing asphalt.
PREPAREDlY: -----I
DATE:
CHK'DBY;
End of Appendix-Villa
=~~
/0/8//
~'2JL7
BY,
!(}f
1.1,_
DATE, 10 rKI II
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDl:RING
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS I-PLA_NT_N_~C+-_

INDEX
_ -+ DOCUMENT NO. +-_
PAGE -+_--1
_NO REV.

C494 A Villa
OF o
PTS-11CM010
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA 4
APPENDIX-Vilib
i REVISIONS
STRUCTURAL/CIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA,
TECHNICAL & MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
PRE_ARID BYl _--I
DAT!"
CHIDBY:
! A,PPROyED
..l.. . NIlMISSION ASSET FOR

P~;'G DEPARTMENT

OP~RATING DEPARTMENT
CERTIF[D
A ./
BY, '--\JL~ - PTS-11CM010
DA, "l7l1XIII
(
I
T~S DRAWING
T BE
IS NOT
USED FOR
C NSTRUCTION OR
F ORDERING
M TERIALS UNTIL
C TIFIED AND DATED
! (ATTACHMENT TO SCHEDULE "8" OF CONTRACT NO / )
[ROn
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANTNO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO REV
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
! JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIXVlllb 1
, C494 A PTS11CM010 OF o
I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
1.01 GENERAL 05
1.02 PREPARATION OF STRUCTURAUCIVIL CALCULATIONS 05
1.03 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 08
1.04 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTING STRUCTURES 09
,;
z
1.05 LATTICED STEEL GANTRYITAKE-OFF STRUCTURES 09
REVISIONS
II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PKE'AREDBV: _ _ -I
DA.TE:
2.01 GENERAL 11
OiK'DBY: 2.02 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS TO BE PERFORMED 11
BY CONTRACTOR
APPROVED
2.03 SOIL ELECTRICAL RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENTS 12
TJlANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT 2.04 SOIL THERMAL RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENTS 12
-
"<!2:? 2.05 EARTHWORKS 13
2.06 ASPHALT ACCESS ROAD TO SUBSTATION 13
r /
2.07 REMOVAL OF SAND DUNES AND SAND STABILIZATION 13
2.08 SLOPE PROTECTION 13
OP[RATING DEPARTMENT
2.09 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL BUILDINGS WITH CABLE 14
BASEMENT
2.10 SWITCHGEAR & CONTROL BUILDING WITH CABLE 18
ENTRY ROOM
2.11 COOLING TOWER 22
2.12 CABLE TUNNELS 23
2.13 ROAD MARKING AND PARKING AREAS 23
2.14 GATEHOUSE AND TOILET 23
2.15 GROUNDING OF REBARS AND WELDED WIRE FABRIC 24
2.16 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STRUCTURES 24
2.17 LATTICED STEEL GANTRYITAKE-OFF STRUCTURES 24
2.18 CAST-IN-PLACE AND PRECAST CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS 24
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO HE USED FOR 2.19 CONCRETE COVER 25
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
llNTlL
2.20 CONCRETE CABLE TRENCHES 25
CERTIFIED AND DATED
2.21 CONCRETE PROTECTION 26
2.22 CONCRETE PROTECTIVE COATING REQUIREMENTS 26
AND APPLICATION
[ROl]
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-Vlllb 2
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF o
~ ,
~ i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Cont'd)
2.23 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 32

2.24 SEPTIC TANKS AND SEEPAGE PITS 32
2.25 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES AND COVERS 33
2.26 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT SUPPORT 33
STRUCTURES/TAKE-OFF STRUCTURES
2.27 POWER TRANSFORMER FOUNDATIONS 33
ez 2.28 FIREWALLS 34
2.29 STATION SERVICE TRANSFORMER FOUNDATIONS 34
REVISIONS
2.30 COMMUNICATION DUCTBANKS AND HANDHOLES 34
PKE~AREDB'V: __ -I 2.31 ELECTRICAL DUCTBANKS AND MANHOLES 36
2.32 SUBSTATION SIGNBOARD 36
2.33 PERIMETER FENCE & GATES/PRECAST BOUNDARY WALLS 37
2.34 PROTECTIVE CRASH BARRIERS WITH CHAIN LINK 37
APPROVED
2.35 ACCESS LADDER TO ROOF 37
~SMISSION ASSET
P4'NNING DEPARTMENT 2.36 ROOF AND CANOPY WATERPROOFING SYSTEM 38
..1 -
~ 2.37 CABLE BASEMENT, CABLE TUNNEL AND CABLE ENTRY 40
VO/[;'/// ROOM WATERPROOFING
f /
2.38 LIGHTING AND LIGHTNING MAST STEEL MONOPOLES 40
2.39 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS 40
O"'RATINC DEPARTMENT
2.40 CONCRETE REPAIR WORK 41
2.41 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR CRACK INJECTION REPAIR 42
III MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS
3.01 GENERAL 43
3.02 CONCRETE 43
3.03 CEMENT & SAND SCREED 43
3.04 REINFORCING STEEL 44
3.05 STRUCTURAL STEEL/RAIL TRACK STEEL 44
3.06 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS, MORTAR AND GROUT 45
3.07 HOLLOW METAL DOORS 46
T~'IS
T
DRAWING IS NOT
BE USED FOR
3.08 WALL AND ROOF THERMAL INSULATION 53
C NSTRUCTION
F
OR
ORDERING
3.09 FIBERGLASS WALL INSULATION 53
M TERIALS UNTIL
C TIFIED AND DATED 3.10 DRY WALL SYSTEM AND GYPSUM BOARDS 54
3.11 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE 56
3.12 ASPHALT CONCRETE 59
[ROT]
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO REV
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1----+----1------+---+--1
! JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIXVlllb 3
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
!
:". TABLE OF CONTENTS

is ' (Cont'd)
i
I 3.13 BASE AND SUB-BASE MATERIALS 59
zl
t
0'
I 3.14 BACKFILL MATERIALS 59
~
<>
3.15
3.16
PAINTING SYSTEM
PVC WATERSTOPS
59
60
3.17 NON-SHRINK GROUT 61
! 3.18 POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE 62
3.19 COAL TAR EPOXY 63
g I r-, ~ -
3.20 CEMENTITIOUS ELASTOMERIC IMPERMEABLE MEMBRANE 63

I REVISIONS
3.21 REPAIR MORTARS 63
3.22 CONCRETE SURFACER 64
DA.rt: 3.23 CRACK INJECTION MATERIALS 64
CH~'DBV: 3.24 EPOXY ZINC-RICH PAINT/PRIMER 64
3.25 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS 65
~
3.26 SUB DUCTS 65
..!u"N'l:MlSSION ASSET
piJ'NNING DEPARTMENT
3.27 GEOTEXTILES 66
- 3.28 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER/BACK-UP MATERIALS 66
3.29 PROTECTION BOARD/COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLER BOARD 66
/
3.30 POLYETHYLENE SHEETS 67
3.31 ALUMINUM FLASHING 68
OP~RATING DEPARTMENT 3.32 CONCRETE EPOXY FLOOR DUST PROOFER & HARDENER 68
3.33 ROOF DRAINS 71
3.34 WATER TANK 71
3.35 JOINT SEALANTS 71
3.36 CONCRETE BONDING AGENT 73
, :::fiJ 3.37 HANDRAILS 74
3.38 RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM 74
J\JWjf 3.39 FIRE-STOP AND SMOKE-STOP PRODUCTS 79
DAI" 10710/1
I .,
3.40 COMMUNICATION CABLE TRAYS 82
3.41 ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAYS 83
3.42 CERAMIC TILES 83
,
3.43 DOOR/FINISH SCHEDULE AND MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS 83
T~S DRAWING
T BE USED
IS NOT
FOR
C NSTRUCfION OR
F R ORDERING Attachment:
M TERlALS UNTIL
C TlFIED AND DATED
PTS-08EM313 - Geotechnical Investigation and Material Testing for 380kV Substations
[R01]
STRUCTURAUCIVll DESIGN CRITERIA. TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANTNO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO REV
! JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-Vlllb 4
,
c SECTION I - STRUCTURAL/CIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA

~I
1.01 GENERAL
This section broadly outlines the PROJECT'S design criteria and shall be read in
conjunction with the attached PROJECT drawings, the COMPANY Engineering,
Construction and Material Standard Specifications and the latest edition of associated
international Standards and Codes.
This section also covers mandatory requirements governing the preparation of structural
calculations for the design of all steel and concrete structures (super & substructures)
including equiprnent foundations.
REVISIONS
1.02 PREPARATION OF STRUCTURAL/CIVIL CALCULATIONS
P1 ARED BY: ----I
A. Scope
DA~'
CH~DBY' This Specification covers mandatory requirements governing the preparation of structural
calculations for the design of all steel and concrete structures including
structure/equipment foundations.
I ::::::'SET
phlNG DEPARTMENT
~
The criteria and general design outlined below shall be adopted as applicable to the basic
design of the structures, and shall also serve as the basis in the development of detailed
design by the CONTRACTOR subject to necessary adjustments and implementation
particularly in consideration of geologic conditions of the site.
I
i B. Conflicts and DeViations
OP~RATINC DEPARTMENT
I
~I---I-
Any conflict between this Specification and other applicable COMPANY Engineering
Standards, Material System Specifications, Standard Drawings or Industry Standards,
Codes and forms shall be resolved in writing by the COMPANY.
C. Purposes of Calculations
The purposes of calculations are as follows:
1. To enable the designer to arrive at designs, which are safe, feasible and
economical
2. To provide a record for future reference
3. To satisfy code and/or COMPANY requirements as to the adequacy of the design
, 4. To facilitate determination of the effects of possible future modifications
T~IS
T
DRAWING IS NOT
BI: USED FOR
C
F
,,"STRUCTION
R
OR
ORDERING
D. Units
M TERIALS UNTIL
C RTIFIED AND DATED
All calculations shall be done using SI metric units, except when calculations are made in
compliance with a code, or using a computer program, which has not yet been metricated.
All the conventional calculations shall be converted to metric units.
[ROT]
STRUCTURAL/CIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANTNO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO REV
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11---+-----0+----+---1
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIXVlllb 5
C494 A PTS11CMD1D OF o
I
-----,---------------------- ~~------~-
E. Symbols
Symbols used for steel design shall have the connotation as in the AISC Manual of Steel
Construction, ACI Manual of Concrete Practice. Other symbols shall conform to the
corresponding International Codes and Standards that are referenced in the applicable
COMPANY Standard.
In general, the connotation of all symbols used throughout the calculations shall be stated
at the beginning of the calculations.
The connotations of symbols used only locally shall be stated immediately before or after
the equations in which they are used.
g <"I'l N _
F. Equations
, REVISIONS
All equations, graphs, nomographs, etc., used in the calculations shall be:
PRElfAREDBV: _ _ -I
1. Derived in the calculations, or
2. Referred to in the relevant standard, giving clause number, or
3. IHaken from a text book, accompanied by a copy of the pertinent ~age(s)
4. Commonly used and easily recognized equations such as PL, WL2/8, etc., need not
API'RO,"'[D
be derived or have references provided.
1. ':MISSION ASSET
P~C DEPARTMENT
G. Assumptions
Assumptions on which calculations are based shall be listed in an orderly manner.
CONTRACTOR shall clearly spell out the analysis/design methodology/philosophy

adopted in the design of super and substructures; the decision to adopt a particular
analysis/design method shall solely be on the discretion of the COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
H. Parameters
The values of all parameters shall be stated at the beginning of the calculations.
Justification need not be given for commonly accepted values, e.g. Young's modulus,
Poisson's ratios, coefficients of expansion, etc. However, all other parameters shall be
justified either by quoting a source (e.g., soil report or study), or by brief reasoning or
reference to a standard or code. This, in particular, applies to the fOllowing:
1. Temperature differentials
2. Allowable ground bearing pressures, settlements and differential settlements
3. Wind pressure calculations based on the appropriate basic wind speed, exposure
TH,S DRAWING IS NOT factor, height, shape, gust and importance factor
TOI BE liS ED FOR
cr~STRllcrION OR
Fa ORDERING I. General Presentation
M TERIALS UNTIL
eli: TIFIEDANDOATED
The presentation of calculations shall be in accordance with the followinq procedures and
requirements.
1. The heading shall provide the following information:

[ROT]
I SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11---+-----+---1----1
IJ08 ORDER NO. APPENDlXVlllb 6
~< I
~ I a. Name of the originator of the calculations and the name of the checker
! b. The title, which shall clearly describe the contents of the calculations
c. The date the calculations were made
2. Table of Contents and list of all codes and references used
3. All calculations shall be checked, initialed as checked before being sent to the
responsible Project Manager.
4. Calculations shall have sufficient number of sUb-headings to indicate clearly what is

being calculated or designed. Both sub-headings and final results shall be
g <0\ M _
underlined for easy location.
, REVISIONS Sufficient explanation shall be given so that calculation methods are easily
5.
!
comprehensible. For this reason, simple clear sketches should be liberally used.
PRJ:~AREDBY: _ _ -I
Calculations whose approach is not adequately described will not be accepted by
the COMPANY.
CHKtDIY:
6. Calculations are to be in the English language throughout.

~
l'ltANSMlSSION ASSET 7. The cover sheet of each calculation package shall be assigned a COMPANY
P~G DEPARTMENT
drawing number to identify the calculations for a particular Job Order, and for
inclusion in COMPANY permanent records. Individual calculation sheets following
the cover sheet shall be consecutively numbered (1, 2, 3, etc.).
8. Calculation packages should be limited to pertinent information, voided calculation

sheets shall be removed if these sheets do not contain useful information.
9. Design calculations shall be prepared in computer excel sheets in company
acceptable format. Design calculations shall also be submitted in Abode Portable
Document Format (PDF). These shall be submitted in a CD during the definitive
design stage to aid in the review.
I
~Ill J. Computer Calculations
BV
OAT,
-<1~1
ID KIlf
Computer calculations shall be in accordance with the following guidelines:
I 1. All computer models shall be accompanied by the corresponding input and output
data showing the structural shape, integrity of structure, loads applied and the
joints/members layout, etc. Data provided as computer input shall be clearly
distinguished from those computed in the program. The first sheet of each computer
run shall be signed by the engineer responsible for the structural design. A program
TH. DRAWING IS NOT
TO! BE USED FOR description (user's guide) shall be submitted upon request and contain the
CO STRUCfIQN OR
FO ORDERING information necessary to determine the nature and extent of the analysis, verify the
MA [RIALS UNTIL
CE TIFIED AND DATIW
input data, interpret the results with the recommendations such as soil report,
COMPANY minimum requirements and location requirements, etc., and determine
whether the computations comply with these recommendations.
[R01]

--t
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL f-P_L_AN_T_N_O_.+I_ND_EX_+- DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO+-_-i
REV
fOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX.vlllb 7

.
~
~
v SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
~
~
~
-e
Q 2. A computer CD containing a soft copy of the input and output files shall be furnished
"
~ to the COMPANY for all computer models to aid in the review.
3. Computer programs such as STAAD.Pro 2007 is acceptable programs.
4. A summary of the analysis results that are extracted from the computer output shall
be provided. This summary should clearly state the achieved results (maximum
interaction ratios found, deflection ratios, justification of the output with
requirements, etc.).
1.03 CONCRETE STRUCTURES

i
g! ~ N N
A. The concrete structures shall be designed in accordance with the requirements specified
, REVISIONS in TES-P-119.18 and TES-P-119.19. In addition, load combinations, analysis/design
methodology adopted in the structural design and construction of switchgear and control
PRE~ARED BV: _ _-I
buildings (super and substructures) shall be in accordance with Building Code
DATf: Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary (ACI 318M-05) and International
CHKtD BY; Building Code (IBC) latest edition.
APPROVED
B. Loading criteria shall be in accordance with TES-P-119.19. For any additional load
1. "':MISSION ASSET
requirements, clarifications, etc., ANSIIASCE-7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
P~~(; DEPARTMENT and Other Structures", latest edition, shall be followed.
C. For reinforcement detailing, ACI-315 "Detail and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement,

/ / latest edition, shall be followed.
D. The building frame structures shall be designed to support any additional dead loads to
be hung from the roof such as A1C equipment, A1C ducts, false ceiling, lighting fixtures,
piping, electrical equipment (disconnect switches, post insulators, etc.), cable trays
carrying power and control cables.
E. The bUilding structural system shall be designed to resist all loads and stresses resulting
from lifting, handling, erection and transportation of electrical equipment.
,
~
. ..-.-I. /I F. The building structural system shall be designed to withstand the overhead traveling
BY'~~ ,
crane loads and its impact for lifting, handling and transportation of all electrical
DA II"'! /\l1t equipment. Crane beams, support brackets and connections to columns or roof beams
shall be designed for impact loads.
G. BUildings and structures shall be designed to withstand the seismic forces. Seismic loads
shall be computed based on the International Building Code (IBC), latest edition.
TH~ DRAWNG IS NOT H. Building structures shall be designed for either seismic load or wind loads, whichever
T BE USED FOR
C STRUCTION OR
FO ORDERING
governs, considering the corresponding load combination.
M TERlALS UNTIL
CEfTIFlED AND DATED
I. Live load for cable tunnels and ductbanks that are likely to be crossed by heavy
equipment shall be H20 truck loading. When the depth of fill above the top slab of the
cable tunnel and ductbank is 0.60m or less, treat the wheels as concentrated loads
directly applied on their top for determining design moments and shears.
[ROT]
, SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL I------ll--.....-----+----+----l
I JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-Vlllb 8
I
1.04 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STRUCTURES
A. Loading criteria shall be as per TES-P-119.09, Rev. 01. For any additional load
requirements, clarifications, etc., ANSI/ASCE-7, "Minimum Design Loads for BUildings
z
>! and Other Structures", latest edition, shall be followed. All the structures supporting
~ equipment with flexible conductors at top shall be latticed steel structures. Structures
.'"'"
u
Q
supporting rigid conductors on top shall be steel structures.
B. Steel structures (supporting rigid conductors on top) shall comply with the requirements of
TES-P-119.09, Rev. 01 except that the equipment steel structures shall be designed,
fabricated and erected as per American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
,;
z ~ N
- "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings of the Manual of Steel Construction, latest
REVISIONS edition. The design to be adopted shall be based on "Allowable Stress Design" method.
.
PREtARED BY, Increase in allowable stresses by 1/3, in case of wind and seismic loading, acting alone or
in combination with the design dead and live loads is not allowed, because wind or
DA+ seismic forces/loading are considered as primary loads.
CH1'DBY:
i
, C. Latticed steel structures (supporting equipment with flexible conductors at top) shall be
APPROVED fabricated conforming to 20-TMSS-01. Design, fabrication and erection of latticed steel
P ;
~MISS10N ASSET
G DEPARTMENT
structures, equipment supports with flexible conductor at the top and the structures
supporting rigid conductors with more than three meters height shall be as per TES-P-
?'e 119.09, Rev. 01 and ASCE Standard 10-97 "Design of Latticed Steel Transmission
/p/S/# Structures", Latest Edition.
"
D. The equipment support structure foundations shall be designed as per the requirements
of TES-P-119.18. In addition, the analysis/design methodology adopted in the structural
O'rRATING DEPARTMENT design of reinforced concrete foundations for steel structures shall be in accordance with
ACI 318M-05 "Building Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary".
---11-----
I E. For foundation reinforcement detailing, ACI-315 "Detail and Detailing of Concrete
Reinforcement", latest edition, shall be followed.
1.05 LATTICED STEEL GANTRYITAKE-OFF STRUCTURES
A. Loading criteria shall be as per TES-P-119.09, Rev. 01. For any additional load
requirements, clarifications, etc., ANSI/ASCE-7, "Minimum Design Loads for BUildings
and Other Structures" shall be followed.
,
,
! B. Structural members shall be fabricated from materials conforming to 20-TMSS-01.

T~IS DRAWING IS NOT Design, fabrication and erection of latticed steel structures shall be as per TES-P-119.09,
TO BE USED FOR Rev. 01 and ASCE Standard 10-97 "Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures",
C~NSTRUCTION OR
F R ORDERING Latest Edition.
M 'rERIALS UNTIL
C~RTlFIED AND DATED
C. The gantry/take-off structure foundations shall be designed as per the requirements of

TES-P-119.18. In addition, the analysis/design methodology adopted in the structural
design of reinforced concrete foundations for steel structures shall be in accordance with
ACI 318M-05 "Building Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary".
[ROT]
I
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----1---+------1---1----1
I JOB OR.DER NO. APPENDIXVlllb 9
D. For reinforcement detailing, ACI-315 "Detail and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement",

latest edition, shall be followed.
z
o
f **** END OF SECTION I ****
el:i
Q
REVISIONS
I
PREfARED BVl ----I
DA~;
CHlfD BY:
I
I
I~
,k"'NSMISSION Assn
~ING DEPARTMENT
I .......,..".
cr:_y~
/p/g///
----l---
~
By,lerj '~,
.A E, to I
~ [I
!,
T!IS DRAWING IS NOT
T BE USED FOR
C NSTRUCTION OR
F R ORDERlNG
M TERlALS UNTIL
C RTiFIED AND DATED
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL t-----t--.....,f------+---+--1
I JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIXV1l1b 10
C494 A PTS11CM010 OF o
I HAIL SAUDI ARABIA 84
!
,
~
:,u, '
SECTION" - TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
, 2.01 GENERAL
This section broadly outlines the technical specifications of the major materials required
for the satisfactory and complete construction of the PROJECT. The specifications
~i
~I
0: ,
outlined herein shall be read in conjunction with the PROJECT drawings, the COMPANY
Engineering, Construction and Material Standard Specifications and the associated
~I
QI international Standards and Codes,
I
I 2.02 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS TO BE PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR

0
Z
~ N
- A. Prior to any design WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall hire a Geotechnical Consultant,
REVISIONS approved by the COMPANY, who shall undertake the geotechnical site soil investigations.
The geotechnical investigation agency representative shall visit the site, familiarize
PRE/'ARD BY' ----I himself at the site and submit a detailed preliminary geotechnical proposal on the
DAliE: following for COMPANY review:
CH~'DBY'
1, Scope of WORK
2. Field Investigation method (boring and sampling)
~
1.. ~MISSION ASSET

3, Laboratory investigations (soil tests)
P-}NNING DEPARTMENT 4. Foundation types for different soil types, conditions and recommendations
5, Identification of potential problems such as settlements, de-watering problems, rock
excavation, etc" and their solutions
/ 6, Soil electrical and thermal resistivity measurement method and procedure
7. Recommendations for soil improvement if sabkhah soils are encountered
I The minimum number of boreholes to be drilled shall be ten (10) boreholes for buildings
and six (6) boreholes for equipment foundations."
CONTRACTOR shall not start the investigation and boring until they receive the
approval of preliminary geotechnical proposal from the COMPANY.
I B. The report shall also include an A-size drawing in SEC format (drawing number, index,
T7' ~dI plant number, etc.) and showing the location of boreholes and soil electrical and thermal
BY,
DA,
\:7
1tI/)('lf
resistivity measurement points.
I C. Minimum depth of each borehole shall be 2B, where B is the width of the foundation, and
in no case shall be less than 8 meters. In case of mat foundation, the borehole depth
should be at least twice the mat width. For augured drilled soil piers, the borehole depth
shall be at least 3 meters below the bottom of the pier foundation. Sufficient number of
soil borings shall be taken so that a soil profile can be drawn with reasonable accuracy to
THJS DRAWING IS NOT
TOI BE USED FOR serve as the basis for the foundation design. Borehole for normal dry soil under raft
C~STRUCTION OR foundation shall be ten (10) meters maximum and loose soil boring depth shall be
FO ORDERING
M TERIA LS
CE TlFIEDAND DATED
UNTIl. increased till the hard strata is achieved. The final location and number of boreholes
shall be solely decided by the COMPANY.
D. Final geotechnical report submission shall be strictly in accordance with the requirements
of PTS-08EM313 (attached in this Appendix as reference).
[ROT]
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO, INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO REV
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1----1-----1-----+---+--1
~BORD.RNO. APPENDIX-Vlllb 11
='
$'
~! E. When sabkhah soils are encountered at the site, CONTRACTOR shall improve the
! sabkhah as per the recommendations of TCS-Q-113,02,
!
i
F. CONTRACTOR shall hire a professional soil agency with adequate experience and
knowledge of improvement of sabkhah soils, The agency shall be acceptable to the
~i COMPANY,
~I ,
The geotechnical agency (who has performed the soil investigation) together with the
agency responsible for improvement of sabkhah soil shall recommend the improvement
; technique SUitable to the sabkhah soil encountered, All the related calculations and
documents for arriving at the soil parameters (Which are necessary for foundation design)
i
such as soil bearing capacity, settlement, etc" and improvement techniques shall be
gil .., M -
submitted for COMPANY review and approval.
! REVISIONS
The final decision for adopting a particular method for improvement of sabkhah
soil shall solely be decided by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and shall be
binding to the CONTRACTOR.
The CONTRACTOR shall not start the design of foundations and earthwork until the
I
soil investigation report is reviewed and accepted by the COMPANY.
~
APPROVE D
SMISSION ASSET
P INC DEPARTMENT
~
2.03 SOIL ELECTRICAL RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENTS
,., ,
A. Soil resistivity measurements shall be carried out using four-point Wenner arrangements
as per IEEE-81 and TES-P-119, 10
B. Soil resistivity measurements shall be carried out at different locations of the

plot/proposed ground grid area so as to cover the entire grounding grid area. Soil
resistivity measurements shall be made at the following locations:
1. Center of the proposed grounding grid area in four (4) different directions at 45
between directions to cover the central area of the grounding grid
2, Near the different sides of the grounding grid area with direction parallel to the
grounding grid sides
3. Additional points based on the size and shape of the grounding grid area
C. The COMPANY shall solely decide the final location of soil resistivity measurement points
and method.
T~IS
T
DRAWING IS NOT
BE USED fOR
C NSTRUCTION OR 2.04 SOIL THERMAL RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENTS
F R ORDERING
M TERlALS UNTIL
C RTlflED AND DATED
CONTRACTOR shall conduct the soil thermal resistivity tests. Soil samples shall be taken
from at least two (2) locations along the proposed ductbank route,
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL t------1t----;-----+----+---i
Q
i< ,
2.05 EARTHWORKS
e
The site clearing, rough grading, excavation, controlled fill, sub-base course and base
course placement and compaction, etc., shall be as per the requirements of TCS-Q-
113.02.
2.06 ASPHALT ACCESS ROAD TO SUBSTATION
A. CONTRACTOR shall construct asphalt access road to the proposed substation drive gate
from the existing asphalt road.
B. Design and construction of access road shall conform to TES-P-122.11 and TES-P-
119.19.
REVISIONS
C. CONTRACTOR shall provide all the necessary road traffic warning signs such as stop,
PRE~AREDB\': __ -I speed limit, caution slow down, direction, etc., speed humps and substation informative
DAT',
signs at the intersection of proposed asphalt access road and the existing asphalt road.
CH"1 D DY,
I Speed humps shall be provided at 100 meters from substation and existing asphalt road.
I
,
I D. The access road shall be 8 meters wide with 1.0 meter wide shoulder on each side. The
I~ slope of embankment shall be protected with 50mm thick asphalt.
~SMISSION ASSET
P~IN'G DEPARTMENT
E. Asphalt concrete paving works shall be as per the requirements of TCS-Q-113.01.

Minimum thickness of combined binder and wearing course shall be 102mm (64mm thick
class "A" asphalt binder course and 38mm thick Class "C" asphalt wearing course).
F. Sase and sub-base materials shall satisfy the requirements of TCS-Q-113.01 and TCS-Q-
I 113.02. Minimum thickness of base course shall be 300mm, Class "S" as per TCS-Q-
O"RATING DEPARTMENT
I
113.02 with liquid limit of 25% and Plasticity Index of 4-8% maximum. Sub-base materials
shall conform to TCS-Q-113.02.
i
2.07 REMOVAL OF SAND DUNES AND SAND STABILIZATION
Shifting sand and sand dunes within a distance of 200m from the proposed fence/wall
around the substation shall be removed and graded. The area shall be stabilized by
spraying oil or emulsified asphalt material as recommended in TCS-Q-113.01, TCS-Q-
113.02 and TES-P-122.11.
Reinforced concrete interceptor channel shall be installed at the cut portion of the
proposed substation. Interceptor channel shall drain water away from the substation
!'
fence.
T~S
T
DRAWING IS NOT
BE USED FOR
C NSTRLiITION OR
F R ORDERING
M TERIA LS UNTIL 2.08 SLOPE PROTECTION
C TlFI[DANDDATED
Slope protection shall be as recommended in TCS-Q-113.02.
[ROl]
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO REV
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL I------li---+-----+----+-~
2.09 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL BUILDINGS WITH CABLE BASEMENT
A. Design and construction of switchgear and control bUildings shall satisfy the requirements
ofTES-P-119.19.
z B. The switchgear and control building is a reinforced concrete structure. Provide cable
.
0
;::
;;
basement at locations if shown in the Control Building Floor Plan. The finished floor
elevation of the GIS & control buildings shall be 300mm higher than the crown elevation
'"'
'" EL= 0.00 of the substation yard.
'=
"'
C. All required clearances of the equipment from walls or columns shall be provided as per
TES-P-119.19. In addition, the following minimum height clearances shall be maintained:
0
z M N
- GIS room 7.00 m
REVISIONS (Subject to change based on the GIS equipment requirements & maintenance of light/fire detectors)
PREPARID BYl
Minimum hook height 5.00m
(Subject to change based on the GIS equipment manufacturer recommendation)
DATEl
CHK'DBY: Control room, battery room, communications room, workshop,

Records room/office, toilet (finished floor to false ceiling) 3.70m
APPROVED
Cable Basement (basement floor to bottom of ground floor beams) 2.50 m
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PlANNING DEPARTMENT
D. The GIS room shall be equipped with an overhead traveling crane for assembly and
/~
maintenance work purposes. The overhead traveling crane shall be able to handle the
/0/;;&
, heaviest module in the GIS buildings. All other requirements of the crane shall be as per
TES-P-119.19. .
E. Provision for future openings of adequate sizes shall be provided on the floor and walls.
OI"RATING DEPARTMENT
Openings shall be sealed with three (3) hours fire stop and smoke stop products and
covered with fire coated material aluminum plates. Openings shall be made weather-tight
to prevent ingress of sand, dust and water.
F. Cable basement shall be constructed as per TES-P-119.21 and TES-P-119.19 except

that it shall be provided with two (2) layers of 4mm thick each elastomeric bituminous
"~~IJ waterproofing membrane. A minimum of two (2) emergency exits from the cable
BV, '\ ".,t
basement shall be provided. Fire rated doors and reinforced concrete staircases with
handrails shall be provided at the emergency exits. Cable basement shall have a clear
D.TE'. 10 flff
, , height of 2.50 meters from the highest part of basement floor to bottom of ground floor
beams.
G. Provide unloadinglloading platforms not less than 2.50 meters in front of all double leaf
doors/equipment doors. Reinforced concrete retaining wall 2.50 meters long shall be
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
provided at the edge of each platform. The sidewalk and the platform shall be at the same
CONSTRUCTION
FOR ORDERING
OR elevation as the buildings.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CIRTIFIED AND DATF.D
H. Below grade construction, expansion and control joints in concrete structures shall be
provided with 200mm wide PVC water stops.
[ROT]
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANTNO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO REV
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL .... ---11---+-----+----+--4
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIXV1l1b 14
~ I,
~
u, SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
"I
~I
I. Building superstructures shall be reinforced concrete with precast concrete structural
~I
15 i frame and non-load bearing CMU walls.
,
Precast concrete superstructures shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 16 of ACI

318M-05.
;<'
0'
E' Building substructures shall be cast-in-place reinforced concrete.
"I~I J. Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Interior and exterior walls shall be non-load bearing walls.
Q,
1
Minimum thickness of walls shall be 200mm. Interior and exterior walls shall be reinforced
with vertical/horizontal reinforcement. Vertical reinforcement shall be 12mm 0 and shall
I , be installed in each cell of CMU or 200mm on centers. Horizontal reinforcement shall be
prefabricated truss/ladder type and shall be installed in alternate layers of CMU walls. All
0
z;
~ ~
- cells of the CMU for exterior and interior walls shall be fully grouted.
REVISIONS
K. Interior walls shall be plastered finish and painted. Exterior walls shall be tooled finished
PR'f"REDBY; ---t and texture painted.
DA"JiE'
CH.'DRV: L. Construct concrete cable trenches with removable hot-dip galvanized checkered steel
plate covers inside the buildings.
i APPROVED
CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of these trenches and shall size them
fuNSMISSION ASSET
~ING DEPARTMENT adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: space for maintenance and
operations, all future piping to be installed and all the piping installation in this PROJECT
plus 20% spare capacity. CONTRACTOR shall provide all the cable trays, galvanized
steel supports and necessary accessories.
M. Construct concrete cable trenches with removable precast concrete covers outside the
buildings.
O~RATING DEPARTMENT
adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: cable bending radii, future
cable splicing (if required), space for maintenance and operations, all control and power
cables to be installed in this PROJECT plus 20% spare capacity. CONTRACTOR shall
provide all cable trays, galvanized steel supports for the cables & necessary accessories.
'V,~f
Concrete cable trenches shall be provided with seepage pit for water drainage.
N. Concrete roof slab shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19 except that it shall
DA E, IOI'XIII
be provided with one (1) layer of 4mm thick elastomeric bituminous waterproofing
membrane or one (1) layer of 1.5mm thick PVC waterproofing membrane.
Reinforced concrete parapet walls shall be provided around the buildings with a minimum
height of 500mm above the highest part of the roof. The top elevation of the parapet wall
TI~S DR-\WING IS NOT
shall be kept same throughout.
To! BE USED FOR
C~STRUCTION OR
FO
1\1 TERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
CE TIFIED AND DATED
o. Canopies shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19 except that they shall be
provided with one (1) layer of 4mm thick elastomeric bituminous waterproofing membrane
I
or one (1) layer of 1.5mm thick PVC waterproofing membrane. The minimum projection of
canopy shall be 1.0 meter.
[ROT]
I
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----lI---+-----+----1---1
IJOBORDERNO. APPENDIX-Vlllb 15
, HAIL SAUDI ARABIA 84
Ii ,.~.JfS1J ~J.JA-l\ ~~j
'"
V SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
Q
~
Q
~
P. Toilets shall be provided as specified in TES-P-119.19. The finished floor level of the toilet
=
c shall be 50mm lower than the finished floor level of the switchqear and control building.
The partition walls inside the toilet shall be non-load bearing CMU walls fully grouted with
minimum thickness of 100mm. The walls shall be reinforced with vertical/horizontal
reinforcement. Vertical reinforcement shall be 12mm 0 minimum. Horizontal
z reinforcement shall be prefabricated trusslladder type. All cells of the CMU shall be fully
...;:
0
grouted. The walls shall be provided with ceramic, vitrified glazed tiles for full height.
u
.....'" The toilet cubicle door shall be hollow metal door. Accessories required inside the toilet
cubicle shall be as follows:
1. Lock: Stainless and heat resistant chromium-nickel as per ASTM A167

2. Lock/Unlock indicator: Stainless and heat resistant chromium-nickel as per ASTM
g ~ N
- A167
REVISIONS 3. Wall mounted dual, roll toilet paper dispenser: Stainless steel overall size 265 x 140
x 100mm depth
PREPARED BY,
4. Surface mounted round towel bar: Bright polished stainless steel 600mm long x
DATE: 75mm projection
CHK'DBY: 5. Surface mounted coat hook: Stainless steel bright polished (three in number)
6. Metallic sign: 3mm thick aluminum/brass/stainless steel plate, 225mm high,
APPROVED
engraved letter as "Please flush the toilet after use." in Helvetica medium and its
TRANSMISSION ASSET
Arabic translation. Fix to door with the use of adhesive.
-
PlANNING DEPARTMENT
c~ ~......,.. Q. Doors shall be hollow metal doors and shall comply with the requirements of TES-P-
/0/6/// 119.19 and TES-P-119.21.
/"
R. The location and number of doors shown on the layout drawing of the switchgear &
control bUilding is conceptual design only, and may be varied depending upon the
requirements of operation and maintenance. The size of the doors shall be decided for
OPERATING DEPARTMENT
easy movement of the biggest size of equipment. However, the minimum sizes of doors
shall be as follows:
Door Type Location Minimum door size

(Subject to change based on the door
manufacturer's recommendation)
mIL ,J! Single Leaf door for Battery Room, Net door width: 1.10 m
-, "
l /' movement of Communication Room, Net door height: 2.50 m
B'I: : I
equipment Workshop
DATE' /0 .v, /( Single Leaf door for Toilet, Records Room, Net door width: 0.95 m
personnel movement entrance to cable Net door height: 2.1 m
basement, entrance to
Buildinq
Double Leaf door for Control Room Net door width: 2.50 m
THIS ORAWING IS NOT equipment movement Net door height: 2.50 m
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR Double leaf door for GIS Room Net door width: 4.00 m
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
equipment movement Net door heiaht: 4.00 m
CERTIFIED AND DATED Double leaf door for Mechanical Room Net door width: 2.50 m
equipment movement Net door heiaht 2.50 m
[ROll
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
i
Ii!
e I SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
~ I
~:
~ i
S. Reinforced concrete door columns and lintels shall be provided on all door openings.
~I Door frames shall be fixed to the reinforced concrete elements firmly with the use of
i expansion/anchor bolts.
I
!
i T. The elevation of the floor surfaces on both sides of a door shall not vary by more than
13mm. The elevation shall be maintained on both sides of the doorway for a distance of
~IE at least equal to width of the widest leaf Thresholds at doorways shall not be more than
=1
~i
13mm in height.
~I
I
U. All stairs, landings, sidewalks, platforms and open elevated places with more than two (2)
I steps (300mm) shall be provided with hand railings with zinc yellow paint. Stairs and
I handrails shall be as per Life Safety Code, NFPA 101. Approved aluminum nosing shall
be provided to all stair treads,
0
Z
~ N
-
REVISIONS V. Floor finishes and yard surfacing shall be as per TES-P-119.19. Loading/unloading
platforms in front of double leaf doors shall be provided with UV resistant (exposed type)
solvent free polyurethane or acrylic polymer modified cementitious material.
DA'!',
CH'DBV, W. Battery room shall be provided with acid/caustic resistant floor and wall tiles up to roof
ceiling. Acid neutralizing dry pit shall be provided outside the building to collect the
I
acid/caustic from the battery room. The finished floor level of the battery room shall be
:~
-htANClMISSION ASSET
50mm lower than the finished floor level of the SWitchgear and control building.
P~C DEPARTMENT
X. Suspended/dropped false ceiling shall be provided at control room, communications

room, records room/office, ACIDC Room, Relay Test Room, corridors, workshop, and
/ toilet. The false ceiling requirement shall be as per TES-P-119.19.
Y. Raised access floor at the communications room shall be provided as per the
I requirements of TES-P-119.19.
O,,"RATING DEPARTMENT
II
Depth of raised floor system shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR to provide

sufficient space for routing cable to the associated equipment. but shall not be less than
900mm.
Z. The exterior of the buildings shall be painted with textured emulsion paint on tooled finish.
The interior of the switchgear and control building shall be plastered and painted with flat
enamel semi-gloss paint. The ceiling shall be painted with textured matt enamel paint.
The firewalls shall be painted with textured emulsion paint. Basement walls and ceiling
. shall be painted. Basement floor shall be coated with epoxy floor dust proofer and
hardener.
I
A1. Siabs-on-grade shall be as per TCS-Q-113.03. The minimum thickness of slab shall be
i 150mm reinforced with the required reinforcement.
T~IS DRAWING IS NOT
T BE lTSED FOR
C NSTRULTION OR 81. Room identification plates and safety signboards for switchgear & control building fire
F~R ORDERING
M TERIALS UNTIL rated doors (indoor and outdoor locations) shall be installed on walls beside the doors by
C RTIFIED AND DATED
screws. The plates/signboards shall be of aluminum with durable baked enamel
background. Message shall be screen-printed with UV resistant ink.
[ROT]
I SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11---+-----+---+--1
Safety signs on doors shall be installed as per the requirements of COMPANY Safety
Signs and Warning Devices Special Manual NO. 65-110.
The color shade for room identification letters shall be with Traffic Black (RAL 9017).
English Letter style shall be Helvetica and shall be uppercase only.
C1. Design, fabricate and install hot-dip galvanized steel unistrut supports, clamps, etc., for
routing outgoing feeder cables.
D1. Design, fabricate and install hot-dip galvanized steel bridges over the cables. The steel
bridges shall be covered with hot-dip galvanized steel grating.
2.10 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL BUILDING WITH CABLE ENTRY ROOM

REVISIONS
A. The SWitchgear and control building is a one storey structure with a cable entry room.
PRI.PAllEDBY: ------I
Design and construction of switchgear and control buildings shall satisfy the requirements
DATE: ofTES-P-119.
CHK'DBY:
B. The building foundation (isolated or mat fouridation) shall be at least 1.20 meters below
APPROVED the finished floor level of the cable entry room to accommodate the cable ductbank. The
1lL\NSMISSION ASSET space between cable entry floor slab and the foundation shall be filled with soil and
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
compacted as per TCS-Q-113.02 requirements. No retaining wall shall be provided below
c:::. 7' ~ the cable entry room slab.
/0/15///
/ /
C. Cable entry room walls shall be constructed of reinforced concrete and concrete hollow
block masonry walls. The reinforced concrete walls shall be designed to support the
hollow block masonry walls load and to retain the soil in the substation yard. The
OPERATING DEPARTMENT reinforced concrete walls shall be extended 300mm higher than the finished grade level.
D. All required clearances of the equipment from the walls or columns shall be provided as
per TES-P-119. In addition, the following minimum height clearances shall be maintained:
GIS room 7.00 m

(SUbject to change based on the GIS equipment requirements & maintenance of light/fire detectors)
2~
sv, \j "r., / Minimum hook heiglJt
(Subject to change based on the GIS equipment manufacturer's recommendation)
5.00 m
DAn. /0
I
/ U
Control room, battery room, communications room, workshop
Records room/office, toilet (finished floor to false ceiling) 3.70 m
Cable Entry Room 2.50 m

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRllCfION OR
FOR ORDERING E. The GIS room shall be equipped with an overhead traveling crane for assembly and
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFlEDAND DATED maintenance work purposes. The overhead traveling crane shall be able to handle the
heaviest module in the GIS buildings. All other requirements of the crane shall be as per
TES-P-119.19.
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----1f---+-----+----+---1
~ I
F. Provision for future openings of adequate sizes shall be provided on floor and walls.
Openings shall be sealed with three (3) hours fire stop and smoke stop products and
covered with fire coated material aluminum plates. Openings shall be made weather-tight
to prevent ingress of sand, dust and water.
G. Cable entry room shall be constructed as per TES-P-119.21 and TES-P-119.19 except
that it shall be provided with two (2) layers of 4mm thick each elastomeric bituminous
waterproofing membrane. A minimum of two (2) emergency exits from the cable entry
room shall be provided. Fire rated doors and reinforced concrete staircases with handrails
shall be provided at the emergency exits. Cable entry room shall have a clear height of
2.50 meters from the highest part of cable entry room floor to bottom of ground floor
beams.
oz
H. Provide unloading/loading platforms not less than 2.50 meters in front of all double leaf
REVISIONS
doors/equipment doors. Reinforced concrete retaining wall 2.50 meters long shall be
provided at the edge of each platform. The sidewalk and the platform shall be at the same
elevation as the buildinqs,
I. Below grade construction, expansion and control joints in concrete structures shall be
provided with 200mm wide PVC water stops.
J. Building superstructures shall be reinforced concrete with precast concrete structural

frame and non-load bearing CMU walls.
Precast concrete superstructures shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 16 of ACI

318M-05.
Building SUbstructures shall be cast-in-place reinforced concrete.

0tRATlNG DEPARTMENT
K. Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Interior and exterior walls shall be non-load bearing walls.
Minimum thickness of walls shall be 200mm. Interior and exterior walls shall be reinforced
with vertical/horizontal reinforcement. Vertical reinforcement shall be 12mm 0 and shall
be installed in each cell of CMU or 200mm on centers. Horizontal reinforcement shall be
prefabricated truss/ladder type and shall be installed in alternate layers of CMU walls. All
cells of the CMU for exterior and interior walls shall be fully grouted.
L. Interior walls shall be plastered finish and painted. Exterior walls shall be tooled finished
and texture painted.
M. Construct concrete cable trenches with removable hot-dip galvanized checkered steel
plate covers inside the buildings.
T IS ORAWING IS NOT
T BE USED FOR CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of these trenches and shall size them
C NSTRUCTION
F R
OR
ORDERING
adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: space for maintenance and
MI\TERIALS UNTIL
C RTIFIED AND DATED
operations, all future piping to be installed and all the piping installation in this PROJECT
plus 20% spare capacity. CONTRACTOR shall provide all the cable trays, galvanized
steel supports and necessary accessories.
[R01]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL /----II---t------I----+--I
N. Construct concrete cable trenches with removable precast concrete covers outside the
buildings.
adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: cable bending radii, future
z cable splicing (if required), space for maintenance and operations, all control and power
f cables to be installed in this PROJECT expansion plus 20% spare capacity.
~
Q
CONTRACTOR shall provide all cable trays, galvanized steel supports for the cables &
necessary accessories. Concrete cable trenches shall be provided with seepage pit for
water drainage.
O. Concrete roof slab shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19 except that it shall
be provided with one (1) layer of 4mm thick elastomeric bituminous waterproofing
membrane or one (1) layer of 1.5mm thick PVC waterproofing membrane.
REVISIONS
PRE ARED BY: _ _ -I

Reinforced concrete parapet walls shall be provided around the building with a minimum
! height of 500mm above the highest part of the roof. The top elevation of the parapet wall
:TL~':"'"
shall be kept same throughout.
P. Canopies shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19 except that they shall be
provided with one (1) layer of 4mm thick elastomeric bituminous waterproofing membrane
MISSION ASSET or one (1) layer of 1.5mm thick PVC waterproofing membrane. The minimum projection of
P ING DEPARTMENT
canopy shall be 1.00 meter.
~~~
Q. Toilet shall be provided as specified in TES-P-119.19. The finished floor level of the toilet
shall be 50mm lower than the finished floor level of the switchgear and control building ..
The partition walls inside the toilet shall be non-load bearing CMU walls fully grouted with
OP~RATlNG DEPARTMENT minimum thickness of 100mm. The walls shall be reinforced with vertical/horizontal
! reinforcement. Vertical reinforcement shall be 12mm 0 minimum. Horizontal
~-
reinforcement shall be prefabricated trusslladder type. All cells of the CMU shall be fUlly
grouted. The walls shall be provided with ceramic, vitrified glazed tiles for full height.
The toilet CUbicle door shall be hollow metal door. Accessories required inside the toilet
~
cubicle shall be as follows:
BY:
\J';'.r 1. Lock: Stainless and heat resistant chromium-nickel as per ASTM A167
DA
11"1 rut 2. Lock/Unlock indicator: Stainless and heat resistant chromium-nickel as per ASTM
A167
3. Wall mounted dual, roll toilet paper dispenser: Stainless steel overall size 265 x 140
x 100mm depth
4. Surface mounted round towel bar: Bright polished stainless steel 600mm long x
T IS DRAWING IS NOT
T BE USED FOR
75mm projection
Ia NSTRUCTION OR 5. Surface mounted coat hook: Stainless steel bright polished (three in number)
Fe R ORDERING
M TERlALS UNTIL 6. Metallic sign: 3mm thick aluminum/brass/stainless steel plate, 225mm high,
C RTIFIED AND DATED
engraved letter as "Please flush the toilet after use." in Helvetica medium and its
Arabic translation. Fix to door with the use of adhesive.
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL I-----I---t-----+---+--I
~-
~-
~
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY "4~ 4.:~."....J\ 4.5~\
Q
~
~
Q
R. Doors shall be hollow metal doors and shall comply with the requirements of TES-P-
=
c 119.19 and TES-P-119.21.
I
S. The location and number of doors shown on the layout drawing of the switchgear & control
bUilding is conceptual design only, and may be varied depending upon the requirements of
~ operation and maintenance. The size of the doors shall be decided for easy movement of
9
t the biggest size of equipment. However, the minimum sizes of the doors shall be as
;:
.
u
vo
Q
follows:
I, Door Type Location Minimum door size

(Subject to change based on the door
manufacturer's recommendation)
Single Leaf door for Battery Room, Records Net door width: 1.10 m
0
e: ~ ~
- movement of
equipment
Room, Communication Room,
Workshop
Net door height: 2.50 m
REVISIONS
Single Leaf door for Toilet, entrance to cable entry Net door width: 0.95 m
PRE ARtUS'!: personnel movement room, entrance to Building Net door height: 2.10 m
I
DA
I
h, Double Leaf door for Control Room Net door width: 2.50 m
CH 'DBY:
equipment movement Net door heloht: 2.50 m
Double leaf door for GIS Room Net door width: 4.00 m
equipment movement Net door heiqht: 4.00 m
APPROVED
Double leaf door for Mechanical Room Net door width: 2.50 m
~ANSMISSION ASSET
P ~ING DEPARTMENT equipment movement Net door heiqht: 2.50 m
'- ~~
/&/8/// T. Reinforced concrete door columns and lintels shall be provided on all door openings.
r Door frames shall be fixed to the reinforced concrete elements firmly with the use of
expansion/anchor bolts.
o RATING DEPARTMENT
U. The elevation of the floor surfaces on both sides of a door shall not vary by more than
13mm. The elevation shall be maintained on both sides of the doorway for a distance of
at least equal to width of the widest leaf. Thresholds at doorways shall not be more than
13mm in height.
j
V. All stairs, landings, sidewalks, platforms and open elevated places with more than two (2)
steps (300mm) shall be provided with hand railings with zinc yellow paint. Stairs and
,~ handrails shall be as per Life Safety Code, NFPA 101. Approved nosing shall be provided
\~'f to all stair treads.
BY:
DAi" /6 ,o.J t(
W. Floor finishes and yard surfacing shall be as per TES-P-119.19. Loading/unloading
platforms in front of double leaf doors shall be provided with UV resistant (exposed type)
solvent free polyurethane or acrylic polymer modified cementitious material.
n IS ORAWING IS NOT
X. Battery room shall be provided with acid/caustic resistant floor and wall tiles up to roof
T( BE lJSF.D FOR ceiling. Acid neutralizing dry pit shall be provided outside the building to collect the
NSTRUCTION OR
i.e R ORDERING acid/caustic from the battery room. The finished floor level of the battery room shall be
M TERlALS UNTIL
C RTIFlED AND DATED 50mm lower than the finished floor level of the SWitchgear and control building.
Y. Suspended/dropped false ceiling shall be provided at control room, communication room,

record room/office, AC/DC Room, Relay Test Room, corridor, workshop, and toilet. The
false ceiling requirement shall be as per TES-P-119.19.
[ROll
,
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
Z. Raised access floor at the communication room shall be provided as per the requirements
ofTES-P-119.19.
Depth of raised floor system shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR to provide

z sufficient space for routing cable to the associated equipment, but shall not be less than
S2
t 900mm.
~
Q A1. The exterior of the buildings shall be painted with textured emulsion paint on tooled finish.
The interior of the switchgear and control building shall be plastered and painted with flat
enamel semi-gloss paint. The ceiling shall be painted with textured matt enamel paint.
The firewalls shall be painted with textured emulsion paint. Cable entry room walls and
ceiling shall be painted. Cable entry room floor shall be coated with epoxy floor dust
procter and hardener.
REVISIONS
81. Siabs-on-grade shall be TCS-Q-113.03. The minimum thickness of slab shall be 150mm
reinforced with the required reinforcement.
nt
CHlDBY; C1. Room identification plates and safety signboards for switchgear & control building fire
rated doors (indoor and outdoor locations) shall be installed on walls beside the doors by
k
' ~ screws. The plates/signboards shall be of aluminum with durable baked enamel
SMlSSION ASSET background. Message shall be screen-printed with UV resistant ink.
P ING DEPARTMENT
Safety signs on doors shall be installed as per the requirements of COMPANY Safety
Signs and Warning Devices Special Manual NO. 65-110.
The color shade for room identification letters shall be Traffic Black (RAL 9017). English
Letter style shall be Helvetica and shall be uppercase only.
01RATING DEPARTMENT
01. Design, fabricate and install hot-dip galvanized steel unistrut supports, clamps, etc., for
routing outgoing feeder cables.
E1. Design, fabricate and install hot-dip galvanized steel bridges over the cables. The steel
bridges shall be covered with hot-dip galvanized steel grating.
2.11 COOLING TOWERS
A. Where required, cooling tower concrete foundations and their supporting frameworks
(reinforced concrete or galvanized steel) shall be designed and installed per the
, recommendations of the manufacturer.
I
B. All the required concrete foundations for pumps, motors, valves and tanks, etc., shall be
~ts ~~WU~~DIS ~g~
C NSTRUCTION OR
designed and installed.
F ORDERING
M TERIALS
C
UNTIL
TIFIED AND DATED
C. All ducts, piping and components shall be suitably designed and supported by hot-dip
galvanized steel support structures. Design and installation of their foundations.
I
D. Design and installation of hot-dip galvanized steel structures and their concrete
foundations for heat exchanger.
[R01]
I
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11---+-----+----+---1
I
I
I
2.12 CABLE TUNNELS
A. Contractor shall design and construct cable tunnels as shown in the Substation Layout.
Five (5) meters width of tunnel shall be considered from the edge of the column is
projected inside the tunnel
B. CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of the cable tunnels and shall size them
adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: space for maintenance and
operations, all future piping to be installed and all the cables installation in this PROJECT
plus 20% spare capacity. However, minimum width of cable tunnels shall be 5 meters.
CONTRACTOR shall provide all the metallic cable trays, galvanized steel supports for the
cables and necessary accessories
REVISIONS
C. Cable tunnels under or adjacent to the GIS buildings shall meet all the requirements of
PREPARED BY: ----I TES-P-119.19. Emergency exits shall be per TES-P-119.19. Cable tunnel waterproofing
DATI:
shall be per TES-P-119.19. A minimum of two (2) emergency exits from the cable tunnels
CHI(fD BY:
shall be provided. Fire rated doors and reinforced concrete staircases with pipe railings
shall be provided at the emergency exits to allow exit from the cable tunnel or entrance to
cable tunnel from the substation yard.
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT The floor slab of the cable tunnel shall be sloped towards the drainage sump pit at 0.5%
slope with the use of cement screed. A minimum of two (2) sump pits shall be provided.
The size of the sump pits shall be 600x600x400mm.
D. Cable tunnels shall be properly ventilated.
OPBRATlNG DEPARTMENT
2.13 ROAD MARKING AND PARKING AREAS
Contractor shall develop and propose the required road marking inside the substation
based on traffic movement requirements.
Car park (With marking and precast concrete stoppers) areas shall be developed inside
~~'.)I
the substation.
BY, The road marking and car park shall be painted with reflectorized yellow paint. The
DATt, ID rII centerline of the roads shall be painted with reflectorized white broken lines.
2.14 GATEHOUSE AND TOILET
TH)S DRAWING IS NOT A. Gatehouse shall be constructed as per the requirements of COMPANY Standard
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRllCTION OR Drawings TA-800039, TA-800040, TA-800041 and TA-800042. The location of the
I-OR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
gatehouse shall be near the main drive gate. However, the final location of gatehouse
CERTIFIED AND DATED shall be decided during the definitive design stage.
B. Toilet shall be provided near the gatehouse. Toilet shall be a separate reinforced concrete
room with concrete hollow block masonry walls 200mm thick. Toilet shall meet all the
[R01]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL t-----1I----+------+----+--I
,------,--------------------------- -------
requirements of TES-P-119 except it shall have one (1) western water closet, and one (1)
washbasin.
2.15 GROUNDING OF REBARS AND WELDED WIRE FABRIC

z
o The rebars of the switchgear & control buildings and outdoor equipment foundations shall
t
be connected to the main grounding grid of the substation. The grade slab of the
~ switchgear & control buildings shall also be connected to the main grounding grid at every
" 5 meters in both directions.
,
The grounding conductor shall be connected to rebars by exothermic welded joints and
the welded joints shall be painted with two (2) coats of coal tar epoxy & mastic taped.
The minimum size of conductor for connection to rebars shall be as per TES-P-119.
REVISIONS
Sufficient number of pigtails shall be left at appropriate locations for grounding connection
I
to the foundations, grade slab and structures, etc. The pigtails are then readily available
'IUf AIUD BY : _ _ --I
after backfilling for the above grade connection.
D'~'
CH,.D Bl':
I
2.16 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STRUCTURES
I APPROVED
pre lA:MISSION ASSET

DEPARTMENT
A. CONTRACTOR shall design, fabricate and erect all equipment support structures such as
bus insulators, surge arresters, cable-sealing ends, disconnect switches, etc., as detailed
d,.- in the COMPANY Standard Drawings TA-800001 and TA-800102. These drawings shall
be used for general arrangement, concept and guidance only. The sizes of members shall
not be less than those given in these drawings. CONTRACTOR shall provide the design
calculations for COMPANY review and approval.
0t ....TING D"'RTMENT B. Fabricate and install switch operating platforms for disconnect switches as detailed in
COMPANY Standard Drawing TA-800002.
I
C. Anchor bolts for fixing outdoor equipment structures to their reinforced concrete
I foundations shall be Type-3 as detailed in Standard Drawing SC-036128. Other types of
anchor bolts may be used depending upon the requirements and acceptance of the
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
2.17 LATTICED STEEL GANTRYITAKE-OFF STRUCTURES
Latticed steel gantry/take-off structures shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.09,

Rev. 01. All latticed steel gantry/take-off structures shall be designed and detailed such
that they can be extended on both sides.
TIllS DR4.WING IS NOT
,T() BE IJSED FOR
CC NSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
M TERIALS UNTIL.
2.18 CAST-IN-PLACE AND PRECAST CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS
CIi:RTIFIED AND DATED
Cast-in-place concrete shall be as per the requirements of TCS-Q-113.03.
Precast concrete shall be as per the requirements of TCS-Q-113.04.
[ROl]
I HAIL SAUDI ARABIA 84
I
2.19 CONCRETE COVER
Concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as per the recommendations of TCS-Q-113.03.
2.20 CONCRETE CABLE TRENCHES
A. Inside the Buildings
Design and construct separate reinforced concrete trenches covered with removable steel
checkered plates to route power cables and mechanical pipes inside the buildings. The
inner edges of the trench walls shall be provided with steel angles.
REVISIONS
The checkered plates shall be properly supported with steel supporting framework. The
PRE'AREDBVt ----I size of each checkered plate shall be limited to 0.6 square meters. Each checkered plate
DATE: shall be provided with two elliptical openings for lifting purposes and adequate number of
CHK'D BY, lifting bars shall be supplied. The steel plates shall be properly stiffened with steel flats at
their bottom. All steel shall be hot-dip galvanized.
Bottom slab of the trenches shall be sloped towards a sump pit; sufficient number of
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENI' sump pits shall be provided at suitable locations.
~
Access to trenches shall be through climbing rungs. Climbing rungs shall be galvanized
r , steel coated with polyethylene red in color on 300mm spacing. The diameter of the rod
shall be 25mm; the wall distance shall be 180mm and bore distance shall be 330mm.
Trenches shall be made water-tight by providing two (2) layers of elastomeric bituminous
waterproofing membrane (each minimum of 4mm thick) on sides and bottom exposed to
soil. The membrane shall be protected with cement screed and protection board.
B. Outside the buildings
Design and construct reinforced concrete trenches with removable precast concrete
covers outside the substation bUildingsto route power cables and mechanical pipes.
The precast concrete covers shall be provided with lifting arrangement acceptable to the
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. The design of trenches and trench covers shall be such
that entry of surface water shall be minimum. The inner edges of the trenches shall be
protected with galvanized steel angles.
Bottom slab of these trenches shall be sloped towards a sump pit. Sufficient number of
THIS DRAWING IS NOT sump pits shall be provided at suitable locations.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR
MATERlALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
Access to trenches shall be through climbing rungs. Climbing rungs shall be galvanized
CERTIFI[D AND DATED steel coated with polyethylene red in color on 300mm spacing. The diameter of the rod
shall be 25mm; the wall distance shall be 180mm and bore distance shall be 330mm.
The top of trenches shall be kept 100mm higher than the surrounding asphalt level to
prevent the entry of surface storm water, dust, debris and sand.
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL I---'""'"'!I---+-----+----+-'""'"'!
The trenches inside the substation yard shall be of traffic type, i.e., these trenches shall
be designed for heaviest anticipated vehicle load.
Trenches shall be made water-tight by providing two (2) layers of elastomeric bituminous
waterproofing membrane (each minimum of 4mm thick) on sides and bottom exposed to
soil. The membrane shall be protected with cement screed and protection board.
2.21 CONCRETE PROTECTION
Concrete surfaces, except grade slab, shall be coated in accordance with the following:
oz A. Concrete surfaces in contact with soil

, REVISIONS Concrete shall be coated with coal tar epoxy after thirty-five (35) days of concrete
placement. Minimum number of coats shall be two (2) or the dry film thickness shall
not be less than 600 microns, whichever produces higher thickness.
'.8" ! APPROVED
B. Concrete surfaces above grade
After a minimum of thirty-five (35) days of concrete placement for severe exposure
concrete, all exposed concrete surfaces (above grade) shall be coated with an
l"'sMJSSION ASSET
~INC DEPARTMENT elastomeric polyurethane waterproofing material. The coating application shall
extend continuously 300mm below grade after curing of first coat of coal tar epoxy
coating. The minimum dry film thickness of elastomeric polyurethane coating shall
be 1mm. The interface of concrete and steel shall also be coated and the coating
shall extend 300mm above the interface point over the steel members. The primer
shall be suitably selected for concrete and steel surfaces.
OrfRATlNG DEPARTMENT C. Concrete interior surfaces
,
All interior surfaces (walls and base slab) of concrete (manholes, handholes,
trenches and cable basements/cable entry rooms) shall be coated with two (2) coats
of elastomeric cementitious impermeable membrane after thirty-five (35) days of
concrete placement. The total wet film thickness shall not be less than 1mm.
For cable tunnels, all interior surfaces shall be coated as per Clause 2.21.C above.
2.22 CONCRETE PROTECTIVE COATING REQUIREMENTS AND APPLICATION
A. General
i
,
I
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly followed in all aspects of surface
~
IS DRAWING IS NOT
T
C NSTRlJCTION OR
BE USED FOR preparation, priming, coating application (first and succeeding coats and intervals therein,
F R ORDERING etc.), and curing time and safety practices. The coating on the exterior concrete surfaces
M TERlALS UNTil.
C RTIFIED AND DATED
,
shall be carried out after a minimum of fourteen (14) days following the curing period.
i
The coating shall form and maintain a continuous film over the concrete. The coating
material shall penetrate into the concrete and adhere to it effectively. This is to afford
protection to the concrete against the entry of oxygen, moisture and aggressive ions.
[R01]
i SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1----11---+-----+----+--1
:
The recommended procedure for protective coating application is outlined in the

subsequent sub-sections.
B. Surface Preparation
z
o
E The surface to be coated shall be prepared prior to the application of the coating material.
~
o If any, surface cracks, shallow spalis and holes on the concrete surface shall be filled with
a concrete surfacer.
These regions shall be repaired in a manner prescribed below:

oz
1. Where cracks are present, cut "V" grooves using chisel or a similar tool.
REVISIONS 2. Presoak with potable water the region for at least eight (8) hours before filling the
cracks.
ARED
Pi BY: --1 3. Fill the cracks with the specified concrete surfacer.
DA,!-, 4. Cure with potable water the repaired region continuously for time period as
CH~'DBY: recommended by manufacturer, but in any case not less than seven (7) days.
,
Dirt and other loose materials, laitance, oil, grease, wax, black-white carbonate deposits
i~
~RANSMISSION ASSET and yellow-white sulfate deposits shall be removed from the surface to reach solid gray
PFING DEPARTMENT
concrete underneath.
< _ L~.
The concrete surface shall be scrubbed by steel bristled brushes, followed by blowing of
compressed air (free of oil). Alternatively, a brush-off blast procedure may be adopted
(the sandblasting gun is held at a distance from the surface and the surface is swept with
the blast stream). The compressed air shall be free of oil and water as visually indicated
01RATING DEPARTMENT
by a collector (absorbent or non-absorbent), following the standard test procedure ASTM
!
04285. Further, ASTM standard practices for surface cleaning and abrading of concrete
-1r------ surface prior to coating application clean the newly exposed roughened concrete surface
by water blasting, using potable water. If corrosion products are observed on the metallic
structure and/or associated hardware immediately above the concrete, sandblast and
clean 300mm length above the concrete. This shall be done by abrasive blasting,
employing 60-80 meshes sand or mineral grit to a "white metal blast" finish as described
l~ in Section 6.2.7 of TES-H-107.01. Care shall be taken to ensure avoidance of any
BJ--SJ~'/ damage of the thread of the bolts. At the time of application of coating material, the
DA~' IU rJ(( (J surface shall be clean, dry and shall have adequate roughness for effective bonding of
I the costing material to the prepared substrate.
Manufacturer's recommendation shall be strictly followed in all aspects of surface

,
,
preparation, priming as applicable to concrete and steel substrates, coating application
(first and succeeding coats and intervals therein, etc.), curing time and safety practices.
~
DRAWING IS NOT
T BE USED FOR
C NSTRUCTION OR
M TERlAlS
ORDERING
UNTIL
The coating work shall be carried out after a minimum of 14 days following the completion
C , TIFIEDAND DATED of curing period. The coating shall form and maintain a continuous film over the concrete
surface and over the steel-concrete interface. The coating material shall penetrate into
the concrete and adhere to it effectively.
[ROl]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL t-----1I---+-----+----+---1
"i< C. Coating
o
1. General
a. Coating material application shall be carried out according to the

manufacturer's recommendations. In case of any conflict between this
specification and the manufacturer's recommendations, the conflict shall be
resolved by a meeting of the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and the
manufacturer's REPRESENTATIVE prior to any application.
b. Coating materials, which have gelled or otherwise deteriorated during storage,

shall not be used. However, thixotropic materials, which may be stirred to
g ~ N _
obtain normal consistency, shall be acceptable.
REVISIONS Coating materials containing heavy or metallic pigments that have a tendency
,
to settle must be kept in suspension in the pressure pot by a mechanical
PRI~ARED BY; - - - - - I stirrer.
DA.,k,
CH''DBY: c. Only thinners as specified by the manufacturer shall be used. Mixing and
I thinning directions as furnished by the manufacturer shall be followed.
I
I APrROVID
"I\RANSMISSION ASSET
If a coating material requires the addition of a catalyst. the pot life under
~ING DEPARTMENT application conditions shall be clearly stated on the label. The pot life must not
be exceeded. When the pot life limit is reached, the spray pot must be
emptied. the material discarded, the equipment cleaned and new material
" ,/
catalyzed.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry thoroughly and at least for the specified time
(as recommended by the manufacturer) prior to the application of a
succeeding (follow-on) coat.
No coating application shall be done during a sandstorm and on windy and

rainy days. In case of an unanticipated occurrence of any of the above
conditions, the wet coat shall be protected (covered) properly. The completed
(cured) coating shall be free from defects such as runs, sags, pinholes, voids,
bubbles or other "Holidays".
BY:
2. Coating Application
DA
a. Priming
The prepared surfaces shall be coated with the primer specified, within
the time limits as may be specified by the manufacturer, and prior to
T~IS
T
DRAWING IS NOT
BE USED FOR sunset of that day.
C NSTRUCTION OR
F R ORDERING
M TERIALS llNTlL
C RTIFI[DAND DATED
The prepared, dried concrete surfaces shall be primed with a highly
penetrating priming coat. The primer shall be applied by brush and shall
I be applied rather heavily for penetration. However, any excess shall be
removed from the surface so that no heavy areas or puddles are
formed.
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11---+-----+----+--1
I
I
I
~
Q
~
~

Q
~
=
u Regions of metallic members and hardware cleaned of any corrosion
products, as mentioned in "surface preparation" above shall be coated
with sacrificial specified zinc primer. This shall be done immediately after
cleaning. After curing of the sacrificial zinc primer, apply the elastomeric
z coating material.
o
E
The priming coat shall be applied on the steel surfaces and the steel
~
Q concrete interface such that there are no air or water pockets. Care shall
be taken to ensure proper coating at sharp corners, edges, bolts, hidden
recesses and inaccessible areas.
1-++--+-+--1 b. Coating WORK
REVISIONS Coating materials shall be either spray-applied or brush-applied.
PRE AIlED BYl ----I 3. Spray Application

DAl , ----I
Lines and pots shall be thoroughly cleaned before the addition of new materials.
CH PBV: ---I
The spray gun shall always be held at right angles to the surface and shall be held
no closer than 450mm nor more than 600mm from the surface for the airless spray
I APPROVED gun method, or no closer than 150mm or more than 250mm from the surface for air
r
f SMISS,ON ASSET
NING DEN.RTMENT
.
"..'c:.p
...--..-
spray equipment. Even, parallel passes shall be made with the spray gun. In
application of material, each spray shall overlap the previous pass by 50%. Large
surfaces shall always receive passes in two directions at right angles to each other.
Spray width adjustment on the gun shall be made and the readjustment of
/ /'
t-t------t atomiZing pressure at the regulators shall be made until the desired spray pattern is
obtained.
I
O+RATING DEPARTMENT Each coat is to be applied uniformly and completely over the entire surface. All runs
l~1
and sags shall be brushed out immediately or the paint shall be removed and the
surface re-sprayed.
-+----- Before spraying each coat, all areas such as corners, edges and interstices shall be
precoated by brush to ensure that these areas have at least the minimum specified
film thickness.
Spray application from a single position will not be permitted.
A supply of tips with varying spray angles and washers, as recommended by the
supplier for each specific configuration to be coated, shall be available at site.
4. Brush Application
T IS DR.<\.WING IS NOT
T BE USED FOR The coating material shall be brushed on to all areas, which cannot be properly
C NSTRUCTION OR
F R ORDERING spray coated for any reason. Surfaces not accessible to brushes shall be coated by
MI\TERlALS UNTIL
C RTIFIED AND DATED other suitable means to ensure a uniform film of adequate thickness.
Brushes used in coating application shall be of a style and quality that will permit
proper application. Round or oval brushes generally are considered most suitable
for rivets, bolts, and irregular surfaces. Wide flat brushes are suitable for large flat
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL I-------...,I------+-----------f------+----I
H~==~-1
L+ ......L HAIL SAUDI ARABIA---1._ _......L_---1. 84
----JL....-_........----I
areas, but they shall not have a width of over 120mm. No extending handles shall
be allowed on brushes.
The brushing shall be done such that a smooth coat, as nearly uniform in thickness
as possible, is obtained. There shall be no deep or detrimental brush marks. The
coating material shall be worked into all crevices and corners.
Runs or sags shall be brushed out.
In brush application of any of the solvent-type coatings, care must be taken so that
no lifting of former coats occurs.
0;
During application of each coat, all areas such as corners, edges and interstices
z
shall receive additional coating material to ensure that these areas have at least the
REVISIONS minimum specified film thickness and to ensure continuity of the coating.
pnt U D BY: _ _- I
5. Film Thickness and Testing:
PAT:
The total dry film thickness (OFT) that shall be obtained upon application and
subsequent curing shall be:
APPROVED
~SMlSSION ASSET a. Above Grade Application: 1mm for polyurethane material

PL ~G DEPARTMENT
.-..
"~
b. Below Grade Application: O.60mm for coal tar epoxy
,/ ,/ c. Concrete Interior Surfaces: 1mm (wet film thickness) for cementitious

elastomeric material
The coating dry film thickness limit must be adhered to strictly; the film thickness
OP RATING DEPARTMENT
shall be checked with the calibrated film thickness gauge supplied by the
CONTRACTOR. Where the film thickness does not meet this specification,
additional coating material shall be applied.
In order to achieve the specified dry film thickness, frequent checks on wet film
thickness shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR.
=~
~ In case of concrete surfaces, coupons of the dried film shall be cut out from the
BV, II coated surface, at locations where lesser film thickness is suspected. The cut out
DA /0 :11
region shall be re-coated, as specified herein.
A dry film, magnetic type thickness gauge (for steel surfaces) shall be calibrated
and made available at the site.
Tt IS DRAWING IS NOT
T( BE USED FOR
D. Repair of Defects
C( NSTRUcrION OR
Fe R ORDERING
M TERIALS UNTIL 1. General
C RTIFIED AND DATlm
Before application of any further coat of material, all damages to previous coats
shall be repaired.
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL t------1I---+-----+---+--I
..--1~-r--Y---r-------------------------------,
2. Inadequate Coating Thickness
Areas with inadequate coating thickness shall be thoroughly cleaned and, if

necessary, abraded, and additional compatible coats applied until they meet this
specification. These additional coats shall blend in with the final coating on adjoining
areas.
3. Coating Damage not exposing the Substrate
Surfaces to be over coated, which become contaminated or damaged, shall be

cleaned by lightly brush-blasting (sweep-blasting) the surface free of all
contamination prior to applying the following coats. After brush blasting, any
t-f+--+-+--1 residual contaminants shall be removed by dry compressed air or wiped by hand
with clean, dry rags. The coating around the damaged area shall be chamfered,
t-!-----1
REVISIONS using an approved method, to ensure continuity of the patch coat. The full coating
system shall then be reapplied strictly in accordance with this specification.
PRE AREDBV; _ _ -I
---I 4. Coating Damage Exposing the SUbstrate

---I
The damaged area shall be re-c1eaned as originally specified for that item and the
APPROVED
full coating system reapplied in accordance with the manufacturer's
~SMISSlDN ASSET
recommendations. The re-cleaning shall carry over on to the secure surrounding
P """"INC DEPARTMENT coating (properly adhering to the substrate) for not less than 25mm all around and
the edges shall be duly chamfered.
E. Inspection
.......,------1
1. The COMPANY shall have the right to inspect at all times any tools, interments,
,
materials or equipment used in the performance of the coating application. The
O~RATING DEPARTMENT
CONTRACTOR shall make all parts of the WORK accessible for these inspections.
jf----' The COMPANY will designate a REPRESENTATIVE who will act for the COMPANY
to:
1-1------
a. Observe all application procedures during the time the WORK is in progress.
8Y~'
,
D. E, 101lift(
b.
c.
Approve the surface preparation prior to the application of any coating.
Approve condition of each coat prior to the application of the following coat.
Film continuity verification on concrete substrate may be done by following the

standard practice ASTM 04787, utilizing high voltage start testing. Film
I continuity over the steel concrete interfaces shall be following mentioned.
~
IS DRAWING IS NOT
BE USED FOR
C NSTRliCTION OR 2. The COMPANY shall have the right to reject any and all tools, instruments,
F
M
R
TERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
materials, equipment or WORK, which do not conform to the specifications.
C RTIFIEDAND DATED Rejected areas of coating application shall be marked (for indication only) with a
compatible paint of contrasting color.
3. Any rejected coating applications, defective preparatory WORK or any defective

WORK not conforming to this specification shall be rectified by the CONTRACTOR
[R01]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL I--------II------+----------~------+----(
1-+-----1
JOB ORDER NO. 31
APPENDIX-Vlllb
L...+ - L HAIL SAUDI ARABIA ----L_ _......._----L 84
---JL....-_-L..----I
~
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY "4~ ~~..,-l\ ~~I
c
~
~
c
~
at no additional cost to the COMPANY. Any rejected tools, instruments, materials or
5 equipment shall be replaced or rectified at no additional cost to the COMPANY.
4. After completion of the WORK, all surplus materials and wastes from the coating
WORK shall be collected and disposed-off outside the working area. Overruns,
z droppings and smears shall be removed.
s
~
v
...'" 2.23 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
"
A. The crown of substation asphalt yard shall be at the center of the substation plot. The
yard shall be graded to drain water towards the fence (or boundary wall) at slope of 0.5
percent.
0z ~ N
-
REVISIONS
B. For the finished grade (crown) of the substation/BSP site development. refer to Clause
r-
I 7.4, TES-P-119.19.
DA :
C. Asphalt concrete paving works shall be as per the requirements of TCS-Q-113.01.
CH 'DBY:
Minimum thickness of combined binder and wearing course shall be 102mm (64mm thick
class "A" asphalt binder course and 38mm thick Class "C" asphalt wearing course).
~
~MISSION ASSET
rl~G DEPARTMENT
D. Base and sub-base materials shall satisfy the requirement of TCS-Q-113.01 and TCS-Q-
113.02. Minimum thickness of base course shall be 300mm, Class "B" as per TCS-Q-
<: --:- yCZ;?
113.02 with liquid limit of 25% and Plasticity Index of 4-8% maximum. Sub-base materials
/67//// shall conform to TCS-Q-113.02.
/
E. Asphalt paving shall be designed for the following vehicle (mobile substation) loading.
OPfRATING OEPARTME.T Description Vehicle Type (Mobile Substation)

Truck width 3400mm
Axle Spacing 1500mm
Axle load 20000 kg
King Pin Load 25000 kg
Pay load + Dead Weight (81500 + 22500 kg
!llIJWJ!
l~
Total Weight 104000 kg
BY:
OAT , 10 fit
2.24 SEPTIC TANKS AND SEEPAGE PITS
Septic tank, seepage pit and distribution box shall be as per COMPANY Standard
Drawings TA-800134, TA-800135 and TA-B00136, except as modified herein:
TH S DRAWlNG IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR a. Concrete shall conform to severe exposure condition.
co STRUCTION OR
FO ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CE TIFIED AND DATIW b. CONTRACTOR shall determine by structural calculations if the septic tank and
seepage are directly located under traffic load. If necessary, the CONTRACTOR
shall redesign/reinforce the septic tank and seepage pit.
I
[ROl]
STRUCTURAUCIVll DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO REV
OB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-Vlllb 32
C494 A PTS11CM010 OF 0
c. Septic tank interior surfaces shall be coated two (2) coats of elastomeric
cementitious impermeable membrane after thirty-five (35) days of concrete
placement. The total wet film thickness shall not be less than 1mm.
d. Septic tanks shall be made watertight by providing two (2) layers of elastomeric
bituminous waterproofing membrane (each minimum of 4mm thick) on sides and
bottom exposed to soil. The membrane shall be protected with cement screed and I
protection board.
2.25 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES AND COVERS
g f"') N _ Sanitary sewer manholes and covers shall be as per COMPANY Standard Drawings TA-
800137.
REVISIONS
I
PREt""REDBY: ---I
2.26 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STRUCTURESITAKE-OFF
DATf'
I
STRUCTURES
CH1D1Y,
Concrete foundations shall be provided to support all the necessary equipment and steel
I~ structures. Top of concrete foundations for equipment and other support structures shall
~SMlSSION ASSET be of the same elevation, with the top of concrete at 150mm (minimum) to 450mm
P~ING DEPARTMENT
(maximum) from top of asphalt.
-
Design criteria for the design of foundations shall be in accordance with TES-P-119.19
and TES-P-119.18.
OP~RATING DEPARTMENT 2.27 POWER TRANSFORMER FOUNDATIONS
~I----- The foundations for power transformers shall be designed as per TES-P-119.18 and TES-
P-119.21. Oil catch basin or oil retention pit shall be designed in the form of an open
rectangular reinforced concrete box with transformer placed on concrete block foundation.
The oil catch basin shall be designed to hold 100% of transformer oil. Interconnection
~JM! pipes shall be provided to keep the depth to a minimum. In addition, the following
/j' requirements shall be implemented.
BY, ~ ,I
DAT, Ie <./I! Design and install galvanized steel grating and structural steel supports 300mm below the
top of the foundation and spread gravel with size between 20 to 30mm over it to permit
transformer oil to readily flow into the oil catch basin. The gravel shall be clean, non-
dusting, hard and shall conform to 70-TMSS-03 (except the grading requirements). The
galvanized steel grating shall be adequately grounded and bonded to the substation
THis DRAWING IS NOT grounding system. The floor slab of the catch basin shall be sloped towards a sump pit.
TO BE USED FOR
CO STRVcrlON OR Galvanized steel checkered plates shall be provided over the sump pit.
FO ORDERING
Mil ERIALS ure'ru.
CE TIFIED AND DATED
A permanent manually operated horizontal mounted centrifugal pump shall be installed
near the transformer foundation on a concrete pad. It shall be protected with a galvanized
steel sunshade.
[ROll
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11--......------1----+---1
OBORDERNO. APPENDIX-Vlllb 33
_1_-
Top of transformer foundations & oil catch basins shall be kept as follows:
a. Shall be in level with other equipment foundations (approximately 300mm above the
surrounding asphalt level) if rails are to be provided up to the road fronting the
transformers
b. Flushed on the asphalt if longitudinal rails are also provided along the road fronting the
transformers, in which case, the road shall be level for a length equal to the length of
the longitudinal rails
Galvanized steel grating shall be a minimum of 5mm thick with a clear spacing of 19mm.
Gratings and structural steel supports shall be galvanized as per ASTM A 123, except that
oz the minimum thickness of galvanizing shall be O.13mm. Galvanized steel wire mesh shall
be provided above the metal grating.
REVISIONS
The oil catch basin shall be made watertight by providing elastomeric bituminous
PRE ARED BY: ----I
waterproofing membrane two (2) layers, each 4mm thick on sides and bottom. The
waterproofing membranes shall be protected with protection board and cement concrete
screed.
APPROVED
Crash barriers with chain link shall be installed around power transformers as per the
~.SMlSSIONASSET Standard Drawing TA-800133.
P r'.....INC D1EPARTMENf
2.28 FIREWALLS
Design and install reinforced concrete firewalls at locations shown on the conceptual
drawings. Minimum thickness of firewalls shall be 200mm for above ground and 300mm
for below ground. Firewalls shall be constructed independent from the buildings and
separated by isolation joints.
The clearance of a firewall from a transformer shall be as per TES-P-119.21. Fire

resistance rating of firewalls shall be 3 hours. Firewall faces shall be painted with texture
emulsion paint. Painting shall be as specified in TES-H-107.01 and TES-H-107.02.
2.29 STATION SERVICE TRANSFORMER FOUNDATIONS
The foundations of transformers shall be designed as per TES-P-119.18 and TES-P-

119.21.
Crash barriers with chain link shall be installed around station service transformers as per
T IS DRAWING IS NOT Standard Drawing TA-800133.
T BE USED FOR
C NSTRUCTION OR
F( R ORDERING
M TERIALS UNTIL.
C RTIFIED AN D DATED
2.30 COMMUNICATION DUCTBANKS AND HANDHOLES
CONTRACTOR shall construct all necessary dedicated communication concrete encased

ductbanks (for underground non-metallic fiber optic cables and communication entrance
[ROn
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1----.....,~--+-----+---_+-_1
telephone cables from STC) and handholes. The CONTRACTOR shall determine the
exact routing of the ductbanks.
Ductbanks and handholes system shall be provided from take-off structure up to the
communication room. Communication handhole near to the take-off structure shall be
within 5 meter radius.
Handholes shall conform to the COMPANY Standard Drawings TB-800076 and TB-
800077.
Communication handholes shall be provided at every change in direction, crossing, start

and end of ductbank system and at every 300 meters of continuous cable run.
~ "'" N _
Communication handhole nearest to the building shall be within 5 meters from the building
wall.
REVISIONS
Communication ductbanks shall consist of 2 x 110mm 0 PVC conduits encased in

concrete in accordance with Standard Drawing TB-800079. One of the conduits shall be
provided with 4 x 32mm HDPE sub ducts. Spare conduits and sub ducts shall be provided
with different colored nylon pull ropes and shall be plugged for future use.
I APPROVED
Two (2)-50mm 0 PVC coated rigid steel galvanized conduits shall be provided and
I
1 RANSMISSION ASSET
installed to route the Underground Non-Metallic Optical Fiber Cables from the Joint Box
PL ~ING DEPARTMENT
on the take-off structures to the Communication Handhole located at the base of the
C:::=~:5P structure.
/0/8///
I' / Two (2)-50mm 0 PVC coated rigid steel galvanized conduits shall be provided from the
handhole near the building to the point of cable entry into the building to route the fiber
optic cables.
Additionally, a ductbank with one (1) 50mm diameter PVC conduit shall be provided
between communications telephone termination cabinet (TTC) and the boundary wall for
jt- I
- -
the future STC Telephone connection.
Sides and base slab of handholes shall be provided with two (2) layers of waterproofing
membrane (each minimum 4mm thick). The membrane applied to vertical surfaces shall
~
be protected with a 15mm thick protection board, and applied to horizontal surfaces shall
be with 50mm thick concrete screed and two (2) layers of 150-micron polyethylene sheet.
RV:
DA, I U
,In fU The elevation of the top of the communication handholes shall be 100mm above the
surrounding asphalt finished grade elevation to preclude the entry of water. All handholes
within the substation yard shall be of traffic type.
Communication handhole accessories shall be in accordance with Standard DraWing TA-

I TI IS DRAWING IS NOT
800098
T( BE USED FOR
C( NSTRUCTIQN OR
Fe"
M TERlAlS
ORDERING
usru, A stainless steel marker plate with the following information shall be provided on each
CORTIFIED AND DATED
fiber optic cable handhole. Marker plate shall be as per Standard Drawing TB-800076.
The marker plate shall be located on the handhole cover collar frame.
[R01]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11--;-----+---+---1
SEC FIBER OPTIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
CONTRACT NO.
, HANDHOLE NO./STRUCTURE NO. :
JOINT BOX NO.
z CABLE TYPE/NO. OF CORES
....
0
;: LINK DESTINATION
CABLE MANUFACTURER
'-'
'"
'"0 INSTALLATION YEAR
I
I
I
2.31 ELECTRICAL DUCTBANKS AND MANHOLES
g ~ H
- CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of power and control cable ductbanks
REVISIONS and shall size them adequately to accommodate all the LV & power cables to be installed
in this PROJECT including future expansion plus 20% spare capacity.
P4A.REDBYl _ _......
Ductbanks shall meet the requirements of Standard Drawing TA-800062. Manholes shall
*- I~
~M1SSION
P~ING DEPARTMENT
ASSET
~
be in accordance with TA-800096, TA-80009? and TA-800098. Manholes shall be of
traffic type.
Manholes shall be sized to accommodate all the electrical cables and shall provide
necessary room for the maintenance, bending and splicing of cables
;>< ~
Manholes shall be provided with pulling eyes, sump, ladder rungs and all necessary
accessories. Manhole covers shall be of cast iron, coated with anti-corrosion paint. Spare
ducts shall be capped and water sealed.
I Manholes shall be provided at every change in direction, crossing, start and end of
O+RATING DEPARTMENT ductbank system and at every 300 meters of continuous cable run.
I
Sides and base slab of manholes shall be provided with two (2) layers waterproofing
membrane (each minimum 4mm thick). The membrane applied to vertical surfaces shall
-It- I
- - - be protected with a 15mm thick protection board, and applied to horizontal surfaces shall
be with 50mm thick concrete screed and two (2) layers of 150-micron polyethylene sheet.
CtRT[F~
BY,
DA
'-11!
/0 cUr
The elevation of the top of manholes shall be 100mm above the surrounding asphalt
finished grade elevation to preclude the entry of water. All manholes within the substation
yard shall be of traffic type. The manholes shall not be located in asphalt road or road
marking.
A stainless steel marker plate with writing "SEC ELECTRICAL MANHOLE NUMBER #"
shall be provided on each manhole. The marker plate shall be located on the manhole
Tt IS DRAWING IS NOT cover collar frame.
T( BE USED FOR
C( NSTRUCTION OR
Fe,," ORDERING
M TERIALS IJNTIL
C",TIFIED AND DATED
2.32 SUBSTATION SIGNBOARD
A. Substation building signboard shall be installed as per Standard Drawing TC-800003.
[ROT]
I
I
B. Substation signboard shall be installed near the gatehouse facing the access road.
Substation signboard near the gatehouse shall be per Standard Drawing TA-800111.
2.33 PERIMETER FENCE & GATES/PRECAST BOUNDARY WALLS
A. Perimeter fence shall be as per COMPANY Standard Drawing TA-800113, TES-S-

101.02, SEC Construction Standard TCS-M-112.01 and 70-TMSS-02.
B. Pedestrian and vehicular gates Main drive gate and personnel gate shall be as per
Standard Drawing SA-036272 except the height shall be 3000mm instead of 2400mm.
There shall be helical barbed wires with tension wires (3 strands) behind the gate similar
to the precast boundary wall. A suitable opening shall be provided in the drive and
personnel gate at padlock location so that the lock can be opened/closed from both sides
REVISIONS
of the gate, details of which shall be furnished to the COMPANY for review and approval.
~~um--l C. The asphalt level near the gates shall be maintained at the same elevation (preferably
flat) for a distance of at least equal to the width of the gate leaf to facilitate opening of
CHfDBY: gates and maintaining 50mm gap between the asphalt and the gates.
I~ D. The gate locking system indicated in the drawing may be changed depending upon the
~~MISSION ASSET requirements of the COMPANY. Similarly, the gate holder arrangement may also be
P ~lNG DEPARTMENT
changed depending upon the requirements of the COMPANY.
E. The drive and personnel gates shall be fabricated and installed to avoid the following:
1. Unbalancing of hinges
I
2. Barrel bolt shall have movable lid at the top to prevent entry of sand and debris.
OPfRATING DEPARTMENT 3. It shall be made rigid, such that during high wind condition it can be opened or
closed easily and safely.
I
F. Precast concrete boundary walls including pedestrian and vehicular gates, if shown in the
conceptual drawings, shall be constructed as per Standard Drawing TA-800012.
Contractor shall submit boundary wall layout and shop drawings for review and approval
=Xj; before fabrication of precast columns and walls.
J\lfi
DA , If.) (fir 2.34 PROTECTIVE CRASH BARRIERS WITH CHAIN LINK
I
Protective crash barriers shall be installed as per Standard Drawing TA-B00133.
A heavy-duty galvanized chain link shall be provided between the barriers, provision shall
TIj IS DRAWING IS NOT
be made at the barrier to secure the chain link properly.
TC BE USED FOR
C< NSTRUCTION OR
FUR ORD':RING
M TERIALS UNTIL
C'RTIFIED AND DATED
2.35 ACCESS LADDER TO ROOF
The caged ladder to roof of the buildings shall be as per Standard Drawing SE-119192B.
At the entrance of the ladder, a galvanized steel mesh with locking arrangement shall be
provided.
[ROn
C494 A PTS-11 CM01 0 OF o
; ",4.J+Sll ~J~\ ~..,>JJ\
~
u SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
~
~
~
~
~
=
v
2.36 ROOF AND CANOPY WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
Building roof shall be provided with one (1) layer PVC waterproofing membrane or two (2)
z; layers bituminous waterproofing membranes.
.;::
0
0:
v Roof waterproofing with PVC Membrane
"'
'"
0
Item # Description Reauirements/Specifications

1 Concrete roof The concrete surface should be even and
smooth. All sharp projections shall be knocked
<i
z ~ N
- down and local depressions and sudden
changes shall be filled with high strength
REVISIONS
mortar to present a true surface.
PJU: AIUD BY: 2 PVC waterproofing Joints shall be welded together using hot air
membrane, 1.5mm, loose- gun.
DAT:
laid (horizontal)
CHK DBV,
3 PVC waterproofing UV resistanUstabilized bonded to parapet wall
i
membrane, 1.5mm thick, and terminated at the groove/chase.
i
fixed with adhesive Exposed application
_.
~
;. ~~MISSION ASSET
lNNING DEPAKTMEJ'{f
(vertical) (Solar shield)
4 Adhesive Special suitable for hot and humid climate
'C ,. ~
5 Hot Air Weld The horizontal and vertical membrane shall be
/<7/8/// welded (minimum overlap 75mm)
I'
6 Separation layer 200 micron polyethylene sheet
7 Roof Thermal Insulation RiQid extruded polystyrene board
I
I 8 Protection layer Non-woven, geotextile made from polyester or
OPi RATING DEPARTMENT
propylene fibers, 2mm thick and weighing
300g/m2
9 Gravel 50mm thick
10 Sealant UV resistant
11 Aluminum flashing 50mm x 1mm thick with four bends fixed with
screws
~D 12 Cement Mortar Under tiles (25mm thick)
13 Tiles Walkway 800mm wide, loose laid precast
BY:
, /6/11. II concrete tiles (400mm x 400mm x 25mm)
DAT
, I
14 FilleUCant strip 50mm x 50mm sand and cement mortar strip
should be made along the intersection of
horizontal and vertical surfaces.
TH ~ DRAWING IS NOT Roof waterproofing with4mm thick elastomeric bituminous membrane

TO BE USED "'OR
co STRUCTIOi"f OR
FO ORDERING Item # Description Reauirements/Specifications
MA""RIALS UNTIl.
CE TlFIED AND DATF.O 1 Concrete roof The concrete surface should be even and
smooth. All sharp projections shall be knocked
down and local depressions and sudden changes
shall be filled with high strength mortar to present
[ROl]
OBQRDERNQ. APPENPIX-Vlllb 38
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
,
I
i
~ ~4JfSl1 ~J.Jl'-l1 j"s~1
~
=
~
=
~
a true surface.
1i 2 Primer Concrete surfaces shall be dry before application
of Primer. Primer must not be poured onto the
surface & care must be taken to avoid "pounding"
in depressions.
z 3 Bituminous membrane, The membrane shall be installed using torch
.;:
0
;;
4mm thick with 200 welding method and on application fully adhered
gsm polyester fabric to the primed surface for the horizontal and
'"'Q"'
'"
reinforcement vertical surfaces. The joints shall be welded by
torch welding method.
4 Bituminous membrane, The membrane shall be loose laid over the
4mm thick with 200 membrane described in item 3. The longitudinal
ez ~ N ~
gsm polyester fabric and end lap joints shall be welded by torch
reinforcement welding method.
REVISIONS
5 Solar shield Bituminous Granular surface for exposed application
PRl+~..RfD BY: membrane, 4mm thick
with 200 gsm polyester
OAt' fabric reinforcement
CH 'DBY:
6 Separation layer 200 micron polyethylene sheet
7 Roof Thermal Rigid extruded polystyrene board
,i
_.
APPROV[D Insulation
jRANSMlSSlON ASSET
p ~G DEPARTMENT
8 Protection Layer Non-woven, geotextile made from polyester or
-1--
propylene fibers, 2mm thick and weighing
",9 300g/m 2
vc/g/// 9 Gravel 50mm thick
.'
/' ~
I
11 Aluminum flashing 50mm x 1mm thick with four bends fixed with
,
,
screws
O+RATING D"'RTMEI'IT 12 Cement Mortar Under tiles (25mm thick)
13 Tiles 800mm wide, loose laid walkway made up of
~ precast concrete tiles (400mm x 400mm x 25mm)
14 Fillet/Cant strip 50mm x 50mm sand and cement mortar strip
should be made along the intersection of
CERTWII:D
horizontal and vertical surfaces.
BY: ~l / /) fMLI
Door canopy waterproofing with one "PVC" or one "4mm thick Bituminous"
membrane
D.
f
Item # Description Requirements/Specifications
1 Concrete canopy
2 Cement sand screed Screed surface should be even and smooth.
Tf IS DRAWING IS NOT 3 PVC waterproofing Terminate at the groove/chase. Joints shall
T( BE USED
C( NSTRUCTION
FOR
OR
membrane, 1.5mm thick, be hot welded.
Fe,,"
M TJ:RIALS
OROF.RING
UNTIL
horizontal loose laid and
c ~TIFIED AND DATED vertical fixed with adhesive
OR
Bituminous membrane,
4mm thick with 200gsm Torch welding method. Terminate at the
[ROll
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO REV
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
Ii 1'4~ ~J..,.....Jl ~~I
~
u SAUDI ELECTRICITYCOMPANY
=
s,
~
=
~
polyester fabric groove/chase.
"
u reinforcement
4 Adhesive Special suitable for hot and humid climate
(applicable for PVC membrane)
5 Gravel 50mm thick
z 6 Protection layer Non-woven, geotextile made from polyester
s
~ or propylene fibers, 2mm thick and weighing
"
u
r:l
300a/m 2
Q
8 FilieUCant strip 50mm x 50mm sand and cement mortar
strip should be made along the intersection
of horizontal and vertical surfaces.
0
z ~ N
- The following shall be implemented:
REVISIONS
PREtAKEDBY;
1. The roof slope at the gulley/scupper shall be achieved by cement sand screed.
2. Overlapping of PVC membrane shall be 75mm.
DA~' The built-up roof details other than recommended shall not be approved.
3.
CH,'DB": 4. The adhesive for the PVC membrane shall be recommended by the manufacturer.
I
I 5. The primer for bituminous membrane shall be recommended by the manufacturer.
~ APPROVED
SMISSION ASSET
P I INC DEPARTMENT
_
2.37 CABLE BASEMENT, CABLE TUNNEL AND CABLE ENTRY ROOM WATERPROOFING
r-- .,. 7
10/15/// Waterproofing shall be carried out as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19.
('
The waterproofing membrane shall be extended up to the finished floor level and shall be
I
I
fixed to finished grade slab with aluminum flashing and sealant. In exposed areas, the
0t1RATINC DEPARTMENT membrane shall be type for exposed purpose.
I
I 2.38 LIGHTING AND LIGHTNING MAST STEEL MONOPOLES
Fabricate and erect lighting and lightning mast steel monopoles as detailed in Standard
, CAli/ Drawing TA-800004. CONTRACTOR shall select the steel monopoles based on the
BY:
wj
1,lIklll
r
approved lighting/lightning calculations and submit the fabrication, assembly & erection
drawings for company review & approval. No fabrication or erection shall start until the
DA E:
, , I SUbmitted drawings are approved & stamped as Issued For Construction (IFC) & Noted
By.
Design, assembly, fabrication drawings provided by the COMPANY will in no way relieve
the CONTRACTOR from the entire responsibility.
T IS DRAWING IS NOT
Tl BE USED FOR
C NSTRUCfION OR
F( R ORDERING
M TERlALS UNTIL 2.39 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS
C RTIFIED AND DATED
A. The CONTRACTOR shall install temporary supports to hold the structures and equipment
in place while performing repair WORK. The temporary supports shall be installed only
after the section to be repaired is de-energized.
!
[ROll
I
I STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO REV
I SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
I JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-V1l1b 40
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
I
I
B. The temporary supports shall be removed when compressive strength of the grouting
material and concrete is 28 MPa or more, and in no case, shall the temporary supports be
removed sooner than seven (7) days after concrete pouring. However, curing shall
continue for twenty-one (21) days as outlined in the repair procedure. Placement of
z grouting material shall not be done until concrete compressive strength is 21 MPa or
E
;
more.
u
~
"
2.40 CONCRETE REPAIR WORK
A. Corroded/unsound concrete shall be chipped and removed in order to reach sound

g ~ N _ concrete and clean rebar.
REVISIONS
B. The chipping shall not be stopped at (or near) the clean rebar. It shall continue to a
PREPARED BY; _ _.....
minimum of 50mm behind the rebar. The lateral extent of concrete removal shall be
minimum of 300mm beyond the length of the crack or corroded length of the exposed
DATE:
rebar, whichever is greater.
CHK'DBY:
C. If the cracks still exist, then inject those cracks with epoxy resin.
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PlANNING DEPARTMENT
D. Clean and remove corrosion products from surfaces exposed on concrete removal. The
surface preparation shall be SSPC-SP10 of rebars and SSPC-SP5 of embedded metallic
inserts of cable clamps, i.e., to the description in Sections 6.2.6 and 6.2.7 of TES-H-
/0/8/// 107.01 respectively, shall be obtained.
.r
E. Tie an extra rebar (not exceeding 'the original bar in diameter) where any rebar is found to
be corroded by more than 20% of the original cross sectional area, as determined by the
OPERATING DEPARTMENT COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
F. Coat all cleaned rebar surfaces with a sacrificial zinc-rich primer specified. Prime and coat
the cleaned, embedded metallic inserts of cable clamps. Wet grit blasting or other
approved means shall be adopted to obtain white metal surface finish (SSPC-SP3 or Sa-3
Surface Preparation of TES-H-107.01).
G. Presoak the concrete substrate continuously with potable water, at least eight (8) hours
preceding the placement of concrete/repair mortar. Alternatively, use a bonding agent
according to manufacturer's recommendations and upon COMPANY'S approval.
H. In the chipped (as mentioned above), cleaned and prepared (i.e., presoaked) regions,
place concrete and repair mortar. Ensure a minimum clear cover of 75mm to the
cleaned/added coated rebar. The thickness of the member in the repaired regions shall, if
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR need be, increased for this purpose.
CONSTRUCfION OR
,,'OR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTil
CERTIFIED AND DATED
I. Cure the repaired regions with potable water continuously for duration of twenty-one (21)
days, since the placement of concrete, and as recommended by the manufacturer, but in
any case, a minimum of seven (7) days, since the repair mortar placed.
[R01]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----1I---t-----+----+--I
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX.Vlllb 41
J. All repaired/sound concrete surfaces and surface for embedded metallic inserts of cable
supports shall be prepared and coated for protection.
K. Temporary supports shall be removed only after the on-site cured concrete cylinder
specimens have attained a minimum compressive strength, as mentioned above, and in
no case, shall it be less than seven (7) days after concrete placement.
2.41 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR CRACK INJECTION REPAIR
A. This method of repair is adopted when concrete cracks are deep and the structural
integrity of the concrete is to be restored. This procedure of rehabilitation and protection is
0;
z
outlined in the following sections.
REVISIONS
B. The concrete surface to be repaired by resin injection shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
PREPARED BY, ----I deteriorated concrete and all other loose materials. Those that are to be injected shall
then be thoroughly inspected and injection port, drilling and pumping pattern established.
DATE:
CHK"D BY,
C. Install injection ports by drilling holes designed to intersect the cracks to depth below the
concrete surface. The spacing of the injection ports shall not exceed 300mm, and closer
APPROVED spacing of ports may be required. All cracked surfaces shall be sealed so that the liquid
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
resin injected under pressure will not leak and flow out of cracks prior to gelling and
curing. A non-sagging surface seal shall be applied to the faces of the cracks completely
bridging the cracks.
/ /
D. The surface seal adhesive shall be an epoxy resin compatible with the liquid resin being
injected. It shall preferably belong to the product range of the manufacture of epoxy resin
material specification.
E. Care shall be taken to mix only that amount of surface seal that can be utilized before the
material begins to gel. Continuous mixing of the two (2) components of the injection
adhesive shall be done in mixing chamber that properly mixes the material into the
finished curable adhesive. The injection adhesive components shall be separately
pumped into the chamber.
BY'~'
DATE, /(1 /Kill
F. The mixed adhesive shall be mechanically injected entering the ports through a
connection fitting appropriate to the type of port fitting attached to the concrete. Injection
pressure shall typically be in the range of 1 MPa to 1.5 MPa and shall allow the entire
crack/fixtures to be filled. The injection pressure shall be sustained until the port no longer
accepts resin. The adhesive shall be injected into the cracks through successive adjacent
ports starting at the lowest port and working upwards. Injection must continue through
one port until the epoxy adhesive starts flowing out of the adjacent port in a steady stream
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE lJSED FOR without air. At this stage, the first port shall be capped off and injection started on the port,
CONSTRUCTION
FOR ORDERING
OR
which has begun to show adhesive.
MATERIALS llNTlL
CRTIFIEDAND DATED
**** END OF SECTION II ****
[R01]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL t-----tt--;------t----t---t
SECTION 111- MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS
3.01 GENERAL
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit two (2) sets of original literature/brochures of the materials,
z
0
which shall necessarily include description, composition, uses, advantages, standards
t
;;:
compliance, limitations, precautions, storage, maintenance, installation and application
u procedurelmethod, etc., of the material in detail.
f:I
" I
I B. Two (2) samples of the proposed material shall be submitted.
C. The materials manufacturer shall provide Certificate of Analysis of his product from the
oz company approved Independent test agency at the time of approval and shall ready to
perform the random site sampling test at the company approved Independent testing
REVISIONS
agency. The site sampling test reports shall be forwarded to the COMPANY directly by
the Independent testing agency.
D. COMPANY has the right to send the proposed sample to an approved independent
testing agency for testing and verification purposes..CONTRACTOR shall bear all the
expenses incurred for testing.
i~
tluNSMlSSION ASSET
p~ DEPARTMINl'
--=-- 3.02 CONCRETE
A. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of 70-TMSS-03.

,/ /
B. Type of concrete shall be based on the soil investigation report.

,
OPtRATING OEPARTMENT C. A lean concrete 75mm thick shall be provided under all concrete cast against the earth.
I
Lean concrete shall be normal condition; minimum strength shall be 17 MPa. A vapor
! barrier, two (2) layers of 150 microns each, polyethylene sheet shall be placed above the
lean concrete.
D. A vapor barrier, two (2) layers of 150 microns each, polyethylene sheet, shall be provided
under electrical and communication concrete encased ductbanks.
BY,
OA
q}, III IXII/
3.03 CEMENT & SAND SCREED
A cement & sand (1:3) screed with water cement ratio as low as possible compatible with
workability. The surface of the structural concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned from all
rubbish, concrete and mortar droppings. Oil and grease patches shall be cleaned with
T~S
T BE USED FOR
DRAWING IS NOT approved agents. The surface of the floor shall be roughened with wire brush and
C NSTRUCfIQN OR
F ORDERING thoroughly cleaned with clean water. SurplUS water shall be brushed off and 1:1
M TERIALS UNTIL
C TIFIEDANDDATED
cement/sand slurry brushed over the surface immediately before laying the screed. The
,
finished surface shall be laid in panels and trowelled smooth to produce hard, dense and
flat surface. Continuous curing shall be performed for at least 7 days.
[Ro1]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----jI---+-----+----f----1
I
I
3.04 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Reinforcing steel shall conform to SASO SSA-2/79, hot rolled medium and high tensile
deformed steel with minimum yield strength of 350 MPa and 420 MPa respectively.
Deformations shall conform to ASTM A615M.
B. Reinforcing steel fastening ties shall be made using 1.5mm diameter galvanized wire with
at least two (2) wraps and twists. Tie spacing along the line of any bar shall not exceed
600mm horizontally or vertically. Wire tied splices shall be made with a minimum of two
(2) separate ties.
I C. Welded wire fabric shall conform to SASO SSA-224; cold drawn, steel wires with
<:> minimum yield strength of 240 MPa.
z
REVISIONS
D. Splices in welded wire fabric shall be made by lapping a minimum of one spacing of
PREtA-REDBY, _ _--\
outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet plus 50mm.
DA~: E. All reinforcement shall be bent cold. Once steel has been bent it shall not be rebent.
CH4DBYl
I
F. Welding shall not be permitted unless the mill test reports are furnished and show that
steel has been modified for weldability. Welding shall be done in accordance with
~
'PP'OVE.
~SSET Company Engineering Standard TES-W-1 09.01, Rev. O.
P INC DEPARTMENT
G. All reinforcement accessories (spacers, chairs, etc.) required for spacing, assembling and
supporting reinforcement shall be plastic (PVC or HOPE) accessories and shall be subject
/ " to approval.
I
I
01IlATING DEPARTMENT
3.05 STRUCTURAL STEEURAIL TRACK STEEL
I
A. Structural steel shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM A36M/ASTM A572M.
B. Where shown in the drawings, rail track steel shall be provided for easy movement of the
transformers during maintenance. The Contractor shall design/propose the type and size
UIIf!!Jl of rails using the transformer manufacturer's suggestions/requirements/
J
recommendations. They shall rest and bolted on reinforced concrete ballasts/supports,
BY ~~~ /
which will be designed/proposed by the Contractor and submit drawings for review .
E, 10 'J(/,/
C. Bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM A325M, ASTM
A563M and ASTM F436 respectively.
D. Structural steel shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with the
Tf IS DRAWING'S NOT
requirements of 01-TMSS-01, Rev. 01. Bolts, nuts, washers and palnuts shall be
T( BE USED
C( NSTRUCTION
FOR
OR
galvanized in accordance with the requirements of 01-TMSS-01, Rev. 01.
FeR ORDERING
M TERIALS U"'TIL
CI!RTIFIED AND DATED E. Welding shall conform to COMPANY Engineering Standard for "General Welding Criteria"
TES-W-109.01, Rev. O.
F. Anchor bolts shall conform to Standard Drawing SC-036128. Full length of anchor bolts
shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with 01-TMSS-01, Rev. 01.
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL t---"""'"'it---+-----+----+-"""'"'i
G. Design, fabrication and erection of steel structures shall be in accordance with latest
revision of AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
H. Design, fabrication and erection of latticed steel structures shall be in accordance with the
latest revision of AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
I. CONTRACTOR shall submit all fabrication and erection drawings for COMPANY review
and comments. No fabrication shall commence until all fabrication drawings are approved
and marked "Issued for Construction".
J. All steel structures shall be fabricated from a COMPANY approved steel fabricator.
CONTRACTOR shall submit the assembly and fabrication drawings for COMPANY review
and comments in coordination with the steel fabricator. Assembly and fabrication
REVISIONS drawings shall be signed and stamped by CONTRACTOR as well as steel fabricator.
Fabrication shall not commence until all fabrication drawings are approved and marked
PutARID BY: ----I "Issued for Construction" by SEC.
D+
CH1'DBY:
3.06 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS, MORTAR AND GROUT
I
,I~ A. Non-load bearing concrete masonry units shall conform to ASTM C129, Type II. The
.EMISSION ASSET
PT",ING DEPARTMENT surfaces of CMU shall be fair-faced, strain-free ready to receive paint. The CMU shall be
true to shape and size, free from flaws, cracks and other defects, CMU with broken edges
and otherwise damaged shall not be used.
" B. The CMU wall shall be cured continuously for at least seven (7) days.
,
C. Where wall heights are not an exact number of courses, the extra height shall be made
D~RATINC
,
D. . . .TM.NT up with cast-in-place concrete with minimum compressive strength of 38 MPa. The
surface finish shall be similar to the adjacent CMU.
D. Horizontal reinforcement shall be ladder or truss type, pre-fabricated from steel

conforming to ASTM A82 and galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 116, Class 1 or
Class 3, or ASTM A 153, CB-2. Minimum size of horizontal reinforcement shall be 9
1:zt!J gauge.
BYI1\JfJ, E. Vertical reinforcement shall conform to SASO SSA-2 with a yield stress of 420 MPa.
DA In I Mil Deformations shall conform to ASTM A615M. Minimum size of vertical reinforcement shall
be 12mm diameter.
F. At the interface of concrete elements (beams, columns) and CMU walls, expanded metal
lath and dovetail anchors shall be provided.
Ttl IS DRAWING IS NOT
TC BE USED FOR
C( NSTRUCfION OR G. All the plastering accessories such as expanded metal lath, angle bead, control joint
FUR OKU[RING
M TERlALS UNTIL bead, strip mesh, corner mesh, block work reinforcement, plaster stop bead, etc., shall be
CERTIFIED AND DATED
galvanized steel.
H. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Type M and shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 17 MPa at twenty-eight (28) days:
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----1~--+------f---_+-_1
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-V1l1b 45
~i
<
Portland Cement ASTM C150, Type V

Lime ASTM C207, Type S
Sand ASTM C144
z;
o
Proportions by Volume: 1 part cement, 1/4 part lime and 3 to 3-3/4 parts sand
t
;;
I. Masonry grout shall conform to ASTM C476 and shall have a minimum compressive
~ strength of 21 MPa at twenty-eight (28) days.
"
Portland Cement ASTM C150, Type V
Lime ASTM C207, Type S
Aggregate ASTM C404, maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 9.5mm
REVISIONS
Slump shall not be less than 200mm.
P~AREDBY: __ -I
t-----f 3.07 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General
~
APPROYE D
SMiSSION ASSET 1. All doors, except toilet doors, shall open outwards and shall be weather-tight to
P, INC DEPARTMENT
prevent moisture, dust and sand from entering inside the building.
2. Exterior and interior hollow metal doors shall be acoustically sealed, thermally
/" /" insulated, honeycombed core construction and approved and labeled for 3 hours fire
resistance rating as per Underwriter's Laboratories (UL).
I,
I
3. Doors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and UL 63.
O~RATING DEPARTMENT
i 4. Fire endurance tests of door assembly shall be performed in accordance with NFPA
j- 252.
-j--- 5. Hollow metal doors shall be fabricated in conformance with the requirements of
Steel Door Institute (SOl) specifications, SOI-100.
6. Hollow metal doors shall be erected in accordance with the requirements of Steel
Door Institute (SOl) specifications, SOI-105.
7. Hardware of hollow metal doors shall be in accordance with the requirements of

Steel Door Institute (SOl) specifications, SOI-107.
8. Minimum fire rating of all exterior and interior doors shall be 3 hours.
I ~'IS DRAWING IS NOT
I T( BE llSED FOR
C< NSTRUCTIQN OR 9. All doors shall be bonded together with braided copper clad steel and shall be
FOR ORDERING
M TERlALS UNTIL grounded to substation grounding.
C RTiFIED AND DATED
10. The fire resistance ratings of all the doors and hardware shall be certified by an
accredited independent testing agency acceptable to COMPANY.
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11---+-----+--..-+---1
11, Door frames shall be completely filled with cement grout with minimum compressive
strength of 21 MPa.
12. Metal surfaces of doors shall be thoroughly cleaned of all rust, scale, grease rough
spots and other foreign matters that may prevent proper paint adhesion.
13. All surfaces of doors and frames shall be applied or sprayed with one coat of rust-
inhibitive metallic oxide zinc chromate or synthetic resin primer and finished with
catalytically cured epoxy coating system. Primer shall be baked-on in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations for developing maximum hardness and
resistance to abrasion. Primed surfaces shall be smooth and suitable to receive the
finish coat.
ez
14. All surfaces of doors and frames shall be coated with two (2) coats of high gloss
REVISIONS epoxy paint. The paint shall be suitable for application over the galvanized surfaces.
15. Metal spreaders on frames to be set in concrete are to remain in place. Metal
spreaders on frames set at finished floor level shall not to be removed until frames
are securelyanchored in place with permanent anchors.
APPROVED
16. Painting work to doors and frames shall be in accordance with TES-H-107.01 and
RANSMISSION ASSET color shade shall be as per TES-H-107.02.
P NNING DEPARTMENT
17. The size of doors shall be adequate for the easy movement of biggest equipment,
while sizing the door CONTRACTOR shall provide the documents for the biggest
,./ / equipment that shall be moved in and out of the door.
18. All door (exterior and interior) locks including fire exit hardware lock devices shall be
master keyed to one system as per TES-P-119.19.
19. CONTRACTOR shall submit all fabrication and erection drawings for COMPANY
review and comments. No fabrication shall commence until all fabrication drawings
are approved and marked "Issued for Construction".
a. Submit shop drawings indicating the following:
BY~
DArn, ~, I VI
."
{(
Elevations of each door and frame type
Profile and thickness of metal
Wall conditions and anchorage details
Typical and special details of construction
Label requirements
Finished hardware location, reinforcing and preparation
T~ IS DRAWING IS NOT Specification for surface preparation and shop priming
T( BE USED FOR
C NSTRU(TION OR Other pertinent and necessary information
F<lR ORDERING
M TERIALS VNTIL
CIRT,FIEDAND DATED b. Samples: Submit three (3) 300mm x 300mm section of door showing internal
construction, edge detail and reinforcement for butts, three (3) "L" section of
frame showing corner detail and two (2) 300mm length of removable stop.
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL t-----1f---+-----+----+---1
C494 A PTS11 CM010 OF o
c. Submit all the technical literature and sample board of all the hardware.
20. Doors shall be installed by door fabricator or on his behalf, by a professional door
installer approved by the manufacturer and acceptable to the COMPANY.
Contractor is not authorized to install the door by himself, unless the manufacturer
approves him as their authorized installer. However, the door manufacturer is
responsible for professional installation.
Contractor shall submit the installation procedure for COMPANY review and
approval.
21. Double leaf doors with more than 2.40m in height shall be provided with awning
transom panel. Lifting and holding arrangement of awning transom panel shall be
mechanical. Details shall be provided for COMPANY review and approval.
i REVISIONS
22. Double leaf doors shall be provided with roller moving on rail. The rail shall be
PREP~RED BY: - - - - I
!
embedded in the concrete floor and flushed with room floor finished level.
DATt
OIK BY,
B. Door Leaves
I
i~ 1. Doors shall be fabricated from 1.5mm (gauge 16) hot-dip galvanized steel sheet
.~SMISSION ASSET conforming to ASTM A446; Grade D. Steel sheets shall be galvanized as per ASTM
Pil'llNG DEPARTMENT
A525M, with coating class 2-275 (275 g/m2 ) .
2: Doors shall be reinforced with galvanized steel channel or 2 shaped members

/ ./
minimum t.smrn thick, full height of door, spaced not more than 150mm on centers
and spot welded to face sheets 75mm on center, or doors shall be reinforced with
continuous truss, full height and width, spot welded to face sheets 75mm on centers
OPE~T1NG DEPARTMENT both vertically and horizontally.
~--
3. Doors shall be provided with 1.87mm (gauge 14) horizontal stiffener channels at top
and bottom of doors welded to face sheets.
!
4. Doors shall be provided with 1.87mm (gauge 14) stile channels welded to face
'Y+~'
sheets.
5. Prepare door opening for hardware. All joints and corners of the assembly shall be
DAT, IMt\{ U face welded and ground smooth.
6. All hollow portions of the doors shall be filled completely with fiberglass insulation or
solid core rigid polyurethane (foam-in-placed)/pre-foamed polystyrene insulation.
I
The insulation material shall be such that the U factor is not greater than 0.568 WI
THI~ DRAWING IS NOT (m 2 -K).
TO i B[ USED FOR
CO~STRUCTIQN OR
FO ORDERING
MA ERIALS UNTIL 7. Exposed joints shall be fully welded, filled and ground smooth.
CE1TIFIED AND DATED
! 8. Interlocking joints or seams shall not be made on faces or edges of doors.
9. Doors shall have a 3mm bevel on the strike side.

[ROll
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11---+-----+----+--1
10. Doors shall not have more than 3mm clearance at jambs and headers and 6mm
from the finished floor.
11. Door panels shall be free from buckles, twists or other imperfections. Panels shall
not have a buckle exceeding 1.5mm, as determined by a straight edge applied to the
face of the panel.
12. All door edges shall be filled with mineral filler to conceal seams.
! 13. CONTRACTOR shall install the doors plumb, square and in true alignment. Adjust
doors to required clearances and tolerances as per NFPA 80.
oz
c. Door Frames
REVISIONS
1. Metal frames shall be fabricated from 2mm thick galvanized steel sheet. Bends shall
be brake formed to assure true, sharp radii and to minimize camber, corners shall be
OAt fully welded.
CH1'DB\,;
k ~
2. Door frames shall be fabricated to have minimum 66mm width of frames, double
backbends to enable the frames to grip the wall firmly, double rabbet type and
S~SION ASSET depths (see item-3 below) shall be sized to fit the wall thickness.
P DEPARTMENT
3. For exterior and interior, the depth of frame shall be different. For exterior walls, the
/0/$/// depth of the frames shall be arrived on the basis that there is heat insulation with its
/ / supporting framework and gypsum board. For interior walls, the depth shall be
arrived on the basis that the there shall be plastering/tiles on both sides of the walls.
The width of frames shall be such that a projection of 15mm shall be provided from
.+.. . TlNG DEPARTMENT the face of the wall.
4. Frames shall have all construction joints welded full depth and width, or welded with
equivalent splice plates on the unexposed faces of frames. Exposed surfaces of
welded joints shall be dressed to produce invisible connections. Reinforcements and
stiffeners shall be welded to inside surfaces of frames.
5. Exterior door frames (header and jambs) and door bottom shall be provided with
neoprene compressible seal.
6. CONTRACTOR shall install the frames plumb, square and in true alignment. Use
installation spreader at base, strike and mid-top locations to insure constant and
proper jamb opening for door.
T IS DRAWING IS NOT 7. Frames set at grade shall be provided with an angular base anchor or steel plate at
T HE USED FOR
C NSTRUCTION OR each jamb, 38mm x 38mm depth less 3mm. Jamb legs to be furnished with two (2)
F( R ORm:RING
M Tt:RIAL.S UNTIL holes for power driven attachment to floor.
C ~T1FIEDAND DATED
D. Door Hardware
1. All door hardware shall be heavy duty.
[ROll
I
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11----+-----+----+--1
I
I
2. Hardware provision for hollow metal doors and frames shall be prepared at the
manufacturer's plant in accordance with template furnished and shall be drilled and
tapped to receive hardware as indicated on the hardware templates. Preparation
shall conform to ANSI A 115.1.
z; Hardware Specifications
o
t Hinges Provide doors with 5mm thick steel reinforcement welded to
~
frames. Hinges shall be heavy duty/high frequency full mortised
Q stainless steel ball bearing, concealed type. Hinges shall have five
(5) knuckle ball bearings, non-removable stainless steel pins when
.
door is closed. Hinges shall be 127mm x 127mm in size with

minimum thickness of 4mm. Minimum of four (4) hinges shall be
provided on any door. Hinges shall conform to ANSI A156.1 or
A156.7. Hinces shall be UL listed and ANSI certified.
REVISIONS Thresholds a. Exterior Doors: All exterior doors shall swing outwards and
shall be provided with thresholds of extruded aluminum alloy
~I
' A"D 'Y' conforming to ASTM 8221. Thresholds shall be maximum of
DA: ----I 13mm thick and 100mm wide by the required length.
CH 'D BY: ----I
b. Interior Doors: Extruded aluminum alloy, 13mm x 100mm by
~
the required lenqth
APPROV[O
Doorstops a. Provide doors with 4.5mm thick steel reinforcement for
MISSION ASSET
P I G DEPARTMENT doorstops welded to door. Doorstops shall be floor mounted,
75mm high with circular base 60mm in diameter.
b. Stops shall be UL listed and ANSI certified.

/ /
Door Closers a. Provide doors with 4.5mm thick steel reinforcement for closer
welded to door. Active and inactive leaves of double doors
shall be equipped with automatic door closers. Materials shall
be heavy duty: concealed or surface mounted type, full rack
and pinion operation, control for both openings and
closings/swings, adjustable spring power, High strength cast
iron cylinder, hydraulic back-check, modern cover, tamper-
proof, non-critical regUlating screws, liquid "X" temperature
stable fluid, shall permit door swing up to a minimum of 90,
(A~ shall have a choice of closer arm direction.
BY:
\ ~"] /
b. Hinges shall be UL listed and ANSI certified, ANSI A156.4
OA'<, fCf?llj Grade 1 Standard.
I I
c. The door closer shall be able to close the door in the shortest
interval of time with uniform speed and without damage to the
person usinq the door.
rr IS ORAWING IS NOT Door Holders a. Provide doors with 4.5mm thick steel reinforcement for door
BE USED FOR
1'(
c< NSTRUCTION OR holder welded to door. Door holders shall be made of cast
F~ R ORDERING brass, heavy duty, shall have 150mm long arm and base shall
M TERlALS UNTIL
C RTiFIED AND DATED be 40mm x 60mm, finish shall be satin chromium plate.
b. Holders shall be UL listed and ANSI certified.
[ROl]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1------11---+-----+---+---1
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIXV1l1b 50
C494 A PTS11CMD1D OF o
; 1'4..>fS1l ~J,....JI J..sjJJl
!j SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
c
s,
~
I
c
I<
Weather Weather stripping of all doors shall be made to reduce air pressure
5 Stripping loss and also to provide protection against wind blown dust
infiltration into the building.
a. Astragal: Inactive leaf of double doors shall be provided with

z;
field attached Z-shaped astragal. Shall be UL listed and ANSI
0
certified. Material shall be aluminum, stainless steel, brass or
~ bronze with stain chromium plated finish.
...'"'"
u
" Door Gasketing: Shall be UL listed and ANSI certified.

b.
Material shall be aluminum, stainless steel, brass or bronze
housing a durable neoprene insert for lasting performance
with finish stain chromium plated.
0
z ~ ~
- Door Bumpers Material shall be cast brass with durable rubber.
Door a. This device is required for pair of doors; it shall prevent the
REVISIONS
I
Coordinators inactive door of a pair of doors from closing and latching
PU+REDBY: before the active door closes and latches. It shall be heavy
I
duty. Material shall be aluminum, stainless steel, brass or
t
DAT
CHK BY:
bronze with finish stain chromium plated.
~~
b. Shall be UL listed and ANSI certified
Trim for a. For all exterior doors, the trims shall be "Key Lock
T NSMISSION ASSET
ING DEPARTMENT
exterior and Thumpiece".
interior doors
I r- "'<s> b. For all interior doors, the trims shall be "Key Retract Latch
/'0/,1;/// Bolt".
//
These trims shall be able to receive the COMPANY master key
I
cvlinder and shall be compatible with the fire exit devices.
OP RATINC DEPARTMENT
Fire Exit a. Single Doors: Exit devices shall be push pad type, double
Devices cylinder. The device shall consist of lock stile cover, touch bar
end cap, touch bar, mechanism housing and mechanism end
cap.
b. Devices shall be UL listed and fire rated for the doors, it shall
CERTIFIED
have special trim to accept ABUS (Euro) cylinder for master
~r,
key system. Lock shall be such that key retract and latch bolt.
8\1: c. Double Doors: Exit devices shall be push pad type, double
DA :
fA f III cylinder. The device shall consist of lock stile cover, touch bar
end cap, touch bar, mechanism housing and mechanism end
cap.
d, Fire exit devices for inactive doors shall be concealed with
rins DRAWING IS NOT vertical rod and shall be compatible with the active door exit
TU BE USED FOR
C(] NSTRUCTION OR device.
FC ORDERING
M TERL4.LS IJNTIL
C ~TlFIED AND DATED
[R01]
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
~ ~4.Jf5ll ~J~I ~y1l1
~
Q
~
~
Q
~
Locksets Locksets shall be provided to doors, which do not posses fire exit
= devices.
"
a. For interior doors - not master keyed
b. Exposed trim wrought brass, bronze or stainless steel, finish

z
0 shall be satin chromium plated.
t
iii
u c. Keying shall be 6-pin tumbler with two-nickel silver keys per
..'"
~
lock.
d. Shall be UL listed and ANSI certified, ANSI A156.2 Series

4000, Grade 1, lock knob torque requirements.
Indicating a. Provide to toilet main door.
ez ~ N
- Bolts
REVISIONS b. Body, handle and keep shall be of zinc, finish shall be
chromium plated.
PRE IAREDRY:
I c. Indicator case shall be of zinc, finish chromium plated with

BATt emergency release feature.
CHKDB,
i d. Spindle shall be flat steel.

I
I APPROVED
~MISSION ASSET
e. Variant shall be angled with striking plate.
PL ~G DEPARTMENT
f. Shall be UL listed and ANSI certified.

-: -",...
Push Plates Materials shall be stainless steel with thickness 5mm; size shall be
I,/;::;o/B///
100mm x 400mm with round corners.
" " Pull Plates Materials shall be stainless steel with thickness 5mm, size shall be
! 100mm x 400mm with round corners and stainless steel 25mm
I
diameter rod.
optRATING DIPARTMENT
Rubber SingIe doorframes shall be punched and provided with three (3)
Silencers rubber silencers. Double doorframes shall be punched to receive
~ two (2) rubber silencers. They shall be provided with metal
spreaders. Rubber silencers shall be shipped loose installed after
final painting.
Cll!illlIf! Door Sweepl a. Protection against weather, light, sound and dust shall be
.LJl1 Bottom provided for all exterior doors.
BY:
\JjJ; b. Shall be extruded aluminum housing a durable neoprene
DA ~. I~ I tu inserts for lasting performance. Door sweep shall be able to
create a positive contact seal with threshold. It shall be
compatible with the threshold.
c. Shall be supplied with #6 sheet metal screws.
Tii IS DRAWING IS NOT
BE USED FOR
T[
C( NSTRUCfION OR
d. Finish shall be satin chromium plated.
FOR ORDERING
M. TERIALS UNTIL
C RTlFIED AND DATED e. Shall be UL listed and ANSI certified.
[ROll
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
,
Anchors Frames in reinforced concrete COlumns/hollow masonry block walls

shall be anchored by means of expansion anchor bolts. Anchors
shall be located not more than 150mm from top and bottom of
each jamb with intermediate anchors spaced at 400mm on
centers. Expansion anchor bolts shall be made of malleable iron or
steel. At the location of each expansion anchor bolt the jamb shall
be reinforced with 5mm thick steel plate welded to inside of the
frame (iamb) and spot welded to the backbends. Anchor bolts shall
be minimum 10mm diameter by 150mm long.
Hardware a. Reinforcement for butts shall be 5mm thick by 230mm long
Requirements and 6mm narrower than the thickness of the door.
b. Reinforcement for locks and escutcheons shall be box type of

4mm thick steel spring leaf contacts for lock cases.
REVISIONS
c. Reinforcement for fire exit .device and mortised or surface
PRE AREDBY, ----I applied hardware shall be minimum 4mm thick and by
I
template requirements as to length and width.
D't/:'
CH~'DBVJ
d. Provide all doors and frames with minimum 4mm reinforcing
,
as necessary to support the hardware schedule. Drilling and
I APPROVED tapping for surface applied hardware to be performed at the
~MISSION ASSET building site.
PiNNING DEPARTMENT
Icc '
e. Wall Anchors: Same material and thickness as the frames
f. Frame Splines: Same material and thickness as the frames
g. Hinge Reinforcement: 5mm x 45mm x 250mm
O+RATING DEPARTMENT h. Strike Reinforcement: 5mmx 40mm x 100mm

I,
i. Holder and Closer Reinforcement: 5mm by the required length
& width
3.08 WALL AND ROOF THERMAL INSULATION
Roof and exterior walls of the buildinq thermal insulation shall be installed as per the
requirements of Standard TES-P-119.19.
3.09 FIBERGLASS WALL INSULATION

I
A. Wall insulation shall be highly efficient, lightweight, strong, resilient and easy to handle,
T~IS DRAWING IS NOT
T BE USED
C NSTRlICTION
FOR
OR
flexible insulation, composed of fine, stable and uniformly textured inorganic glass fibers
Ii R ORDERING bonded together by a non-water soluble and fire retardant thermosetting resin.
M T[RIALS UNTIL
C RTIFIED AND DATED
i B. The insulation blanket shall be laminated with foil reinforced Kraft paper, vinyl Kraft or
other specific vapor barrier to prevent condensation (both sides).
3
C. Nominal thickness shall be 64mm With density of 12 kg/m
[ROT]
I
~ ~4.JtS.ll ~J.."....J\ tsyJJl
~
.
c
~
~
c
~
:
v D. Fire flame spread rating shall be 25.
E. Base fiberglass shall be non-combustible and shall conform to UL 723, ASTM E84 or
ASTM E136.
z
9
t
F. It shall be UL listed, i.e., shall conform to UL 273, and fire tests of building construction
ii
u
material.
i:l
Q
G. Installation:
1. Between the metal studs, the insulation can be friction-fit in place. In areas where it
will be applied in heights over 2.5m, supplementary support should be provided to
ez ~ N
- hold insulation in place.
REVISIONS
I 2. When applied to masonry walls, the insulation can be fixed by impaling on pins or
PR[~ARED BY:
other similar attachments and then affixing a locking washer to hold the insulation in
DA~' place.
CHiD BY,
I
I APPROVED
3.10 DRY WALL SYSTEM AND GYPSUM BOARDS
=MISSION ASSET
P G DEPARTMENT
A. Dry wall System
+:~.::::.-.;><:;.
/0/$/1/ The heat insulation and gypsum board shall be fixed to interior face of exterior walls by
/" /" steel stud system. The steel stud system shall consist of steel framing, made of floor and
ceiling metal runners and studs, formed from hot-dip galvanized steel sheeting, with the
. I
following specifications:
Of' RATING DEPARTMENT
Steel Quality ASTM A525 and ASTM A527, Lock forming quality
Hot-dip galvanized, with coating Class G-90 (275 g/m 2)
I The studs and runners shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM C645.
Dimensions and shape of studs Dimensions and shape of Runners

lor CERT1D/
C shape C shape
BY: ~Jfrr Flanqe width: 29mm Flanoe width: 34mm
DA ~,1t1 !( ((f Depth: 70mm Depth: 75mm
. I
Thickness: 1.5mm Thickness: 1.5mm
Runners shall be spaced 600mm center to
center.
TI IS DRAWING IS NOT
Installation: Installation of studs and runners commences with ceiling and floor runners
'ro BE lISt:D FOR being aligned and secured in position with suitable fastenings. Steel studs are secured
C( NSTRUCTION OR
Hi'< ORDERING vertically in position at appropriate centers, by inserting into the runner and twisting
M TERlALS UNTIL
c jRTIFIED AND DATED through 90, 610mm center for 16mm thick board.
Location of studs shall not be more than 50mm from door jambs, abutting partitions, and
other construction. Studs located adjacent to doors, partition corners and other
[ROn
I
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
I
construction and corners shall be secured to the vertical flanges of the runner by positive
fixings, either screws or pop rivets.
A cut to length section of runner with base at each end shall be placed horizontally over
doorframe and secured by screws to the adjacent vertical studs. A cut to length stud shall
z be positioned at the location of vertical joints over the doorframe header, extending to the
o
t ceiling runner and similar treatment to other openings.
~
Q A knurled surface on the stud provides non-skid entry for pan head and dry wall screws,
using an electric screwdriver. Knockouts shall be provided in the studs for concealed
services.
B. Gypsum Wallboards
0:;
z
REVISIONS 1. Gypsum boards shall conform to ASTM C36, Type X (special fire retardant), shall
provide at least one (1) hour fire retarding rating.
PRE A.REDB'V; ---t
DA~' 2. Mihimum thickness shall be 16mm. Edges shall be tapered.
CH1DBY:
3. Gypsum boards shall consist of incombustible gypsum plaster core with fiberglass
I
incorporated, surfaced with special cardboard bonded to core.
APPROVED
1 ~SMISSION A55ET The back surface of the foil-backed gypsum wallboard shall, in addition, be covered
PL ~G DEPARTMErrr
4.
with aluminum foil.
5. It shall be UL listed, i.e., shall conform to UL 263, and fire tests of building
/
construction material.
6. Fire flame spread rating shall be 25.

01RATING DEPARTMENT
7. Gypsum wallboards shall be attached to steel stud system with self-drilling dry wall
screws.
8. The joints between the adjacent gypsum boards may be reinforced and concealed
with tape joint system, leaving the wall surface virtually free of joints.
:.6~1 9. Density shall be 1100 kg/m3 .

.;/\]0/. /
DA,
.f'r( ,I KIll 10. Average breaking stress shall not be less than 670N (bearing edges across fiber of
surfacing) and 225N (bearing edges parallel to fiber of surfacing), when tested in
accordance with ASTM C473.
11. Joint treatment materials shall conform to ASTM C475.

Tl S DRAWlNG IS NOT
T( BE US[O rOR 12. Nails shall conform to ASTM C514.
C( NSTRlJCTIDN OR
FC" ORDERING
1\1 TERlAlS UNTIL 13. Screws shall conform to ASTM C646, Type S, and ASTM C954.
C ~TIFIED AND DATED
14. All accessories such as screws, joint tape, joint compound, corner tape, shall be
used for proper installation of gypsum board.
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11---+-----+---+---1
~
~
u SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4.JfSll ~J..,....JI ~~\
.=.
~
<
=
'=u" 3.11 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
A. General
z
0
1. Waterproofing membrane shall be a purpose design and have proven application in
t the Kingdom considering thermal expansion and contraction.
iii
'"'
i:I
2. CONTRACTOR shall submit samples and brochures of the product for COMPANY
"
review and acceptance.
3. Waterproofing membrane shall be installed by the membrane manufacturer, or on

his behalf, by a professional waterproofing CONTRACTOR approved by the
0
z ~ M
- manufacturer, acceptable to the COMPANY.
, REVISIONS
PRE~A1'ED BY,
4. CONTRACTOR shall submit the installation procedure for COMPANY review and
approval.
DA*
5. The waterproofing material and the installation of the membrane shall be
CH1'DBY'
guaranteed for a minimum period of ten (10) years.
i APPROVED
I
~SMlSSION ASSET B. Modified Bituminous Waterproofing Membrane
P INC DEPARTMENT
-_.
"'" /'~ 1. This type of membrane shall be used especially for underground structures such as
/o/er~/ cable basements/cable entry rooms, electrical manholes, communication
//
handholes, and septic tanks as well as for roofs.
I
2. Membrane shall be bitumen modified with Attactic Polypropylene (APP). The
01RATING DEPARTMENT membrane shall be reinforced with isotropic spun bounded, non-woven polyester
mat 4mm thick. Membrane shall have the following specifications:
Properties Typical Values Standards

Thickness Minimum4mm
Reinforcement: Non-woven polvester 200 qrn/m"
ED
'w
C'::i Ultimate Tensile Strength, N/5cm @ 25C ASTM D5147
Longitudinal 950
BY: " I. Transverse 800
I U 16(11
DA
I Ultimate elongation, % @ 25C
Longitudinal 45
Transverse 50
Tear Resistance, N ASTM D5147
Longitudinal 600
l-,~"m
TO
C
1'0
BE USED
STRUC'TION
M TERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
FOR
OR
Transverse
Softeninq Point, C
Low temperature flexibility, DC
400
155
-6 to -10
ASTM
ASTM
036
05147
cr. TinED AND DATED
Water Absorption, % Wt @ 23C 24 hours Less than 1 ASTM 05147
Resistance to aging & UV No change greater ASTM G53
Weather-O-meter 2000 hours than 20% of the
original values
[ROl]
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
ti l't,o~ ~J~l 4.s~\
~
e
~
Q
~
Puncture Resistance, N 1155 ASTM E154
=
v Water Vapor Transmission, g/m2/24 hours, Less than 0.5 ASTM E96
RH 90% at 38C
Resistance to Leakage at Joints Pass UAEtc
Penetration, @ 25C, dmm 20 ASTM D5
z Dimensional Stability % ASTM D5147
~
0:
Longitudinal + 0.5
u Transverse - 0.5
'"
'"
Q
Load Strain product @ 25C
Longitudinal 42,750
Transverse 40,000
Lap joint strength, N/5cm (Longitudinal and Same as
0
z ~ N
- Transverse) membrane
REVISIONS
Installation Procedure: A layer of bituminous primer is cold applied on the cleaned
PRE ARED BY: screed using a plaster roller with organic, solvent resistant wool.
-1
CHKDBY,
i APPROVED
The rolls of membranes are laid one by one on the dried primer and properly
aligned to cover the entire surface. Each membrane is re-rolled and unrolled
systematically for torching by means of a propane gas torch.
Overlapping seams of adjacent rolls of membranes shall be torched and pressed
MISSION ASSET
G DEPARTMENT tightly.
~ .... ~
y~
Control joints shall be provided at locations determined based on the geometry
/(.7/,13//,/
/ / configuration and drainage characteristics of the roof.
The waterproofing membrane shall pass over the parapet and be fixed under the
I
aluminum flashing.
OpiRATING DEPAR.TMENT
I
Between the levels, the protection of waterproofing vertical edges is provided by a
I
metal section (aluminum flashing) used as water drip. The metal section is nailed to
the vertical wall and its upper part is sealed using suitable elastic sealer. The
waterproofing membrane shall be raised on the walls to the same level of the
surroundinq parapet.
CER!lli1t!!
/ ' rf c. Bituminous Roofing Primer
BY:
~ ./
DA [:
f(1 .iI (f Roofing primer shall be formulated from highly pliable, flexible bitumen, select petroleum
solvents and compounded with wetting and saturation additives. It shall comply with
ASTM D41 with the following specifications:

T IS DRAWING IS NOT Densitv at 25C, kq/liter 0.86 to 0.89 ASTM D70
T( BE USED FOR
C NSTRUCfION OR Viscosity at 25C, cps 70 - 150 ASTM D88
F( R
M TERIAl.S
ORDERING
UNTIL
Drying time to touch at 25C 3 hours
C RTIFIEDANDDATED Drvina time, throuqh at 25C 24 hours
Non-volatile, % weight 45 (minimum) ASTM D402
Volatile, % weight 55 (maximum) ASTM D402
Water content Zero ASTM D55
[ROl]
C494 A PTS.11CM010 OF 0
Shelf life 2 years

Penetration at 25C of asphalt from ASTM D55
distillation up to 360C, dmm 20 - 50
It shall have the following outstanding features:
1. Optimum penetration of primer into the surface pores, pinholes and cracks
2. The primer shall allow for better saturation, dust absorption and adhesion. Primer
shall prepare the surface for a permanent and durable bond between the substrate
and the membrane.
D. PVC waterproofing membrane

oz 1, This type of membrane shall be used especially for roof of bUildings.
REVISIONS
2. It shall be high polymer PVC waterproofing membrane with high tenacity polyester
pur REn BY; ----I mesh reinforcement, UV stabilized. Membrane shall have the following
DA1: specifications:
CHK1DBY:
Properties Typical Values
!
Thickness 1.5mm
I APPRO"'ED
~SMISSION ASSET Ultimate Tensile Strength, N/5cm

P~ING DEPARTMENT Longitudinal 1200
Transverse 1100
Ultimate elongation
Longitudinal 300
Transverse 300
Softening Point (OC) 180
Tear Resistance, N 250
Resistance to low temperature (DC) -20
Water absorption (maximum % Wt. Chance) less than 0.025
jt------ Hydrostatic resistance (N'crn")
Impermeability of the membrane to water under pressure
250
(Bars) 7
,~
Root Proof Yes
Chemical Resistance including Acids, Alkaline, Salts, Yes
BY;~)111 Alcohol, Amines, Oils and Hydrocarbons with high
DAT I () / iiI/I Concentration
I I
Resistance to aging More than 5000
hours
Fire Resistance Yes
TH~
TO
DRAWING IS NOT
BE USED FOR
E. Water flood tests
CO STRVCTION OR
1"0 ORDERING
M ERIALS UNTIL CONTRACTOR shall carry out water flood tests for at least seventy-two (72) hours by
CE TlFIED AND DATED
impounding water over the roofs to check the adequacy of waterproofing membrane over
the roofs. For basements/cable entry rooms, manholes, handholes, trenches, oil catch
basins, all de-watering operations shall be stopped completely after the installation of
waterproofing membrane. If any leakage is found inside the basemenUcable entry
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL I------ll---+------f----+----I
i HAIL SAUDI ARABIA 84
I
~
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY S'\.,I.JfSl.l ~~.,....J\ ~~\
0
~
~
0 room/cable tunnel or under the roof slab, the CONTRACTOR shall take all the remedial
'"
~
~ measures acceptable to the COMPANY.
3.12 ASPHALT CONCRETE

z;
!2 Asphalt concrete materials shall be in accordance with TCS-Q-113.01.
~
0:
v
...
"' Q
3.13 BASE AND SUB BASE MATERIALS
Base and sub-base materials shall satisfy the requirements of TCS-Q-113.01.

0
z ~ N
-
REVISIONS 3.14 BACKFILL MATERIALS
PRE ARED BV: Backfill materials shall satisfy the requirements of TCS-Q-113.02. Soil thermal resistivity
DA1 :
tests in addition to other tests shall be carried out on the backfill materials. The backfill
cu DBYl
materials shall have a maximum thermal resistivity of 1.2KcmlW.
APPROVED 3.15 PAINTING SYSTEM

'RANSMISSION ASSET
-
P ANNING DEPARTMENT
A. Painting system shall conform to TES-H-107.01. Paint color code shall be as per TES-H-
"'" ~.cc..r
107.02. The paint system shall have the following properties:
/0/.9"///
/ / Water resistant
1.
2. Micro porous, allows surface to breath
I
3. Anti Carbonation
O~RATING DEPARTMENT 4. Flexible
5. Chemical resistant
6. Low maintenance costs
7. Built-in sheen, keeping surface constantly fresh
8. Color retention & non-yellowing
~1, B. Paint Selection Guide:
~l'o/I
r
BY, Exterior Concrete Surfaces Generic

10/ I(/If First Coat Acrylic Primer/Sealer
DA ,
Second Coat Acrylic Copolymer Resin Emulsion
Top Coat Acrylic Textured Emulsion
eMU block wall Surfaces Generic

T IS DRAWING IS NOT (Exterior)
T< BE USED FOR
C NSTRlICTION OR First Coat Latex Primer/Sealer
ORDERING
F'R
M TERL\L.S UNTIL
Second Coat (Filler) Plastic Filler
C RTIFIEDANDDATED Top Coat (Two coats) Medium texture (Emulsion)
Battery Room Ceiling Generic

First Coat Epoxy Primer/Sealer
[ROn
SPECIFICATlONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
~
~
I
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ,4->fS.\l ~J~I 4.s~\
c
~
~
c Second Coat (Filler) Epoxy Filler
'="
~ Top Coat (Two coats) High Solid Polyamide cured Epoxy Semi-Gloss
Enamel
Galvanized Steel Surfaces Generic

z First Coat (where not shop Two component etch primer containing phosphoric
.e:
0
Oi
bonderized) acid and rust-preventing pigments
u First Coat (where not shop Two components epoxy/polyamide primer
'"
'"
Q bonderized) containing zinc phosphate as corrosion inhibiting
pigment
Second Coat Acrylic Epoxy
Top Coat Urethane Epoxy Enamel
z0 ~ N
- Gypsum boards Generic
REVISIONS
First Coat Acrylic Primer/Sealer
I
'HErARED B\'l Second coat Latex Vinyl Versatate Copolymer Resin
Top Coat Latex Vinyl Versatate Copolymer Resin
D'~
CJI1'D BY: Surface Preparation:
I
!~ Concrete shall be free from dirt, loose or excess mortar, efflorescence or any film left from
P
~SMISSION ASSET
I!"lG DEPARTMENT
incompatible form oils or concrete curing compound. If form oils or incompatible curing
compound are used, the surface shall receive sweep sandblast. Patch cracks and other
,e--" .-
1-.- ';>< ~ blemishes prior to painting.
/iJ'/tff/;//
,-
Masonry shall be free from dirt, loose or excess mortar, efflorescence and thoroughly dry.
Patch cracks and other blemishes too large to be covered with block filler.
i
I
Plaster must be hard and dry. Test plaster surfaces with a moisture meter and do not
0iRATING DEPARTMENt'
proceed with painting until the moisture content satisfies the recommendation of the
J respective paint manufacturer. Remove grit, mildew, loose particles and repair surface
irregularities before paint is applied. Repair cracks and holes with patching plaster,
properly keyed to the existing plaster and sandpaper smooth.
.~'UI
Galvanized Surfaces: Remove water-soluble dirt and chemicals with water and detergent;
solvent soluble contaminants with solvent. Rinse, allow to dry, then power or hand abrade
BY,
\f);. to remove oxides.
DK :
[D /6./ ~I
I Gypsum board: Repair minor cracks and holes with finishing compounds and smooth
after drying.
In order to check that the manufacturer color shades match with that of the COMPANY
color shades, CONTRACTOR shall prepare the sample of color shades with texture at the
~
S DR<\.WING IS NOT
BE USED FOR site for inspection and approval.
C( NSTRUCTION OR
'-0" ORDERING
M TERlAtS UNTIL
c p,TlFlED AND DATED
3.16 PVC WATERSTOPS
Preformed, flexible and extruded from high-grade polyvinyl chloride compounds for
sealing expansion, construction and contraction joints in concrete structures
[ROT]
STRUCTURAL/CIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOGUMENT NO. PAGE NO REV
I C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
l;i
t: SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY 1'4Jf11l ~JJLwIlI ~~\
p
~
Q
;.,
Ii Properties Nominal Values Standards
Water absorption 0.15 ASTM 0570
Tear Resistance 60 N/mm ASTM 0624
Ultimate Elonqation 390% ASTM 0638
z Tensile strenqth 15 MPa ASTM 0638
0
.
;: Low temperature Passed at -35F /-37C ASTM 0746
"...
u
'"
brittleness
Stiffness in flexure 8.5 MPa ASTM 0747
Specific qravity 1.37 ASTM 0792
Ozone resistance No failure ASTM 01149
Volatile loss 0.30% ASTM D1203
763 ASTM 02240
0
z ~ H
- Hardness Shore A15
Accelerated extraction CRO C572
REVISIONS
Tensile strength 150 kg/cm 2
PREf'ARED BY:
Elongation 370%
Effect of alkali
DATE:
Weight change +0.05%
CHK'DB\,:
Hardness chance ..
-1 point
~ Site Jointing: The PVC waterstops shall be but-jointed by the process of heat fusion or
'fKANSMlS:ilON ASSET
Pl..o\NNINGDEPARTMENT
welding. A special portable wooden jig shall be used for welding and is used in
~.-.
conjunction with an electric welding blade. The end of the waterstop having been cut
~~ square, the jig is used to line up the two ends of the waterstop in precise opposition. The
/ <C::7/9 /// heated blade is then inserted between the two ends and material is melted on contact.
/
The blade is then removed and the two ends of the waterstop pushed together in the jig
where they achieve fusion.
OnRATlNC DEPARTMENT Application: Use external waterstop systems for waterproofing basements/cable entry
rooms/cable tunnels and substructures. Flat dumbbell for construction/contraction joints.
Center Bulb for expansion/movement joints
3.17 NON-SHRINK GROUT
BY,
DATE'
11
L-fJJ:
OrtI
.t
IU
Grout shall be cement based fully complying with the requirements of ASTM C1107.
Grout shall be non-shrink, non-metallic & chloride free, high performance, free flowing,
non-catalyzed, shrinkage compensated and hydrogen free system. The non-shrink grout
shall have following specifications:
Specifications Values at 20C at Remarks

twentv-eight (28) days age
THIS DRAWING IS NOT Compressive Strength 60 MPa Application,
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR Flexural Strength 10 MPa formwork, mixing,
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIl..
consistency of mixed
CERTIFIED AND DATED Coefficient of Thermal grout, placing, curing
Expansion 11X10-6/oC and cleaning,
storage, handling of
Modulus of Elasticity 29,000 MPa the grout must be in
[ROll
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
~
c SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY "'4Jt5ll ~J.,......J\ ~~I
.=.
~
=
~
Mixing water shall be free for oils, acids, organic matter or strict accordance with
:
u other deleterious substances and shall not contain more the manufacturer's
than 500 parts per million (ppm) of total dissolved solids. instructions.
Minimum time of initial setting shall not be less than 3 hours
Minimum time of final setting shall not exceed 8 hours
"-
g Fluidity of grouts shall be high fluidity, 10-30 seconds flow
~ when tested in accordance with ASTM C939.
'"
u
...
"'
Q
3.18 POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
A single component, liquid applied, moisture cure, polyurethane waterproofing membrane

0 ~ N ~
with the following properties:
z
REVISIONS
Priming Coat and Subsequent Coats (Aromatic Formulation)
PRE REDBY:
, Properties Typical Values
DAT~ Color Black
CHK BY;
I
Modulus at Break 3 MPa
~~
Ultimate Elonqation 400%
Tear Resistance 25 kN/m
T SMISSION Assn
P ING DEPARTMENT Tensile Set Recovery 95%
Adhesion to Mortar 3000 N/m
,,-"'$
Hardness Shore A 45
v",,/g.//"/
,1'/ Permeability to water vapor 0.4 metric perms
Recoatabilitv Excellent
Thickness Minimum number of first and subsequent coats
I
shall be two (2) or dry film thickness shall not be
Or'IlATING DEPARTMENT
less than 600 microns, whichever produces higher
I thickness.
~ Chemically resistant to alkalis, acids, chlorides and sulfates and can withstand
service temperature up to 90 DC.
~
Top Coat (Aliphatic Formulation)
r/ /I
BV:
~ ""7 i Properties Typical Values
DA' E, ID 'if II Color White
Ultimate Elonoation 30%
Tear Resistance 7.5 kN/m
Tensile Strength 22 MPa
I
Hardness Shore A 85+5
T IS DRAWING IS NOT Total solids ov weiqht & volume 60%
TC BE USED FOR
Thickness Minimum number of coats shall be four (4) or
I~ R
N$TRUCfION OR
ORDERING
M UNTIL
TERIAL.S the dry total film thickness shall not be less than
C RTiFIEDAND DATED
400 microns, whichever produces higher
thickness.
[ROT]
I PLANT NO.
STRUCTURALJCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO REV
i
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
- ---------------
3.19 COAL TAR EPOXY
A two-component, high-build, high-solids (at least 90%) coal tar and epoxy resin with the
following properties:

Bond Strenqth to Concrete 3 MPa
Bond Strength to Steel (Sandblast) 7.5 MPa
Heat Deflection Temperature 60C or above ASTM 0648
Potential Health Hazard during application None
and in-service
Priming coat shall be suitably selected separately for steel and concrete, and
0:;
z approval shall be obtained from the COMPANY.
REVISIONS
PREP RED BY: ----I 3.20 CEMENTITIOUS ELASTOMERIC IMPERMEABLE MEMBRANE

DATil:
CHK'~BY:
A polymer modified cementitious coating material, when cured; it shall form an
elastomeric impermeable membrane with the following properties:
~
Properties Tvpical Values Standards
_T ~~MIS5IONASSET
r .... ~.,.INGDEPARTMENT Resistance to Water Surface Positive 7 bar (70m head of DIN 1048
water)
Crack Accommodation Excellent
Static and Dynamic
CO2 & Chloride Ion Diffusion Excellent
Resistance
Bond to Damp Concrete Excellent
3.21 REPAIR MORTARS
High performance, free flowing, non-metallic, non-shrink, cementitious micro concrete,

with the following properties, tested for flowable consistency at 20C and twenty-eight (28)
days age:

Compressive Strenqth at 28 Days ace 58 MPa
Modulus of Elasticity at 28 Days aqe 29,000 MPa
Slant Shear Bond Strength with Concrete at 60 MPa
28 days aqe
TH DRAWING IS NOT Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion
TO BE USED FOR
CO STRUCfION OR Chloride Ion Penetrability Very low (less than 1000 Coulombs
FO ORDERING
MA [RIALS UNTIL as per ASTM C1202)
CE TlFIEDANDDATEO
Setting Time at 20C
Initial 5.5 hours (minimum)
Final 7.5 hours (minimum)
Flexural Strength 10 MPa
[ROn
~
~
c SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~l:.)fS.lJ ~J~I ~~I
~
~
~
<
Q
~
For repair sections deeper than 100mm, use properly graded Bmm to 12mm silt
=
v free aqqregate washed with clean water.
3.22 CONCRETE SURFACER

z
0
t A single component polymer modified cementitious fairing coat, designed for vertical (and
i2
u also overhead), used to infill honeycombing and voids up to 3mm deep, and as a blow
'"
'"'
Q
hole filler up to 10mm deep. Following test results obtained at a water powder ratio of
0.3:1 by weight and temperature range of 20C to 35C.

0z ~ N
- Compressive Strength at 20C
Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion
30 MPa
7 to 12 x 10-<>rC
REVISIONS
Bond Strenqth to Concrete 23 MPa
PRE A.REDBY: Flexural Strength 7MPa
Working Life Approximate 45 minutes to 20 minutes
PA1'
CH 'PRY:
I 3.23 CRACK INJECTION MATERIALS

~
ltANSMlSSION ASSET
Pl ~G DEPARTMENT Epoxy resin based, low viscosity, non-shrinking bonding material, conforming to ASTM
...,... - C881-90, Type IV, Class C and satisfying the following requirements:
~'<=:7?
/0/8///
/ / Properties Typical Values
Compressive Strenqth at 7 days aoe 95MPa
i Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion at 7 days age 5.5 x 10-orC
Adhesive strength on dry concrete at 7 days age 3 MPa
Flexural Strength at 7 days age 40 MPa
i
, Tensile strength at 7 days aoe 30 MPa
~
Modulus of elasticity at 7 days 3400
Elongation at break at 7 days 4%
Heat deflection temperature (HOT) as determined by 65C or above
IG,../~~i'
ASTM 0648
Coefficient of viscosity at 23C 10 mPas
BY, "ir:L1
k'S1 a
/'t)
Pot life 2 hours at 20C
DA , 24 minutes at 40C
Chemically resistant to alkalis, acids, chlorides, sulfate. Compatible with dry and
damp concrete.
l"U~".'OO
T BE USED
C NSTRU(TION
ORDERING
FOR
OR
3.24 EPOXY ZINCRICH PAINT/PRIMER
M n:RIALS UNTIL. A two-component (base & curing agent), metallic zinc-rich epoxy primer. High
C TIFIEDANDDATED
performance to give maximum protection to aggressive environments. The material shall
comply with the composition and performance requirements of SSPC Paint 20.
[ROl]
i SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
,! JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-Vlllb 64
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
I
!
~ "~Jf11l ~.l.;a-l\ 4,s~\
~
Q
a,
~
Q
~
Properties Tvplcal Values Remarks
=
c Color Grey
Gloss level Hiqh Application, cleaning,
Thickness 50 - 75 microns DFT storage, handling,
85-127 microns WFT etc., must be in strict
z Mix Ratio 4 parts base: 1 part curinq aqent accordance with the
51
t Volume Solids 59% manufacturer's
;;
u Density 2600 kg/m 3 instructions.
~
Q
Drying time 75 minutes at 25C (Touch dry)
4 hours at 25C (Hard dry)
Application method Airless Spray
0
z ~ N
-
REVISIONS 3.25 CONDUITS AND FITIINGS
PRE AREDa,,: A. PVC Conduits

OAT:
1. Plastic conduits and fittings shall be made of extra strength PVC plastic utility duct
01. DBV:
for underground installation of communication cables. PVC conduits and fitting type
shall be DB, designed for direct burial in underground trenches with a requirement
~ for concrete encasement in concrete or type EB, designed for encased burial in
PL ~~~s;:R~~
/0/;:;///
I'
/-
.'
2.
3.
concrete when installed in underground trenches.
Plastic conduits and fittings shall meet the requirement of 23-TMSS-01 and
following as specified below:
PVC plastic conduits compound shall meet the minimum cell classification of PVC
12154 as per ASTM D4396.
I
OP RATING DEPARTMENT
4. PVC plastic duct fittings shall meet the minimum cell classification of PVC 11232 as
per ASTM D4396.
5. PVC solvent cements shall be as per ASTM D2564 and applied as per ASTM F402
for safe handling of solvent cements.
6. PVC duct bell ends, where permitted/required, shall be as per the dimensions listed
.,:::fi/
r~fl'~ in Table 2-2 of NEMA TC8.
BY:
DAT:
10 ,IX/II 7. PVC ducts and fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible
cracks, holes, burrs, foreign inclusions, or other defects that could damage cables.
B. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Galvanized Conduits

!
Rigid conduits shall be hot-dip galvanized with PVC coating, fittings shall be threaded and
TH S DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR hot-dip galvanized.
co STRUCTION OR
FO ORDERING
>lA ERlAL$ UNTil
CE TIFIED AND DATED
3.26 SUB DUCTS
A. Sub ducts on straight runs installed in the underground ductbanks shall have 32mm
outside diameter, their inner walls shall be smooth and their pulling length shall not
[ROT]
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
Ii I'~JioS.U ~,)~ ~~I
~
p
~
~
-e
0
~
exceed 450 meters. They shall comply with specification DIN 8074, DIN 8075 AND
=
c MOPTT specification MAT2301 (Issue #1).
B. Sub ducts on handholes and inside the buildings shall be corrugated, flexible and fire
resistance shall be 2 hours with 32mm outside diameter. Sub duct installation shall be in
z accordance with SCS-T-557.08.
s
t

..'"
u
Q
3.27 GEOTEXTILES
Geotextiles' basic uses are for drainage, reinforcement, filtration, separation, protection
and sealing. Geotextiles are used in various construction application such as dewatering,
erosion control, road stabilization, roads, roof waterproofing, etc. The fabric shall be non-
0
z ~ ~
- woven, made from polyester or propylene fibers, and shall have the following
specifications:
REVISIONS
PKI AREDBY:
Properties Values Standards
Thickness Not less than 2mm under 2
11::
DA
kN/m 2
CK 'DRV:
Unit.weiqht 200orams/m 2
Punchinq Strenqth Not less than 100 kq/cm 2
~APPROVED Highly resistant to UV radiation, weather action, temperature variation and
P
SMISSION ASSET
C DI1PARTMENT
acids/alkalis
I
~~
/0/8/// 3.28 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER/BACK-UP MATERIALS
/
Joint filler materials shall be extruded closed cell polyethylene foam rod or polyurethane
foam rod. Joint filler shall be of suitable sizes and shapes so that when compressed (25
O.lRATING DEPARTMENT to 50%) it shall fit in the joints as required. Sealant shall not be applied without filler
material and bond breaker strip. Preformed Joint Fillers shall comply with the
I
requirements of ASTM 01752. It shall have the following specifications:

Tear strength Greater than 1.0 N/cm 2
~~I
Water absorption and hiqh water vapor transmission Extremely low
Temperature ranee Wide
BY, ~~r Resistant to insect attack or pest damage and shall be High
DA o (0 I Mil unaffected by funql, moss, lichen, molds or bacteria
Resistance to chemicals, acids, alkalis and oils Hlqh
3.29 PROTECTION BOARDI COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLER BOARD

TH IS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR Protection board is used to protect underground waterproofing membrane. Joint filler
co STRUCfION OR
FO ORDERING board is used in concrete joints. It shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D1751. It
MA TERIALS UNTIL.
CE TIFIED AND DATED shall have the following specifications:

Highly resilient soft wood fibers Impregnated with minimum
20% bitumen
[ROll
STRUCTURAL/CIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO REV
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
I
I
I
I
Iiw 1'L,a...,.sll ~J.".....JI4.s~1
=
~
~
=
~
Densitv 325 kq/m'
=
v Thickness 15mm for waterproofing
membrane protection
as required for concrete
ioints
z Load required compressing the ASTM 0545
...'" test piece to 50% of nominal 5.2 MPa
;v thickness
...'" during 50% <3% ASTM 01751
Q Weight Loss
Compression
Recovery within 10 minutes >80% ASTM 0545
Water Absorption after 24 hours <10% ASTM 0545
0
z ~ N
- Extrusion at 50% Compression
Bendinq Strenqth
<1mm
3.0 MPa
ASTM 0545
REVISIONS
Densitv Air Dry Filler >394 kg/m' ASTM 0545
PREPARJ:D RYl Solid Content 100%
Weather Resistance -40C to 130C under
DATIE:
OIK'DB'r';
normal usaqe
Must not deform or break under normal handling
It shall be immune to dry and wet rot, fungus and most forms of insect attack or
APPROVED
similar forms of deterioration.
TIlANSMISSION ASSET
PUNNING DEPARTMENT
'"-. --YCz?"
/n/.t:;/";I
3.30 POLYETHYLENE SHEETS
I' .'
Polyethylene sheets shall conform to ASTM E154. They shall have the following
specifications:
OPERATING DEPARTMENT Properties Typical Values Standards

Color Transparent clear
Film thickness 150 microns
Impact Strength 1600 kg/m'
Yield Strength 125 kg/cm' Minimum ASTM 0638
Ultimate Elongation 850 - 900% ASTM 0638
~,
Coefficient of Friction 0.5 Minimum
Shear Modulus 1600 kg/cm'
BY, ./
I (I /Klf( Density. Heavy-duty low- 0.22 grams/cm' ASTM 01505
DAn:
density polyethylene
Temperature Resistance -30C to 90C Retain its flexibility over
80C temperature
1% Sealant Modulus 18.5 to 23 kN/m< ASTM 0638
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
Vicat Softening 99C ASTM 01525
TO BE USED FOR Tensile Strength at Break 1800 to 2200 N/cm< ASTM 0638
CONSTRUCTION OR
,"'Ok
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
Elmendorf Tear Strength 3.3/6.0grams/micrometer ASTM 01922
CERTIFIED AND DATED Dart Drop Impact 600/400 urams ASTM 01709
a. Punctures and tears in vapor barriers shall be patched. Edges shall be lapped not
less than 100mm and end joints shall be lapped not less than 150mm. Edges and
[ROT]
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
laps shall be sealed with a pressure sensitive tape not less than 40mm, compatible
with membrane.
b. The polyethylene sheet shall be UV stabilized to prolong its life, retain its physical
properties and remain chemically resistant to aggressive soil conditions attack by
soil organism (bacteria, etc.), plant life and other soil fauna (molds, algae, etc.),
resistance to corrosive effects of ground water sulfates and chloride.
3.31 ALUMINUM FLASHING
Aluminum sheet shall conform to ASTM 8209, temper H14, alloy 1050 and shall be used
to fabricate aluminum flashing to the required/approved profile.
Q
z
REVISIONS
3.32 CONCRETE EPOXY FLOOR DUST PROOFER AND HARDENER

PREtREDBV: ----I
:::t~BV'
A. The material shall be four-component system, consists of binder (epoxy resin), hardener
(magnesium silicoflouride), aggregate and pigment. These components shall be pre-
I~
weighed for site mixing strictly as per the recommemdations of the manufacturer. After
application, it shall produce the following features:
TftANsMlSSION ASSET
P~ING DEPARTMENT
1. It shall chemically react with free lime and calcium salts in hardened concrete to
~
make it more dense and durable surface.
2. It shall penetrate concrete surface and make it hard, free from dusting and high
resistant to corrosion and abrasion.
3. Chemically resistant - resists acids, alkalis, oils and salts

OPi RATING DEPARTMENT
4. Durable - good wear abrasion resistance
5. Hygienic - Impervious, self-leveling, seamless floor surface, which is easily cleaned
6. Nominal thickness shall be 3mm. Smooth and glossy finish and light reflective
surface
7. Floor hardener shall achieve compressive strength of 55 MPa and flexural strength
of 34 MPa at 7 days when tested to 8S 6319.
B. Surface preparation of old and new concrete floors:
1. General
THI
TO
DRAWING IS NOT
BE L'SED FOR
CO STRUCTION OR It is essential that the surface preparation of the concrete is done correctly;
FO ORDERING
MA [RIALS UNTIL
otherwise optimum performance will not be obtained.
CE TIFIED AND DATED
New concrete: It is important that the concrete has been laid for a minimum of 28
days before applying the coating. The moisture content of the concrete should be
below 4% by weight. The release of surface water is dependent on the thickness of
I [ROn
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----1t---+-----+---+---1
OB QRDER NO. APPENDIX-Vilib 68
the concrete, the season, the temperate and relative humidity of the environment
and the prevailing ventilation conditions. Due to the above, the moisture content of
the concrete should always be checked/measured prior to the coating application.
The moisture content at the concrete surface can be measured using an instrument
z called a Protimeter or shall be measured in accordance with BS 8203 Appendix A or
o
t by a Vaisala thermodygrometer type MHI 31.
iii
"i:l The main problem with concrete floors is the weak top surface layer known as
" laitance. This water-rich top layer forms during the drying out period and is
mechanically weak. In addition to this, the laitance has a chemical composition
different from the rest of the concrete. These properties obviously provide a poor
surface to apply coatings to. It should therefore be a precondition that all laitance be
,;
z removed prior to coating applications.
REVISIONS
2. Surface Preparation
PREfARED BY, _ _;
PATI:,
In order to ensure good adhesion and the long-term protection of any floor coating,
CHK'D BY:
it is essential that the correct type of surface preparation is carried out. The
following are the recognized method of preparation:
~ a. Removal of chemicals from floor surfaces: The removal of chemicals, oil and
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT grease must be completed before any other preparation of work commences,
such as acid etching, blasting, etc. Concrete that has become contaminated
c~.:.::;o""57~ by chemicals must be neutralized before coating. If the surface is acidic, it
/0/9/// must be neutralized with an alkaline cleaner and rinsed thoroughly with
clean/fresh water. If the contamination is alkaline, it can be cleaned with
detergent and steam. Oil and grease can be removed using a combination of
solvents, steam and/or detergents, depending on the severity of the
contamination.
b. Abrasive blast cleaning: Abrasive blast cleaning should always be the first
choice for heavy duty flooring systems, if conditions allow. The blast is
normally carried out using an enclosed system such as a Vacu-Blast or Auto-
Blast type machine. These systems are virtually dust free and work on the
CERT~
principle of propelling small particles of abrasive, Le., steel shoUgrit, against
BY'
~J
"1:/-.. 'r
the floor surface while at the same time vacuum recovering the dust and the
abrasive to a recovery hopper. In addition to cleaning the floor and removing
DA~[' /0 "{tI/ any laitance, blasting will leave the surface of the floor with a profile, which will
enable the coating to gain a physical as well as chemical bond to the
substrate. Blast cleaning is the recommended system for large areas.
c. Scarifying (sometimes known as scabbling), involves the use of rotting wheels

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
and brushes to scour the concrete surface. The scarifying equipment is
CONSTRUCTION OR pushed over the floor and the enclosed rotating wheels abrade the surface. It
FOR ORDERIJ"G
MATERIALS l!NTIL is not as efficient or as dust free as a Vacu-Blast machine, and can, in the
CERTI FIE D AND DATED
wrong hands, cause excessive damage to the substrate. It is most effective on
small areas or areas where abrasive blast cleaning cannot be carried out.
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1----1---+-----+----+--1
C494 A PTS11CM01 0 OF o
d. Power grinding: Similar to scarifying, this method can be used to open up

holes and voids and to remove loose materials from the surface of poured
concrete and precast slabs. It is slower than blasting but could be considered
for small external floor areas.
z
o
e. Wire brushing: Can be used to remove loose material from the surface and
t.. open up holes and voids in poured concrete. This can be either power or hand
u wire brushing; with the power wire brushing giving increased productivity.
l:l
" f. Impact tools: Poured concrete surfaces can be roughened using impact tools
such as Needle Guns, etc. This method is slow however, and should only be
considered for small areas. Granulating or hammering machines work quicker
g .. N _
but should only be used if flooring screeds are to be applied.
REVISIONS Impact tools are normally electrically or compressed air driven and work on
the principle of a sharpened tool vibrating against the surface. It is fairly easy
for an inexperienced operative to gouge the concrete surface and therefore
DA~' great care should be taken when using this method of preparation.
~1DB'r':
, g. Acid etching: This method of surface preparation is most suited for use on
I~ concrete floors. It is carried out to remove laitance, but will not remove old
~SMlSSION ASSET paint or oil and grease, and should only be used in areas where sufficient
rtfNNlNG DEPARTMENT
drainage exists to allow the water and acid solutions to be easily removed. To
c..::::::~~ carry out acid etching, the following procedures should be followed:
/&7/8//;
/ i. Before commencing acid etching, the concrete surface should be cleaned
for all loose concrete.
optRATINC DEPARTMENT
ii. Deposits of oil and grease should be removed using an alkaline cleaner
I or by steam cleaning.
iii. Thoroughly dampen the floor with water.

,
iv. Sprinkle uniformly over the floor an 8-10% solution of phosphoric acid in
~ water. The approximate spreading rate is 1.5 m2 to 1-liter solution.
A~;, v. The acid solution should remain on the surface for 2-4 minutes and then
BY,
DA
tu 1(( rinsed thoroughly with clean water. The rinsing can be done with a water
hose and sweeping brush.
I vi. It is important that the rinsing operation is carried out immediately to

I
prevent the formation of salts on the surface, which are difficult to
i
T~'SDRAWING IS NOT
remove.
TO BE USED FOR
C STRUCTION OR
FO
M n:RIALS
OROERING
UNTIL
vii. The concrete surface should be checked for acidity using pH paper and
CE TIFIED AND DATED should have a pH of 7 or greater.
,
viii. Depending on the concrete type, more than one operation may be
required to achieve a satisfactory surface profile.
[ROT]
I SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11----+------+----+--1
IJOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-Vlllb 70
I C494 A PTS11CM010 OF o
i
ix. Thorough rinsing with clean water should be carried out after each etches
application. The surface profile should be similar to fine sandpaper.
x. The concrete should be allowed to dry prior to applying the coating.
3.33 ROOF DRAINS
Roof drains shall be 200mm in diameter, galvanized cast iron body with combination
flashing clamp and gravel stop. The dome shall be made of bronze, brass or aluminum
with low profile. Roof drains shall have the following features:
oz
a. Under deck clamp & secondary flashing clamp
REVISIONS b. 100mm high stainless steel perforated extension
c. Sump receiver
PRE AREDBY, _ _ -I
d. Bronze or stainless steel mesh screen over dome
I
e. Vandal proof secured top
"1" f. Vertical expansion joint
CH~'D8Y:
.-
g. 50mm high external water dam

i
APPROVEO
h. Threaded outlet
E ~ASSET
G DEPARTMENT
=-:;;.--....~,..g7;,
V'o/8///
r . C.
i. 100mm speedy-set outlet
3.34 WATER TANK
If required, the water tank shall be as per TES-P-119.19 and the following shall be
considered:
a. The method of fixing the tank to the roof slab shall be specified to resist high wind
forces.
~--- b. Overflow pipe shall be connected to drain pipe of the tank. Overflow pipe shall be
brought from the roof slab to the splash block near the sidewalk.
BY: 3.35 JOINT SEALANTS

DAT:
fOI5.'({
I
A. Polysulphide
Low-modulus pitch polysulphide joint sealant shall be multi-component pitch extended

I
polysulphide based joint sealant, which cures to form a low-modulus durable and elastic
T~H DRAWING
TO BE
IS NOT
USED FOR
seal. The sealant shall have the following properties:
CO STRUCTION OR
FO ORDERING
M ERIALS IJNTIL 1. Low Modulus, high resilient and high performance
CE TlFIED AND DATED
2. Excellent flexibility and movement tolerance
i
3. Elastomeric
4. Non-sag, non-staining, non-bleeding
5. Prolonged life due to high age hardening resistance
[ROl]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----1I---t-----+---+---i
l;i
~
c SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY 1'L,.J4-S.ll ~J",.....J\ J.s~\
Q
g,
~
Q 6. Resistant to penetration of stones and hard debris

'"
=
~ 7. Chemical curing and self-leveling type
8. It shall posses high tensile strength.
I
9. Curing time shall be as minimum as possible.
I
I
10. It shall effectively seal against the infiltration of water, sand and dirt.
z 11. Resistant to spillage of most diluted acids, alkalis and chemical solutions. Also
.
Q
I-
iii
resistant to petroleum based fuels, synthetic oils and vegetable oils plus many
solvents.
"'"en
Q 12. Resistant to deterioration due to weathering, UV light, ozone and attack by
chemicals present
!

Hardness Shore A Range 15 to 50
.,;
z ~ N
- Elonaation Aoorox. 500% ASTM D412
REVISIONS Tensile Strenath 0.55 MPa ASTM 0314
Pot-life 2 hours at 25C
PREtAR.ED BYl
Cure time 24 hours at 25C
DAJ, Service temperature ranee -40C to 82C
ot+DBY: Movement accommodation 25%
factor
I
Specific qravitv Approximately 1.5
P
f~ SMISSION ASSET
ING DEPARTMENT
Consistency Gun-grade
<:;::t ..... .-=-.
Color Cement Gray
-...,... Resistance to ozone Non-crack
/0/8/// Viscosity Thixotropic paste
/ /
Solid content Greater than 99%

Sealant shall conform to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, T, P, G, Class 25
standards Federal Standard TT-S-0227 E Type II, Class A,
OP~RATINC DEPARTMENT BS 4254 & BS 5212, Type F
,
I
Joint Design: For optimum performance, joints shall be designed for not more than 50%
~
extension and 25% compression. No joint shall be less than 6mm wide. In joints up to
12mm wide, the depth shall be calculated using the following formula:
=:I!fJ1/! Depth in mm = Joint width in mm + 6mm, Sealant depth shall never exceed joint width.
BY:
DAT ,
v1f'l'
IV II
~r
(II
3
Minimum width of joint shall be four (4) times the anticipated movement.
(
All movement joints subject to trafficking shall be recessed 5mm below flush so that
during joint contraction, the sealant does not protrude above the surface.
Joint Backing: Joint filler material shall be extruded closed cell polyethylene foam rod or
l"~~
polyurethane foam rod. Joint filler shall be of suitable sizes and shapes so that when
TO BE USED FOR
CD. STRUCTION OR
compressed (25 to 50%) it shall fit in the joints as required.
FO ORDERING
MA [RiALS lJNTll
CE TIFIED AND DATED Priming: The correct priming must always be used. Sealant shall not be applied without
compressible filler board and bond breaker strip.
Preparation
[ROT]
i SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
108 ORDER NO.
C494 A
APPENDIX-Vlllb 72
0
,
PTS-11CM010 OF
gv SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ,.\.i.)iSll ~J.."..,.JI a.s~1
Q
~
Q
~
1. Clean, prepare and size joints in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
is Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter, which might impair adhesion
of sealant.
2. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
3. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealant to perform properly.
z
0
E Installation
..
u
'"
'"0 1. Perform WORK in accordance with ASTM C790 and ASTM C804.
2. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Joints shall be free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges and sags.
4. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges.
0
z ~ N
- B. Silicone Rubber Sealant
REVISIONS
Silicone rubber sealant shall be used to seal around tubs, sinks, urinals and for sealing
PREI RI:DBY, fixtures in toilet and battery room.
DAT.
CHK DBY;
3.36 CONCRETE BONDING AGENT
APPROVED
The bonding agent shall be solvent-free epoxy resin, two components, containing
T ~MISSION ASSET
PC ~ING DEPARTMENT pigments and fine fillers. It is used for structural bonding of new concrete to existing
concrete. The bonding agent shall be able to provide a bond of far greater strength than
~'.' .~ ...,c <?:::ZJ
the tensile strength of the concrete itself.
/o/~///
/ .
The bonding agent shall have the following properties:
a. It can be applied to dry or damp substrate.

OP1RATINC DEPARTMENT b. Special 'slow-set' version available allowing time to erect steel reinforcement and
formwork
-1 c.
d.
Solvent-free can be used in enclosed locations.
Workable at low temperatures
e. Unaffected by moisture
~
.......L,I/I
Properties Standards
. ~ Compressive strenath 60-70 MPa
BY: 'oJ rJl Shear strength 30 MPa
/6 l\.( u
DAT : Flexural strength 30-35 MPa
Bond strenoth to concrete 2.5-3 MPa
Bond strength to steel 18-20 MPa
Tensile strength 18-20 MPa
Densitv Aoorox. 1.4 ka/liter
TH ~ DR<\.WING 18 NOT
TO BE USED FOR Color Dove Grav
CO STRUCTION OR
FO ORDERING Pot life 5 to 7 hours
MA ERIAI$ I!NTIL
CE TlFlED AND DATED
Initial Hardness 48 hours
Full cure 7 days
Standards: ASTM C881 & BS 6319

Surface Preparation
[R01]
I, HAIL SAUDI ARABIA 84
Clean all surfaces and remove any dust, unsound material, plaster, oil, paint, grease,
corrosion deposits or algae. Roughen the surfaces, remove any laitance and expose
aggregate by light scabbling or grit blasting.
Oil and grease deposits should be removed by steam cleaning, detergent scrubbing or by
the use of a proprietary degreaser.
Application
After missing, apply directly to the prepared substrate by brush, roller or spray. On damp
surfaces, ensure that it is well brushed in. Pour new concrete within specified open time,
as long as material is still tacky.
e
z
REVISIONS 3.37 HANDRAILS
Handrails shall be as per Life Safety Code, NFPA 101. Handrails shall be constructed of
DA+ materials, which are smooth and free of mill scales, roll marks and pitting. Pipes
CH1PBY: complying with ASTM A120, Schedule 40, shall be used. Minimum diameter of pipe shall
be 50mm. Maximum spacing of posts shall be 1.8 meters. Angles, offsets, and other
~
i APPROVED changes in alignment of railings shall be made with accurately mitered joints or welded
MISSION ASSET railing fittings.
P ING DEPARTMENT
l-- . "'" -
1'- -- ~ Welding shall be done with fillets dressed to uniform radius; excess metal removed, and
/0/8/// welds ground smooth and flush. Welded joints shall be of flush type. Members shall be
/
neatly coped and continuously welded at junctions of posts and rails. Flattening of the rail
or post ends at junctions of posts and rails shall not be permitted.
I
OP~RATINC O[PARTMENT Steel handrails shall be galvanized after fabrication. Prior to galvanizing, fabrication
i section shall have internal openings so that there are no closed or blind sections of pipe.
Handrails shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386, Class A or B, with
2
minimum zinc coating thickness of 610g/m followed by approved method of surface
preparation under ASTM D2092 for painting. Handrails shall be painted with zinc yellow
epoxy enamel paint.
BY:
When assembled, posts shall be vertical and longitudinal members shall be parallel with
DAT
,
I J) 1(\111 each or other supporting members. The top rails shall run continuous over the posts, and
the posts shall be continuous through lower rail or rails.
Handrail Pipes shall be bonded to the substation grounding.

I
THi DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE
CO STRUCTION
foUR
OR
lJS~D
3.38 RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM
FO ORDERING
MA [RIALS UNTIL
CE: TIFlED AND D.\TED Access flooring shall be portable assembly of modular floor panels on an elevated support
i system (under structure) forming a complete under floor cavity to accommodate electrical
cables/communication cables. Panels shall be gravity held with bolted stringers under
structure system. Depth of raised floor system shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11---+-----+---+--1
I
i
I
to provide sufficient space for routing cables to the associated equipment, but not be less
than 900mm.
Access flooring shall comply with all the test requirements in accordance with "Ceiling and
Interior System Construction Association", Recommended Test Procedures for Access
Floors", "CISCAiAF".
Access floor system shall consist of the Floor Panels, Floor covering, Understructure.
Floor Panels shall have the following properties:
Panel thickness 33mm

Standard Module 600 x 600mm
oz Concentrated load 3000 - 5000N
REVISIONS Distributed load Maximum 30,000 N/m2
Electrical conductivity Less than 1Of Ohms
PRE AREDBY: ----I Thermal conductivity Approximately 1.25 W/m' _OK
OAT , Fire rating Minimum 3 hours
CH'DRY, Floor Panels: Including those with cutouts capable of supporting concentrated
design loads of 1000 Ibs. magnitude with a top surface deflection under load and as
permanent set not to exceed 2mm and 0.25mm respectively
~
1 ~~MISSION ASSET
The panel shall be all steel panel system with steel minimum thickness 1mm,
PL ~ING DEPARTMENT welded steel construction and filled with a non-combustible synthetic anhydrite.
C:~,~~ Lightweight for ease in handline. Aooroximate weiaht shall not exceed 18 ka.
,/0/,8///
Floor covering shall have the following properties:
Nominal minimum thickness I 3.2mm

OP~TING DEPARTMENT Nominal size I 610mm x 610mm
Floor covering shall have cleanliness, ease of maintenance, long and high wear,
Jf-;- - - - dust free environment and rigid.
Conductive flooring for control of static electricity
Washable surface
RY,
OAT,
c(jjj,
fA fls.ilf
Edge Condition or Trim: Integral trim eliminates any potential separation of edge
trim with the panel. Edge trim is mechanically attached to as perimeter of each
I panel. Edging will be interlocked with top sheet and captured by up turned edge of
bottom steel sheet. Edge trim shall protect the panel and covering against
mechanical damage and humidity.
Floor covering shall be conductive grade and factory applied high-pressure

TH S ORAWING IS "OT
TO BE USED FOR
laminate (HPL) with the following specifications. The laminate should be bonded
CO STRllCTION OR using professional fabricating technique and procedure. Adhesive shall also be
1'0 ORDERING
MA TERIALS UNTIL conductive.
CE TIFIED AND DATlm
Conductive laminate flooring shall be properly grounded by utilizing a variety of

terminals and grounded cords properly attached to the laminate and a suitable
earth around.
[ROl]
~ S'~,JfSll ~J."....JI ~.;JJI
~
c SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
0
i:-c
0
~
6 Understructure: The understructure shall be bolted stringer system. It consists of
pedestal assembly and stringer system.
Pedestal Assembly: - Includes base, column with Galvanized and yellow

z provision for height adjustment and head cap made passivated steel
E
iii
either of steel or aluminum or aluminum or a combination construction
u of both.
'"
"'
Q Pedestal Assembly shall provide vibration proof mechanism for making and holding
fine adjustments in height for leveling purposes over a range of not less than 2 in.
include means of locking leveling mechanism at a selected height, which requires
deliberate action to chance heiqht settinc and prevents vibratory displacement.
<i
z ~ M
- Fixinq of pedestal to sub floor
Axial load without as permanent deformation as per 3630 kg
Dowellinq
REVISIONS
pedestal without panels or other supports
PRE1'''REDBYt
Overturning moment without as permanent deformation 113 Nm
as per pedestal without panels or other supports
"4'
CHKDBY,
!
Pedestal head to accept bolted stringer
Pedestal adiustino rod of minimum 22mm solid steel threaded stud
,
I
~ Pedestal Head
~M1SSION ASSET Die formed galvanized pedestal head and projection welded stud with adjustment
P G DEPARTMENT
nut. Head and installed strinuers shall provide full as perimeter edoe support.
. .- -- = Strinqers to be attached with 1/4" - 20 flat head screws
/0/';///
/ /
Pedestal head shall be tapped for engagement of stringer screws.
Gantry lock collar to provide anti-vibration displacement
Vibration proof levelinc nut shall be 22mm.
Pedestal head shall have gasket for fixing of panels and sound insulation and
OP,RATING DEPARTMENT
electrical conductivity.
Perimeter pedestals shall provide support for panels around columns at walls, and
provide details for complete information.
Gasket
Conductive synthetic
BY:
I~
\L ,
idf, kftl
Electrical resistance
Gasket shall serve as a hiqh frequency safety
Approximately 10'
DAT ,
Pedestal Base
z
Base to be at least 400mm and hot-dip galvanized steel.
,
Pedestal tube shall be 25mm diameter, qalvanized tubinq.
i
m~.~._ is xor
TO BE USED FOR Strinaers
CO STRUCTION
FO
OR
ORDERING
Stringers shall be used with floor height of greater than 500mm.
M [RIALS UNTIL
eE TIFIED AND DATED
Heavy-duty roll formed, steel stringer shall withstand 450 Ibs. mid span load.
,
I Hot-dip qalvanized stringer construction to prevent corrosion
!
Stringer shall have factory applied conductive gasket to provide quiet sound
!
I absorbina seal.
!
[R01]
OB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-V1l1b 76
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
I
~ ~~~J.;J..,......JI ~~\
~
=
~
~
<
= Accessories
"=
~
Cutouts Fabricate cutouts in floor panels to accommodate cable
penetrations and source outlets, comply with requirements indicated
for size, shape, number and locations. Provide reinforcement or
additional support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply
z; with standard as performance requirements.
.
0
;::
;:
Ramps Manufacturer's standard ramp construction of width and slope
..
u
~
0
indicated, but not steeper than 1 in 12, with non-slip raised disc
rubber or vinyl floor covering and of same materials, as
performance and construction reauirements as the access flooring.
Steps Provide steps of size and arrangement indicated with floor covering
to match access flooring. Apply non-slip aluminum nosing to treads
0
z ~ N
- Railings
unless otherwise noted.
Manufacturer's standard stain finish extruded aluminum post and
REVISIONS
rail system at ramps and open sided as perimeter of access flooring
v
where indicated, including handrail, intermediate rails, posts,
PHt.. , brackets, end caps, wall returns, wall and floor flanges, plates and
OAT:
anchorages where required. Provide railing that complies with
CHK~BY; structural as performance reauirements for railinq.
I
Panel Lifting Manufacturer's standard portable lifting device at least two (2) single
APPROVED Device and double suction cup type.
;. ~~ISSION ASSET
LNNING DEPARTMENT
Vertical When under floor cavity is not enclosed by abutting walls, columns,
Closures beams or downward slabs, provide manufacturer's standard plates
~ ---.~
'~ (Fascia) with factory-applied finish.
/~/$/// Fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets in sizes indicated or where size of
/ /
cutouts exceeds maximum grommet size available, trip edge of cutouts with
manufacturer's standard plastic moldil"\9 having tapered top flange. Furnish
I
removable covers for grommets.
O~TING DEPARTMENT Provide foam rubber pads for sealing annular space formed in cutouts by cables and
trim edge of cutout with molding having flange and edge for capturing and supporting
I
pads.
Loads
Ultimate Ultimate concentrated load shall be not less than the value
~r
Concentrated Load obtained from multiplying the factor indicated below by the
without Failure specified concentrated design load on floor panels. Failure is
BY:
IV l1li' defined as the point at which access- flooring system will not
DAT :
take any additional load.
Factor: 3.0
Design Concentrated Load: 5000 N
Ultimate Uniform Ultimate Uniform Loads without Failure: Ultimate uniform
Loads without Failure load shall be not less than the value obtained from
TH DRAWING IS NOT
TO R": USED FOR multiplying the factor indicated below by the specified
co STRUCfION OR
FO ORDERING uniform design load on floor panels. Failure is defined as
MA ERIALS UNTIL
I
CJ.o: TIIoU:D AND DATED the point at which access-flooring system will not take any
I additional load.
! Factor: 3.0
2
Design Uniform Load: 25,000 N/m
Rollina loads RollinQ loads as noted below applied to panels throuoh
[R01]
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGEND REV
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
Ii ~\,oJfoS.ll ~JJA-l\ ~yl:J\
~
::=-c '
=
i<
CISCA/AF wheel with combination of local and overall
=
v deformation not to exceed 1mm measured across panels
610mm span and permanent set not to exceed 1mm after
exposure to rolling load as per CISCAIAF path A or B
whichever path produces the greatest top surface
z deformation.
S!
Ii:
"i,;... 10 Passes of Wheel Load for path A: 1,000 Ibs
10,000 Passes of Wheel Load for path B: 1,000 Ibs
"
Impact Load: A load shall be dropped 915mm into an inch square indenter, there
shall be no svstern failure -150 Ibs.
0z ~ M
- Other requirements
Electrical Resistance of Systems: Provide access-flooring system with the following
REVISIONS
electrical resistance characteristics: Less than 1 ohm measured across surface of
putARED BY;
bare panel to under structure by test method as specified in NFPA 99.
DAf'
CH DRY:
Installation
Install access floor system and accessories under supervision of the access flooring
manufacturer's authorized representative to ensure rigid, firm installation free of
~APP'OV'D vibration, rocklnq, rattle, squeaks and other unacceptable performance.
~ASSn
P INC DIPARTMEIVT Set pedestals in adhesives to provide full bearing of the pedestal base on the sub-
b' ~ floor.
~
Layout floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at the floor perimeter
/,0/8///
/ /
to a minimum. Scribe panel assemblies at perimeter to provide a close fit with no
voids qreater than 3.2mm where panels abut vertical surfaces.
Secure grid members to pedestal heads in 'accordance with access floor
I manufacturer's instructions.
OP*RATlNG DEPARTMENT
I
Thoroughly clean up dust, dirt and construction debris caused by floor installations
including vacuuming the sub-floor area as installation of floor panels proceeds.
I Extend cleaninc under installed panel as far as possible.
Cutting and trimming of other dirt or debris producing operations will not be permitted
in the rooms where the floor is beinq installed.
CERTIFIED Level installed access floor to within 1.5mm of true level over the entire area and
~~
within 2.5mm at any 3m distances.
BY,
, 10 'fl., 1(/ Submittals: Submit the following:
DAT
a. Product data for each type of access flooring

.,
I b. Shop drawings indicating complete layout of access flooring based on the field
verified dimensions, including details with descriptive notes indicating materials,
l~""
TO
FO
BE USED FOR
co STRunlON
M TERlALS
OR
ORDERING
UNTIL
CE TIFIEDANDDATED
finishes, fasteners, typical and special edge conditions, accessories, under structure
and other data to permit a full evaluation of the entire access flooring system.
c. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer charts consisting
of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures and patterns
available for each type of floor covering and exposed finish indicated.
[ROl]
IJOB ORDER NO. APPENDlX-Vlllb 78
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
I
I
d. Samples for verification purposes in full size units of each type of floor covering and
exposed finish indicated.
Quality Assurance
z
o
a. Engage an experience installer that is approved by the access-flooring
e manufacturer for installation of the types of access flooring required for this
e
l:l
PROJECT.
Q
b. Provide access flooring complying with NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring.
c. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain access flooring from a single manufacturer.

oz
d. Coordinate location of electrical WORK in under floor cavity to prevent interference
REVISIONS with access flooring pedestals.
PREPARED BY: ----I e. Access floor system shall be guaranteed by a quality management system
DATI: according to ISO 9001.
CHK'D BY:
f. Environmental Condition: Do not proceed with installation of access flooring until

~
installation area is enclosed and has an ambient temperature of between 55F and
11lANSMISSION ASSET 90F and a relative humidity of not more than 70%.
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
c:::::=.-Y<?' g. Deliver access-flooring components in original unopened packages, clearly labeled

/v/8h'1 with manufacturer's name and item description.
/ /
h. Handle and store packages containing access flooririg in a manner that avoids
overloading the bUilding.
OP[RATING DEPARTMENT
i. Do not proceed with installation of access flooring until after substantial completion
of other performable construction within affected spaces.
3.39 FIRE-STOP AND SMOKE-STOP PRODUCTS
A. General
1. This section describes the specifications of fire-stops and smoke-stops for all fire-
rated walls and floor assemblies accommodating penetrating items such as cables,
conduits, pipes, ducts, cable trays, etc., but not limited to the following:
a. Through-Penetrations: Fire-stopping shall be installed in all open penetrations

TH IS DRAWING IS NOT and in the annular space in all penetrations in any bearing or non-bearing fire
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
rated barrier.
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
lJNTlL
b. Construction Joints/Gaps: Fire-stopping shall be provided
CERTIFIED AND DATED c. Between the joints of floor slabs and exterior walls
d. Between the tops of walls and the underside of floors
e. In control joints of masonry walls and floors
f. In expansion joints
[ROT]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----1f---+-----+---+---1
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-V1l1b 79
2. Submit manufacturer's product literature for each type of fire-stop and smoke-stop
material to be installed. Literature shall indicate product characteristics, typical uses,
as performance and limitation criteria, and test data.
3. Fire stopping system (material and design): Shall conform to both Flame (F) and
Temperature (T) ratings as required by agencies ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests
in a configuration that is representative of field conditions.
The F rating must be minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance
rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating when required by code authority
shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on penetrating item(s). The
fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01
inch of water column.
REVISIONS For joints, must be tested to UL 2079 with movement capabilities equal to those of
the anticipated conditions.
PRE AREDBY: ----I
.ATt, 4. Fire stopping materials and systems must be capable of closing or filling through
rn1'DBY, openings created by 1) burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or
! pipe insulation materials, or 2) deflection of sheet metal due to thermal expansion
APPK O
(electrical & mechanical duct work).
JF ---
" '.
MISSION ASSET
P G DEPARTMENT
5. Fire-stopping materials shall be asbestos and lead free and shall not incorporate or
require the use of hazardous solvents.
6. Fire-stopping sealant must be flexible, allowing for normal pipe movement.

!
I, 7. Fire stopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidence by cracking or
OP,KATING DEPARTMENT
pulling back from contact surfaces.
I
8. Fire-stopping materials shall be moisture resistant, and may not dissolve in water
after curing.
9. A contractor trained or approved by the fire-stop and smoke-stop manufacturer shall

perform installation of fire-stopping systems.
r\/!f
BY, \]}) / 10. All the fire-stop and smoke-stop products and systems shall be designed and
.Al, /0 I{trw installed so that the basic sealing system will allow the full restoration of the thermal
and fire resistance properties of the barrier being penetrated with minimal repair if
penetrants are SUbsequently removed.
Materials Specifications
TH~ DRAWING IS NOT Intumescent The fire-stopping sealant shall be one-part, two stage intumescent
TO BE USED FOR
C<J~STRUCTION OR Fire-stop and latex compound. The sealant when exposed to high heat or flame
FO~ ORDERING
M TERlALS UNTIL Smoke-stop shall be capable of expanding a minimum of eight (8) times. Range
CE TIFfED AND DATED
Sealant and of continuing expansion shall be from 230 DF to >1000DF. The
Caulks sealant shall be thixotropic and shall be capable of caulking or
toweling on to vertical surfaces or overhead. The sealant shall be
UL Classified and/or FM Systems approved and tested to the
[ROll
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL t----..,I---+-----+---+---1
tiw S'4..JfSll ~J~I ~~\
c SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
c
~
~
c
~
requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
a Latex Fire- The fire-stopping sealant shall be one-part, latex-based compound.
stop Sealant The sealant shall dry to form a flexible non-shrinking penetration
seal and shall be capable of allowing pipe movement and shall
contain no solvents, water-soluble fillers, or inorganic fibers. The
z sealant shall be thixotropic and shall be capable of caulking or
sE- toweling on to vertical surfaces or overhead. The sealant shall be
o.
il: UL Classified and/or FM Systems approved and tested to the
u
~
'"
Q requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
Elastomeric The fire-stopping sealant shall be one-part, neutral curing silicone
I
Water-Based sealant. The sealant shall be completely water-resistant and shall
Sealant contain no solvents or inorganic fibers of any kind. The through-
penetration fire-stop and smoke-stop sealant shall allow movement
Q
z ~ ~
- of +25% and shall be UL Classified and/or FM Systems Approved
REVISIONS
and tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479). The fire-
stop joint sealant shall allow movement up to 50% and shall be UL
r.afAREDBY:
Classified and tested to the requirements of UL 2079.
Silicone Fire- The fire-stopping putty shall be a one-part, two-stage intumescent,
CIt
Dl 'DBV:
stop Sealant non-hardening compound. The putty, when exposed to high heat or
I
and Caulks flame shall be capable of expanding a minimum of five (5) times.
! ~ Range of continuing expansion shall be from 230F to 1OOOF. The
~SMISSIONASSET putty shall be soft and pliable with aggressive adhesion and shall
~1NG DEPARTMENT
-
p.
not contain any water-soluble intumescent ingredients. The putty
c:.--"
7' '-7' shall be UL Classified and/or FM Systems approved and tested to
,/o//?/// the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
-/ /
Fire-stop The fire-stopping putty shall be one-part, two stage intumescent,
Putty & Pads non-hardening compound. The putty when exposed to high heat or
I
I
flame shall be capable of expanding a minimum of 5 times. Range
0tRATING DEPARTMENT of continuing expansion shall be from 230F to > 1000F. The putty
shall be soft and pliable with aggressive adhesion and shall not
I
contain any water-soluble intumescent ingredients. The putty shall
~ I
be UL Classified and/or FM Systems approved and tested to the
requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
Fire-stop The fire-stop system shall be factory assembled fire-stop collar
,~ Collars utilizing a molded two stage, flexible intumescent insert. The
intumescent insert shall provide a minimum 15 times free
BV,
\If', f expansion and shall contain no water-soluble expansion
DA , ,
ft' 'Iff ingredients. The specified material shall be approved for a wide
range of applications including PVC, CPVC, ABS, ABC Foam Core,
and FRPP pipes when used by itself or in combination with other
products from the same manufacturer. The collar shall be UL
Classified and or FM approved and tested to the requirements of
T IS DRAWING IS NOT
T BE lJSi:D FOR
ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
C NSTRUCTION
Fl R
OR
ORDERING
Wrap Strips The wrap strip material shall be a highly flexible, two-stage
M TERlALS UNTIL intumescent material. The wrap strip shall provide a minimum of 15
C RTI.'IED AND DATED
times free expansion and shall contain no water-soluble expansion
ingredients. The specified material shall be approved for a wide
range of applications including combustible and non-combustible
penetrants when used by itself or in combination with other
[R01]
C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF 0
products from the same manufacturer. The wrap strip shall be UL

Classified and or FM approved and tested to the requirements of
ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
Two Parts The fire-stopping product shall be a two-part, silicone, room
Silicone Fire- temperature curing foam. The foam shall be completely water-
stop Foam resistant and shall contain neither solvents nor inorganic fibers of
any kind. The through-penetrations fire-stop shall be UL Classified
and/or FM Systems approved & tested to the requirements of
ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
Fire-stop The fire-stopping material shall be a lightweight; fast drying
Mortar Portland cement based material. The density of the wet mortar shall
be ::;45 Ib/cu. ft. The specified mortar shall be approved for a wide
range of applications including combustible and non-combustible
penetrants when used by itself or in combination with other
REVISIONS
products from the same manufacturer. The fire-stop mortar shall be
UL Classified and or FM approved and tested to the requirements
PREfAREDBY: ----I
of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
DAr/:'
Fire-stop The fire-stopping system shall utilize an intumescent pillow heat-
CH~'DBY: Pillows . sealed in a fire-retardant poly bag. The fire-stop pillow shall consist
of a monolithic (one-piece) core that is encapsulated on all sides by
APPROVED a flexible intumescent coating and shall not contain any loose
RANSMISSION ASS'r fiberfill. The pillow shall be UL Classified and or FM approved and
P ~ING DI:PARTMENT
tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
Elastomeric The fire protective joint coating shall be water-based, non-
Spray halogenated elastomeric coating and shall contain no solvents,
inorganic fibers, nor asbestos. The coating shall dry to form a
flexible, moisture resistant film and shall adhere to all common
I construction surfaces. The coating shall be thixotropic and shall be
O*RATING DEPARTMENT capable of being applied by brush or trowel application or by airless
I spray. The approved coating shall be UL Classified and or FM
i
approved and tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
Cable The fire protective cable coating shall be a water-based
I
Coating intumescent coating capable of expanding up to five times its dry
W!Ill~
applied thickness. The coating shall dry to from a flexible, water
I
and weather-resistant film and shall contain no solvents, asbestos,
, L1'I,
or inorganic fibers. The coating shall be thixotropic and shall be
BY< -\ ~/ capable of being applied by brush application or by airless spray.
DA E, ; ~ '6./11 The coating shall be FM systems approved and tested.
, I
Accessories Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard or other types as

per manufacturer's recommendation.
T~1S
T BE
DRAWING IS NOT
lISF.D FOR 3.40 COMMUNICATION CABLE TRAYS
C' NSTRUCfION OR
F R ORDERING
M TERlALS UNTil, CONTRACTOR shall install dedicated cable trays (aluminum) to route optical fiber cables
C ,RTI"DANDDATED
from cable pull box up to fiber optic terminal equipment inside the communication room.
The communication cable trays shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19.
[ROn
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----11----+-----+--4--1
I
I
~ 1'\.,IJfSl.l ~J,JLwJ\ ~~\
w
c
~
~

c
~
3.41 ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAYS
=
u
The aluminum cable trays galvanized steel supports and necessary accessories for
routing all the power and control cables inside the substation shall be per 24-TMSS-01.
z The electrical cable trays shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19.

9
..t
u
'"
"' 3.42 CERAMIC TILES
"
I
A. Wall and Floor Tiles for Toilets
I
Floor tiles shall be unglazed, 150mm x 150mm x 9mm thick, color off-white.
.,; ~ N ~
z
REVISIONS Wall tiles shall be glazed, 150mm x 150mm x 7mm thick, color off-white.
"Et
RED BY' B. Wall and Floor Tiles for Battery room
"1
CHK BY:
Floor tiles shall be unglazed, 150mm x 150mm x 9mm thick, color dove gray.
I
Wall tiles shall be glazed, 150mm x 150mm x 7mm thick, color ivory.
I APPROVED
P
*SM1'S'ON ASSET
INC DEPA.RTMENT C. The tiles shall comply with SSA 1031, BS 6431 & ANSI with the following specifications:
, .---.
.;>< "7 Properties Tvpical Values
"o/t!1/;!/
, .. Walls Floors
Flatness Deviation O.50% 0.50%
I
I
Water absorption 14%-16% 3%-6%
OPE~TING
Coefficient of linear thermal Less than 9 x 10-0 / K Less than 9 x 10-0 / K
DEPARTMENT expansion
Hardness - Mohs scale Less than 3 5 - 8
Modulus of Rupture Greater than 20 MPa Greater than 30 MPa
Acid/Alkali resistance Resistant Resistant
Crazinq Resistance Resistant Resistant
Size Deviation +0.50% 0.50%
~
C1J,~
Thickness Deviation 50% 50%
Abrasion resistance Not required Class 2-5
BY:
If) E. ((
DATI ,
I Internal/external angle beads, elephant feet, internal/external corners, capping, and other
tile accessories/fittings shall be provided for complete tile installation.
D. Installation
I
~~~w~.~
TO BE
CO STRlJ(.'TIQN
USED FOR
OR
Ceramic tile installation shall be per TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
FO ORDERING
MA ERIALS UNTIL
CE TIFIED AND DATED 3.43 DOOR/FINISH SCHEDULE AND MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
A. Door Schedule
[ROT]
l0B ORDER NO.
C494 A
APPENDIX-Vlllb 83
0
PTS-11CM010 OF
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Door schedule and details shall be in accordance with Standard Drawing TA-800023.
B. Finish Schedule
Floor, wall, ceiling and surface finishes of buildings, firewalls, cable tunnels, basements,
etc, and miscellaneous details shall be in accordance with Standard Drawing TA-800024.
**** END OF SECTION III ****
ez
REVISIONS
PRE "'DBY, _ _ -I
::tB"
I
T~~MISSION ASSET
PL~ING DEPARTMENT
DP~T1NG DEPABTMENT
E
I~~
"(1 f{ f
BY:
DAT , I 0 fIi Itt
l
THI DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CO STRUCTION OR
FO ORDERING
MA [RIALS UNTIL
CE TIFIED AND DATED
[RO"!]
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL t----+--+------+---+--I I
I .
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL

Q
'"
..... N ...
PROVISIONS
REVISIONS
DA 1'1:: 1"'1002'"
FOR
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND

OnBATlNGDEPAB'IMI:NT
MATERIAL TESTING FOR 380kV
SUBSTATIONS
-
DAn:, ----I
PTS-08EM313
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR. ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL (ATTACHMENT TO SERVICE ORDER NO.... ./....)
CERTIJi'IED ANDDATED
TEO/ROT - 10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE Ne RE~
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 1
T238 A PTS08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
-,-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~---_. __ .-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION - PARAGRAPH TITLE fAQ5

SCOPE OF WORK 5
I " TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
2.01
2.02
Mobilization and Demobilization
Schedule and Order of Work
6
6
6
2.03 ExplorationlDrilling and Sampling Methods 6
A. Overburden Drilling 6
REVISIONS 1) Small Diameter Auger Drilling
2) Large Diameter Auger Drilling
PREPAllEDBY; -"'Q--1 3) Rotary Drilling
B. Soil Sampling and Testing 7

1) Soil Classification Sampling
2) Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
TRANSMlSSJONASSn
PlA.NNJNG DEPARTMlN'r
3) "Undisturbed" Samples
J?bI C. Sampling of Cemented Soil, Stiff Clay and Soft Rock

1) Drive Samples
9
2) Double Tube Barrel Samples
OPUIATlNG DUAllTMINT D. Rock Drilling and Coring 10

1) Overburden Drilling and Stabilization
2) Rock Drilling
3) Core Drilling
E. Sample Containers 13
1) Soil Classification and SPT Samples
'. -',."..
BY, M:SM
3) Rock Cores
DAn, ----t F. Care and Delivery of Samples 17

G. Freighting 17
H. Supplementary Work 17
2.04 Exploration/Open Excavation and Sampling Methods 18
THIS DRAWrNG IS NOT

A. Test Pits and Sampling 18
TO BE
CONSTRUCTION
USED
OR
FOR B. Test Trenches and Sampling 20
Fo"
MATERIAlS
ORDERING
UNTIL
C. Testing 20
CERTIFIED AND DATED
2.05 Exploration/Cone Penetration Test Methods 20
TEQlROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NC REII
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Con't.)
SECTION - PARAGRAPH T I TL E PAGE
I 2.06 Exploration/Geophysical Methods
A. Refraction Seismic Test

1) Equipment
2) Procedures
20
21
3) Records
4) Analyses and Reports
REVISIONS
B. Cross-Hole Seismic Testing 22
-, 1) Objective and Principle
2) Equipment
..........
-.
3) Procedures
4) Records
5) Analyses and Reports
TlL\NSMlSSION A8S1.T
PLANNING DEl'ARTMINT C. Electrical Resistivity 23
J(JJf 2.07 Standards for In-Situ Field Testing and Instrumentation 23
A. Dry Unit Weight and Moisture Content 23

B. Moisture Content Direct 24
OPIJlAIlNGDEPAllt'MENT C. Plate Bearing Tests 24
D. Full Scale Spread Footing Load Tests 24
E. Pile Load Tests 24
1) Compression Load Test
2) Tension Load Test
3) Lateral Load Test
4) Inclined Tension Load Test
."" ., .... F. Ground Water Observations and Permeability Tests 25

n, M1>M 1) Piezometer Installation and Observation
DA.TE: -------I 2) Permeability Testing
G. Electrical Resistivity 29
H. Thermal Resistivity 29
I. Field Vane Sl:lear Test 29
J. Pressure Meter Test 29
THIS ORAWlNG [S NOT K. Percolation 29
To BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
L. Other Consideration 29
FOR ORDERlNG
MATERIALS UNTIL
Cri:RTlnED AND DATED 2.08 Field Records 30
2.09 Laboratory Testing 31
TEO/ROT - 10125108
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENC REV
T238 A PTS-OBEM313 OF o
SAUDI ARABIA
49
J.. . _
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY l't.......-..su ~J.."....JI4.sjJJl
'"
Eo
$
~'"
'" TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Con't.)
SECTION - PARAGRAPH TI TLE PAGE

:z
~ 2.10 Standards for Laboratory Testing 31
;u
~ A. Visual Classification 31
B. Classification Testing 32
C. Index Properties Testing 32
D. Structural Properties Testing 33
E. Compaction Testing 34
z0 ~ ... - F. Chemical Analyses 35
REVISIONS
G. Other Testing 35
PJLUAllED BY:
2.11 Laboratory Test Records 35
DATE: lJ.t1-I1MI1
CHK'DB'fr 'K'=T"
~ III GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF FINAL LOGS 36
AUIl!!m 3.01 General 36
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PI...ANNlNGDEPARTMENT 3.02 Density of Soils 40
3.03 Consistency of Soils 40
<-RA!1, 3.04 Cemented Overburden Materials 41
t-" 3.05 Rock 41
3.06 Field Notes and Records 42
3.07 Final Logs 42
OPERATlNGDEPARTMEHr
IV GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 45

4.01 General 45
4.02 Scope 45
4.03 Format 45
~j
'~' "<"'"
- A.
B.
Executive Summary
Scope of Work
45
46
BY:
M:SM C. Project Description 46
DAn:
D. Site Condition 46
E. Field Investigation 46
F. Laboratory Tests 46
G. Subsurface Conditions 47
H. Engineering Analysis 47
I. Recommendations 47
THIS DRAWING IS NOT J. Certification 48
TO BE
CONSTRUCTION
USED
OR
FOR
K. Illustrations 48
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CER.TIFIED AND DATED
TEQIROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT Ne INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE Ne RE~
T238 A PTS-OBEM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
SECTION I - SCOPE OF WORK
1.01 The CONTRACTOR (Geotechnical Consultant) shall perform all WORK in accordance
with the latest ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) Standards, except
where indicated otherwise in Section II, Technical Provisions; or, by such other
standards specifically authorized in the SERVICE ORDER. For tests where no
I 1.02
accepted or tentative ASTM Standard exists, test procedures will be subject to
approval by the COMPANY.
The CONTRACTOR shall perform all investigations, field and laboratory tests as
required in, and prepare all reports, charts and graphs as instructed in each SERViCE
ORDER issued by the COMPANY and accepted by the CONTRACTOR. The
CONTRACTOR shall not commence any WORK prior to the execution of such
SERVICE ORDER.
REVISIONS
1.03 The CONTRACTOR shall review the proposed Scope of Work for a geotechnical
-'1:1'<>----1
PIlD'ARED BY:
investigation of a given PROJECT to determine if it is adequate for the level of
DATE: II--Iwot.
professional responsibility associated with presentation of conclusions and
recommendations as outlined in Section IV - Guidelines for Geotechnical Report, of
this Specification. -
The CONTRACTOR, by acceptance of a SERVICE ORDER discussed in Item No. 1.03

above, shall be obligated to provide the COMPANY with Geotechnical Report
consistent with the professional standards of skill, care and diligence associated with
high quality, international practice of geotechnical engineering.
1.05 Intermittent services are generally anticipated on all material testing projects. The
OPl:IU.TJlfG DiJ".ut1'MENT COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE will give at least one day notice each time the
CONTRACTOR is required to visit the site for material testing. Immediately upon the
availability of test results, the CONTRACTOR shall submit three (3) copies to the .
COMPANY Transmission Asset Development Department/BUlk Asset Planning
Division.
~j
......... - ..* END OF SECTION I *..
BY, MSM
DAn, ----I
THIS BRAWING IS NOT

To BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR
J'OR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CEkTJFIEDAND DATED
TEO/ROT - 10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICAnONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENC REV
JOB ORDiR NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 5
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
SECTION II - TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
2.01 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION
A. Mobilization for geotechnical investigations and field load tests shall consist of the
delivery at the WORK SITE of all plant, equipment, materials and supplies to be
IQ
furnished by the CONTRACTOR; the complete assembly in satisfactory working
order of all such plant equipment on the job; and the satisfactory storage at the
WORK SITE of all such materials and supplies.
B. Demobilization for the above shall consist of the removal from the site of all plant,
equipment, and refuse after completion of the WORK.
C. No mobilization and demobilization shall be applied to material testing jobs. Site

REVISIONS
visits shall be paid on mileage unit rates, which shall include all direct and indirect
PBEPAREVBY: _~-'-I
_
vehicle and personnel charges.
DATE: n .. :z-l_
2.02 SCHEDULE AND ORDER OF WORK
CHK'PBor, ''''..,.-
,
The schedule and order of WORK for geotechnical exploration and for field load tests
will be shown on the documents for each PROJECT COMPANY, whenever and in
TIlANSMlSSION ASSET
whatever manner is deemed best for accomplishing the WORK.
p~
The schedule and order of material testing WORK will depend on the size and nature of
'I-" the project. As and when required, the CONTRACTOR will be called upon intermittently
to provide material testing services.
OPEBAl'lNGDEPABTMENT 2.03 EXPLORATION - DRILLING AND SAMPLING METHODS
A. Overburden Drilling
1) Small Diameter Auger Borings
The scope, apparatus, report and procedure shall be in accordance with ASTM
01452, "Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Boring". Samples shall be
. , ,. obtained for each material change in sufficient quantity to reveal the subsurface
BY, MSM conditions and for such laboratory testing as may be required. Augering will not
DATE:
be continued below the water table when encountered.
2) Large Diameter Auger Borings
The Augering shall be performed in soil and/or decomposed rock with drilling
equipment capable of advancing a helical auger bit having a diameter equal to
THiS ORAWING [S NOT or greater than 760 mm (30 inches). Adaptors should be provided to permit soil
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
sampling with thin-wall Shelby tube samplers as described in SUbparagraph
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
3.B.3 of these Technical Provisions. The scope and report procedures specified
CERTIFIED AND DATI:D in ASTM 01452 shall apply.
TEQ/ROT - 10125108
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO REV
T238 A PTSOBEM313 OF o
SAUDI ARABIA
49
,1-""------------------------
3) Rotary Drilling
a) Definition
Overburden rotary drilling will be any drilling made through soil overburden
or decomposed rock by drilling equipment utilizing power rotation of a
drilling bit as circulating fluid removes cuttings from the hole.
b) Equipment and Procedure
The equipment and procedures used for overburden drilling for or with SPT
and undisturbed sampling shall be in accordance with the equipment and
methods recommended in U.S. Navy Design Manual NAVFAC DM-7.1,
entitled "Soil Mechanics" dated May 1982, except as modified hereinafter.
REVISIONS
In areas where a water table is encountered in overburden or decomposed
rock materials, or where cavinq of the sidewalls occurs, borings may be
PBEPAlIEP BY: -J:E_-1
- drilled by using suitable drilling mud slurry.
lJ.l%4'"
The drilling mud shall be maintained at the top of the hole during all drilling
and sampling operations. The mud slurry may consist of bentonite-water or
AllIIl!!Il! attapulgite-water mixtures as required for stabilization of the hole. Sampling
TBAl"fSMfSSJON MOT
~DUAltTMlJlrT procedure shall be by such means as will prevent inclusions of the drilling
mud in the samples. Otherwise, the borings shall be sUitably cased to
J?IJf prevent collapse of the sidewalls and to permit sampling.
B. Soil Sampling and Testing
OPEIU.TlNG DEPARTME?O' 1) Soil Classification Samples
Samples retrieved from augering and cuttings retrieved from rotary drilling shall
be retained for Classification and Index properties testing. The scope of
sampling, procedures and report shall be in accordance with ASTM 01452.
Recovery of samples is incidental to drilling and cost shall be included in the
applicable unit rates for drilling.
- 2) Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
The scope, apparatus, procedure, and report shall be in accordance with ASTM
01586, "Standard Method of Penetration Test and Split Barrel Sampling of
Soils", except as modified herein. The intent of the Standard Penetration Test is
to determine resistance, the consistency of the materials, depth at which rock
coring shall commence, andto QbtClinsamples. SPT sampling is notconsidered
incidental to drilling and shall be paid by the unit rate for each penetration test.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR.
a) Eguipment and Supplies
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED ANDDATED Equipment shall include split barrel samples, power driven core drilling
machinery of a type or types approved by the ACOMPANY, and all other
accessories for taking samples of soil or decomposed rock. Unless
TEQlROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT Ne INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE Ne REV
T238 A PTSOSEM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
otherwise specified, drilling machinery shall be of the "hydraulic feed" type.

Borings may be advanced above the water table by augering or, by rotary
drilling for the full depths of boring. Supplies shall include all casing, piping,
pumps, and power necessary to accomplish the required boring and
sampling.
I b) Procedure
Standard Penetration Test (SPT) shall be taken at maximum vertical

intervals of 750 mm (2-112 ft) for the first 3 meters (10 ft) of depth,
measured from ground surface and at maximum intervals of 1.5 meters (5
ft) thereafter, or as otherwise directed. If it becomes apparent that gravel or
rock fragments are rendering SPT results meaningless, or if refusal is
consistently encountered, SPTs shall be discontinued. In material other
REVlSIONS
than gravels, refusal shall be defined as an SPT with less than 100 mm (4
inches) penetration per 50 blows. The samples shall be placed in air-tight
PREPARED BY, ---:u_-l plastic bags or other containers as soon as possible after they are taken
DA1'&: 1.... J..1". from the hole in order that the natural moisture content of the material may
CHK'DBv.-- ~
be retained to the fullest extent.
"
3) "Undisturbed" Soil Samples
TllANSMJS510NASSET
PLANNlNGDJ2AJn'M1iN1'
The scope, apparatus, procedure, preparation for shipment, and report shall be
J?JJ1 in accordance with ASTM 01587, "Thin Walled Tube Sampling of Soils", except
as modified herein.
a) Definition
OPERA'D'fG DEPAK'l'MEl'(f
An undisturbed sample is a thin-walled tube sample taken in accordance

with ASTM 01587, using piston-type samplers. Nonpiston-type or open-
tube with ball check valve type samplers may be used only when
authorized by the COMPANY and should be clearly indicated as such on all
logs, records and reports.
-cr-r.,", ..
- b) Equipment and Supplies
BY, MSM Equipment shall include samplers, power-driven core drilling machinery of
bAn:
an approved type or types, and accessories for procuring undisturbed soil
samples. Drilling machinery shall be of the "hydraulic feed" type unless
otherwise specified. Supplies shall include all casing, piping, pumps and
power necessary to accomplish the required boring and sampling where
used. Drill casing shall have an inside diameter such as to allow the taking
of proper samples of the size directed by the COMPANY.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
c) Procedure
FOR. ORDERING
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED ANDDATED The thin wall sampler shall be forced down by a continuous push using the
hydraulic feed. Driving of the sampler by means of a drop hammer will not
be permitted. For tube samples containing medium stiff to very stiff clays,
TEQIROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO RE\I
SAUDI ARABIA
49
the ends shall be sealed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM

01587. For tube samples containing cohesionless soil or soft clay requiring
special handling and testing, the ends of the sample tubes shall be cleaned
out to a depth of 76 mm (3 inches) and a seal provided of micro-crystalline
wax, such as Humble Oil Company Microven No, 1650, Gulf PetrowaxA, or
Socony Product 2300, 2305, or equal. A metal or metal and rubber "0" ring
type expansion disc having a diameter slightly less than the diameter of the
tube shall be inserted into the wax at 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the
soil sample. The wax plugs shall be flush with the ends of the tube and a
final seal consisting of a metal/plastic cap andlor plastic adhesive tape shall
be placed over the ends. Special sample containers will be accepted upon
approval of the COMPANY.
d) Logging and Labeling

REVISIONS
Particular care shall be taken to indicate the relative positions and the tops
J'REPAR.ID BY! .....:I:IQ.,...--1
and bottoms of samples. Tubes and crates for undisturbed samples shall
DATE: 11-81--108.
CHK'D BY. ;,. 9"""
be labeled "Do not Jar or Vibrate" and "Handle, haul and Ship in a
. " Horizontal Position".
e) Disposition of Samples
Every precaution shall be taken to avoid damage of samples as a result of

careless handling and undue delay in shipping. Samples shall be shipped in
wooden boxes made from 16 mm (5/8-inch), or heavier, lumber and with a
capacity for holding up to six sample-containing tubes depending on
shipping weight restrictions. The sample tubes shall be well packed in wood
OPEUTlNGDIJlARTMENT shavlnqs, foam or other equal material to protect the samples against
vibration. The CONTRACTOR shall avoid exposing sealed and crated
samples to extremes of temperature. Samples permitted to freeze, even I
partially, shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR at his expense.
Undisturbed samples shall not remain on the site of sampling for more than
one (1) week before being freighted for testing. Samples shall be hauled
and freighted with the tube in a horizontal position in order to prevent
,..-'.- - consolidation and segregation of water content.
BY, MSM C. Sampling of Cemented Soil. Stiff Clay and Soft Rock
DATE; ------I
1) Drive Samplers
"California" type drive samplers having segmented brass liners may be used for
sampling cementedsoiLor stiff clays, provided that no significant disturbance of
the natural materials occurs during sampling, including alteration of natural soil
Tms DRAWING IS NOT structure, density andlor shear strength. The sampler will be driven in
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfJON OR
accordance with ASTM 01586 equipment and procedures; and an appropriate
FOR
MA TERlALS
OllDERING
UNTll.
correlation of blow count with "N" values obtained by SPT procedures will be
CERTlFlED AND DATED provided by the CONTRACTOR. The individual segments of the liner will be
removed from the outer split-tube after sampling, the natural materials exposed
at the ends visually classified, and the liner segment capped, sealed and
TEQIROT - 10J25JOS
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT Ne INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO RE~
JOB ORDERNO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 9
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
labeled. No attempt shall be made to eject the sample from the liner segment in
the field. Disposition of samples will be done in accordance with the procedures
specified below for Double Tube Barrel Samplers. Care, handling and delivery
of samples will be done in accordance to the requirements of Clauses 3.E, 3.F
and 2.03.G of this Technical Specification.
2) Double Tube Barrel Samplers shall be used for hard clays, cemented coarse
grained soils, chalk and soft or weathered rock, which cannot be recovered
intact by drive sampling or penetrated with thin-wall Shelby tube samplers.
a) Definition
A Double Tube Barrel Sample shall be a sample recovered with either a

Denison double tube core sampler or a Pitcher sampler having a protruding
REVISIONS
inner barrel or liner tube.
-%EQ-C---t
PREPA.IlED BY:
b) Equipment and Supplies
Sampling equipment will include either Denison or Pitcher samplers. Liners

shall be of 29 gauge steel with inner lacquered surface or equal. The length
of protrusion of the inner barrel or liner, and the type of bit used on the outer
barrel shall be appropriate to the type of material being sampled and will be
SUbject to approval by the COMPANY.
The maximum recovery of unpredictable soft rock or friable materials is the

primary purpose for use of this type of sampling equipment. Accessory
equipment and core drilling machinery will be as specified in subparagraph
oPERATING DEPAIlTMENI 3.D.3.a of this Technical Specification.
c) Procedure
The sampling operation shall be advanced by continuous rotation of the outer

cutting barrel in conjunction with the circulation of the drilling fluid. Down .
pressure on the hydraulic feed and drilling fluid flow should be adequate for
continuous smooth penetration of the sampler without undercutting the
...Ad)
'.'
M~M
- protruding edge of the inner barrel. Blockages of circulation or SUdden
Y, changes in speed of advancement of the sampler are sufficient cause to
DATIl ----I terminate the sampling core run to avoid possible loss or damage of the
sample. The natural materials exposed in the ends of the inner tube shall be
visually classified immediately following recovery of the sample. Samples,
which appear to be suitable for laboratory testing shall be capped, sealed,
labeled and treated as "Undisturbed Samples". Samples, which appear to be
suitable only for laboratory classification tests may be ejected in the field and
rats DRAWING IS NOT treated as "Soil Classification Samples".
TO BE USED fOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR
MATERlALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
D. Rock Drilling and Coring
CERTIFIED AND DAT'KD
1) Overburden Drilling and Stabilization
TEO/ROT - 10i2SiQ8
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NC RE\I
JOBOKDERNO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 10
SAUDI ARABIA
49
Where sampling of the overburden is limited to recovery of soil classification

samples, the CONTRACTOR may employ any method and equipment for
drilling through the overburden that will permit rock and/or core drilling from the
rock surface downward in accordance with these specifications. The overburden
may be stabilized by use of casing ora mud slurry drilling fluid but, in either
procedure, stabilization methods must be adequate to prevent caving of the
overburden.
A Standard Penetration Test with less than 50 mm (2 inches) penetration with

50 blows shall be used to determine top of rock.
2) Rock Drilling
Where recovery of rock cores is not required, the COMPANY may require the
REVISIONS
CONTRACTOR to drill and log the condition of the rock. Where recovery of rock
cores is required, the CONTRACTOR may elect to ream and clean the core
hole to the bottom of the last core run prior to attempting the next core run. In
either instance, the CONTRACTOR will be reimbursed for the depth of rock
drilling measured from the top of rock (as defined in subparagraph 3.0.1 above)
to the bottom of boring. Repeated reaming and/or cleaning within this depth will
not be a separate pay item. Rock drilling may be done with crtricone bit, other
rock bits, or with the core barrel.
3) Core Drilling
Scope, equipment, procedure, and report shall be in accordance with ASTM

D2113, "Diamond Core Drilling for Site Investigation", except as modified
OPERA.Tl'iG DUAltTMlJllT herein. All core drilling shall be performed with NW size barrels and bits or with
larger sizes subject to the approval of the COMPANY. Coring shall not be
performed in soft, friable rocks or cemented soils, which can be more suitably
sampled with the equipment, methods and procedures described in
SUbparagraph 3.C. Recovery of representative rock cores is the primary
purpose for undertaking rock coring and, the CONTRACTOR will be paid only
for the actual length of rock core recovered. Payment for core recovery shall be
~j
"7- ' .... ..,-
- in addition to the payment for rock drilling within the same depth. Equipment and
procedures shall be as described below, unless directed otherwise by the
BY, MSM COMPANY_
DATE:
a) Equipment and Supplies
Equipment for core drilling shall include diamond core drilling machinery of
a type or types approved by the COMPANY complete with all accessories
for taking continuous rock cores of consolidated or semi consolidated
THIS DRAwrsc IS NOT material of a diameter consistent with bit size to the depths specified.
TO 81: USED
CONSTRUCTION
FOR
OR
Machines shall be equipped with hydraulic feed head. The use of screw or
FoR
"tARRlAlS UNTIL
ORDERING fixed speed feed heads will not be permitted. The core drilling equipment
CERTIFIED AND DATED shall conform to NW core drilling equipment, equal or better than Sprague-
Henwood (Model 40CL). The core drilling machine shall be able to develop
a bit speed of at least 1200 rpm and the hydraulic system shall be able to
TEO/ROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NC REV
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION ANO MATERIAL TESTING
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
develop at least 2760 kPa (400 psi) down pressure. The drill rods (NW)
shall be the same size as the core barrel (NW) and the drill head shall be
able to swivel 360 degrees. Since the maximum recovery of unpredictable
soft or friable rock is of prime importance, the CONTRACTOR shall use a
standard ball-bearing, swivel-type, double-tube core barrel equipped with
diamond set core bits and standard core lifters similar in construction and
I equal in performance to Sprague and Henwood "M" series or a wireline

drilling system similar in construction and equal in performance to Longyear
"Q" series. The CONTRACTOR shall have both internal and bottom
discharge diamond core bits on the job. The diamond core bits will have the
appropriate stones per carat recommended by the bit manufacturer for the
rock encountered. The CONTRACTOR will furnish all supplies for core
drilling, which shall include but not limited to, casing, drill rods, core barrels,
diamond set coring bits, piping, pumps, water, tools and power required for
REVISIONS
drilling and boxes and containers required for core samples. The
CONTRACTOR's drilling equipment shall be capable of drilling vertical core
P~ABEJ)BY: -.-..~.--t
holes to depths of at least 50 meters. Terrain may vary from flat to high
DA.TE: 1I..f1-1001
relief, thus necessitating skid mounted drills and suitable support equipment
clIK' Br 'A ""7"
~ in some locations.
b) Procedures
All holes shall be drilled vertically to the bottom elevations or depths

specified unless indicated otherwise in the SERVICE ORDER or when
directed by the COMPANY to be drilled otherwise. Casing of the
overburden may be required when coring in soft rock or through an
unstable overburden. The casing shall be seated tightly into rock prior to
OPERA.11NG DEPA.RTMENT any coring. Otherwise, the CONTRACTOR may use drilling mud to keep
the hole open provided that during coring no contamination of rock samples
occur and good core recovery is achieved. If the samples are contaminated
or otherwise inadequate, the CONTRACTOR shall drill a new hole to the
same depths and take additional rock cores at no additional cost to the
COMPANY. The CONTRACTOR shall operate his drills at such speeds and
with such water pressures as will ensure maximum core recovery in
9BIImll
A,..:ii". _ whatever kind of rock is being drilled. Where soft or broken rocks are
'.
BY,
,,,,-MSM encountered, the CONTRACTOR shall reduce the length of runs to 0.6
meters (2 feet) or less and/or use a larger diameter core barrel in order to
DATEl ----I reduce core loss and core disturbance to the minimum. Failure to comply
with the foregoing procedures shall constitute justification for the
COMPANY to require redrilling at the CONTRACTOR's expense of any
boring from which the core recovery is unsatisfactory. In as much as the
function of -core borings includes determination of the width, direction,
extent and spacing of rock fractures, the CONTRACTOR shall exercise
THIs DRAWING IS NOT particular care in recording water losses, rod drops, and other unusual
TO BE
CONSTRUCT10N
USED FOR
OR
coring experience that indicate the existence, nature and extent of any
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
fracturing or solution activity. Fractures and cavities with their estimated
CERTI'IED ANDDATED thickness shall be marked in the core boxes. Spacers shall be used to
visually indicate open fractures, cavities or, samples, which have been
removed.
TEQIROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENC RE~
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF o
SAUDI ARABIA
49
C) Logging and Labeling
The CONTRACTOR shall keep a careful and complete record of the results
of all boring and sampling. Soil and rock materials shall be classified by the
CONTRACTOR immediately following the drilling. The log of each boring
shall include the time of drilling required for each "run", with the precise
I depths and elevations of the top and bottom of the run, the percentage of
core recovered per run, the depth and elevation at which ground water is
encountered, and the amount of drill water lost. Each boring shall be logged
on a separate log sheet for each ten meters of drilling (or less), and a
complete log of each hole shall be submitted prior to payment for that hole.
The labeling of core boxes shall be done in the manner prescribed. The
materials encountered in drilling shall be Visually classified according to soil
types as defined in ASTM 02487 or, if appropriate, ASTM 03282.
REVISIONS
d) Cementing Holes During Drilling

P1lEI'ABID n.: --D_-I
DA~ IH1-29lI1
The CONTRACTOR will take such precautions as necessary to prevent
mixing of caving materials from the walls of the hole with core samples, or
to avoid loss of circulation of drill fluid and poor core recovery. This may
necessitate cementing the hole to seal or stabilize the side walls. Such
TRAJiSMlSSION A9~T
PLANNING D.lPAJITliUNT cementing will be considered incidental to the cost of rock coring and no
.J(1Jf. extra payment will be made unless specifically agreed to in the SERVICE
ORDER.
E. Sample Containers
OPERATlNGDUAItTMI".NT The CONTRACTOR shall furnish jars, tubes, bags, labels, tags, boxes and crates
for sample containment and freighting. Samples obtained from test borings shall be
contained as follows:
1) Soil Classification and SPT Samples
Samples retained for laboratory classification (visual or by testing) may be in
~ - heavy duty plastic bags of one-quart capacity or other containers approved by

the COMPANY. Moisture content sample bags shall be tightly sealed to prevent
ay, MSM moisture loss. Each bag shall be identified with a label or tag, which clearly
DAn, ----I indicates the PROJECT, boring number, sample number, top elevation of
boring, sample depth, "N" value from SPT (if applicable), and a description of
material.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

This includes thin-wall Shelby tube samples, California (liner type) samples,
TO BE
CONSTRUCTION
USED
OR
FOR Denison or Pitcher samples, or any other samples recovered in metal tubes.
FOR ORDERING The sample shall be retained in the tube for shipment to the laboratory. For
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED samples consisting of stiff clays or cemented soils, the ends of the tube shall be
tightly sealed with wax, metal caps and/or plastic membrane, subject to
approval by the COMPANY. Sample tubes, containing cohesionless soils or soft
TEO/ROT -10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTN( INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE N( RE\
JOBORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 13
SAUDI ARABIA
49
clays, shall be sealed as described in Section 2.03, paragraph B.3.c. Each

sample shall be identified with a label or tag as required in subparagraph (1)
above.
3) Rock Cores
I a) Boxes
Longitudinally partitioned wooden core boxes constructed of dressed lumber

or other approved materials in accordance with the arrangement and
dimensions shown in Plate 11-1 shall be used for all rock cores. As many core
boxes as may be required shall be used in sUbmitting each rock core or
group of cores. Core from more than one (1) test boring shall not be placed in
a single core box except with written permission from the COMPANY, in
REVISIONS
which case the core holes contained in a single box shall be consecutively
numbered. Core boxes shall be completely equipped with all necessary
PREPARED BY: ......:0_.. . partitions, covers, hinges and screws for holding down the cover, permanent
DA.T I: 11n-z08l
identification plates, tags, spacer blocks, and other accessories. The run
number, core length drilled, core length lost, depth designation and recovery
shall be written directly upon the spacer blocks. The coordinates of the
boring, ground surface elevation, date of drilling, box number, PROJECT
TJlANSMI5SIONASSET
name, hole number, delivery order number, and CONTRACTOR's name
p~~ shall be written upon the inside and outside of the lid. The inside label shall
be in accordance with the requirements shown on Plate 11-2. Each end of the
l'-' box shall be marked with the PROJECT name, hole number, and box
number. Empty portions of the core boxes shall have several wide divider
blocks nailed at about the third points to prevent the longitudinal dividers from
OPlRATl"fGDU'AllnaNT bowing and allowing the sample to shift.
=
~~':ib:..",.........r- -
BY, MSM
DATEI
TH1S DRAWING IS NOT

TO BI USED FOR
CONSTRUCflON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATElUALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
TEQIROT - 10125108 .
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NC RE\I
J08 ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 14
T238 A PTS-OSEM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
I
REVISIONS
TllANSMlSSION ~ET
PJ..ANN]NG DEPAATMJNr
OPERATING DEPAIlTMI'JIJI'
!, TMn Imrlll n S,lj mDHDtt

1" Tn? !GHOi. L1i:I$;& s:JDtz :jji l"UI ~ml Pm'!(l~.
I. ?lJHTIO"~ Of lON" nUKE fHiltDD, sn, ~lli.!O.
~. ~Pl:tEP. aLDCll OF slImnm i,;vTH JH(IIJD auNU"tEI.
~ttll;5 or TOf UO ~mtll af HI" OJ; .;m ~mn D~IUU.
HtovUf un ~~u.
DA.TE:
PLATE U-t
TVPtCM. COREBOX
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
.OR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIY.D AND DATED
PLATE 11-1
TYPICAL CORE BOX
TEO/ROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLAHTN INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE N
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA 49
PROJECT :. _
I PTS NO.lS.O. NO.
BORING NO. : _
ELEVATION: _
i .. . ., -
COORDINATES: N. E. _
REVISIONS
STATION: OFFSET: _
...
ltolZ,JfOI
DATE (S) DRILLED:. _
BOX NO. OF BOXES
CONTRACTOR. _
NOTES:
1. LABEL OF SUFFICIENT SIZE TO ALLOW ALL INFORMATION TO BE CLEAR

AND ELIGIBLE ON PHOTOGRAPH OF CORE.
2. LOCATION MAY BE EITHER BY COORDINATES OR BY STATIONING, AS

APPROPRIATE TO THE PROJECT.
~
BY, MSM
DAn:
PLATE 11-2
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfJON OR
POR. ORDERING TYPICAL CORE BOX LABEL
MATERIALS UNTIL
ConnED AND DATED
TEO/ROT - 10/25/08
SCOPEOF WORK & TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT Ne INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO RE~
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
b) Arrangement
All cores shall be arranged neatly in the partitioned boxes in the same
sequence in which they occurred before removal from the hole. Facing the
open box, with the hinged cover away from the observer and the open box
closer to the observer, cores shall be arranged in descending sequence
beginning at the upper left end of the partition farthest from the observer and
continuing in the other partitions from left to right to the right hand comer
close to the observer. The highest core shall be placed in Box 1, and lower
portions of the core shall be placed in the other boxes in consecutive order.
All cores shall be photographed with a folding rule or measuring tape
temporarily placed lengthwise along the edge of the box so that core piece
lengths may be readily discerned. The photographs shall clearly illustrate the
REVISIONS
condition of the core, and the identification labels and marks outlined in
SUbparagraph (a), above. Copies of photographs of all cores recovered on
P~AREDBY: ....;u;<>----t the PROJECT shall be included in the final report.
DATK: I....I-Jotl
c) Test Samples
Rock samples selected for testing shall be preserved by wrapping with

TAANSMlSSlON ASSET
plastic membrane and sealing to avoid moisture loss, or by other methods
.tR6J1
PLANNING DEPAJl'IMENT
SUbject to the approval of the COMPANY. Preserved samples shall be

properly positioned in the core box and identified with a tag or label as
required in subparagraph (1), above.
F. Care and Delivery of Samples

OPEMTINGDiI"AIlTMINT
The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for preserving all samples in his
possession in good condition. The CONTRACTOR shall keep samples from
freeZing, from undue exposure to the weather and sun, and shall keep all
descriptive labels and designations on sample jars, bags, and boxes clean and
legible. Samples shall be delivered within the time limits specified for each type of
investigation. In general, no sample shall remain at the WORK SITE for more than
one week after being taken. Samples shall be retained by the CONTRACTOR at
his laboratory for a period of not less than ninety (90) days following submittal of
BY,
MSM the final report. The CONTRACTOR may then either destroy the samples, or make
DAn, ----f delivery to the COMPANY if so directed by the COMPANY.
G. Freighting
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for freighting all samples for which
laboratory testing is required as specified in the SERVICE ORDER. This includes
THIS DRAWING IS NOT transportation to the CONTRACTOR's laboratory and may include commercial
TO BE USIO FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR freighting to other laboratories if required for tests, which the CONTRACTOR
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDJ:RJNG
UNTIL
cannot perform in his laboratory or within the time frame of the SERVICE ORDER.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
TEQIROT - 10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NC RE\
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
H. Supplementary Subsurface Exploration
Subsurface exploration, that is abandoned or from which unsatisfactory samples

are being obtained, shall be supplemented by other exploration adjacent to the
Original, in order that satisfactory samples or the required information is obtained.
Penetration to abandonment depth or to the depths where unsatisfactory samples
I were obtained, may be made by any methods selected by the CONTRACTOR that
in the opinion of the COMPANY will permit satisfactory completion. No additional
payment will be made for supplementary subsurface explorations that are required
to replace those abandoned or from which satisfactory samples were not obtained
because of mechanical failure of equipment, negligence on the part of the
CONTRACTOR, or other preventable causes for which the CONTRACTOR is
responsible. Payment will be made for acceptable portions of these supplementary
subsurface explorations below the depths or outside the reaches of the previously
REVISIONS
accepted WORK.
PKEFAJlEDBY: -DQ---1
2.04 EXPLORATION -OPEN EXCAVATION AND SAMPLING METHODS
DAn: IJ;.tl.0291l1
A. Test Pits and Sampling
AWIQl1I!! 1) Definition
TRANSMl'l:SJON ASUl'
PLANNING DIlARTMiNT
A test pit will be any excavation in soil, decomposed rock, or overburden, which
J(bf has an open cross-section area large enough to permit efficient excavation,
engineering inspection, and undisturbed sampling. Test pit excavations will not
be continued below the water table.
2) EqUipment and Supplies
The equipment and supplies shall include suitable backhoes, picks, shovels,
and sampling tools. Backhoes used for all test pitting shall be capable of digging
pits to depths specified in the SERVICE ORDER. Supplies, which the
CONTRACTOR shall furnish for obtaining undisturbed samples, shall include
split metal cylinders complete with bolts and nuts for tightening, and/or bolted
..,. - metal or wooden boxes of acceptable size and types. The minimum inside
dimensions of tightened cylinders shall be 200 mm (8 inches) in diameter by
BY, MSM 300 mm (12 inches) in length and the cubic boxes, shall have 250 mm (10
DATE:
inches) dimensions. Accessories to be supplied by the CONTRACTOR shall
include a small sample trimming shovel or spade, hatchet, trimming knife,
paraffin and facilities for melting and brush application, trowels, labels, boxes for
shipping samples, and lumber for shoring test pits. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish bags with ties and tags for containing disturbed samples.
THIS ORAWING IS NOT 3) Procedures

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR
POR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTR.
a) Excavation
CERTIFIED AND DATED
Excavation shall conform to the requirements of the COMPANY Safety

Manual, Part 3, Section 1-307, "Excavation and Trenches".
TEQIROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENC REV
T238 A PTSOBEM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
b) Undisturbed Sampling
In obtaining undisturbed samples from test pits, the undisturbed natural

physical and structural characteristics of the samples of in-situ material shall
be preserved insofar as possible both while samples are being taken and
during shipment to the point of testing. In cohesive and partially cohesive
soils, this may be accomplished by isolating the soil column or cube to be
sampled by gently trenching around it and knife-trimming it to the required
dimensions of the split cylinder or box. A thin coating of melted paraffin shall
then be applied quickly, but gently, to the sample with a paint brush, to seal it
against loss of moisture. The metal or wooden sample container, with bolts
cz tightened shall then be placed over the paraffin coated sample and all
clearances between the sample and the walls of the container filled with
REVISIONS
melted paraffin. After the paraffin has hardened, the soil column or cube shall
be cut-off a few inches below the container, the sample and container
inverted and removed from the pit, and the sample trimmed at the base. A
DA.n; lJ.G,lOOl
brush coating of paraffin shall then be applied to the exposed portion. Where
overburden materials to be sampled are only partially cohesive, it is best not
to isolate the soil column for its full length before paraffining and lowering the
~ container. By exposing and paraffining small sections at a time, and
TIW'ISMtSSION,~l'
PLANNING DEI'ABTMI:NT progressively lowering the container, the sample will be subjected to less
disturbance. Where natural moisture content is an important factor, delay
cRIJI shall be avoided in taking the sample, in order that the natural moisture
content of the material may be retained to the fullest extent.
c) Disturbed sampling
OPEBAT!NGDUAll'IMDIT
Disturbed samples shall be taken from the side walls of the test pit. The size
of the disturbed samples shall be adequate for the quantity of materials
required for the types of laboratory tests outlined in the SERVICE ORDER.
Sample containers may be cloth or burlap bags or, if moisture loss is to be
minimized, heavy duty plastic bags. In any case, the strength of the bags
must be sufficient to resist tearing or splitting during handling of the
contained samples. All bags must contain an inside label and an outside tag
'. <iI"-- showing pertinent information as required for Soil Classification Samples.
BY' MSM
DATEI -----I d) Disposition of Samples
Cylindrical and box samples shall be packed in dry packing and freighted in
sturdy wooden boxes of strength and construction sufficient to guarantee
against damage during shipment. Boxes should be no larger than is required
for freighting two such samples. Both box samples and boxed cylindrical
THiS BRAWING IS NOT samples shall be marked "FRAGILE - HANDLE WITH CARE" and shall be
TO Bit USED FOR
CONSTllUcnON OR
identified by labels, similar to those for Undisturbed Samples taken from
FOR
MATERW.S
ORDERING
UNm..
borings, attached to inside and outside of each box. The CONTRACTOR
CERTIFIED ANDDATED shall avoid exposing sealed and crated samples to extremes of temperature.
Undisturbed Samples permitted to freeze, even partially, shall be replaced by
TEQ/ROT - 10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO RE\I
JOB ORDR NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 19
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
the CONTRACTOR at his expense. The CONTRACTOR shall not hold these
samples at the site of exploration for a period in excess of one (1) week.
B. Test Trenches and Sampling
1) Definition
A test trench will be any excavation in soil, decomposed rock or overburden

with a cross-section equal to the width of a bulldozer blade. Test trenches will
not be continued below the water table.
2) Eguipment and Supplies
The equipment and supplies shall include suitable bulldozers, hand tools and
REVISIONS
sampling equipment. Test trenches, which are to be dug to refusal, shall be
excavated using a bulldozer equivalent to a Caterpillar Model 0-9 rated at 385
PREPABEDBY: -n;Q.--f
HP off the flywheel with a dozer blade and a single tooth ripper. Supplies, which
DATE: 11-01~:J:OO'
the CONTRACTOR shall furnish for obtaining undisturbed samples, shall be as
listed in "Test Pits and Sampling".
3) Procedures
I TlUJ'fSMI5SJON~:t
PIANNJNG DU'AllTMENT
a) Excavation shall conform to the requirements of the company Safety Manual,

I."
.:
J?JIf"'1-'-
Part 3, Section 1-307, "Excavation and Trenches".
I: .
b) Sampling shall be as specified in "Test Pits and Sampling".
._c.'
,.~. OPERATJI'(GDIPARTMENl' C. Testing
~.
Testing of materials exposed by excavation shall be performed as directed by the

COMPANY. Testing may include any of the WORK described in Section 2.07,
Standards for In-Situ Field Testing and Instrumentation, subparagraphs A, S, C, H,
K and L. The payment for such field testing shall be exclusive of payment for test
pit and/or trenches, based on the established unit price for each test.
~
~j
.-., .-,. -
>y, MSM
DAr.TE:
The scope, definitions, apparatus, procedure, special techniques, precautions,
precision, accuracy and report shall be in accordance with ASTM 03441, "Deep, Quasi
- Static, Cone and Friction-Cone Penetration Tests of Soil". The equipment shall be
capable of exerting 100 kg/cm2 pressure on a standard cone tip.
2.06 EXPLORATION - GEOPHYSICAL METHODS

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
The scope, definitions, and procedures for geophysical explorations shall be in general
FOR
MATEIUALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the apparatus used by the
CERTJFlED AND DATED CONTRACTOR for each type of test. The type of apparatus and auxiliary equipment,
special techniques, precautions, precision, accuracy and report shall be SUbject to
approval by the COMPANY and shall be in general accordance with the following
TEO/ROT -- 10/25108
SCOPEOF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO REV
JOB OKDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 20
T238 A PTS.()8EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
requirements for each type of test. The type of apparatus and auxiliary equipment,
special techniques, precautions, precision, accuracy and report shall be subject to
approval by the COMPANY and shall be in general accordance with the following
requirements for each type of test.
A. Refraction Seismic Testing
I 1) Equipment
The apparatus used for refraction seismic testing shall be of the hammer-impact
sensitive type similar to the Nimbus Enhancement Seismograph Model ES-125
or the Bison Model 1575 B, Automatic Signal Enhancement Seismograph.
Accessory equipment shall include a Strip Chart Recorder, Vertical Geophone,
Horizontal Geophone, as well as hammers, cables, switches, and other items
REVISIONS
required for the performance of a complete seismic refraction traverse having a
length of at least 100 meters.
PItEPAIlED BY: -"'Q-'--I
DAT!: IJ..I1-1IDI
2) Procedures
Refraction surveys will be conducted in accordance with the procedures

recommended for the equipment being used, and shall provide a precision and
TIlANSMlSSION ASSET
PIAl'mU'lG DUllTMlNT accuracy of data as required for evaluation of strata changes within a maximum
~
depth of 30 meters. Hammer impact points, generally, should not be farther
apart than 3 meters and the spacing should be reduced, where necessary, to
accurately delineate changes in seismic velocity of subsurface materials.
Elevation of ground surface shall be determined at each impact point relative to
a bench mark elevation provided by the COMPANY's Survey Division or to the
OPEJATlNGDEPARTMENT center of traverse at an assumed elevation of 100.000 meters. Double traverse
(forward and reverse) shall be performed at each location to evaluate strata dip
and subsurface irregularities. Right angle double traverses and/or radial
traverses may be required as directed by the COMPANY. Seismic velocity at a
given impact point shall be based on the cumulative average of "first arrival"
wave time for three or more hammer blows.
.'."'~
- 3) Records
ay, MSM When a clear wave pattern is developed for ''first arrival" wave time, the time
DATEI
shall be recorded in the field notes for the traverse. When the "first arrival" is
questionable, the wave pattern shall be reproduced on the Strip Chart
Recorder. Field notes and computations shall be recorded on forms described
in the following SUbparagraph 6.AA. Records and copies shall be provided to
the COMPANY as required therein. If voluminous, The records may be
presented in a separate volume of the final report.
THIS DRA.WING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR 4) Analysis and reports
FOR ORDERING
MAnRIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED Analysis of field data shall generally conform to the procedures and techniques
described in "The Handbook of Engineering Geophysics", Bison Instruments,
Inc., Minneapolis. Minnesota, USA. When field data is voluminous, the
TEO/ROT - 10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT N( INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE Ne REV
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
computer program for analysis of the multiple-dipping-Iayer structure described

in Chapter 12 of the Handbook, may be used. Reports shall include time-
distance plots showing average arrival time from each impact point, "best fit"
velocity and depth for each stratum, dip and top of rock irregularities. Where
possible, evaluation of subsurface materials should be correlated with
subsurface conditions encountered in test borings or exposed in natural
outcrops or man-made excavations.
B. Cross-Hole Seismic Testing
1) Objective and Principle
o This test shall be used to determine compression (P) and shear (S) wave
z
velocities through subsurface materials at various depths for estimation of
REVISIONS
physical characteristics and engineering parameters of the materials.
PREP~BY: -D_"'-! The principle consists of recording the time it takes for a particular type of sonic
DAB: t."'OZ.lGGI
wave to travel a known distance between the impulse originating in one
borehole and the signal receiving device, geophone, in another borehole. The
signal received by geophone is amplified, displayed and enhanced by a remote
AmW:II! seismograph on the ground surface.
TBANSMESJONA.SSET
PLANNING DIPARTMINI'
.J?bf 2) EqUipment
The apparatus used for cross-hole seismic testing .shall be of the hammer
impact sensitive type similar to the signal enhancement seismograph OYO
MSBIS-150. Accessory equipment shall include a Strip Chart Recorder, Vertical
Of'l:1lA.TlNG DIP..urrMENT Geophone, hammer, cables, switches and other items required for the
performance of cross-hole seismic testing.
3) Procedures
At present, there is no ASTM or other Industry Standard available for this test.
Until such a Standard becomes available, the following test procedure shall
... ''; .,.. - generally be followed:
IV, MSM a) The receiver hole shall be drilled, sampled and cased to the maximum
DA.TEI
desired depth of the cross-hole test.
b) The impulse hole shall be drilled a distance of three to five meters away to
about 1.5 meters depth. The drill rod shall then be detached from the rig
and a steel anvil shall be screwed on the rod.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT c) The rod shall be struck with a sledge hammer, creating an impulse that
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfJON OR
travels down the rod and into the soil, and also initiating the time base in
FOil
MATERlALS
ORDEIlING
UNTn..
the seismograph.
CERTIFJJ:DANDDATED
TEQ/ROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTN( INOEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE N( RE\
SAUDI ARABIA
49

d) The impulse shall be detected by a geophone, placed at the same depth

as the end of the rod in the receiver hole, and relayed in electronic signal
to the seismograph.
e) The seismograph shall display the wave pattern sensed by the geophone
on its cathode ray tube screen.
I f) This pattern shall be shown to the scale of a preselected time base such
that the time from the original impulse to the time of the impulse arrival for
various waves can be measured.
g) Knowing the travel time and travel distance, the wave velocities at that
particular depth shall be computed.
REVISIONS
h) The drill rod shall be advanced to a greater depth and the above
procedure repeated.
PREPARED BY: -.:J:EQ----1
DA TId II-O].ZOO'
CHlC'D. , . ... ..,...
4) Records
"'.
When a clear pattern is developed for the first arrival time of the various waves,
the time shall be recorded in the field notes. When the first arrival times are
TIl4NSMlSSIONASSET
PLANNING DJ:PAJrI'MINI questionable, the wave pattern shall be reproduced on the Strip Chart
Recorder. Records and copies shall be provided to the COMPANY.
<-RIIt 5) Analyses and Reports
Field data shall be analyzed to determine compression (P) and shear (S) wave
velocities and estimate therefrom the physical and engineering characteristics
of the materials. Reports shall include time-distance plots showing average
arrival time for the two waves from each impact point, best fit velocities and
depth for each test. Where possible, evaluation of subsurface materials should
be correlated with subsurface conditions encountered in test borings or exposed
in natural outcrops or man-made excavations.
C. Electrical Resistivity
....,
BY, MSM The apparatus and accessory equipment used for evaluation of subsurface
DAR: --I
conditions, based on the apparent electrical Resistivity, shall be comparable to the
Soil Test R-40C Resistivity Meter with a sensitivity adequate for evaluation of
materials to a depth of 30 meters. The scope, definitions, procedure, special
techniques and precautions, report and precision and accuracy shall be in
accordance with ASTM G-57, "Field Measurement of Soil Re!iistivity Using the
Wenner Four-Electrode Method". Analysis of field data shall generally conform to
THIS DRAWING JS NOT the procedures and techniques described in "Earth Resistivity Manual", Soil Test,
TO BI USED rOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
Inc., Evanston, Illinois, U.S.A., and the results shall be presented as described
FOR
MATEIUA1S
ORDERrNG
UNTlL
therein.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
TEQIROT -10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE Ne RE~
T238 A PTS..()8EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
2.07 STANDARDS FOR IN-SITU FIELD TESTING AND INSTRUMENTATION
A. Dry Unit Weight and Moisture Content
In accordance with any of the standard test procedures described in:

1) ASTM D1556 Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method
2) ASTM D2167 Density of Soil In-Place by the Rubber-Balloon

Method
3) ASTM D2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
4) ASTM D2937 Density of Soil In-Place by the Drive-Cylinder Method

REVISIONS
The method used shall be clearly indicated for each test result presented in the
PB,EPAJlIIIBY: -D:Q----1
final report.
c::::~~5i
11-lJZ..1001
U ....'
B. Moisture Content Direct
In accordance with ASTM D3017, "Moisture Content of Soil and Soil Aggregate In-
Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)".
.
c. Plate Bearing Tests
In Accordance with ASTM 01194, "Bearing Capacity of Soil for Static Load on
Spread Footings", except that dial gages accurate to 0.025 mm (0.001 inch) shall
OPRATBfGDEPAR'IMENT be used to measure deflections. The Unit Rate for this item shall include
mobilization/demobilization charges.
D. Full Scale Spread Footing Load Tests
In general accordance with ASTM D1194. For each specific case, the
CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY the test set up, the equipmentto be
- used, the step by step procedure and the final report format. Tests will not be
started until these documents are reviewed and approved by the COMPANY.
Testing equipment shall be capable of exerting maximum test load up to 2700 kN
(=300 tons). Mobilization/Demobilization for this item shall be paid as a separate
pay item.
E. Pile Load Test
MobilizationlDemobilization for the following tests shall be paid as a separate pay

THIS DBAWING IS NOT item:
TO BI: USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDEJUNG
UNTIL
1) Compression Load Test
CERTIFIED AND DATED
In accordance with ASTM D1143, "Piles under Axial Compressive Load",

except that the ASTM D1143 (Figure 1) loading method of jacking against
TEQIROT- 10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFOR PLANT Ne INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE Ne REII
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONAND MATERIAL TESTING
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
hold-down piles shall not be used where dead-load reaction is feasible. The
equipment shall be capable of applying a maximum test load of up to 1800 kN
(=200 tons).
2) Tension Load Test

z
i In accordance with ASTM 03689, "Individual Piles Under Static Axial Tensile
Load". The equipment shall be capable of applying a maximum test load of up
to 900 kN (=100 tons).
3) Lateral Load Test
oz In accordance with ASTM 03966, "Piles Under Lateral Loads". The equlpment
shall be capable of applying maximum test load of up to 900 kN (=100 tons).
REVISIONS
4) Inclined Tension Load Test

DATE: IJ.I2..1801 .
This test will generally be applicable to foundations of transmission line towers
where the stub angle is embedded in foundation concrete at an angle to the
vertical. In the absence of a directly related ASTM Standard, the test shall be
performed in general accordance with ASTM 03689, except as modified
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DU'AaTMENJ' hereafter.
t.ffl The testing assembly shall be capable of applying a maximum tensile load of
1100 kN (=125 tons) in a direction axial to the stub angle at a tower footing.
The test loads shall be transmitted to the ground through the test frame resting
on leveling pads on the ground.
OPElU.TlNG DU'AIlTMENT
Horizontal and vertical movements shall be measured during the test at a

minimum of three locations on the footing. The movement of the stub angle
shall be measured at two locations. The dial gages for measuring movements
shall be either 0.076 mm (0.003) in.) per division or 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) per
division, as necessary for accurate assessment of movement. Electronic load
cells shall be used to measure the applied load by the jacks. These cells shall
be accurate to about 890 N (200 Ibs.), and shall be calibrated before and after
T .,.- the tests are performed.
BY, MSM
DATE:
Loads shall be applied in maximum increments of 45 kN (=5 tons). Each load
shall be held for a minimum of about 15 minutes, or until the movement rate
becomes less than 0.254 mm (0.01 in.) per hour. Load shall be raised to
design load and held for at least 6 hours. Unloading shall be done in three
equal decrements. Each decrement shall beheld until the rate of movement is
less than 0.254 mm (0.01 in.) per hour. Readings dUring loading and
TillS DRAWING IS NOT unloading shall be taken at time intervals of 30 seconds, 1, 2, 4, 8, 15, 30
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
minutes and one hour as necessary. The final readings after unloading shall
FOa
MATERlALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
be taken immediately and 2 hours after all the load has been removed. The
CERTIFIED AND DATED above procedure shall be repeated by reloading the foundation to failure or to
a maximum specified test load and then unloading in three decrements.
TEQ/ROT - 10/25/08
,JOBORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 25
1238 A PTS08EM313 OF o
SAUDI ARABIA
49
The report shall present load-movement curve for each test together with the
estimated failure load. The observed mode of failure shall also be described.
F. Ground Water Observations and Permeability Tests
1) Piezometer Installation and Observation
I Will be directed primarily towards evaluation of "static" water levels and

possible seasonal variations thereof, as recorded by water levels measured in
observation wells. The Piezometers shall be of the stand pipe type, utiliZing
perforated PVC pipe, plastic filter screens and selected backfill materials
installed in drilled holes as shown on Plates 11-3 and 11-4. The installation and
~ I'"l .... _
observation shall be in accordance with Chapter 1.10, Ground Water
Investigation, "Foundation Engineering Handbook", Winterhom and Fang, Van
REVISIONS
Nostrand Reinhold Co. 1975. Piezometers may be installed in test borings,
subject to the approval of the COMPANY, or in special holes drilled for
installation of Piezometers. In either case, drilling of the hole will be a separate
Pit.u: l ....U-2IO.
pay item or items.
1' . 1- OPEIU.Tll"fGDIPARTMENT
~,
I!!Il[W!
".,."" ....
-
B~, M~M
DATE:
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FoR OmERlNG
MATERlAl.S UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
TEO/ROT -10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNG INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENC RE'oI
T238 A PTS-QSEM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
1
THREADED STEEL CAP WITH

WELOED HASP AND PAD LOCK
I
..--
l/. CASING AND CAP PAINTED WHITE
I
~ 1t ~
r.;; HOLE 00. P.A[NTED ON CAP IN
~ I. BLAiCK PAINT
'"gj
'"
- ~. ~
r,TOP OF GROUND
-:
..
..
.~
III
.~.
~
i ~ 'I!o.
N ~ '14-- GROUT
REVlSIONS .
I!ii) ~.",
~...
"j
,:~.
... ~., ';-.N!iIIi,i+--_ STE.El ClSIHG 1I00mm I~{). WU
PREI"AllEDBY: -'.AQ---j ,'Ii .' .~
DATEl 11-OJ.J1lJI
+ "" i r ' _ . . ...
!.-I--.. -~~
.... L-1 . ~. TE.MPED BENTONITE pn LETS
~
TllANSMlSSIONASSZT
PIANHlNG DEPJUlTMINT
<-R1Jf
ai.
(~
V
IIV I. PVC PIPE SHALL HAVE A MIN. I.D. OF 25m.
2. BOTTO~ END OF PVC IELL SCREEN SHALL
I .. \'-".
r/.l
v
cI
V
l
BE PLUGGED.
3. ONE 3mm VENT HOLE. SHALL BE 01(lLLED
IN THE CA$lNG 15mm BELOW THE
V
, .
orEllATlNG DEJ"ARTM:ENT
(/ BOTTO" OF THE CAP~
V;, 4. POOTECTIVE PIP[. LOCK. AND GROUT
11-----1
1 1- - - - - 1 V"/
r /
//cI
REomRED FOR~LL [H$TALLATIONS,
E.~CEPT THOSE DESIGNATED AS ITEWPORARyl.
... .... .,.

.
-
/
-1-----+-+/- f -
/ /
cJ
?r' / \.......
5. t4 - METERS
mm -MILLIMETERS
PVC PIPE f2Smm l.O. t.N.)
MSM
=~/~
OY,
DAn, __ --I
/ ./ p.E.A
. . GRAV.IL ,(5....ALLE..STCONS,mUENT
/ j NUST BE NO SMALLER THAN IE: LL
/: / SCREE:N SLOT OF MESH l
THiS DRAWING IS NOT

TO
CONSTRUCTION
FOR
MATERIALS UNTIL
BIi:. USED
ORDERING
FOR
OR
, / == /
, L . . -_ _ TOTAL WIDTH TO
PVC WELL SCREEN
'Sun SIZE: OF CeRE.
CERTIFIED AND DATED - fAA Y BE AL TERE.D FOR SITE CQNDlTIOMS
PLATE 1I-3 PIEZOMETERS DETAIL - SINGLE INSTALLATION
__.' ..__"._,._".h"" ......,_ .._._.-._._..._.._.__._,_.._.__... _,_" . __ ,_. .____ _ . . _ .. _ " .--- ----
TEO/ROT -10/25/08
PLANTN( INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE Ne RE\
JOB ORDER NO. 27

SAUDI ARABIA 49
J'--- ~ _
NOTES rSEE PLATE IT-3
g ., N ...
REVlSlONS
PREPAllEDBY: --'"'>--.-f
DATE: II-O:.-zeBI
PVC PIPE
PEA GRAVEL (SMALLEST CONSTITUENT
MUST BE NO SMALLER THAN WELL
SCREEN SLOT OF MESH)
,
PVC WELL SCREEN
1---- 1 -
APPROXlMnE3.flM
TEMPED BENTOMTE PELLETS
'., .".
-
BY, MSM
DAn; ----.-f
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MA TlRlALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
PLATE 11-4
PIEZOMETER DETAIL - MULTIPLE INSTALLATIONS
TEO/ROT - 10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTN( INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGENC RE\
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
--'----------------,------
!
2) Permeability Testing
Shall be limited to falling-head type testing conducted in SUitably cased bore

holes, or in standpipes or Piezometers contained in adequately backfilled bore
holes. General procedures shall be in accordance with the reference cited in
subparagraph (1), preceding.
I G. Electrical Resistivity
Where definitive values of electrical resistivity of subsurface materials are required

for analysis of grounding problems for COMPANY structures, the field tests will be
conducted in accordance with ASTM G57, Rev. A, "Field Measurement of Soil
Resistivity Using the Wenner Four Electrode Method", as also required in Section
2.06.C for geophysical exploration.
REVISIONS
H. Thermal Resistivity
PREPARED BY: -""'--I
In accordance with IEEE* 442, "Soil Thermal Resistivity Measurements", an outline
of the procedure is described herein: Insert the probe into a soil mass and allow
the probe to come into thermal equilibrium with the soil. An electrical current is
then passed through the heating element causing temperature rises in the interior
TRANSMl9SlOJ'f ASSET
FLANNlNG DEPABnn:NT of the probe. A thermocouple inside the probe measures the heat rise and
~. readings are taken at intervals measured by a stopwatch. The time temperature
data reduction is done then by graphical means. More sophisticated data reduction
procedures may be adopted by the CONTRACTOR upon COMPANY's approval.
Supplementary soil data (e.g., in-situ soil density and moisture content) shall be
obtained as directed by the COMPANY.
OPEllATINe DIPABTMENT
I. Field Vane Shear Test
Vane Shear Test shall be in accordance with ASTM 02573, "Method for Field
Vane Shear Test in Cohesive Soils".
J. Pressuremeter Test
p ',-
- Pressuremeter testing shall be in accordance with ASTM 04719, "Standard Test
n, MSM Method for Pressuremeter Testing in Soils".
DATE:
K. Percolation Test
In accordance with the ARAMCO Sanitary Code, Section IX-B, 9.18.4.
L. Other Considerations
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED 'OR.
CONSTRUcnON OR Certain other Standards, which shall be observed in the performance of field
'OR. ORDERING
MA TERlALS UNTIL
WORK but do not represent separate pay items include:
CI:R.TlJI1ED ANDDATW
1) General Field Procedures - in accordance with ASTM 0420, "Investigating and

Sampling Soil and Rock for Engineering Purposes".
TEQ/ROT - 10/25/0B
i
I
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
!
2) Visual Classification of Soil - field evaluation of soil classification based on

ASTM D2487, "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes", and ASTM
D2488, "Descriptions of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedures), or ASTM 03282,
"Classification of Soil and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction
Purposes", as directed by the COMPANY.
i .
2.08 FIELD RECORDS
The CONTRACTOR shall keep accurate subsurface logs and records of all field work
accomplished under this CONTRACT and shall deliver complete, legible copies of
these logs and records to the COMPANy upon completion of the WORK or at such
other time or times as he may be directed. All such records shall be preserved in good
condition and order by the CONTRACTOR until they are delivered and accepted. The
COMPANY shall have the right to examine such records at any time prior to their
REVISIONS
delivery. Separate logs shall be made for each hole and test pit. The following
information shall be included on the logs or in the records for each hole:
DATE: I1-t1-1OO1
A. Hole number or designation and elevation of top hole
B. Make and manufacturer's model designation of test-pit and trench excavation,

drilling, and cone testing equipment
C. Type of drilling, sampling, and cone testing operation by depth
D. Dates and time by depths when test-pit and trench excavation, drilling, sampling
and cone testing operations were performed
. 1------1
!. ~: OPERATING DtrARTMIM' E. Depths at which samples or cores were recovered or attempts made to sample or
i; core inclUding top and bottom depth of each run.
F. Classification or description by depths of the materials sampled, cored, or

penetrated including a description of moisture conditions and of conditions of
compactness or stiffness of materials encountered. This classification or
description shall be made immediately following the taking of the samples or cores
- and in accordance with ASTM D2487 and ASTM D2488.
G. Penetration and resistance such as drive-hammer blows given in blows per foot or
DATE:
part thereof for driving sample spoons and casing and as the pressure in pounds
per square inch applied to push undisturbed samples
H. Percentage of sample or core recovered per run and RQD value expressed as a
.
percentage
THIS DRAWINGIS NOT I. Depth at which ground water is encountered. Record Static Water Level and date
TO 81: USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
at least 24 hours after the hole is finished
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIEDAND DATED J. Depths at which drill water is lost and amounts. Depth and distance of drill rod
drops
TEQIROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT Ne INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO REV
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
K. Depth of bottom of hole
Additionally, records of test data for all field testing shall be provided in accordance
with the Standards specified in Section 2.07. The CONTRACTOR will provide sample
.copies of standard forms for each test to the COMPANY for review and approval prior
to performance of tests. The presence of a COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE or the
keeping of separate records by the COMPANY shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of
the responsibility for the WORK specified in this paragraph. Payment will not be made
for any WORK for which the required records have not been furnished by the
CONTRACTOR.
2.09 LABORATORY TESTING

~ .., N ....
All samples received in the laboratory shall be inspected and visually classified by an
REVISIONS
engineer or geologist. The condition of the samples shall be recorded and
representative samples suitable for testing shall be selected and stored in a manner
-""Q.--1
PUPAllEDBY;
that will protect the samples from fluctuations in temperature or low humidity.
DATE: IJ..I1-1IKlI
Regardless of the basic purpose or type of test (classification, strength, volume
change), it is not intended that all samples be subjected to testing. Testing should be
limited to samples representative of significant subsurface conditions; and, the
numbers and types of test should be limited to those which will contribute to the
geotechnical evaluation of subsurface conditions for the specific PROJECT. Payment
will not be made for any laboratory testing that represents needless duplication of test
data or that is not related to significant tangible geotechnical considerations or that is
not specifically identified in the approved SERVICE ORDER.
I
2.10 STANDARDS FOR LABORATORY TESTING

OPEIlATlNG DEPJUlTMJ:NT
Where relevant Standards are applicable, the laboratory WORK shall be conducted in
accordance with the procedures of the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM) or in accordance to such other procedures and Standards delineated or
referenced herein. Where relevant standards are not necessarily applicable, gUide
Standards are provided. Reference to a specific standard does not necessarily
represent a pay item unless so indicated. Standards included in another test procedure
~
or which are required for the general operation of the laboratory (e.g. ASTM D421, "Dry
AI
BY, M1>M
preparation of Soil Samples for Particles Size Analysis and Determination of Soil
Constants") are not considered to be separate pay items. Standards for laboratory
"Am - - - - t testing are as follows:
A. Visual Classification
Evaluation and classification of soiLsamples according to the criteria provided in

ASTM D2487, "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes" and ASTM
THIS DRAWING IS NOT D2488, "Description of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedures)" or, if directed by the
To BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR.
COMPANY, ASTM D3282, "Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for
FOR
MATERIALS
OIIDERlNG
UNTIL
Highway Construction Purposes", without benefit of supporting laboratory
CERTIFIED AND DATED classification test data; and, evaluation and classification of rock samples by
composition, structure and hardness according to the criteria described in Section
lEOIROl - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT Nt INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO RE\I
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
III: Guidelines for Preparation of Final Logs. Visual classification is not a separate
pay item.
B. Classification Testing
Identification of soil types based on laboratory testing shall not be separate pay
I item. The cost shall be included in the costs of the various tests required for
identification based on the criteria of ASTM D2487 or ASTM D3283. Tests shall be
assigned by the CONTRACTOR only after review of field data and visual
classification of samples recovered. Sufficient tests shall be performed to confirm
or modify visual classifications. Excessive testing, where definite visual
classification is possible, shall be avoided. Testing shall be done primarily on
.., . materials, which are borderline and are difficult to classify. A soils sample would be
ML-CL or SP-SM. Classification tests shall include:
REVISIONS
1) Particle -Size Analysis/Mechanical

PKEPABl'JJn: -'W>-~--I
DATE: 11-01-200'
In accordance with ASTM D422, "Particle-Size Analysis of Soils", but not
including hydrometer analysis
2) Particle-Size Analysis/Hydrometer
TlW"lSMlSstONASSET
PLANNlNG DIPAllTMENT
i c.RM
.......
In accordance with ASTM 0422, "Particle-Size Analysis of Soils", plus
determination of specific gravity but not including sieve analysis
3) Percent Finer Than the #200, U.S. Standard Sieve

.... 1 - - - - - - - - 1
I":
_.. OPEItA.TJNGDEPAJl1'MENT In accordance with ASTM 01140
:.-
4) Plasticity
Determination of the Plasticity Index based on the results of tests performed in

accordance with ASTM D4318, "Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index
of Soils"
... "....-
ay, MSM
- C. Index Properties Testing
DAn:
Tests include those required to group soils in major strata and to provide a basis
for evaluation of the structural characteristics utilizing a restricted number of
"Structural Properties Tests" described in subparagraph D, following. Index
properties tests required as a part of any other standard laboratory test procedure
r
(as in subparagraph 8.2, above) are not pay items. When performed
independently of other test procedures, payment will be made on the basis of the
THiS DRAWING IS NOT actual tests performed. Tests are to be assigned after evaluation of field data and
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
as needed for extrapolation of other laboratory test data. Index properties tests
FOR
MAnRIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
include:
CERTIFIED AND DATED
1) Moisture content
TEO/ROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT Ne INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NC REV
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
J'----- ~_
In accordance with ASTM D2216, "Laboratory Determination of Water

(Moisture) Content of Soil, Rock and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures".
2) Dry Unit Weight and Moisture Content
No standard test procedure. Test to be performed on Undisturbed Soil
I"
Samples, Denison Samples or Rock Core with unaltered natural volume.
Determine total dry weight of a sample of measured total volume, compute
and provide Dry Unit Weight and Moisture Content.
3) Specific Gravity
Testing generally limited to materials finer than the #4, U.S. standard sieve in
accordance with ASTM D854, "Specific Gravity of Soils", unless otherwise
REVISIONS
directed by the COMPANY. Reported specific gravity shall be based on the
average of tests performed on three specimens of the same sample.
PREPAJllt 8Y: -DQ..-,-1
DAn: J....l~2ltOt
4) Natural Relative Density
Natural dry unit weights expressed as Relative Density based on maximum

>illIl!ll1I!! and minimum densities, SUbparagraph E(2), following. Computation of relative
TKANSMmSJOJ'fMSET
PJAMf]NG DUAJtTMENT density is not a separate pay item.
~. D. Structural Properties Testing
Tests performed only on Undisturbed Soil Samples, Denison Samples or Rock

Core. The test program shall be planned for analysis of specific design problems
OPERATING DEPARThlENI' and testing limited to specimens obtained from carefully selected high quality
samples. Tests performed on mediocre samples will not be accepted or paid for by
the COMPANY. Rigid standardization of test procedures is not appropriate for
.these tests. The test procedures described in: Lambe, "Soil Testing for Engineers"
(Ref. 1) and/or ASTM, "Procedures for Testing Soils (Ref. 2) are considered to be
appropriate with variations as described below:
."".~
JaY, MSM
- 1) Permeability
Generally limited to the Constant Head Procedure (Ref. 2) on clean, coarse

DATI:,
grained soils having less than ten percent (10%) finer than #200 U.S. standard
sieve. Test procedures described in ASTM D2434, "Permeability of Granular
Soils (Constant Head)", may be used as a guide.
2) Unconfined Compression
T81S BRA,WING IS NOT Generally in accordance with the procedures outlined in Ref. 1. ASTM 02166,
TO BE USJ:D FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR "Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil", may be used as a
FOR
MATERIALS
OllDERING
UNTIL
guide. Trimming of specimens should be limited to "Squaring" of the ends (if
CERTIFIED AND DATED capping is not appropriate). Reduction of specimen diameter by trimming is
not acceptable. Ratio of specimen height to diameter should be less than
three and greater than two.
TEQ/ROT - 10/25108
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT Ne INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE Ne REV
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION ANO MATERIAL TESTING
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
3) Triaxial Compression
Generally in accordance with Ref. 1 and limitations on specimen trimming and

specimen sizes as described above for unconfined compression; and, triaxial
chambers and test platens must be of size to accommodate the specimens
I within these limitations. Triaxial tests to be paid for on a per test basis; either
as one of a series of tests at different confining pressures or as individual tests
at confining pressures approximately equal to "at-rest" lateral earth pressures
for the in-situ condition. The procedures described in ASTM 02850,
"Unconsolidated, Undrained Strength of Cohesive Soils in Triaxial
Compression", are generally adequate for that type of test. Consolidated,
undrained testing, with pore water pressure readings, as described in Ref. 1
will be required on all specimens tested at confining pressures comparable to
REVISIONS
earth pressure.
.....:I1'l-'---i
pREPARED BY:
4) Direct Shear
DATE' <d:::::>i~5i
Generally limited to tests on cohesionless soils or to consolidated shear tests
on fine grained soils. Test procedures generally as described in either Ref. 1
or Ref. 2. Consolidated shear test procedures outlined in ASTM 03080,
TRANSMlSSlONM5ET
~GDEPAJn'MINT "Direct Shear Test of Soils", may be used as a guide.
.<-?IJ1.. 5) Elastic Moduli of Rock
In general accordance with ASTM 03148, "Elastic Moduli of Rock Core

;.~
Specimens in Unaxial Compression".
~__ OPERA11NGDUAitTMENr
6) Consolidation
Test procedures generally as described in Ref. 1 or Ref. 2, except that

individual loads may be maintained for more than 24 hours if secondary
compression is a consideration. Test procedures outlined in ASTM 02435,
"One-Dimensional Consolidation Properties of Soils", may be used as a guide.
- Test will be paid for on a per-increment-of-Ioading basis.
7) Expansion Pressure
Specimen preparation and equipment as required in (6) above. Maximum

pressure required to maintain zero volume change for 24 hours following
saturation to be determined.
E. Compaction Testing
THIs DRAWlNG IS NOT Test to be performed on disturbed bulk soil samples representative of significant
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
materials. Structural properties tests may be assigned as required for geotechnical
FOil ORDERING
PdATI:'RIALS UNTIL
evaluation of proposed construction and will be paid for separately from
CERTlFlIDAND DATED compaction testing. Compaction tests, standards, and variations are as follows:
TEO/ROT - 10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO RE~
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
...J"-- _
1) Modified Compaction
In accordance with ASTM 01557, "Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-

Aggregate Mixtures Using 4.54 kg (10 Ibs) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) Drop",
Method "0"; but, compacted specimens shall not be re-used for successive
compaction determinations unless authorized by the COMPANY.
I 2) Maximum and Minimum Densities
In accordance with ASTM 04253, "Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a

Vibratory Table", and ASTM 04254, "Minimum Index Density of Soils and
Calculation of Relative Density". These test methods are applicable to soils that
may contain up to 15%, by weight, of soil particles passing a No. 200 sieve,
provided they still have cohesionless, free draining characteristics.
REVISIONS
3) California Bearing Ratio (CBR)

PuPAREDIJV: _Q.--!
DA.' (1:: 11041-1011
In accordance with ASTM 01883, "Bearing Ratio of Laboratory Compacted
Soils", and sample compaction performed as specified in subparagraph (1),
Modified Compaction, above, except that compaction energy will be varied as
directed by the COMPANY. Determination of maximum density and optimum
TRAN3M15SIONABSET
plA.N1UfG DDA.IC11dINJ' moisture by modified compaction is included and will not be paid as a separate
~
item. Pay items will include CBR 3-point, unsoaked and CBR 3-point, soaked (4
days surcharged, with swell measurements taken daily).
'}L-" ,
F. Chemical Analysis
OP.ERA.'mGDIPA.R.TMENI' Chemical tests shall be performed for water soluble salts as a percent by weight of
dried sample at 105 0 C to include sodium, potassium, SUlfate, chloride ions and
sodium chloride.
G. Other Testing
Other laboratory testing than that described above will be required for materials
~~"''-
av, MiSM
- quality control. Such tests are included in Schedule with appropriate ASTM or
other Standard designation.
DAn:
2.11 LASORATORY TEST RECORDS
All laboratory measurements and observations made for each test shall be recorded in
a near, legible manner or forms appropriate to the test being performed. Forms used
for this purpose are subjecUo the approval of the COMPANY. Copies of test data will
be provided to the COMPANY upon request. Original test data will be preserved for a
THIS ORAWING IS NOT period of three years after submitting the test results to the COMPANY or for a lesser
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCI10N OR
period if authorized by the COMPANY to destroy the data earlier.
.OR ORD:r.RING
I'A T.f,RIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
...... END OF SECTION II ......
TEQIROT - 10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NC RE\I
.JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 35
T238 A PTS08EM313 OF o
SAUDI ARABIA
49
SECTION 111- GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF FINAL LOGS
3.01 GENERAL
Final logs shall be prepared using information and pertinent results from field logs and
results of laboratory and/or field tests including Standard Penetration Test values.
I"
Overburden materials shall be classified according to ASTM 02487, "Classification of
Soils for Engineering Purposes"; and, ASTM 02488, "Description of Soils (Visual-Manual
Procedures)", for all investigations other than those, which are primarily intended for
evaluation of subgrade soils for pavement design. Soil designations and Group Symbols
shall be used on all logs, conforming to the Unified Soil Classification as outlined on Table
111-1, attached. Rock classification shall be based on standard geologic terminology with
applicable descriptive adjectives or numbers as shown on Table 111-2, attached. Subgrade
soils will be classified in accordance with ASTM 03282, "Classification of Soils and Soil
REVISIONS
Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes". Elevation and depths shall be
shown for any change of material, weathering, top of rock and bottom of hole. Other
pertinent information will be provided on the logs as described in the following paragraphs.
DA.TE: 1....:z...z&O.
"flt.ANSMISSION ABDl'
PlANNING DIPAllTMI'.NT
OPERAllNG DEPARTMENT
gAIJml!
.~;I -
.."..,.
BY, MSM
DATE:
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FoR ORDERING
MATERIALS IJNTIL
CERTIfiED AND DATED
TEQ/ROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENC RE\
SAUDI ARABIA
49
.'"
~
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ,.4~ ~J.,.....JI ~~I
~
$
e Unified Soil Classification System
PrimaryDivisionsfor Fieldand Group Laboralory Classification Supplementary CriterIa

TypicalNames
Laborattlrv Identification Symbol Criteria tor VlSualldenUflCQtion
Clean
Coarse-gmlned Gravel. Gravels. GW Wei graded gravels, c.. = D&JD1o lNide range in grainsize
~
{More than (Less than gravel-sand
soils (More than haW 5% mixtures, andsubstantial amounl
B
~
half ofmaterlal
finer than 3.
mh
oflhe coarse
fractionIs
larger
of material
smallocthan
little or no fine. grealer than 4 of an Intennedlate
particlesize.
Cl than No 4 No. 200
sieve is larger sieve sieve Cz=~
!JlanNo.200 size about siZe.) D,oxo.
between 1 and 3
GP Poo~y graded Not meeting both Predominantly one size
0;Z ~ N
- gravels, gravel-sand
mixtures. little or no
fines.
criteria for GW (unifonnly graded) or
a range of sues with
some lntennediale sizes
REVISIONS
mlsslno (aaDaraded).
Atterberg Atteroerg
~. Gravelswhh GM Silty gravels, Umits limits Nonplastic fines or
PKD'ABEDBY: below "A" aboYe"A"
BATEI 11-11-1'" -do- -do- fines. (More and gravel-sand- jne, line fines of low plasticity.
CHK'DB'ln ' ...,."...,. than 12% of sUtmixtures.

or PI lass
than 4
with PI
between
4& 7 Is
malerial border-
Atterberg
4UAll!II! smalterthan GC Ctayey gr2\Jels, and nmlts line case Plastic fines
No. 200 above MA"
TIlANSMmSJONASSET sieve gravel-sand<:Iay line, GM-GC
PI..ANN...-G DEPARTMENT
and PI
cRVr
...... Sands (More
than half of
size.)"
Clean sands
(less than
SW
mbctLlres.
Wen graded sands,

grBaler
than 1
C,,= Dm'Dl0 Wide range in grain
-cc , th. 5% gravelly sands, sizes and substantial

, ceerae
fraction of material nttle or no fines" qreeter than 6 amounts of aninter-
is smaller
than smallerthan mediate particle sizes
OPERATING nUAB'I'MINT No. 200
No.4 sieve sieve e,= l!Qt
size) size) D1D )( Om
between 1 and 3
SP Poorly graded sands Not meeting both Predominately one size
and gravelly sands, CffIeriafor SW (uniformly graded) or a
f1ttle or no files" range of sizes wlth
some intermediate sizes
mlsslna loaD ""'dBd'
g,!I'IIfW! Alterberg Atternerg
~I Ssndswilh 8M Silty sandS,sand- limits
beJow "AN
limit:;
above "A"
Nonpla.5tic finesor
.., ' ..<f",~ -do- -ee- nnes. (More silt mixtlres. line, flna -nnes of low pla.sticity.
n, or PI less wilhPI
MSM lhan 12% of lIlan 4 belWeen
DATE: Atteroerg 4&715
material SC ClayeV sands, limits border- Plastic flnes
above "A-
smailerthan send-clay mixtures line, line case
No. 200 withPl
sieve greater SM-SC
size}"' lhan1
Tough
ML Reaction ness.
Atterberg
Inorganic silts, very lmits Of}' 10 Near
THIS ORAWING IS NOT Silts and below "A" Atterberg
TO BE USED FOR days. fine sands, ruck line, limits Sirenglh Shaking Plastic
CONSmUCTION OR or PI less above "A"
FOR ORDERING (Liquid limitless (han 50) flour, snty or clayey lhan4 line Limit
MATERIALS IJNTlL Fine grained with PI
CERTIJiII:D AND DATED sails. fine Sands. between None to Quick (0 None
(More than half 4&a
at border- ~ighl slaw
malenals Is ilne case
smallerlhan CL Inorganic clays of Att.erberg ML-CL Medium None10 Medium
TEQIROT- 10125108
SCOPEOF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT N( INDEX DOCUMENT NO, PAGE N( RE\
1238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
I
I
a" SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ,,~JfS.U ~J~\ 4s~1
I,
!'
~
I
No. low limits 10

"
~

above ''A''
200 sieve slze.) -oo , to medium plasticity; line, higl1 very
with PI
(Visual: more gravelly clays, silty greater slow
I
than halfot clays.sanely clays. than 7
particles are so leanclave.
fine that they OL Ofg3nicsiltsand Slight
I
z cannotbe seen -do- organic sUI-clays Attefberg limits below ''A'' line. 10 Slow Slighl
i
f bv naked eve.\
MH
of low oIas1icltv.
Inorganic SillS. mica-
medium.
SIigl11 Slow Slighl
: B -uo-
ceous or
13 Sittsand clays. (Liquidlimit diatomaceous Al1erterg limits below "A" line. to 10 to
" greater than 50.) fine sands Of silts,
elastic ,itt,.
medium. none medium.
Inorganicclaysof
CH higl1 High Non. High
-do - -do plasticity, tat clays. Atterberglimits above "A" line. to lJerj
hiGh
.,; ~ M ~
OH 0fYanic clays of Medium None to Slight
z -do- medium to high AtlElfberg limils below "A"line. 10 very 10
REVISIONS Dlastldlv hioh slow medium
Peat, muck and
PI Dlhef High ignitionloss, LL and PI Organic color and odor,
-do- Highly organic soil highly organic sons. decreaseafter drjing. spongy feel, hquently
PREPAIU,D BY:
fibrous texture.
DATE: 11-01-200'
Materialswith 5 to 12 percent smallerthan No. 200 sieve are border1tne cases, designated:GW-GM, SW-SC, etc.
CHK'I>Br,- ~~
r
4lllI!WOI!
TlUNSMlSSIONASSET
P1AJ"fI"fJNCDIPA.lI.TMINI
Ie <R!Jf IPLASTICITY CHARTl I.

_.
:1,;....
........ ,~' / v
,," Illi/ /'
t
_.,-
r:'
~.I or
OPERATINGDiPAR1MEN'T
..# /
....... / ......
t~ ./
~ ~
/ V
~~-=
./
/ ./
~b/ @ l; /" ==em
- /"- :r...... I/": V ~M'_&
.. /
~ 'lM_ - - -. . . . .
AJ.J lIIr&u
['1'
BY: " MSM / ..- "/
./
IIi!I! .
DATE:
@JI!1II' CI .<
,./ I ./
V
IL IoCIl.
' .. ...,
II HI
lit II II III \1111 ,<II iii I. III :lit
"'lUTUI
IIII'Elio
TlUS DRAWING IS NOT I.RIiir.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION
FOR
MATERIALS
OR
ORDERING
UNTIL
-......-I.. ~
CERTIFIED ANDDATED
TABLE 111-1
TEO/ROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NC REII
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
JI...- _
i Guid,lo, Clas'ifica\ionaoo Oescrlptionol Rocks Wilh Errphasi, onlJlejr ~ineerjrq Propenles

Rock: Applicable descripl ive
General comments Key tophysical propel1l11sof rocks Example
Classification property IIIl!mbars
ANDSTCNE I The 25rockssha'MI on 'hllpl!1erep. Bedding enarac- 1 IM.sSv, ! I The physical propertiesof t he rock
resentlheprinclpalrocklypesencoUlller terlstics .:....._r:;+;;~=';-;;::::;:;-::.----+----+.=~~5'~;;:;:::,:.:.::~::...-I
2 lThintomed.Bedded I
I
may be designated on the boring logs
Psueklglcvariatlonsfrornl hesecomrnon 3 iAsSle ; I either byworddescrlption orbyusing
rockformstmrt have ooenglneerlng sig I the approprtatenumber oroombers
I
"
SHAlE
CCI\l
~PAC11ON
SHALE
CBlENTlll
I
niflcancBhavebeenomiUediftteJItionally.
Thus,white synit. Ofpegmatite Bfe recog-
nized ~y geOlogistasdi~fl:::er:::in"g:::ln;:cerl~'::.:-lr
respectslromgrlnite, toengineerslhese
difference arenot Sllfllcilfll practlcalsiJ' UthologicCbarac-
nlflcMte tovariouslJse ofany Iermbut t erlstles
'
8 iCiayey
9 iSh.ly I
!
I !iliaMl here forI heapplicable propert Ie
Thus, Ihe logforacore hole may beindi-
cal edon engineering drBWlngsl nt he
foUowingmanner:
I
I
_._-
INDURAllD granil e"inIdentifying these rackson 10 ICalcareousllimyl I !

(Xxxxx CLAY engineering drawings' ~theot herhand. 11 !Siliceousl lOGEXAMPLE
dloriteandpbbroareincludedbecause, 112 iSandy I
incertain secttonsof t hecountry, thlse 13 ISllty ! I
REVISIONS
I are recognized aslndlvidual torck Iypes.
part icularly indimanEilon lil;one and aggre
14IPlastlcseams
I I
j
I
I
gateq.rles. Therocksrntolsshown Hardness.andDegree 15 ;vefyOlftorDla.~
I u; cnthechart have been standardized bythe ofCementat Ion 16 1Soft - Canbescratchecl'NItllfil1gernaii
! E Jl
us.
PREPARED.IY: -'''''<---1
I ~ CBoIiglcal Survey anclllilYe beenuSld
eideJy brotherUnited Stat,sand
11 iModerately harll- Gan bescrached easily
! -.;thknlfe;cannotbes:ratchedwllh
1:::t::;:I:;l L1MESTOOE 2,9.17,22,
= 2T~34,3lI
SCHIST ~
:t
..!2o
..
D-
foreign agencies. Cooseqltenlly. when
symbGlsareused todlfferentiat e:rockson
; fingernail.
18 iHard~ Difficult loscratchedwithknife
I
=
.~io!i rnA'lWICKE boring logsor geologlcid crosssectlo/lS. 19!Veryhilrd.Cannol bescratchedwllhknlfe 1 = CEMElillD 13,17.27b,
~;i1!If . o only Ihe 5'jrnbolsappearlngonthls chart 2(1(Poorly cemented ! I~ SHALE 3:3.42.45
s
~
TBANSMmslONASSET
t-e:o;-. . PJARlZJTE .
w
~
I
sl'Iallbeuselllf arock suchastrachytels
~omilledon ba,lng log,thesyrnboJ repre-
21lCemented
I
!
i
PLANNING DU.uTMENT
! 22 iDense ! 17,33.45
J(1JI ..
w
w
X
23lAne
24 iMedium
I
f US,33
'~
5 25 iCoarse !
'II, I.' SOAPSTCJoJE
!~SERPElinNE
o
c
~
.. i
!
1 - - - - - - - 1 ~"'LA'-"TE=--_-1 i: ~
~
i f
o
I
OPEKATINGDEPARTMENT
ll:
..
:>
o
~
.~.;.;- D1CRITE
.-.-.-F=---I
.....+ ..
?r- ~ ~BBRO
===---1
..
BY,
."""..
MSM
~
OESITE
DATE:
BASA~_
(TRAP)
'., ,;~ TUfFffi
=TU"'fF::ia=REC=CIA,--j
AGG.~ERATE
.~;.::~~ CftFlOrVBRECClA
.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
1NOTES; i t SAMESOURC ASTABLEIII1 I ! I I I
t
CONSTRUCTION OR I
FOR ORDERING L ! 2. IGNEOUSROCKNOTCOMMONLYEllCOIJNTERIDINEASTERNPROVtlCE I' .L-_..........L.. I I
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTlJ'lED AND DATED
TABLE 111-2
TEQ/ROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NC RE~
SAUDI ARABIA
49
3.02 DENSITY OF SOILS
The density of coarse grained cohesion less soils and silts shall be described in
accordance with the following, where applicable:
A. Test Pits
I 1) Loose
2) Compact
Easily excavated with hand shovel
Difficult to excavate with hand shovel
3) Dense Must be loosened with pick to excavate with hand shovel
B. Soil Borings
REVISIONS
Where Standard Penetration Test (SPT) results are available and the penetration
resistance does not appear to be influenced by other factors (e.g., rock fragments,
DATE: lJ.OHIII'
cementation, etc.), the density may be described in accordance with the following
presumptive relationship:
lIllI!!lXIl! NUMBER OF BLOWS (N)

TRANSMISSIONASSET
PRESUMPTIVE DENSITY PER 305 mm (12 in.)
~:fiJf~
Very Loose 0-5
v-:
Loose 6 -11
OPERATINGDEPAll1MENl" Medium 12 - 23
Dense 24-35
1 - - - - - - 1 1 ...
Very Dense 36-50
(Not applicable without
......... - further description) Over 50
>y, MSM 3.03 CONSISTENCY OF SOILS

"A.TE:
The consistency of cohesive clays and silts (where applicable) shall be described in
accordance with the following:
A. Test Pits
nus DRAWING IS NOT 1) Very Soft - Easily penetrated several inches by fist
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
2) Soft - Easily penetrated several inches by thumb
CEkTlnEDAND DATED
3) Medium - Can be penetrated several inches by thumb with moderate effort
TEQlROT - 10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENC RE\I
T238 A PTS-OSEM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
1,..........- . - -....- - , , . . . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,

I e-
,i $
4) Very Stiff - Readily indented by thumbnail
~
i 5) Hard - Indented with difficulty by thumbnail
B. Soil Borings
The consistency of cohesive soils encountered in test borings shall be described

primarily on the basis of unconfined compressive strength either from actual laboratory
tests or estimated strength of samples based on pocket penetrometer results or the
evaluations described in paragraph A, above. Consistency descriptions are shown
below for various ranges of unconfined compressive strength. The use of SPT values
without benefit of other evaluations is not acceptable. Where supporting data is
available, correlations of presumptive SPT/consistency relationship should be
established for a given location or site. Where adequate data are not available, the
REVISIONS
consistency may be described on the basis of the presumptive relationship shown
below, only if it is clearly indicated on the log as such:
PREPAUP n: orr...
DATE: 11-02:.2"'
RANGE OF UNCONFINED
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH NO. OF BLOWS (N)
CONSISTENCY ute
or kg/cm 2 PER 305 mm (12 in.)
,
Very Soft Less than 0.25 Less than 2

Soft 0.25 to 0.50 2 t04
Medium Stiff 0.50 to 1.00 5 to 8
Stiff 1.00 to 2.00 9to 15
Very Stiff 2.00 to 4.00 16 to 30
Hard Greater than 4.00 Greater than 30
3.04 CEMENTED OVERBURDEN MATERIALS
. The nature and degree of cementation shall be completely described. The terminology
used to describe cementation shall be defined in the report.
3.05 ROCK
'. ',..--
- After identification of major rock type on the log, the physical properties shall be described
BY, MSM in accordance with descriptive adjectives or numbers as shown in Table 111-2 and in the
DAn, --I
following sequence:
A. Bedding Characteristics - including thin beds or interbedded materials of

different types of rock
B. Lithologic Characteristics
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BI: USED FOR
CONSTRllCTION OR
C. Hardness and Degree of Cementation
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIJ'IED ANDDATED D. Texture
E. Structure (including Degree of Fracturing and/or Fragmentation)
TEO/ROT - 10125/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO RE\
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGA1l0N AND MATERIAL TESTING
T238 A PTS-oSEM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
F. Degree of Weathering
G. Solution and Void Conditions
H. Swelling Properties
I. Slaking Properties
3.06 FIELD NOTES AND RECORDS
All notes recorded on field logs pertinent to the evaluation and analysis of subsurface
conditions shall be transcribed on the final logs, with particular emphasis on ground water
conditions and general drilling operations experienced in test borings. Other records and
REVISIONS
observations, including subsequent variations in piezometric records of ground water
elevations shall also be incorporated in the final logs where applicable.
PUJ'AUDBV: -""_-I
3.07 FINAL LOGS
Examples of final logs of test borings and test pits are illustrated on Plates 111-1 and 111-1 a,
utilizing COMPANY Standard Form 15109 (11/83). Blank copies of these forms will be
l'BANSM}SSlO{'ll ASSET
J'lA,NNlNG DIl'A.RTMDIT available to the CONTRACTOR as needed for specific PROJECTS.
c.RM
OPERATllG DIPAJ.'IMENT
?'
MlAj .. ", ...
-
BY, MSM
DATE.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BI: USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDI.RING
MATER.lALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
TEO/ROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT Ne INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NC RE~
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
~'-' SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY 1'4jfSl.l ~~~\ ~~I
i:"..,
SEC BORING LOG
~" PROJECT No.
'-'
LOCATION: (CONTRACTOR:
INORTH: TYPE OF BORING:
COORDINATES BORING NO.
lEAST: DIA. OF BORING:
GROUND ELEVATION: DIA OF UNDISTURBED SAMPLE: DATE COMMENCED:
...
z: DEPTH AT GROUNDWATER TABLE: CASING HAMMER WT. & DROP: DATE COMPLETED:
sa
MEASURED AT: HOURS,ON SAMPLING HAMMER WT. & DROP: SUPERVISOR:
~
Cl ~
w
Q.
I::
>" I::
illQ. 5 I-~ ~ iijZ
ij
-'
0
Z
0
~
l-
w
W
J: ~ 0 "
W
OJ !
OJ
::; U
I.L
W W ~
::; ~
Q. W
~ u:: DESCRIPTION REMARKS
~ ~ ::;
tii -' (f)
\;:
i
~ 0
~
Q. ::J iij
::; z i1i 0 5 oJ
~ 1;:
0 (f)
..J ::; 5(f)
OJ 0 0 :5o l!j
0
z: ~ ~
- -
REVISIONS
----1
PREPAREDlY: - ~
DAn: 11-1%-1011
CHK...'r"
~
""'''''r'
~
-
~
TRANSMISSION ASSET
~ us
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
-
'-?lIt" l"'""
~
- ~
----.:!
OPJ:RATJNG DD'ARTMI:NT
-
~ ~
-
-!.
~a;f1J! L- - ~
,
"".
.y; ~
MSM
DATI::
-
~ 2E
-
10 33
LEGEND:
SPT 1: STANDARD PENETRATION TEST & NUMBER
THIS DRAWING IS NOT U 1: UNDISTURBED THIN WALL TUBE SAMPLE & NUMBER
TO BE USED I'OR
CONSTRUCTION OR R 1: ROCK CORE RUN 8. NUMBER
roR ORDERING 0 1: DENISON SAMPLE 8. NUMBER
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
ROD ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION
REC RECOVERY SHEET 1 OF 2
PLATE III - 1
TEQIROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTNC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENC RE'
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
e SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY 1'4..>fSll ~..l."....JI4s~1
~
-e
~ SEC BORING LOG

PROJECT No.
STATIONICOORDIN NORTH:
BORING NO.
MCTOR:
z w
~ $
...0 5 lu
.. ~ ~
Q.
;; ffi ffi W "#.
~
~
~ o
0:
!z ~
f:! w
5 ~
en
z :; ~
~ ... ..
~ w z :; u: DESCRIPTION REMARKS ;;
! ... . ~ ~15 ~ ...5
II)
It -'" 5en iij
~
Q.
~
.
u
s 0 :;
~ :;
o II)
en
~
o
Q.
w
0
- ...22
~
.,;
Z
~ H
- -
REVISIONS
~ ~
PREPARED IY:
-
DATa: 1....1-100.
CHK"J) 'Ilt'" ..~ ---..E

".
- ~
~
TJlILNSMJSSION ASSET ~
pJ.A1iN]NC DIPAllTMEI"IT
-
<-R1Jf ~ ~
p
"
-
~
OPERA.TlNG DD'AltTMENJ'
- ~
-
~ ~
~(..-
~
-
--!2
-
Iy:
MSM
~
DAn: -
20
LEGEND:
SPT 1: STANDARD PENETRATION TEST & NUMBER
U 1: UNDISTURI?IOD THIN WA~L TUBE SAMPLE & NUMBER
R 1: ROCK CORE RUN & NUMBER
D 1: DENISON SAMPLE & NUMBER
THIS ORAWING IS NOT ROD : ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR REC : RECOVERY SHEET 2 OF 2
FOR ORDERING
MATERIAL'; UNTIL
CERTIFIED ANDDATED PLATE 111- 1a
*** END OF SECTION III ***
TEO/ROT - 10/25/08
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
SECTION IV - GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
4.01 GENERAL
The wide variation of the scope of services required for individual COMPANY PROJECTS
precludes the use of a single format for all PROJECTS. However, most investigations will
I be considered to be either Preliminary Investigations or, Detailed Investigations for Final

Design; and, the report should be so identified where applicable. These Guidelines outline
the general format for reports for both types of investigations - the reports differing only in
the scope of WORK included therein.
4.02 SCOPE
The results of the investigations shall be presented in a final report, which shall be written
IIEVlSIONS
for the purpose of assisting and guiding designers in making their decisions. Discussion of
broad regional physiographic and geological features will be limited to the tangible
PIW'AIWlBY, -..:1:1_--1 engineering significance and a reasonable understanding of these features in the
selection of a site and determination of the appropriate design. The discussion shall be
focused principally on description of rock, soil and ground water conditions that are
significant in the design or will affect construction. The discussion shall be supplemented
by geologic maps, cross-sections and boring logs as applicable to clearly illustrate existing
1'1tANSMISSlOIIl' ASS~
PlANNING DEPAilTMINI conditions and the relationships of these conditions to the PROJECT. In support of its
conclusions, the discussion shall present the result of field and laboratory investigations in
e..fb1
,....... .
relation to the designs recommended in development of the PROJECT. The report shall
contain specific design recommendations. Technical terms used in the report shall be
clearly defined and used consistently throughout the report. Where variable subsurface
conditions exist, generalized recommendations will not be satisfactory. Specific
OPEB.ATlHGDUAR'IMENT recommendations will be made for specific PROJECT areas or variations in foundation
conditions.
4.03 FORMAT
The final report shall consist of, but not limited to, an effective combination of discussions,
tabulated data, laboratory testing results, backup calculations, soil and geological
illustrations, and reference bibliography to depict the conditions that are of engineering
.'., significance. The discussion in the foundation report should always include alternate
M~M
BY,
foundation systems. The presentation shall include the following:
DATI:; -----I
A. Summary
As a preamble to the report, a cover letter in the form of a summary shall be prepared.
This letter shall summarize the site description, the surface and subsurface soil
conditions and properties, the resulting engineering considerations, and
THIS DRAWING IS NOT recommendations for design of foundations and other elements of construction
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR influenced by subsurface conditions.
I!OR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFl.IDAND DATED B. Scope of Work
TEQIROT - 10125/08
SAUDI ARABIA
49
The Scope of Work shall describe the type of design information that is to be furnished
by the report; e.g., for design of foundations for overhead transmission lines, substation
buildings or other types of structures, slabs-on-grade, roads, parking areas, deep
i excavations, pipelines, buried cables, cable tunnels, etc., as well as the description of
i
the scope of the investigation conducted by the CONTRACTOR.
!
,
i
u
l:l
C. PROJECT Description
The PROJECT Description shall include the geographic location of the site with respect
. "
to existing landmarks, populated areas, etc., the type of construction; the structural
characteristics including the allowable total and differential settlement; moments,
thrusts (including uplift) and Vibratory loads imposed on foundations; neamess to
,,; existing or planned structures; and any other special foundation design considerations.
z
Where some elements of the PROJECT description are not known at the time of the
REVISIONS
preparation of the report, the COMPANY shall provide best estimates for these
elements and the report shall clearly indicate that these are estimates.
D. Site Conditions
i -
TRANSMlSSION;.\SSU'
PLANNlNG DIFAJmlD,NT
~
The existing surface conditions at site shall be described as to grades, access,
drainage and/or any other feature, which may have a bearing on the WORK, including,
where appropriate:
1) Significant and controlling topographic conditions
2) Geomorphology
. OPERATlNCDEPARTMENT 3) Existing construction and/or evidence of previous constructions and man-made site
alterations (e.g., grading, dumping, etc.)
4) Vegetation and land use
5) Evidence of ground water and water levels in existing wells or exposures
AA;;:;mD
,...,.,,.,
)JY. MSM The section on Field Investigation shall describe the type of equipment used; the
DAn, - - - - I number, location, diameter and depth of borings or other types of explorations; the
working procedures; sampling methods and frequency; and type of field tests
performed. Where piezometers have been installed, the type, depth and location, as
well as an accurate as-installed drawing of each piezometer shall be included. Logs of
explorations and the results of all field tests shall also be part of this section. This
section may be presented in a separate volume if voluminous.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
'1'0 BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnoN OR
F. Laboratory Tests
FOR ORDERING
MATERlALS UNTIL
CER.TlFIED AND DATED The section on Laboratory Tests shall contain a description of the sample extraction
procedure, the type of tests performed and all test results. This section may also be
presented in a separate volume if voluminous.
TEQIROT - 10/25/08
I SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE Ne RE\
SAUDI ARABIA
49
G. Subsurface Conditions
The section of Subsurface Conditions shall give a detailed description of the

subsurface materials at the site. Ground water conditions (including artesian) shall be
discussed. Drawings of subsurface profiles shall be included where necessary or
desirable to illustrate subsurface conditions. Where appropriate, this section shall also
include: description of geology with a special discussion concerning composition and
structure of the rocks; engineering description of soils and the relationship of soil to the
bedrock; principal engineering properties of the rock and soil as determined by
conventional field and laboratory investigations; and, foundation conditions that present
special engineering problems.
0;
z:
H. Engineering Analysis
REVISIONS
The section on Engineering Analysis shall contain a description of the geotechnical

considerations involved in developing a suitable foundation system for the PROJECT
DAn.. l .... Z';UO.
structures. A statement of the analysis performed to evaluate the foundation
CHK'.By,- "~
, requirements and the results of these analyses, shall be included, as well as a stUdy of
alternate foundation systems where applicable. Settlement criteria and the results of
settlement analyses shall be described. Consideration of ground water and its chemical
TIAN'SMlSSION 49SIT
PlANNING DRAIlTMI.NT effect on foundation concrete and rebar shall be discussed. Ground water, as related to
~
excavations and to foundations located near or below the ground water table, shall be
discussed. For all foundation cases, the factor of safety employed in the analysis, shall
be stated; and, both "ultimate" and "allowable" values of the appropriate geotechnical
,
design parameters shall be provided. "Net-allowable" stresses shall be defined.

Specific geotechnical parameters to be used for design shall be supported by
OPDlAtING])lPAR'I'MENf computations based on an acceptable method of analysis. Computations do not need
to be included in the report but, shall be retained in permanent files by the
CONTRACTOR; and, copies provided to the COMPANY upon request. Alternate
foundation designs shall be presented along with consideration of construction
problems and current use of foundation construction techniques as practiced in the
SEC System.
~j.
,"",-
BY, M:SM The section on Recommendations shall give clear, concise, positive recommendations
DA.TE:
of the design criteria for each type of foundations, which is to be used, to govern the
design of all foundations for the PROJECT; and, shall give specific recommendations
for the design of other elements of construction, which may be influenced by
geotechnical considerations, as defined in the scope of WORK for a given PROJECT.
Where appropriate, this shall include:
THiS ORAWING IS NOT 1) Bearing capacities for various types of shallow foundations, e.g. spread footings,
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
mat, thickened edge slab, etc. Recommend type best suited for site.
FOR ORDI:RD'iG
MATERIALS UNTD...
CERTIFIED ANDDATED 2) Deep foundation capacities; including drilled piers, caissons, driven piles, etc.
Discuss tension, compression and lateral capacity of foundation system.
TEO/ROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NC RE~
SAUDI ARABIA
49
3) Estimated foundation settlements or swell
4) CBR and "K" values for pavement and floor slab design
5) Lateral earth pressures (active, passive, at-rest, etc.)
6) Potential seismic and dynamic soil problems
7) Slope stability, soil and rock
8) Site development including site preparation and filling
g .. N _
9) Foundation and subsurface construction excavation
REVISIONS
10) Ground water considerations
11) Drilling and blasting problems

DATE: 11-GZ-1'"
i CIIX'D.y,-"'''''Y'"''
/ 12) Rocl< bolting and anchoring problems
13) Special foundation treatments, e.g. surcharging, unsuitable material replacement,

grouting, etc.
14) Recommended elevation for foundations
15) Recommendations for further investigation and analysis, if required
OPERATlNG DUA.RTMINT J. Certification
Both the engineer responsible for the foundation analysis and a principal of the
COMPANY shall certify the accuracy of the contents of the report by affixing their
signatures thereto.
K. Illustrations
~
~~rIJ(.~-r- The illustrations provided with the report do not necessarily require a separate section.
BY, M~M Illustrative material including any of the following that are applicable to the PROJECT
DAn;, ----I will be used in the final report.
1) PROJECT Location Map
:
2) Plan of Exploration
THIS DRAWING JS NOT 3) Logs of Explorations

TO BI: USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
Ji'OR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
4) Test Data and Resulting Charts
CERTIFIED AND DATED
5) Site Geology Map
TEQJROT - 10125108
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
6) Top of Rock Contour Map
7) Geologic Structure Map

i
8) Soils and/or rock cross-sections shall show correlation of overburden and rock units
including such significant features as water levels, water losses, core losses, and
solution zones. Cross-sections shall emphasize geologic structure, show depths of
II primary and secondary weathering, and interpret top of rock for construction
purposes.
9) Photographs of all rock cores recovered as well as photos illustrating pertinent site
conditions. All photos shall have the following information on the back of the photo
.; ~ H H
or under the photo, if it is mounted: Name of PROJECT, site location, date of photo,
" CONTRACTOR, location of photographer and direction that the photo is viewing, a
REVISIONS
brief description of main points in photo, name of photographer, a sequential
number for each photo and notes showing if photo is a "Pan-View'. An arrow
PUPAREDBY:
showing number, location and direction of the photo will be noted on the plan of
I DAn:~ 11-01-2101
explorations for the PROJECT. Negatives for field photos and core photos will be
"""'DB~ ~
retained by the CONTRACTOR in a permanent file.
"
AUR!WIl
i
,
TRANSMI5SI0~ ASSEl'
PlANNING DEPAIlnIINT *** END OF SECTION IV ***
,
J(IJJ
~
OPERATJIIfGDUA1l1MlNl' REFERENCES:
1. Lambe - Soil Testing for Engineers

2. ASTM - Procedures for Testing Soils
h-4J'~MSM
BY,
DATE:
THIS DRA.WING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERnFIED AND DATED
TEO/ROT - 10/25/08
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NC INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NC RE\I
T238 A PTSOBEM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
APPENDIX-IX
SCADA, DSM AND SOE REQUIREMENTS

TRANSMISSION ASSET DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT

TELECOM SYSTEMS PLANNING DIVISION
ROOM 1-202E, SEC-EOA HQS, DAMMAM
APPENDIX IX
oz SCOPE OF WORK AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR

REVISIONS
SCADA REQUIREMENTS
DRAWNBY
DATE
CHK'DBY
ENGINEElUNG DIPI'.
DLSlFP/Gsa
PTS11 CM01 0
2011-10-04
OPERATING DEPT,
DATIl 2011-10-04
OCTOBER 2011
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
APPENDIX IX TO SUBSTATION MAIN SOW-TS PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SEC-COA Saudi Arabia C494 A 11CM010 of7 o
Scope Of Work And Technical Specifications For

PT8-11CM010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
0 Item HEADING DESCRIPTION

z ~ N ~
No.
PAGE
REVISIONS
DRAWNBY
I. GENERAL 3
DAn:
CHK'DB'V
II. SCADA SCOPE OFWORK 4
~ SCADA MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS AND TECHNICAL
ENGINEERING DEPI'. III. 7
SPECIFICATIONS
~ IV. STANDARDS 7
DLSlFP/{fsc
201 HO..()4
V. ATTACHMENT 7
OPERATING DIPT.
~z
DATE; 2011-10-04
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED 'OR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERlALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
I. GENERAL
1. This document, which is the Appendix IX of the titled project technical specifications,
contains the Scope of WorkfT echnical Specification (SOWfTS) for the SCADA,
requirements at the substations associated with the titled project, as indicated
Attachment I to this Appendix IX.
2. CONTRACTOR shall expand the SCADA systems in these sites to accommodate

requirements resulting from the expansion work detailed in the Main PTS of this
project.
3. CONTRACTOR is required to make clause-by-clause compliance statement to this

SCADA scope of work and to the standards indicated in this document for each type
REVISIONS of equipment.
DIlAWNBY
4. To ensure that CONTRACTOR's bid and design proposal is accurate and reflecting
DATE
the most recent situation in site, CONTRACTOR is required to participate in pre-bid
CHK'DBY
site surveys or request for same and clarification with SEC operational site personnel
to gather and ascertain technical data necessary for him to bid, design, and install the
~ SCADA equipment, such data as the type of existing SCADA /DSM/SOE equipment,
ENGINEERING DIPT.
expand ability, availability of installation spaces and spare terminations and terminal
blocks, voltage sources, signal points and related.
DLS/FPl6SQ 5. Contractor shall provide the spare parts as specified in the Appendix V of the main
2011-10-04 PTS.
OPERATING DEPT.
6. CONTRACTOR shall also provide and test for SCADA system, 20% of offered
modules as operational spare parts.
7. CONTRACTOR shall provide and test additional SCADA spare points of 20% of
Contractor-installed points.
8. CONTRACTOR shall provide required equipment/material from approved

manufacturers.
9. CONTRACTOR shall provide all cables, wiring and terminations required at all
DATE: 2011-10-04
locations to install SCADA.
10. CONTRACTOR shall comply to SEC standard 01-TMSS-01, Rev. 01, "General
Requirements for All Equipment/Materials".
11. CONTRACTOR shall provide all components and accessories required for the
satisfactory operation of the WORK covered under the scope of this PROJECT.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT 12. CONTRACTOR shall provide at least one (1) year warranty for the hardware and
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR workmanship, in addition to the availability of a local vendor/agent through which
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL installed hardware's can be procured.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
13. CONTRACTOR shall test on site all his offered equipments/components using
calibrated standard test instruments the calibration of which are traceable to SEC-
approved calibration laboratory. Testing should be done in the presence of
COMPANY engineer/technician.
14. CONTRACTOR shall prepare and/or revise and of SCADA system site-specific
documentations for the involved stations which shall include, but not limited to, as
shown below of the RTU standard 38-TMSS-03, Rev 1, 38-TMSS-04, and 38-TMSS-
06 documentation requirements. Submit two 2) sets of documentations to the
COMPANY both in hard copy and soft copy MS Excel and Microstation formats in CD
media) for review and approval before finalizing:
a. Signal points list

b. Field interface & functional drawings
c. RTU equipment modification drawings
REVISIONS
d. RTU software configuration
e. Bill of materials
DIlAWNBY
.ATE
CHK'DBY
15. Contractor shall ensure that expansion/modification works do not degrade
performance of existing system.
APPROVED
16. Contractor shall ensure that added expansion modules/materials inherit the
ENGINEERING DEFT.
performance of existing system.
17. Contractor shall install expansion modules/materials compatible with existing

DLSlFPIG!a ' equipment to be expanded and manufactured by the same company.
2011-10-04
18. All SCADA documentation, drafting, and drawings shall comply with the SEC drafting
OPEltATING DEPT. standards specified in the main Scope of Work and provided in both in soft and hard
copies.
1 - - - - - - - 1 II. SCADA SCOPE OF WORK

Stipulated in below paragraphs is SCADA system requirements for the project indicated
in Section 1, above.
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install SCADA RTU expansion equipment at the
above indicated substations in order to meet the additional SCADA telemetry point
DATE: 2011-10-04
requirements. The SCADA equipment shall consist of, but not limited to, the following:
a. Expansion RTU I/O Controllers
b. RTU Panels for additional controllers, as necessary
c. IFC terminal block
d. AC/DC power supply
e. Substation Equipment Interface
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR f. SCADA Wiring, Cables & Connectors
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED g. RTU Reconfiguration
h. Additional Transducers
i. Additional Panels for Transducers, as necessary
j. Additional interposing relays
k. Additional Panels for interposing relays, as necessary
I. Operational Spare Parts

m. Operation and Maintenance document of added equipment
2. CONTRACTOR shall prepare and/or revise the SCADA drawings and SCADA Tele-
Information Plan sheets of the substations and submit to the COMPANY for review
and approval before finalizing. Submit new/revised SCADA Tele-Information Plan in
hard copy and soft copy (in a CD).
3. CONTRACTOR shall implement the SCADA Tele-Information plan requirement for the
REVISIONS
substations in this project.
DIlAWNBY 4. CONTRACTOR shall submit the SCADA-signallist of all alarms, indications, controls
DAn: and measurement on the proper prescribed SEC forms, with details of terminations in
ClIK'DBY the marshalling kiosk and proper labeling of signal to be entered in PCC computers for
prior approval of the SEC concerned department.
5. CONTRACTOR shall install SCADA transducers and required number of transducers
ENGINEERING DEPT.
shall be as per SCADA signal list related to the reinforcement of each extension in this
project. Characteristics and rating of the offered SCADA transducers shall be in
accordance with Technical Specification TS-16.23/ R.1.
DLS/FPIGOO '
2011-10-04 6. Transducers shall be rack mounted, not rail mounted.
7. All transducers shall be programmable type and software and necessary cabling and
OPERATING DEfT. tools shall be provided to program them.
8. Transducers shall be DC-powered and for each row of transducers one DC supply
MCB shall be provided.
9. Where multiple racks shall be employed in the RTU rack, each rack shall have its
own power supply. The power to each power supply shall be secured by an individual
MCB mounted in the RTU cabinet.
~
@DAn: 2011-10-04
10. Interposing Relays and Transducers shall be installed in separate cabinets.
11. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that characteristics and ratings of the offered transducers
should be programmable and compliant to Technical Specification TS 16.23/Rev 1.
Analogue input modules shall be +/- 2.5mA input from transducers for bipolar and 0-5
mA for unipolar measurands.
12. Interposing Relays shall be plugged-in type and not soldered.
13. DC-powered lights shall be provided in the panels that will be added, as applicable,
as well as in the SCADA marshalling cabinets.
THlS DRAWING ]S NOT 14. For each RTU cabinet, the rating of power converters, transfer switches, AC/DC
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR power supplies and circuit breakers etc, shall be based on the load of maximum
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL number of RTU I/O racks permissible in a cabinet.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
GSQ\fnL2011-1O-04_PFC_HAILI...APPENDIX-9_PTS-11CMOlO_PLT-C494.docx 2011-10-04
15. All motorized Disconnects/ Isolators & Ground Switches shall be controllable
(Trip/Close), while all non-motorized Disconnects/Isolators & Ground Switches status
(Open/Close) indication shall be monitored from the control center through SCADA.
16. The open position and close position contacts for each DisconnecUlsolator, as well as
for each Earth SWitch shall be provided and wired to the SCADA Automation System.
17. Auto-re-c1oser local/remote status and other related alarms shall be provided, as
applicable.
18. CONTRACTOR shall ensure all the adaptation work required such as extension of the
marshalling kiosk (MK), interposing relays, and all cabling from the source to the MK
and further to the RTU for each substation in these project, shall be in accordance with
Technical Specification TS-16.32/R.4.
19. Modification/adaptation works in the existing RTUs should be done by
REVISIONS
CONTRACTOR if necessary to effect the proper operation of installed expansion
RTUs and be compliant to Adaptation Work TS-16.32, Rev. 4.
DRAWNBY 20. CONTRACTOR shall prepare procedures and conduct installation check-out and
DAn: performance testing in coordination with COMPANY REPRESENTATIVES, which
CHK'DBY
shall include, but not limited to the following:
a. SCADA SAT: A Site Acceptance Test shall be conducted and shall be witnessed
APPROVED
by SEC Representative at the Substation after RTU installation. It should consist
ENGINEERINGDEPT.
of testing all input cards and controllers in conjunction with a protocol simulator.
((i\i b. SCADA System Pre-Commissioning: Verification using the SCADA configurator

& simulator of proper field wire terminations at the IFC; correct point assignments
DLSlFP/~
2011-10-04 in the RTU configuration; and accuracy of analog input, status input and control
output points.
OP~RATING DEPT. c. SCADA System Commissioning: Ultimate test to verify that all SCADA points are
tele-metered and controlled from the Power Control Center from the signal
sources/ transducers, marshalling kiosk, expanded RTUs are telemetered and
controlled from the Power Control Center.
21 Points lists for the SCADA shall be established by CONTRACTOR using the single-
line diagrams provided in the main SOWITS and applicable tables of points, other
;DATE: 2011-10--04
guidelines provided in the SEC standard TES-P-119.27, Rev 1, Supervisory Control
and Data Acquisition. Finalization of all point lists shall be done during base design
stage subject to approval of COMPANY.
22 All cabinets shall be labeled with their functions. Labels shall be of permanently
engraved type, properly fixed with wordings approved by SEC. Ferruling shall be
made at both ends of all wirings
23 All applicable standards, equipmenUmaterial specifications, testing/ inspection/
commissioning, documentation/ drafting requirements that were specified for the
SCADA RTUs in the main Scope of Scope of Work shall be applied for the SCADA
RTU expansion in this project.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
24. Preparation of RTU module sheet shall conform to IEC 60870-5-104; information
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
object addresses, should be presented in un-structured format.
CERTlFIED AND DATED
25. Preparation of checklists shall be in conformity with the LDC format.
JOBORDERNO. PTS- 6
26. The Analog Input Modules shall be adapted for the inputs from electrical transducer
as specified in TS-16.23!R.1.
27. External Interposing relays shall be installed at the controlled devices if the RTU
Relay Output Contact rating cannot sustain the current rating of controlled devices.
28. Status indications for breaker and isolators should be double-pole not single pole.
29. Spare points shall be wired to SCADA interface! marshalling kiosk. In addition, all
points shall be configured in the RTU and should be tested locally.
30. Auxiliary contacts that are used to initiate alarms should be normally open.
31. Contractor shall provide SCADA Protocol Simulator that shall meet the following
technical specifications:
a. Contractor shall provide SCADA Protocol Simulator that shall meet the following
technical specifications:
REVISIONS
b. A portable PC or equivalent with at least PCMCIA, RS232 and LAN 100BaseT
DRAWN BY ports.
DATE
CHK'DBY
c. PCMCIA MODEM and LAN 100BaseT Cards with corresponding connectors,
cables and other RTU-related hardware interfaces.
~
d. Licensed ASE2000 SCADA Simulation software or equivalent installed in the PC
INGINEElUNG DEPT. and capable to simulate the basic functions of a SCADA master station and
SCADA RTU using licensed IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-104 protocols.
32. The necessary documentation of all works done in this project shall be submitted to
DlSlFP~ SEC. All SCADA documentation, drafting, and drawings shall comply with the SEC
201l-10~4
drafting standards specified in the main Scope of Work and provided both in soft and
hard copies.
OPERATING DEPT.
III. SCADA MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

1. Contractor shall install expansion modules, transducers, and interposing relays
similar specifications to existing and made by the same manufacturer compatible to
existing SCADA system and shall be compliant to Company Standard Specification
38-TMSS-03 Rev.1.
IV. STANDARDS
DATE= 2011-10-04
1. 01-TMSS-01, Rev. 1, General Requirements for All EquipmenUMaterials
2. 38-TMSS-03 Rev.1, Remote Terminal Unit
3. TES-P-119.27 Rev.1, Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
4. TS-16.23 Rev 1, Measuring Transducers

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR 5. TS-16.32 Rev 4, Substation Adaptation Work for Remote Control and Monitoring
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERlALS UNTIL V. ATTACHMENT
CERTIFIED AND DATED
1. Attachment 1, List of Substations Under PTS-11CM010
ATTACHMENT 1
List of Substations Under PTS-11 CM01 0
01 8901
02 8902
03 8903
04 8904
05 8911
06 8914
07 8915
08 8918
09 8922
10 8077 in Quwayah
11 7780
12 7782
APPENDIX -X
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SCOPE OF WORK FOR IN FACTORY, THEORETICAL,

PRACTICAL AND IN - KINGDOM ON-THE JOB TRAINING
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 This APPENDIX establishes the scope and schedule of WORK and
means of initiating the WORK to be performed by CONTRACTOR and
describes or references the specifications, instructions, standards and
other documents including the specifications for any materials that
CONTRACTOR shall satisfy or adhere to in the performance of the
WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK in such a professional manner in

order to achieve the following COMPANY training Objective:
REVISIONS
"To enable COMPANY personnel to engineer, test, operate, troubleshoot,

maintain, install and commission the new equipment/System and related
components contained, therein, including, but not limited to, the
equipment/system productively, independently, competently and
effectively."
AI'I'IlOVED
1.2 Description of Training required
CONTRACTOR shall provide Three (03) types of training with new

equipment installed under this contract.
The "Theoretical" and the "Practical" training on new technology, used in
the equipment to be installed by CONTRACTOR, shall be held In-Factory
site (Out-of-Kingdom). The "In-Factory site" means the location of the
facility of the manufacturer that bears the new equipment brand and where
the new equipment's main and major parts were originally manufactured
(not the location where the equipment was assembled).
The "On-the-Job" training shall be held on Project-site (In-Kingdom).

The "Project-site" means the location of the project where the
~ equipment I system will be installed.
,.f 2. COMPANY AND CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED MATERIALS, TOOLS AND

BY: I EQUIPMENT
!
DATE:
2.1 Company Supplied Materials, Tools and Equipment
None
2.2 CONTRACTOR Supplied Materials, Tools and Equipment

THIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR 2.2.1 CONTRACTOR shall identify and supply all related training
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING Materials, Tools and Equipmentfor all critical training topics for the
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED ANDDATED
equipment required for testing and demonstration purposes, as
approved by COMPANY, under this contract.
APPENDIX -X OF PT5-11CM010
PLANTNO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. AGE NO. REV.

TRAINING REQUIREMENTS FOR POWER FACTOR
CORRECTION IN HAIL I----t--+----+---+--I
APPENDIX-X 1
JOB ORDER NO. HAIL SAUDI ARABIA PTS OF 0
C494 A 11CM010
17
2.2.2 CONTRACTOR shall furnish the entire necessary program

curriculum, course materials, training aids, trainee textbooks and
similar other special tools and equipment necessary for the In-
Factory theoretical and practical training and certification training
courses, respectively, in MS Power Point or equivalent blended
learning tool with high quality animated graphics. These training
materials will include, but not limited to, the following:
a) Original Documentation of each Course for every attendant

b) Documentation for SEC Trainers
c) Computer Based training packages
2.2.3 COMPANY shall approve the designated facilities for each

respective training course as applicable at least Three (03)
REVISIONS
weeks prior to the start of that actual training course to ensure
I'RI:I'AREDBY: .......
that all teaching aids, materials, tools and equipment are
DATE; ..t functioning as per course requirements and to the satisfaction of
COMPANY.
CBK'DBY, ~r'----i
2.2.4 CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all approved course manuals
shall be at the designated training site at least Three (03) working
API'ROYED
days before the start of each training course.
2.2.5 CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all End-User training manuals,
textbooks, workbooks, user guides and training-related documents
and computer-based soft copies of actual training presentations in
MS Power Point or equivalent blended learning tool with high quality
animated graphics, editable text and professionally printed labels
must be developed in English/Arabic.
2.2.6 CONTRACTOR shall provide a classroom for the training
furnished with tables, chairs and the following items to be used in
performing the work.
a) One (1) LCD Projector
b) Flip Chart with Holder
.lDI!lIII! c) White Board
d) Lap Top (Portable Computer)
P e) Audiolvisual equipment
BY:
"/ 2.2.7 CONTRACTOR shall provide Audio/visual equipment for both
DATE;
J theoretical and practical training, which will include, but not limited
to, appropriate films, slides, transparencies, flip charts, video and
software packages and any other relevant teaching aids, materials
and supplies necessary to support, maintain and successfully
implement the training program.
mIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTllUcnON OR
2.2.8 CONTRACTOR shall include the Operation and Maintenance of all
FOR ORDERING Equipment and Tools in order that the COMPANY Engineers and
MATERIAlS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED Technicians can perform productively, independently, competently,
APPENDIX -X OF PTS-llCM010
PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. AGE NO. REV.

CORRECTION IN HAIL I----+---+-------f---+--I
APPENDIX-X 2
JOB ORDER NO. HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A
PTS
OF o
11CM010
17
..J ~
effectively, and safely duties and tasks related to the newly

installed equipment in the subject contract.
2.2.9 CONTRACTOR shall use the installed equipment/system prior to

the final testing/commissioning phase of the project. In
accomplishing this, CONTRACTOR shall provide all required test
I equipment, local Craft Interface Devices and other items, which

are required to accomplish the training tasks stated in this Scope
of Work and technical Specifications.
2.2.10 CONTRACTOR shall handover to COMPANY all required test

equipment/s, but not limited to, Simulator, local Craft Interface
Devices, tools and other equipment, which are required to
accomplish the training tasks, installation and commissioning after
REVISIONS
completion of the training program as stated in this Scope of
()
Work ..
DATE: A 3. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS FOR THE EQUIPMENTS/SYSTEMS
CHK'DBY: /
3.1 CONTRACTOR's customized theoretical and practical training shall cover
topics that are applicable to Saudi Electricity Company's Department
API'IIDVED
activities including, but not limited to, the following:
3.1.1 CONTRACTOR shall design and implement a theoretical and

practical training course(s) on eqUipment to enable COMPANY
personnel to engineer, operate, troubleshoot and maintain the
equipment and individual components productively, independently,
competently, effectively and safely in order for the COMPANY
personnel to be able to perform their job related duties and tasks
typical to the works described in the SOW/PTS referencing the
types and features of equloment in this contract.
3.1.2 CONTRACTOR shall implement the training course(s) in such a

way that the participants shall benefit, gain detailed knowledge
and experience hands-on training based on the practical and
theoretical aspects of the subject matter and other similar
activities using "off-line" system modules.
BY: I 3.1.3 CONTRACTOR shall ensure the implementation of the training

DATE: course to be at a coverage rate of 60% for the practical portion and
40% for the theoretical portion. Theoretical portion shall be given a
minimum time and shall be concentrated on topics, which will
support the practical hands-on activities of the training session.
3.1.4 CONTRACTOR shall provide theoretical and practical background

THIS DOCUMENT ]8 familiarization on design and operation of equipment and its
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR assembly / disassembly procedure, as part of the equipment,
FOR ORDERING
MATElUALS UNTIL installed under this contract.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
APPENDIX -x OF PTS-11CM010

CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----1--+----;---+--;
APPENDIXX 3
JOB ORDER NO. HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PTS
OF o
11CM010
17
3.1.5 CONTRACTOR shall provide practical hand-on training sessions

on the operation, maintenance, testing, applying/ retrieving system
parameters and, troubleshooting with assembling /disassembling
installation and commissioning of each type of the
equipment/system components using actual equipment installation
and "off-line" equipment for simulation and for showing practical
I 3.1.6
examples
CONTRACTOR shall provide intensive training and appropriate

practical hands-on training to COMPANY personnel to enable them
to set-up, configure, test, operate, troubleshoot, repair, maintain,
install and commission the new system and related equipment
installed under this contract and provide actual practical examples
during contract implementation.
REVISIONS
3.1.7 CONTRACTOR shall provide in-factory training by the original
PREPAREDBV: A equipment manufacturer of all types of the equipment/system that
DATE: .L shall cover both the theoretical and practical aspects relevant to
CHK'DBY: I the equipment/system to be used in this contract.
3.1.8 CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement all training programs

utilizing reliable and well-established computer-based
developmental training procedures, methodologies and techniques
as approved by COMPANY to illustrate the installation and
operation of new equipment/system provided under this contract
3.1.9 CONTRACTOR shall submit its detailed training action plan during
the Bid Phase of the contract for COMPANY approval. The final
approval of training program will be after the final approval of all
new equipment/system provided under this contract.
3.1.10 CONTRACTOR'S detailed training program shall include but is not

limited to items such as duties, tasks, number of training days and
sessions per task, training locations and methods, equipment,
modules and testing/training aids needed in order for the
documentation proposed for recording and documenting the
training.
BY' "
!l
I
-+---1 3.1.11 CONTRACTOR shall complete the training at least Three (03)
DATE, J
weeks prior to the start of pre-commissioning activities of the works,
as part of the construction project under this contract.
3.1.12 CONTRACTOR shall submit a list of relevant training

requirements at the completion of the training that include
provisions addressing future vendor's technical training courses
~ DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR and/or follow-up training needed and requirements on new
CONSfRUCIlON
roR
011
OIlDEIUNG
technology and/or equipment related to this contract to ensure that
MATEIlIALS UNTD. COMPANY employees stay abreast of the latest technological
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
advances in the field.
PLANTNO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. ~AGENO. REV.

CORRECTION IN HAIL 1----+---+------1---+--1
APPENDIX-X 4
JOB ORDER NO. HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PTS OF o
llCM010
17
1
3.1.13 CONTRACTOR shall conduct the training In-Factory site(s) in

accordance with the Training Program approved by COMPANY for
the equipment/system under this contract.
3.1.14 CONTRACTOR shall train COMPANY personnel to handle

operation and maintenance of the equipment/system installed under
I this contract in order to enable them to successfully handle all types

of abnormalities without jeopardizing the system availability and
reliability.
3.1,15 CONTRACTOR shall train Maintenance Technicians to successfully

operate, configure, troubleshoot and maintain equipment/system
installed under this contract.
REVISIONS
3.1.16 CONTRACTOR shall furnish One (01) complete set of course
materials (hard copies) to each trainee, which will include, but not
PREPAREDlY: n limited to the following:
DATE: ..Y a. All handouts
CBK'DBY:
b. Student Textbooks
J c. Workbooks
3.1.17 CONTRACTOR shall furnish Two (02) additional complete sets of

hard and soft copies of course materials with color graphics to the
COMPANY Training Services Department (TSD) with permission to
copy whole or part of the course materials to be used in the future
in-house training courses delivered by the COMPANY Training
Department, which will include, but not limited to the following:
a, Computer-based soft copy of actual training presentation
in MS Power Point or equivalent blended learning tool with
high quality animated graphics, editable text and
professionally printed label.
b. All handouts
c. Student Textbooks
d. Workbooks
e. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (Original in Color and
Quality)
3.1.18 CONTRACTOR shall submit the detailed Training Schedule to

BY: COMPANY for review and approval, including Two (02) additional
DATE: complete sets of hard and soft copies of training manuals for all
disciplines at least Thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled training.
COMPANY shall review and approve the training material.
3.1.19 TRANSFER OF TECHNOLOGY

CONTRACTOR shall wave all legal rights to transfer of technology
THIS DOCUMENT IS
pertaining to Training, Documentation and hands-on sessions
NOT TO BE USED FOR provided and shall ensure that the transfer of technology from
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING CONTRACTOR to COMPANY staff will be achieved as outlined in
MATEJUALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED this contract.
APPENDIX-X OF PTS-11CM010
PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. ~AGENO. REV.

CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----1--+----+---+--1
APPENDIXX 5
OF o
11CM010
17
1
3.1.20 NUMBER OF TRAINEES

CONTRACTOR shall accommodate COMPANY Engineers /
Technicians on dates mutually agreeable between COMPANY and
CONTRACTOR. (Refer Attachments)
3.2 Theoretical Training (In-Factory, Out-of-Kingdom)
i
CONTRACTOR's customized training course(s) shall cover topics that are
applicable to Saudi Electricity Company's Department's activities, but not
limited to, the following:
3.2.1 General overview of engineering concepts and requirements on the

installation, operation, maintenance and other provisions related to
individual key equipment items included as part of the new
equipment/system covered under this SOW/PTS.
REVISIONS
3.2.2 Engineering concepts of each individual key equipment item, the
interrelationships between the engineering concepts and the normal
PREPARED BY' --t?"'---t
DAn,'....tl
-:=p..._-1
operation and maintenance of the equipment/system to be installed
under this contract.
CHK'DBY, +/----1
I
3.2.3 Overview on the routine operation, maintenance, electrical testing

APPROVED
and commissioning aspects of individual key equipment items
included as part of equipment/system installed under this contract.
3.2.4 Normal Preventive Maintenance procedures for individual key

equipment items included as part of the equipment/system including
periodic (scheduled) Preventive Maintenance requirements for the key
equipment items as well as non-periodic Preventive Maintenance
procedures for each individual key equipment item (e.g., testing and
troubleshooting up to main components including system data
retrieving and setting application).
3.2.5 General theory of operation & design of equipment/system, sub-

assemblies and modules, which comprise portions of individual key
equipment items to be installed as part of the equipment/system.
lE!JltlIY!
3.2.6 Interrelationships through use of schematic and block diagrams
between equipment assemblies and modules that will be useful in
~ routine and corrective maintenance of the new equipment/system
BY: I installed under this contract.
DATE:
3.2.7 Requirements and precautions to be followed by SEC trainees in

operating, maintaining, configuring, removing and replacing equipment
sub-assemblies and modulesand individual key equipmentitems.
3.2.8 Interconnection requirements through use of signal flow diagrams

nns DOCUMENT IS and schematics for individual equipment contained as part of the
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CON5fRUcnON OR new equipment/system installed under this contract as well as
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
specific installation practices and precautions, which the installers
CERTIFIEDANDDATED and maintenance personnel must follow as part of the operation and
maintenance of the new equipment/system.
FOR POWER FACTOR

PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. AGE NO. REV.
CORRECTION IN HAIL 1---+---+-------1---+--1
APPENDIX-X 6
PTS
OF o
llCM010
17
n
1
3.2.9 Fault indicators on key equipment items on the equipmenVsystem

and how to use these indicators to locate equipment and module
faults that will cause malfunction of equipmenVsystem items.
3.2.10 Operation and set-up of equipment's software installation and

configuration implementing IEC standards and other applicable
i 3.2.11
protocols/programs as it relates to the master station's data base
and communication requirements.
Operation and set-up of an adequate Simulator equipped with

software and hardware to operate, test, troubleshoot, maintain,
configure and pre-commission the equipmenVsystem installed
REVISIONS
3.2.12 All items mentioned above applicable to the equipmenVsystem to
be installed under this contract found in SOW/PTS.
PREPARED BY: -rT--i
DATE:
,.jI 3.3 Practical Training (In-Factory, Out-of-Kingdom)
CHK'DBY= I
CONTRACTOR's customized practical training shall include, but not limited
to, the following:
APPIlOVED
3.3.1 Locate on actual equipment individual key equipment items of the
equipmenVsystem along with individual equipment sub-assemblies
and modules used in each key equipment item as part of an actual
equipment installation.
3.3.2 Familiarize/Understand the interconnections between various

equipment items by tracing in an actual equipment installation
cabling, which is used for equipment interconnection, as applicable.
3.3.3 Locate important test points on the "off-line" equipmenVsystem and

demonstrate the operation of basic test equipment that will be used
for troubleshooting and locating the faulty components of the
equipmenVs being monitored through the basic test equipment.
l:iIIIlIJI:Il
3.3.4 Demonstrate set-up and operation of the Simulator, which will be
jJ used to diagnose, troubleshoot and operate the basic and featured
functions of the new equipmenVsystem, as well as to pre-
BY; { commission the new equipmenVsystem.
DATE:
3.3.5 Demonstrate on an "off-line" system, the important maintenance

precautions, which must be taken with all modules and sub-
assemblies and other components as part of the equipmenVs
whose maintenance precautions may include the removal of
equipment modules and sub-assemblies with power removed from
nus DOCUMENT IS the equipment using anti-static ground mats, operating mechanism
Nor TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR and other items of the respective equipment installed under this
FOR ORDERING
MATERIAlS UNTIL
contract.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
APPENDIX -X OF PTSllCM010
PLANT NO. INOEX DOCUMENT NO. AGE NO. REV.
CORRECTIONIN HAIL 1----1---1----+---+---1
APPENDlX-X 7
JOB ORDERNO. HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PTS
OF o
11CM010
17
f
3.3.6 Demonstrate troubleshooting of the equipmenVsystem by fault

isolation and location procedures down to the equipment sub-
assembly/module level and possibly component level, through the
trainer's introduction of simulated module faults on an "off-line
equipmenVsystem.
IS
3.3.7 Understand the operation of fault indicators on "off-line" equipment
and demonstrate through simulation on "off-line" system the activity
of each fault indicator on the equipmenVsystem as well as any
interrelationship between fault indicators.
3.3.8 Demonstrate, thoroughly, routine maintenance and testing using

computerized equipment test set approved by COMPANY along
g ~ ... ~
with demonstrating and developing a software module for automatic
REVISIONS
testing, using the required special tools and instruments.
PREPAlIEDBY: I? 3.3.9 Demonstrate calibrating and applying equipment gauge, any

DATE: .J monitoring device setting, fault retrieving and changing equipment
CBK'DBY: J setting from state to state using both HMI keypads and the external
lap top computer.
APTROVED
3.3.10 Demonstrate testing of the equipment utiliZing computer aided
digital file to verify system performance of all equipment to be
installed under this contract and found in SOW/PTS for the subject
project.
3.3.11 Demonstrate equipment's software installation and configuration

(CMP, DMT, Config Pro, etc) implementing IEC60870-5-101,
IEC608870-5-1 04, Conitel C300 and other applicable
protocols/programs to prepare the equipment for successful
communication, data acquisition and/or supervisory control with the
master station.
3.3.12 Demonstrate retrieving event data from the equipment file and
retest the equipment using the same data to operate the
computerized test equipment to evaluate the overall equlpment
performance.
3.3.13 Demonstrate Hands on Training on maintenance and diagnosis of
equipment problems including performance of all electrical tests
DATE: required during routine and corrective maintenance.
3.3.14 Understand the assembly and disassembly procedure of
equipment.
3.3.15 Test and troubleshoot equipment accessories including, but not
limited to, temperature gauges, Buchholtz relay, sudden pressure
THIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR relief valve, cooling system etc, as applicable.
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS
CERTIFIED AND DATED
UNTIL 3.3.16 Demonstrate all electrical tests for the equipmenVs required for
commissioning and diagnosis.
APPENDIX -x OF PTS-11 CM010
PLANTNO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. ~AGENO. REV.

CORRECTIONIN HAIL t----1f----t----+---+--1
APPENDIX-X 8
OF o
11CM010
17
3.3.17 Demonstrate all inter-tripping schemes for all protective equipment
3.3.18 All items mentioned above applicable to the equipment installed by the
CONTRACTOR under the contract and found in SOW/PTS for the
subject project.
i
3.4 ON-JOB TRAINING (ON PROJECT-SITE, IN-KINGDOM)
(For the Eguipments specified in Attachment)
3.4.1 COMPANY shall assign minimum of Two (02) COMPANY personnel

to work with CONTRACTOR on full time basis and witness the
actual field installation, data administration, acceptance testing and
commissioning and On-Job Training activities.
REVISIONS
3.4.2 CONTRACTOR shall be conducting the entire commissioning and
pre-commissioning processes of this project on the COMPANY
approved sites/locations, In-Kingdom, under the supervision of the
assigned personnel.
3.4.3 CONTRACTOR shall clearly define and document all relevant

duties, tasks, demonstration time frame, tasks duration and
methods of recording and documentation as developed by
CONTRACTOR for COMPANY records of the full-time OJT
activities as approved by COMPANY. A copy of all the
documentation shall be given to each trainee with full oral
explanation and On-Job presentation.
3.4.4 CONTRACTOR shall provide its personnel and COMPANY

participants with all required Safety Gear during the entire
performance of this contract including, but not limited to, hard hats,
safety shoes, gloves, and ear protection during the In-Factory (Out-
of-Kingdom) as well as On Project-Site (In-Kingdom) training.
3.4.5 On-Site Access (In-Kingdom)

COMPANY shall arrange for the On-Site access of
CONTRACTOR's personnel to the Project-Site construction /
installation on daily basis, as scheduled and agreed upon by the
BY, _+-1_--1 CONTRACTOR and COMPANY.
DATE, J
4 TRAINING COURSES REQUIREMENT
CONTRACTOR shall plan and conduct the training course(s) in a satisfactory

time and place to COMPANY, prOViding COMPANY with all required Course
tHIS DOCUMENT IS
Documentations, EqUipment and Tools required to satisfy the training objectives
NOT TO BE USED FOR (testing, troubleshooting, operation, maintenance, installation and
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING commissioning) in accordance with, but not limited to, the following requirements:
MATERIAl.S UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
APPENDIX -X OF PT5-11 CMOl 0
PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. ~AGE NO. REV.

CORRECTION IN HAIL t----Ir--+----+----+-;
APPENDIX-X 9
C494 A
11CM010
17
4.1 Training Courses Time Plan and Location Requirements
4.1.1 DAILY SCHEDULE

CONTRACTOR shall conduct each training course Five (05) days a week,
Eight (08) hours daily including One (01) hour prayer and lunch break for
the training duration agreed upon by the CONTRACTOR and COMPANY.
I 4.1.2 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

CONTRACTOR shall use English/Arabic language in making all
presentations, progress reports, documentation and other matters of
instruction and administration and shall ensure that the oral presentations
and instructions are easy to comprehend by the participants.
4.1.3 CONTRACTOR shall provide training facility, training materials and

REVISIONS
food/refreshments for COMPANY's and CONTRACTOR's Personnel at
In-Factory (Out-of-Kingdom) and On Project-Site (In-Kingdom) training
PREPAlIED BYl n facilities during the scheduled training days.
DATE, ~
OIK'DBV:
4.1.4 CONTRACTOR shall submit the preliminary training plan/proposal during
the Bid Phase of the project, followed by his detailed plan/proposal
during the Base Design Phase of the project.
AWROVED
4.1.5 CONTRACTOR shall furnish COMPANY with detailed sequence/duration

of each specific task for review and approval by COMPANY's
Department and Training Department at least Six (06) weeks prior to the
start of all training courses.
4.1.6 The actual number of training days will be dependent on the COMPANY
approved training plan submitted by the CONTRACTOR.
4.1.7 CONTRACTOR, in his Bid Price for Training, shall provide the "per day"
increase or decrease in cost (from the overall training package price) for
increased or decreased number of training days, respectively.
4.1.8 CONTRACTOR's detailed training shall include, but not limited to, items
such as duties, tasks, number of training days and sessions per task,
training locations and methods, equipment modules and testing/training
BY: aids needed for the documentation and recording of training program.
DATE:
4.1.9 CONTRACTOR shall provide comprehensive in-depth training for

engineers. The training shall cover all hardware and software aspects of
the new system and related equipment to be installed under this contract.
The training shall make the engineers proficient to carry out all functions .
independently and without external support.
TIllS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOil
CONSTIlUCfION Oil
4.1.10 CONTRACTOR shall train COMPANY's Operations personnel to handle
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
operation of all the system and related equipment installed under this
CEIlTIFIEDANDDATED contract. The training shall enable them to successfully handle all types
of abnormalities without jeopardizing the system availability and reliability.

CORRECTION IN HAIL 1---1--+-----+---+--i
APPENDIX-X 10
OF o
11CM010
17
4.1.11 CONTRACTOR shall train COMPANY's Maintenance Technicians to

successfully operate, troubleshoot and maintain all the system and
related equipment installed under this contract.
4.1.12 CONTRACTOR shall train COMPANY's Maintenance and Engineering

personnel in order to make them capable of running and maintaining the
i system and related equipment immediately after the testing and

commissioning.
4.1.13 CONTRACTOR shall train the COMPANY personnel on a training

Simulator that simulates for system and related equipment.
4.1.14 CONTRACTOR shall provide all the required training equipmenVs

including, but not limited to, Simulator, tools and all other equipment
REVISIONS required to meet the training objectives (testing, troubleshooting,
operation, maintenance, installation and commissioning).
PREPAIIED BY, f}
DATE: :/ 4.1.15 CONTRACTOR shall handover all training equipmenVs including, but
(
CHK'VIY:
not limited to, Simulator, local Craft Interface Devices, tools and all other
equipment used for training to the COMPANY after completion of the
training program.
4.1.16 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arrangement of a fully equipped

training facility for Out-of-Kingdom training. A COMPANY representative
shall inspect and approve the facility for adequacy and safety prior to
commencement of training.
4.1.17 CONTRACTOR shall determine the most suitable location for training
phase within the eqUipment factory facilities and its specific activities
before the actual training begins. COMPANY reserves the right to
approve or reject CONTRACTOR's recommended training location.
4.1.18 COMPANY shall approve the designated facilities for each respective
training course as applicable at least Four (04) weeks prior to the start of
that actual training course to ensure that all teaching aids, materials,
tools and equipment are functioning as per course requirements and to
the satisfaction of COMPANY.
BY: I
DAlE:
4.1.19 The training shall be conducted in accordance with the Training Program
approved by COMPANY for system and related equipment supplied by
CONTRACTOR under this contract.
4.1.20 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety of COMPANY

trainees and shall take necessary measures to ensure safety of trainees
nilS DOCUMENT IS providing all required safety equipment such as, but not limited to, hard
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
hats, safety shoes, gloves, and ear protection.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS IJNTIL
CERTIFIEDAND DATED 4.1.21 CONTRACTOR shall design and conduct separate courses for
COMPANY's Operation and Maintenance Technicians and Engineering
APPENDIX -x OF PTS11CM010

CORRECTION IN HAIL 1---+---+-----+---1---1
APPENDIXX 11
JOB ORDERNO. HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PTS
OF o
11CM010
17
1
personnel with relative depth of understanding of the subject area,

respectively.
4.2 Documentation, Equipment and Tools Requirements
CONTRACTOR shall conduct the training course(s) for equipment/s and related
I components in accordance with the following requirements:
4.2.1 CONTRACTOR shall furnish COMPANY with an advance copy of the

course manuals and detailed daily course outlines for review and
approval by COMPANY's Department and Training Department at least
Six (06) weeks prior to the start of all training activity.
4.2.2 CONTRACTOR shall provide the course curriculum, all course

REVISIONS materials, testing and measuring equipment/materials that are required
to accomplish the training objectives (testing, troubleshooting, operation,
PREPAUDBY: n maintenance, installation and commissioning).
DAn: J
,I
CHK"DBY:
4.2.3 CONTRACTOR shall generally use the "off-line" new
I
equipment/system, which the CONTRACTOR is installing.
APPROVED
4.3 Course Manuals and Completion Certificates
4.3.1 CONTRACTOR shall tailor the curriculum for the theoretical and
practical training courses to meet COMPANY's requirements and
specifications.
4.3.2 CONTRACTOR shall furnish course manuals and teaching aids

including handouts that are necessary for demonstration and use during
all course presentations.
4.3.3 CONTRACTOR's instructor(s) shall prepare handouts including

photocopying requirements prior to the start of all training courses.
COMPANY will make no photocopying of course manuals and/or handouts
lm!IlIm! duringthe implementation of any training course.
BY:
J I
4.3.4 CONTRACTOR shall issue individual completion certificates to all
participants completing the theoretical and practical training courses,
DAlE: J respectively.
4.3.5 CONTRACTOR shall use In-Factory assembled models of proposed

equipment/system actually panel wired as simulator for training on the
respective equipment to be installed under this contract.
TIIIS DOCUMENT IS 4.3.6 CONTRACTOR shall conduct the theoretical and practical In-Factory
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR
training by the original supplier for the equipment/system installed under
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
this contract.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
CORRECTION IN HAIL 1-----1f--+----+---+--f
APPENDIX-X 12
OF o
11CM010
17
4.3.7 CONTRACTOR shall submit Two (02)-sets (hard and soft copies) of all
detailed documentation related to proposed equipment and related
equipment at least Sixty (60) days prior to shipment of the proposed
equipment for approval and shall include, but not limited to, the
following:
a. General Layout Drawings
i b. Equipment Specifications (electrical, mechanical, environmental

conditions, etc)
c. Equipment description and schematic diagrams
d. Assembly drawings
e. Wiring diagrams
f. Bill of materials
g. Installation and Maintenance instruction manuals
h. Certificate of compliance for all tests stipulated in the standards
REVISIONS
i. Test procedures and reports covering FAT and commissioning tests
j. As-built drawings for each installation site
All documentation shall be also supplied on CDs to work on computers

for further updating and modifications.
APPROVED
5 CONTRACTOR's MANPOWER AND QUALIFICATIONS
5.1 COMPANY and CONTRACTOR recognize that the services to be

performed by CONTRACTOR under this contract require an extremely high
degree of expertise and experience.
5.2 CONTRACTOR shall provide the required course development and

instructional staff including management, supervisory, course instructor(s) /
trainer(s) / writer(s) / developer(s), and clerical and similar support staff
necessary in order to successfully develop and implement all training
course(s).
5.3 CONTRACTOR shall ensure that instructor(s) / trainer(s) / writer(s) /

developer(s) have adequate qualification in their respective area of
~
expertise subject to COMPANY approval.
jZ 5.4 CONTRACTOR shall ensure that instructor(s) / trainer(s) possess

BY: I Certification from the Manufacturer stating that they are qualified
DATI:: ) instructor(s)/trainer(s) to conduct training in the offered equlprnent subject
to COMPANY approval.
5.5 CONTRACTOR shall hire course instructor(s) / trainer(s) / writer(s) /

developer(s) from the manufacturer of the respective equipment installed
under this contract and this manpower should be proficient in English and
THIS DOCUMENT IS Arabic, highly trained for the development and delivery of course materials,
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSl1lUcnON OR in both languages, theoretically and practically.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
5.6 CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY, the resume'(s) of the
proposed instructor(s) / trainer(s) / writer(s)/ developer(s) with their
APPENDIX -x OF PTS11CM010
PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. ~AGENO. REV.
CORRECTION IN HAIL 1---+---+------1---+--1
APPENDlXX 13
OF o
11CM010
17
professional background relative to field requirement(s) prior to their

approval as instructor(s) / trainer(s) / developer(s) in this project as part of
the Contractor's detailed training plan, which shall be submitted during the
Base Design stage of the project.
5.7 COMPANY reserves the right to reject any proposed instructor(s) /
I 6.
trainer(s) I writer(s) / developer(s) who does not meet the required
qualifications and CONTRACTOR shall immediately replace such
instructor(s)/trainer(s)/writer(s)/ developer(s) with an acceptable one.
CERTIFICATION
6.1 CONTRACTOR shall implement a certification training course that certifies

and authorizes all attendees of COMPANY to troubleshoot, operate,
REVISIONS
engineer and maintain CONTRACTOR's equipment in order not to void or
negate CONTRACTOR's or manufacturer's warranty.
PREPARED BY: ()
DATE, ;.,.(-+t---I 6.2 CONTRACTOR shall ensure that participant technicians fully understand
CHK'DBY, 1_---1
...
and perform related tasks by themselves.
6.3 CONTRACTOR shall ensure that participants meet all the requirements of
APPROVED
the coursers).
6.4 CONTRACTOR shall provide a full, complete and detailed summary of all
the required detailed tasks and duties covered under the certification
training coursefor each participant on both phases, theoretical and practical.
6.5 CONTRACTOR shall certify each trainee upon Company's concurrence

based on each participant's evaluation reports for the different training
programs in accordance with the approved certification program or
COMPANY record,
6.6 CONTRACTOR shall implement a certification training program and issue

individual certification to each participant, upon completion of the course,
certifying that each participant is capable, qualified, certified and authorized
to troubleshoot, operate, engineer and maintain the system and related
y equipment to be installed under this contract as required in order not to
void or negate CONTRACTOR's or manufacturer's warranty.
BY:
DATE:
6.7 COMPANY reserves the right to select participants for the certification
training coursers) from any COMPANY department and/or operating area.
7 COMPANY TRACKING AND LOCATION OF TRAINING
TlDS DOCUMENT IS 7.1 COMPANY reserves the right to assign a COMPANY employee to monitor
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCI'ION OR
and track training participants' progress and program implementation
FOR
MATERIAlS
ORDERING
lJNTlL
through classroom/on-site visits at any time and at any stage of the
CERTD'IED AND DATED implementation of any training course.
APPENDIX -X OF PTS-11CM010
CORRECTION IN HAIL 1----+---+-----1---+--1
APPENDlXX 14
JOB ORDERNO, HAIL SAUDIARABIA C494 A PTS OF o
11CM010
17
17
7.2 Training Location
7.2.1 CONTRACTOR shall conduct the theoretical, practical and

certification training course(s), respectively at the CONTRACTOR's
In-Factory training facilities (Out-of-Kingdom) by the original
manufacture of the equipment to be installed under this contract.
7.2.2 CONTRACTOR shall also conduct the On-Job training at the

COMPANY designated and approved training facilities !Training I
Project Site(s) (In-Kingdom) where the System and related
equipment will be installed under this contract.
7.2.3 COMPANY shall approve the designated facilities for each

respective training course as applicable at least Four (04) weeks
REVISIONS
prior to the start of that actual training course to ensure that all
teaching aids, materials, tools and equipment are functioning as per
PH:PAREQBY: IJ course requirements and to the satisfaction of COMPANY.
DATE: ..d'
CHK'DBY:
v
I 8 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
8.1 CONTRACTOR shall comply with all the safety and loss prevention
requirements of the COMPANY relative to work permits and safe working
procedures at In-Factory (Out - of Kingdom) or on Project Site (In-
Kingdom) installation and commissioning of the new and related equipment
8.2 CONTRACTOR shall submit a loss prevention program for COMPANY's

approval prior to commencement of the WORK. For items not included in
the program, CONTRACTOR shall refer and adhere to the safety rules,
procedures and precautions set forth in COMPANY's Accident prevention
and construction safety manuals available from COMPANY.
8.3 COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall assign Two (02) Safety Engineers at
site for supervising and monitoring the safety aspects of the WORK being
JJa\III]!;!! performed by CONTRACTOR personnel.
BY:
J I
8.4 CONTRACTOR shall provide its personnel and COMPANY participants
with all required Safety Gear during the entire performance of this contract
DATE: including, but not limited to, hard hats, safety shoes, gloves, and ear
protection during the In-Factory (Out-of-Kingdom) training.
8.5 CONTRACTOR shall provide its personnel with all required Safety Gear
during the entire performance of this contract including, but not limited to,
hard hats, safety shoes, gloves, and ear protection on the project site (In-
THIS DOCUMENT IS Kingdom) during the installation/construction period of this project under
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR this contract.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
APPENDIX-X OF PTS-llCM010
PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. AGE NO. REV.
CORRECTION IN HAIL 1----1--+----+---+--1
APPENDIX-X 15
C494 A llCM010
17
o
1
9. TRAVELING REQUIREMENTS
In order to satisfy the theoretical and practical training requirements approved by

COMPANY in this Scope of Work, the selected participants shall attend
CONTRACTOR's customized training course(s) at In-Factory (Out-of-Kingdom),
manufacturer's facility on the new and related equipment to be installed under this
contract, monitor and assist in the installation/construction and commissioning
activities on the new equipment on Project-Site In-Kingdom.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide transportation/airfare, accommodations and

food for the selected COMPANY personnel that will participate in the different
training activities as indicated on the relevant sections of this training program,
based on, but not limited to, the following minimum requirements:
REVISIONS 9.1. For the airfare transportation requirements, CONTRACTOR shall provide
for either lATA (International Air Transport Association) standard lATA
PREPAllEDBY, f1 standard economy class roundtrip airfare tickets from King Khalid
DATE:
;,,4 International Airport at Riyadh / Saudi Arabia to the "Out-of-Kingdom"
CHK'DBY: I activities locations
I
9.2. For the ground transportation requirements, toIfrom activities at Out-of-

Kingdom locations to hotels/airports/restaurants which participants will be
utilizing as well as for ground transportation from participants homes locations
on the Central Province of Saudi Arabia to Intemational Airport at Riyadh, the
CONTRACTOR shall provide ground transportation through use of established
and reputable taxillimousine services for these COMPANY personnel.
9.3. For accommodations portion, CONTRACTOR shall provide accommodations

for each COMPANY selected participants in five star hotels near the activities
locations. In providing these accommodations portion, each participant will be
provided both breakfast and dinner ("bUffer style) for the entire duration of the
hotel stay.
9.4. For food requirements at the activities locations, CONTRACTOR shall

provide a "buffet" style lunch either at activities locationslfacilities, or at a
hotel/restaurant near the activities locations for each of the COMPANY
participants.
BY:
9.5. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing local ground/airfare
DATE:
transportation to CONTRACTOR's participating personnel to/from COA
(Saudi Arabia) regardless of the travel frequency; local transportation
to/from the designated work sites (In-KingdomlOut-of-Kingdom) lodging, all
meals, health insurance and medical coverage and all other expenses for
CONTRACTOR's staff while residing in Saudi Arabia during the
installation/construction period.
THIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCf]ON OR
9.6. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all VISAs and licenses required
FOR ORDERING and all expenses/fees incurred by CONTRACTOR's staff in coming to and
MATERIALS VNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED departing from Saudi Arabia.

CORRECTION IN HAIL 1----1f---+----+---+--1
APPENDIXX 16
JOB ORDER NO. HAIL SAUDIARABIA C494 A PTS OF o
11CM010
17
9.7. CONTRACTOR shall be financially and administratively responsible for

obtaining the necessary Entry & Exit VISA of each trainee and
CONTRACTOR's participating staff as required by the country/countries
where training shall be conducted Out-ot-Kingdom.
i
REVISIONS
PREl'AREDBY, f)
DATE'-"l"I..d'f-_-I
CIIK'D BY' -11'----1
J
BY, --"r----I
DATE:
THIS DOCUMENT IS
NOT TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCI10N OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTlL
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
APPENDIX -x OF PT5-11CMOl0
CORRECTION IN HAIL 1---+---+------+---1---1
APPENDlX-X 17
PTS
OF o
11CM010
17
ATTACHMENT I
REVISIONS
FOR
PREPAREDBY: /"I
DAn:, ~=---1
CIIK'DBY: I
+----1
PTS-11 CM01 0
(ATTACHMENT TO SCHEDULE "B" OF CONTRACT NO .. ... .1....)
THIS DRAWINGIS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTlFIEDAND DATED
ATTACHMENT- I -APPENDIX - X
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS FOR POWER FACTOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
CORRECTION IN HAIL
JOB ORDERNO. APPENDIX-X 1
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PTS-11CM010 OF o
2
1
I I
ATTACHMENT -I
e SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY J'I,o.)fS.ll ~."...JI J.s~1
~<
~ TRAINING REQUIREMENTS FOR

u
IMPROVEMENT OF VOLTAGES IN HAIL SUBSTATIONS
z
1. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 33kV & 13.8kV CAPACITOR, REACTORS
0
AND DE-TUNING REACTORS
E
O!
~ In-Factory training (Out-of-Kingdom) shall be provided to FIVE (5) COMPANY
employees for Capacitors, Reactors and De-tuning reactors.
The duration for the In-Factory training shall be for two (2) weeks on dates mutually
agreeable between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR.
g ~ .. -
REVISIONS Certification Training shall be provided to the above FIVE (5) COMPANY employees
to troubleshoot, operate, engineer and maintain CONTRACTOR'S equipment.
PIlEPAllEDBY:
DATE: 2. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND THE

CBK'DBY: AUTOMATIC CAPACITOR CONTROLLER
~
In-Factory training (Out-of-Kingdom) shall be provided to FIVE (5) COMPANY
employees.
Certification Training shall be provided to the above FIVE (5) COMPANY employees
to troubleshoot, operate, engineer and maintain CONTRACTOR'S equipment.
3. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS FOR SWITCHGEARS
In-Factory training (Out-of-Kingdom) shall be provided to FIVE (5) COMPANY

employees for switchgears.
The duration for the In-Factory training shall be for two (2) weeks on dates mutually
agreeable between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR.
lJIIIII!lllI!
Certification Training shall be provided to the above FIVE (5) COMPANY
employees to troubleshoot, operate, engineer and maintain CONTRACTOR'S
BY:
equipment.
DATE-
THIS DRAWING [S NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATEllIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
ATTACHMENT- I -APPENDIX - X
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS FOR POWER FACTOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
CORRECTION IN HAIL
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDlXX 2
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PTS11CM010 OF 0
2
JI....----_
1
APPENDIX -XI
CATERING AND ACCOMMODATION REQUIREMENTS
(NOT APPLICABLE)
APPENDIX -XII
FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
{NOT APPLICABLEl
APPENDIX -XIII
SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENTS

I APPENDIX-XIII
REVISIONS
DAm .Y SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENTS

CHK'DBY, '/
vrf----I
FOR
PTS-11 CM01 0
THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERJALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENTS
APPENDIX-XIII
SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENTS FOR POWER PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-XIII 1
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PT5-11CM010 OF o
2
1. Special Tools for 33kV & 13.8kV Metal Clad Switchgears.
One (1) set of Special Tools for each type of Switchgear supplied for each
Substation included in the SOW & TS.
2. Special Tools for Capacitor Bank.
TWO (2) Nos. of Capacitance bridges shall be provided as a special tool in the
SOW&TS.
.,;
z
REVISIONS """END OF APPENDIX-XIII"""
PREPARED'Y, --j'J7_-t
DATE: -Ii.
CBK'DBY, ,LI_--t
JD.IIIlI:I!
DATE~
BY, /
THIS DRAWING IS Nor

TO BE USED FOR
CONSfRUCflON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
APPENDIX-XIII
SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENTS FOR POWER PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
FACTOR CORRECTION IN HAIL
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-XIII 2
HAIL SAUDI ARABIA C494 A PT5-11CM010 OF 0
2
EXHIBIT I
COMPANY FORM NO.16511 (2/10)

EXHIBIT-I
Contractor: B. I. No.
SCHEDULE OF ASSET IDENTIFICATION J.O.No.
Contract No. Wark Description: J.O. Title
Work Location: Date
EQUIPMENT I COMPONENT DETAILS

FOR P.O. NO CAP. MODEL SERIAL AMOUNT EXPECTED
SEC OR DESCRIPTION RATING MANUFACTURER NUMBER NUMBER (SR) INSTALLATION
USE ONLY INV. NO ETC. DATE
Contractor Representative
SEG-16511(2/10) Name, Signature and Date

40-TMSS-02 Rev.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

40-TMSS-02 Rev.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Saudi Electricity Company

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN

TRANSMISSION ASSET DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT

SCOPE OF WORK AND TECHNICAL

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

THL'l DRAWING L'l NOT

II BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES

2.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS 6

III SCOPE OF WORK

3.07 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA

4.01 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 69

V EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

J APPENDIX-I LIST OF ATTACHED CONCEPTUAL & REFERENCE

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

[PTS- 11CM01 D-MZKj

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

I This Scope of work and Technical Specifications (PTS-11CM01 0) and associated

1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

Accordingly, this PTS-11CM010 covers the expansion of 33kV and 13.8kV

1.03 PROJECT SUMMARY

****END OF SECTION- I ****

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

SECTION- II - BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES

2.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS

i in detail or not, shall be supplied and installed by the CONTRACTOR as necessary.

B. The engineering design and specification of equipment/materials supplied under this

D. Copies of existing drawings, design calculations, technical reports and other

2.02 KICK-OFF MEETING

A Kick-Off Meeting will be held in COMPANY Headquarters shortly after award of

2.03 BASE DESIGN PHASE

1. Major Materials Purchase Requisitions (Preliminary)

The package to be submitted to the COMPANY shall be properly compiled in 3 -

2.05 PROJECT DRAWINGS

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

2. Drawings shall be of uniform size in each discipline as much as possible and

I on CONTRACTOR'S written request. However, if any related information is not

4. The drawings involving modification/expansion of the existing system in source

A- Size sheet, 711x1 016 mm or (28x40 in.)

6. Revision of Existing Drawings! Drawing Control Sheets

a. All existing drawings including common drawings affected by this

b. For modification WORKS of existing substation, the existing drawings

c. The drawing involving modification/expansion of the existing system in

the corresponding existing system drawings shall also be modified to

7. SCADA Drawings Requirements

a. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for obtaining all necessary SCADA

i. SCADA Function Diagram

SEC assigned tags/labels to transmission lines, breakers, and

SCADA functions at each device defined by SEC standard symbols.

SCADA point list table

Legend of SEC standard symbol used.

I ii. Handover Book Sheets

Input and Output Points List

DllAWNBY: RTU Configuration of RTU Map Sheet

d. The CONTRACTOR shall submit copies of the Handover Book Sheets in

e. The CONTRACTOR shall provide complete sets of Vendor drawings and

8. Protection Drawing Format Requirements

a. Protection AC One Line and Three-Line Diaqrams

[PTS- 11CM01 O-MZK]

2. Vendor drawings are manufacturers' drawings, data schedules, specification

3. Preparation and assignment of vendor drawing numbers shall be in

1. As the PROJECT nears completion, "As-Built" drawings shall be prepared by

All existing drawings affected by this PROJECT shall be revised and

2. All revisions shall reflect field modifications to engineering flow diagrams,

END OF SECTION- I